Vol. 2 - PG

Model Curriculum for
Postgraduate Degree Courses in

Engineering & Technology
January 2018
Volume-II
[vii]
[vii]
Model Curriculum for
Postgraduate Degree Courses in
Engineering & Technology
January 2018
Volume-II
ALL INDIA COUNCIL FOR TECHNICAL EDUCATION

Nelson Mandela Marg, Vasant Kunj, New Delhi–110070
www.aicte-india.org
[viii]
Preface
Post Graduate Education and Research in Engineering and Technology has gained distinct
importance in context of challenges and opportunities in National development. The
ambitious -Making in India Mission has already started showing targeted results in terms of
increased manufacturing sector. Numbers of international projects are being setup in India
through MoUs considering favourable policies and conditions. The start-ups projects have
created a new generation of entrepreneurs in diverse fields of engineering by tapping vast
potential of innovative minds. The skill development mission has attracted large number of
youths to acquire skills of their liking and to convert skills in to employment and enterprise.
The advances in engineering sciences and their applications in service, manufacturing and
agriculture sectors for commercial benefits has made paradigm shift from under graduate to
post graduate level education in engineering and technology. The knowledge, skills and
competency of engineers required by industry for enhancing their competitiveness in the
market need to be developed from post graduate education and research in engineering and
technology. The expansion of engineering PG education in the last decade has offered
opportunity to bachelor degree holders to enhance their academic excellence and skills. There
are number of PG programs in engineering and technology branches in different
specializations which are offered at about 4000 colleges. The Post Graduate Education and
Research in specialised subject have enhanced academic out comes. The teaching and research
facilities created for conducting PG projects have connected institutes with industry for
consultancy and research. Realizing of importance of PG education in engineering, orientation
of curriculum of PG programmes to make it more relevant and useful is considered need the
hour. The All India Board of PG Education and Research in Engineering and Technology of
AICTE has decided to review and update curriculum for various courses and programs in
technical education. The focus is fixed to design and develop model curricula at PG level in the
light of fast changing technological advancement, new emerging areas and also changes in
pedagogy and delivery system in teaching and learning process.
The model curriculum was developed for six branches of engineering-Electronics and
Communications Engineering, Computer Science, Mechanical Engineering, Civil Engineering,
Electrical Engineering and Chemical Engineering and Technology. The subcommittees
constituted for the purses included experts of each branch. The philosophy of drafting model
curriculum for PG level programmes has been evolved through elaborate deliberation through
numbers of meetings. The major specializations in each branch of engineering are selected for
making model curriculum. The course objectives and course outcomes are made part of the
model curriculum to ensure development of specialized knowledge and relevant skill in
integrated manner of learning.
[v]
Preface
A standard academic format common for all PG programmes describing numbers of credits,
weight age for lecture, laboratories work and projects have been fixed considering the scope of
study. The position and sequence of study of core courses and elective courses are made to
ensure sequential and integral learning. The focus on advance study in core courses through
theory and laboratories work supported by study on relevant programme specific electives are
incorporated. The selection of unique courses in the basket of elective is a special features of
model curricula ensuring flexibility and diversity. The emphasis on understanding advanced
concepts of PG course is ensured through elaborate practical work conducted through actual
and virtual laboratory experiments. The concept of designing experiments and developing
concept application is made part of learning process. The PG course is spread over two years in
four semesters and inclusion of mini project, audit courses, open electives and dissertation are
the special features of the curriculum. The contents of course are unitised to facilitate its
execution. The list of suggested reading is also made part of the curriculum.
The students are asked to learn IPR/ research methodology to understand importance and
process of creation of patents through research. The introduction of two Audit courses
covering subjects of developing desired attitude among the learners is on the line of initiatives
such as Unnat Bharat Abhiyan, Yoga, Value education, Disaster management, Sanskrit,
Pedagogy, Constitution of India, Personality development through Indian culture etc. The
introduction of mini projects ensures preparedness of students to undertake major projects/
dissertation. The courses included under open electives are of importance in the context of
special skill development and they are on Business analytics, industrial safety, operation
research and cost management of engineering project. This courses shall make students
capable to work in industrial environment. The dissertation/major project work of PG
programme of one-year duration is given strong weight age in the curriculum. It is expected to
undertake industrially relevant problem to develop an optimal solution through extensive
research work. The students and faculty can design the research project in consultant with
industry preferably in the region. The planning of laboratory work/ modelling/ computational
work with execution schedule is suggested at the being of the programme to ensure expected
outcome. This will lead to creation of patents from the result of the programme.
The exercise of drafting model PG curriculum has been undertaken along with feedback from
experts from industry, research organizations and alumni to make it relevant, dynamic and
updated. The extensive work performed by members of the sub committees to develop model
curriculum in various specializations of core branches of engineering and technology through
marathon meetings and tire less work is highly appreciated. I extent sincere thanks to all the
members of subcommittees for their contributions in developing model PG curriculum.
Adopting and implementing the model curriculum by institutions and universities would help
create human resource with desired competency. The cooperate sector would be benefited from
trained manpower for improvement in quality and productivity leading to competitiveness in
[vi]
Preface
the global marketing through technological intervention. The students with advance
knowledge and special skills would be able to offer innovative ideas, technology, product and
process in national development process and fulfil their career goals. With the specialized
curriculum of PG Programmes, the institutes can transform themselves into global institutes.
This would not only retain the large number of graduate students going around for higher
studies but would also attract international students making country a global place of higher
learning and research in engineering and Technology.
November, 2017
New Delhi
Prof. Vilas S. Sapkal
Chairman,
All India Board of Post Graduate Education
and Research in Engineering and Technology
[vii]
Subcommittees for drafting model curriculum for PG programs in Engineering and
Technology
1) Electronics & Communication Engineering
Names of Members
1. Dr. Priti Rege, Department of Electronics & Telecommunication, Govt. College
of Engineering, Pune
2. Dr. Vineet Sahula, Professor Department of Electronics & Communication
Engineering, MNIT, Jaipur
3. Dr. R.K. Baghel, Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering,
MANIT, Bhopal
2) Computer Science
Names of Members
1. Prof Rajesh Bhatia, Dean and Chairman PEC University, Chandigarh
2. Prof. Atal Chaudhari, Dept. of Computer Science & Engineering, Jadhapur
University, Kolkata
3. Dr. Meenu Chawla, Prof., Computer Science, Maulana Azad National Institute
of Technology Bhopal, Link road Number 3 Near Kali Mata Mandir, Bhopal,
MP- 462 003.
3) Mechanical Engineering
Names of Members
1. Prof. Sam Sher, Delhi Technological University, Delhi.
2. Prof. D.W. Pandey Professor, Mechanical Engineering College of Engineering
Pune.
3. Dr. Gajendra Dixit, Prof, Mechanical Engineering, Maulana Azad National
Institute of Technology, Bhopal, Link road No 3, Near Kali Mata Mandir,
Bhopal, MP 462 034.
4) Civil Engineering
Names of Members
1. Dr. C.S.P. Ojha, Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Roorkee
2. Prof. G.S. waminatha, Civil Engineering, NIT, Tiruchirapulli
3. Dr. Rajendra R. Joshi, College of Civil Engineering, Pune
[viii]
5) Electrical Engineering
Names of Members
1. Dr. M.K. Khedkar, Prof. Electrical Engineering. Visvesvaraya National
Institute fo Technology, South Ambazari Road, Nagpur
2. Dr. Prerana Gour, NSIT, Dwarka, New Delhi
3. Dr. Abhijit Abhyankar, Department of Electrical Engineering, IIT, Delhi
6) Chemical Engineering & Technology
Names of Members
1. Dr. R.S. Sapkal, Ex-Director BCUD, Professor Department of Chemical
Technology, SGB Amravati University, Amravati.
2. Dr. R.W, Gaikwad, Prof. Department of Chemical Engineering, Pravra Rural
Engineering College, Loni, Distt Ahamdnagar 413 736
3. Dr. S.H. Sonawane, Department of Chemical Engineering, NIT, Warangal.
Distinct features of model PG curriculum in Engineering and Technology:
1. Standardized academic structure for all PG Programs with uniform credit

distribution.
2. Advanced study of specialization through core subjects, flexible and diverse

program specific electives.
3. Open electives to widen skills.
4. Enhanced engagement of industry in developing innovations and problem solutions.
5. Collaborating and interactive learning to ensure talent development.
6. Inbuilt mechanism for regular upgradation of curriculum.
7. Focus on development of advanced knowledge and specific skills required for

industrial development.
8. Ensured competency development of learner.
[ix]
Open Elective
1. Business Analytics
2. Industrial Safety
3. Operations Research
4. Cost Management of Engineering Projects
5. Composite Materials
6. Waste to Energy
Audit course 1 & 2
1. English for Research Paper Writing

2. Disaster Management
3. Sanskrit for Technical Knowledge
4. Value Education
5. Constitution of India
6. Pedagogy Studies
7. Stress Management by Yoga
8. Personality Development through Life Enlightenment Skills.
Research Methodology and IPR
Teaching Scheme
Lectures: 1hrs/week
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course, students will be able to
 Understand research problem formulation.

 Analyze research related information
 Follow research ethics
 Understand that today’s world is controlled by Computer, Information
Technology, but tomorrow world will be ruled by ideas, concept, and
creativity.
 Understanding that when IPR would take such important place in growth of
individuals & nation, it is needless to emphasis the need of information about
Intellectual Property Right to be promoted among students in general &
engineering in particular.
 Understand that IPR protection provides an incentive to inventors for further
research work and investment in R & D, which leads to creation of new and
better products, and in turn brings about, economic growth and social
benefits.
[x]
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1: Meaning of research problem, Sources of research problem, Criteria
Characteristics of a good research problem, Errors in selecting a research
problem, Scope and objectives of research problem.
Approaches of investigation of solutions for research problem, data collection,

analysis, interpretation, Necessary instrumentations
Unit 2: Effective literature studies approaches, analysis
Plagiarism, Research ethics,
Unit 3: Effective technical writing, how to write report, Paper
Developing a Research Proposal, Format of research proposal, a presentation and

assessment by a review committee
Unit 4: Nature of Intellectual Property: Patents, Designs, Trade and Copyright.

Process of Patenting and Development: technological research, innovation,
patenting, development. International Scenario: International cooperation on
Intellectual Property. Procedure for grants of patents, Patenting under PCT.
Unit 5: Patent Rights: Scope of Patent Rights. Licensing and transfer of
technology. Patent information and databases. Geographical Indications.
Unit 6: New Developments in IPR: Administration of Patent System. New
developments in IPR; IPR of Biological Systems, Computer Software etc.
Traditional knowledge Case Studies, IPR and IITs.
References:
 Stuart Melville and Wayne Goddard, “Research methodology: an
introduction for science & engineering students’”
 Wayne Goddard and Stuart Melville, “Research Methodology: An
Introduction”
 Ranjit Kumar, 2nd Edition, “Research Methodology: A Step by Step Guide
for beginners”
 Halbert, “Resisting Intellectual Property”, Taylor & Francis Ltd ,2007.
 Mayall, “Industrial Design”, McGraw Hill, 1992.
 Niebel, “Product Design”, McGraw Hill, 1974.
 Asimov, “Introduction to Design”, Prentice Hall, 1962.
 Robert P. Merges, Peter S. Menell, Mark A. Lemley, “ Intellectual Property
in New Technological Age”, 2016.
 T. Ramappa, “Intellectual Property Rights Under WTO”, S. Chand, 2008
[xi]
Contents
 Preface v
1. Civil 1
2. Mechanical 112
3. Chemical Engineering 199
4. Electronics & Telecommunication 258
[xii]
MODEL CURRICULUM
of
Engineering & Technology PG Courses
CIVIL

Nelson Mandela Marg, Vasant Kunj, New Delhi 110 070
www.aicte-india.org
[1]
M. Tech. (Civil Engineering) Specialization: Structural Engineering
Semester I
Sr. Course
Course Name
No. Type/Code
1. Core 1 Advanced Structural Analysis
2. Core 2 Advanced Solid Mechanics

Elective – I
Program 1. Theory of Thin Plates and Shells
3.
Elective 2. Theory and Applications of Cement Composites
3. Theory of Structural Stability
Elective – II
Program 1. Analytical and Numerical Methods for Structural Engineering
4.
Elective 2. Structural Health Monitoring
3. Structural Optimization
5. Core Lab I Structural Design Lab
6. Core Lab II Advanced Concrete Lab
7. MLC Research Methodology and IPR
8. Audit 1 Audit Course
Semester II
Sr. Course
Course Name
No. Type/Code
1. Core III FEM in Structural Engineering

2. Core IV Structural Dynamics
Elective – III
1. Advanced Steel Design
Program
3. 2. Design of Formwork
Elective III
3. Design of High Rise Structures
4. Design of Masonry Structures
Elective – IV
1. Design of Advanced Concrete Structures
Program
4.
Elective IV
2. Advanced Design of Foundations
3. Soil Structure Interaction
4. Design of Industrial Structure
5. Core Lab III Model Testing Lab
6. Core Lab IV Numerical Analysis Lab
7. Core Mini Project
8. Audit 2 Audit Course-2
[2]
################################
Semester III
Sr. Course
Course Name
No. Type/Code
Elective - V
1. Design of Prestressed Concrete Structures
Program
1. 2. Analysis of Laminated Composite Plates
Elective - V
3. Fracture Mechanics of Concrete Structures
4. Design of Plates and Shells
2. Open Elective
6. Waste to Energy
3. Dissertation Dissertation Phase – I
Semester IV
Sr. Course
Course Name
No. Code
1. Dissertation Dissertation Phase – II
Audit course 1 & 2

4. Value Addition
6. Pedagogy Studies
M. Tech. (Civil Engineering) Specialization:Hydraulic Engineering
Semester I
Sr. Course
Course Name
No. Type/Code
1. Core-I Advanced Hydrology
2. Core-II Advanced Fluid Mechanics
(1) Fluvial Hydraulics
3. Prog. Elective-I (2) Hydraulic Structures
(3) Systems Engineering
(1) Water Resources Systems Planning
4. Prog. Elective-II
(2) Irrigation and Drainage
5 Lab 1 Fluid Mechanics
6 Lab 2 Hydrology
7. Core Research Methodology and IPR
8. Audit 1 Audit course 1
[3]
################################
Semester II
Sr. Course
Course Name
No. Code/Type
1. Core-III Ground Water Engineering

2. Core-IV Free Surface Flows
(1) Computational Methods in Fluid Mechanics
Prog. Elective-III
3. (2) Theory and Applications of GIS
Prog. Elective- (1) Environmental Hydraulics
4. IV (2) Advanced Numerical Analysis
Lab 1 Computational Fluid Dynamics
Lab 2 Open Channel Flow
5. Core Mini-Project
6. Audit 2 Audit -2
Semester III
Sr. Course
Course Name
No. Code
Computer Methods in Hydraulics and Hydrology

Programme-
1. Stochastic Hydrology
Elective-V
Programme 3. Operations Research
2.
Elective-VI 4. Cost Management of Engineering Projects
6. Waste to Energy
Semester IV
Sr. Course
Course Name
No. Code
1. Dissertation Dissertation Phase - II
Audit course 1 & 2

4. Value Education
6. Pedagogy Studies
[4]
M. Tech (Civil Engineering)
Model Curriculum Structure
Specialization: Structural Engineering
Program Outcomes (POs):

After completion of the program graduates will be able to
A. Apply the knowledge of science, mathematics, and engineering principles for developing
problem solving attitude
B. Identify, formulate and solve engineering problems in the domain of structural engineering
field.
C. Use different software tools for Analysis and Design structural engineering domain.
D. Design and conduct experiments, analyse and interpret data, for development of simulation
experiments.
E. Function as a member of a multidisciplinary team with sense of ethics, integrity and social
responsibility.
Model curriculum for ME (Civil) - specialization in Structural Engineering

Semester I
Sr. Course Teaching Scheme Credit

Course Name
No. Type/Code Th Tuto Lab s
1. Core 1 Advanced Structural Analysis 3 0 0 3
2. Core 2 Advanced Solid Mechanics 3 0 0 3

Elective – I
1. Theory of Thin Plates and Shells
Program
3. 2. Theory and Applications of Cement 3 0 0 3
Elective
Composites
3. Theory of Structural Stability
Elective – II
1. Analytical and Numerical Methods for
Program
4. Structural Engineering 3 0 0 3
Elective
2. Structural Health Monitoring
3. Structural Optimization
5. Core Lab I Structural Design Lab 0 0 2 2
6. Core Lab II Advanced Concrete Lab 0 0 2 2

7. MLC Research Methodology and IPR 2 0 0 2
8. Audit 1 Audit Course 2 0 0 0
Total 16 0 4 18
[5]
Model Curriculum of Engineering & Technology PG Courses [Volume -II]
Semester II
Sr. Course Teaching Scheme Credit
Course Name
No. Type/Code Th Tuto Lab s
1. Core III FEM in Structural Engineering 3 0 0 3
2. Core IV Structural Dynamics 3 0 0 3
Elective – III
Program 1. Advanced Steel Design
3. Elective 2. Design of Formwork 3 0 0 3
III 3. Design of High Rise Structures
4. Design of Masonry Structures
Elective – IV
Program 1. Design of Advanced Concrete Structures
4. Elective 2. Advanced Design of Foundations 3 0 0 3
IV 3. Soil Structure Interaction
4. Design of Industrial Structure
Core Lab
5. Model Testing Lab 0 0 2 2
III
Core Lab
6. Numerical Analysis Lab 0 0 2 2
IV
7. Core Mini Project 0 0 4 2
8. Audit 2 Audit Course-2 2 0 0 0
Total 14 0 8 18
Semester III
Teaching
Sr. Course Scheme
Course Name Credits
No. Type/Code
Th Tuto Lab
Elective - V
1. Design of Prestressed Concrete Structures
Program 2. Analysis of Laminated Composite Plates
1. 3 0 0 3
Elective-V
3. Fracture Mechanics of Concrete Structures
4. Design of Plates and Shells
Open 3. Operations Research
2. 3 0 0 3
Elective 4. Cost Management of Engineering Projects
6. Waste to Energy
3. Dissertation Dissertation Phase – I 0 0 20 10
Total 6 0 0 16
[6]
Semester-IV
Sr. Course
Course Name Teaching Scheme Credits
No. Code
1. Dissertation Dissertation Phase – II 0 0 32 16
Total -- -- -- 16
Total Credits for the programme = 18 + 18 +16 +16 = 68
Audit course 1 & 2

4. Value Addition
6. Pedagogy Studies
Semester I
Core 1 - Advanced Structural Analysis (Credits - 3:0:0 = 3)
Teaching Scheme
Lectures: 3 hrs/week
Course outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to

1. Analyze the skeleton structures using stiffness analysis code.
2. Use direct stiffness method understanding its limitations
Syllabus Contents:
 Influence Coefficients: Physical Significance, Effects of Settlements, Temperature Change and
Lack of Fit, Member Approach and Structure Approach.
 Stiffness Method applied to Large Frames: Local Coordinates and Global Coordinates.
 Stiffness Matrix Assembly of Structures: Stiffness Matrix in GlobalCoordinates, Boundary
Conditions,Solution of Stiffness Matrix Equations, Calculation of Reactions and Member
Forces.
 Applications to Simple Problems: Beams, Plane Trusses, Plane Rigid Jointed Frames and
Grids by Structure Approach and Member Approach.
 Boundary Value Problems (BVP): Approximate Solution of Boundary Value Problems,
Modified GalerkinMethod for One-Dimensional BVP, Matrix Formulation ofthe Modified
GalerkinMethod.
[7]
 Linear Element: Shape Functions, Solution for Poisson’s Equation, General OneDimensional
Equilibrium Problem.
References:
• Matrix Analysis of Framed Structures, Weaver and Gere.
• The Finite Element Method, Lewis P. E. and WardJ. P., Addison-Wesley Publication Co.
• Computer Methods in Structural Analysis, MeekJ. L., E and FN, Span Publication.
• The Finite Element Method, Desai and Able, CBS Publication.
Core 2 - Advanced Solid Mechanics (Credits - 3:0:0 = 3)
Teaching Scheme
1. Solve simple problems of elasticity and plasticityunderstanding the basic concepts.

2. Apply numerical methods to solve continuum problems.
Syllabus Contents:
 Introduction to Elasticity:Displacement, Strain and Stress Fields, Constitutive Relations,
Cartesian Tensors and Equations of Elasticity.
 Strain and Stress Field:Elementary Concept of Strain, Stain at a Point, Principal Strains and
Principal Axes, Compatibility Conditions, Stress at a Point, Stress Components on an Arbitrary
Plane, Differential Equations of Equilibrium, Hydrostatic andDeviatoric Components.
 Equations of Elasticity: Equations of Equilibrium, Stress- Strain relations, Strain Displacement
andCompatibility Relations, Boundary Value Problems, Co-axialityof the Principal Directions.
 Two-Dimensional Problems of Elasticity: Plane Stress and Plane Strain Problems, Airy’s
stress Function, Two-Dimensional Problems in Polar Coordinates.
 Torsion of Prismatic Bars: Saint Venant’s Method, Prandtl’s Membrane Analogy, Torsion of
Rectangular Bar, Torsion of Thin Tubes.
 Plastic Deformation: Strain Hardening, Idealized Stress- Strain curve, Yield Criteria, von
Mises Yield Criterion, Tresca Yield Criterion, Plastic Stress-Strain Relations, Principle of
Normality and Plastic Potential, Isotropic Hardening.
References:
• Theory of Elasticity, Timoshenko S. andGoodierJ. N., McGraw Hill, 1961.
• Elasticity,SaddM.H.,Elsevier,2005.
• Engineering Solid Mechanics, RagabA.R., BayoumiS.E., CRC Press,1999.
• Computational Elasticity, AmeenM., Narosa,2005.
• Solid Mechanics, KazimiS. M. A., Tata McGraw Hill,1994.
• Advanced Mechanics of Solids, SrinathL.S., Tata McGraw Hill,2000.
[8]
Program Elective I - Theory of Thin Plates and Shells (Credits - 3:0:0 = 3)
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:At the end of the course, students will be able to
1. Use analytical methods for the solution of thin plates and shells.
2. Use analytical methods for the solution of shells.
3. Apply the numerical techniques and tools for the complex problems in thin plates.
4. Apply the numerical techniques and tools for the complex problems in shells.
Syllabus Contents:
 Introduction: Space Curves, Surfaces, Shell Co-ordinates, Strain Displacement Relations,
Assumptions in Shell Theory, Displacement Field Approximations, Stress Resultants, Equation
ofEquilibrium using Principle ofVirtual Work, Boundary Conditions.
 Static Analysis of Plates: Governing Equation for a Rectangular Plate, NavierSolution for
Simply- Supported Rectangular Plate under Various Loadings, Levy solution for Rectangular
Plate with other Boundary Conditions.
 Circular Plates: Analysis under Axi- Symmetric Loading, Governing Differential Equation in
Polar Co-ordinates. Approximate Methods of Analysis- Rayleigh-Ritz approach for Simple
Cases in Rectangular Plates.
 Static Analysis of Shells: Membrane Theory ofShells - Cylindrical, Conical andSpherical
Shells,
 Shells ofRevolution: with BendingResistance - Cylindrical andConical Shells, Application to
Pipes and Pressure Vessels.
 Thermal Stresses in Plate/ Shell
References:
• Theory of Plates and Shells, Timoshenko S. and KriegerW., McGraw Hill.
• Stresses in Plates and Shells, UguralAnsel C., McGraw Hill.
• Thin Elastic Shells, KrausH., John Wiley and Sons.
• Theory of Plates, ChandrashekharaK., Universities Press.
• Design and Construction of Concrete Shells, RamaswamyG.S.
Program Elective I - Theory and Applications of Cement Composites

(Credits- 3:0:0=3)
Teaching Scheme
[9]

1. Formulate constitutive behaviour of composite materials – Ferrocement, SIFCON and Fibre
Reinforced Concrete - by understanding their strain- stress behaviour.
2. Classify the materials as per orthotropic and anisotropic behaviour.
3. Estimate strain constants using theories applicable to composite materials.
4. Analyse and design structural elements made of cement composites.
Syllabus Content:
 Introduction: Classification and Characteristics of Composite Materials- Basic Terminology,
Advantages. Stress-Strain Relations- Orthotropic and Anisotropic Materials, Engineering
Constants for Orthotropic Materials, Restrictions on Elastic Constants, Plane Stress Problem,
Biaxial Strength, Theories for an Orthotropic Lamina.
 Mechanical Behaviour: Mechanics of Materials Approach to Stiffness- Determination of
Relations between Elastic Constants, Elasticity Approach to Stiffness- Bounding Techniques of
Elasticity, Exact Solutions - Elasticity Solutions with Continuity, Halpin, Tsai Equations,
Comparison of approaches to Stiffness.
 Cement Composites: Types of Cement Composites, Terminology, Constituent Materials
andtheir Properties, Construction Techniques for Fibre Reinforced Concrete - Ferrocement,
SIFCON, Polymer Concretes, Preparation of Reinforcement, Casting and Curing.
 Mechanical Properties of Cement Composites:BehaviorofFerrocement, Fiber Reinforced
Concrete in Tension, Compression, Flexure, Shear, Fatigue and Impact, Durability and Corrosion.
 Application of Cement Composites: FRC andFerrocement- Housing, Water Storage, Boats and
Miscellaneous Structures. Composite Materials- Orthotropic and Anisotropic behaviour,
Constitutive relationship, Elastic Constants.
 Analysis and Design of Cement Composite Structural Elements - Ferrocement, SIFCON
andFibre Reinforced Concrete.
Reference Books:
 Mechanics of Composite Materials, Jones R. M,, 2nd Ed., Taylor and Francis,BSP Books, 1998.
 Ferrocement – Theory and Applications, Pama R. P., IFIC, 1980.
 New Concrete Materials, Swamy R.N., 1stEd., Blackie, Academic and Professional, Chapman &
Hall, 1983.
Program Elective I - Theory of Structural Stability (Credits- 3:0:0 = 3)
Teaching Scheme

1. Determine stability of columns and frames
2. Determine stability of beams and plates
3. Use stability criteria and concepts for analysing discrete and continuous systems,
[ 10 ]
Syllabus Contents:
 Criteria for Design of Structures: Stability, Strength, and Stiffness, Classical Concept of
Stability of Discrete and Continuous Systems, Linear and nonlinear behaviour.
 Stability of Columns:Axial and Flexural Buckling, Lateral Bracing ofColumns, Combined
Axial, Flexural and Torsion Buckling.
 Stability of Frames: Member Buckling versus Global Buckling, Slenderness Ratio ofFrame
Members.
 Stability of Beams: lateraltorsion buckling.
 Stability of Plates: axialflexural buckling, shearflexural buckling, buckling under combined
loads.
 Introduction to Inelastic Buckling and Dynamic Stability.
Reference Books:
 Theory of elastic stability, Timoshenko and Gere, Tata Mc Graw Hill,1981
 Principles of Structural Stability Theory, Alexander Chajes, Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
 Structural Stability of columns and plates, Iyengar, N. G. R., Eastern west press Pvt. Ltd.
 Strength of Metal Structures,Bleich F. Bucking, Tata McGraw Hill, New York.
Program Elective II – Analytical and Numerical Methods for

Structural Engineering (Credits - 3:0:0 = 3)
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to

1. Solve ordinary and partial differential equations in structural mechanics using numerical methods.
2. Write a program to solve a mathematical problem.
Syllabus Contents:
 Fundamentals ofNumerical Methods: Error Analysis, Polynomial Approximations and
Interpolations, Curve Fitting; Interpolation and extrapolation.
 Solution ofNonlinear Algebraic and Transcendental Equations
 Elements of Matrix Algebra: Solution ofSystems of Linear Equations, Eigen Value Problems.
 Numerical Differentiation & Integration: Solution ofOrdinary and Partial Differential
Equations.
 Finite Difference scheme: Implicit & Explicit scheme.
 Computer Algorithms: Numerical Solutions for Different Structural Problems, Fuzzy Logic and
Neural Network.
Reference Books:
 An Introduction to Numerical Analysis, AtkinsonK.E., J. Wiley and Sons, 1989.
 Theory and Problems of Numerical Analysis, Scheid F, McGraw Hill Book Company, (Shaum
Series), 1988.
 Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis, Sastry S. S, Prentice Hall of India, 1998.
[ 11 ]
Program Elective II – Structural Health Monitoring (Credits - 3:0:0 = 3)
Teaching Scheme

1. Diagnosis the distress in the structure understanding the causes and factors.
2. Assess the health of structure using static field methods.
3. Assessthe health of structure using dynamic field tests.
4. Suggest repairs and rehabilitation measures of the structure
Syllabus Contents:
 Structural Health: Factors affecting Health of Structures, Causes of Distress, Regular Maintenance.
 Structural Health Monitoring: Concepts,Various Measures, Structural Safety in Alteration.
 Structural Audit:Assessment ofHealth ofStructure, Collapse andInvestigation, Investigation
Management, SHM Procedures.
 Static Field Testing: Types ofStatic Tests, Simulation and Loading Methods, sensor systems and
hardware requirements,Static Response Measurement.
 Dynamic Field Testing:Types ofDynamic Field Test, Stress History Data, Dynamic Response
Methods, Hardware for Remote Data Acquisition Systems, Remote Structural Health Monitoring.
 Introduction to Repairs andRehabilitations ofStructures:Case Studies (Site Visits), piezo–
electric materials and other smart materials, electro–mechanical impedance (EMI) technique,
adaptations of EMI technique.
Reference Books:
 Structural Health Monitoring, Daniel Balageas, Claus Peter Fritzen, Alfredo Güemes, John
Wiley and Sons, 2006.
 Health Monitoring of Structural Materials and Components Methods with Applications,
Douglas E Adams, John Wiley and Sons, 2007.
 Structural Health Monitoring and Intelligent Infrastructure, Vol1, J. P. Ou, H. Li and Z. D. Duan,
Taylor and Francis Group, London, UK, 2006.
 Structural Health Monitoring with Wafer Active Sensors, Victor Giurglutiu, Academic Press Inc,
2007.
Program Elective II – Structural Optimization (Credits - 3:0:0 = 3)
Teaching Scheme

1. Use Variationalprinciple for optimization
2. Apply optimization techniques to structural steel and concrete members.
3. Design using frequency constraint.
[ 12 ]
Introduction:Simultaneous Failure Mode andDesign, ClassicalExternalProblems.

Calculus ofVariation: Variational Principles withConstraints,
Linear Programming, Integer Programming, Nonlinear Programming, Dynamic Programming,
Geometric ProgrammingandStochastic Programming.
Applications:Structural Steel andConcrete Members, Trusses andFrames.
Design:Frequency Constraint, Design ofLayouts.
Reference Books:
 Elements of Structural Optimization, Haftka, Raphael T., Gürdal, Zafer, Springer.
 Variational methods for Structural optimization, Cherkaev Andrej, Springer
Core Lab1 –Structural Design Lab (Credits - 0:0:4 = 2)
Teaching Scheme
Lab: 2 hrs/week
1. Design and Detail all the Structural Components of Frame Buildings.
2. Design and Detail complete Multi-Storey Frame Buildings.
Syllabus Content:
Design and detailed drawing of completeG+ 3 structures by individual student using latest relevant
IS codes.
Core Lab2 – Advanced Concrete Lab (Credits - 0:0:4 = 2)
Teaching Scheme
Lab: 2 hrs/week
1. Design high grade concrete and study the parameters affecting its performance.
2. Conduct Non Destructive Tests on existing concrete structures.
3. Apply engineering principles to understand behavior of structural/ elements.
List of Experiments/Assignments:
1. Study of stress-strain curve ofhigh strength concrete, Correlation between cube strength, cylinder
strength, split tensile strength and modulus of rupture.
2. Effect of cyclic loading on steel.
3. Non-Destructive testing ofexisting concrete members.
4. Behavior of Beams under flexure, Shear and Torsion.
Reference Books:
 Properties of Concrete, Neville A. M., 5th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2012.
 Concrete Technology, Shetty M. S., S. Chand and Co., 2006.
[ 13 ]

Teaching Scheme
Lectures: 1hrs/week
Course Outcomes:
 Understand that today’s world is controlled by Computer, Information Technology, but
tomorrow world will be ruled by ideas, concept, and creativity.
 Understanding that when IPR would take such important place in growth of individuals
& nation, it is needless to emphasis the need of information about Intellectual Property
Right to be promoted among students in general & engineering in particular.
 Understand that IPR protection provides an incentive to inventors for further research
work and investment in R & D, which leads to creation of new and better products, and
in turn brings about, economic growth and social benefits.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1: Meaning of research problem, Sources of research problem, Criteria Characteristics
of a good research problem, Errors in selecting a research problem, Scope and objectives of
research problem.
Approaches of investigation of solutions for research problem, data collection, analysis,
interpretation, Necessary instrumentations
Developing a Research Proposal, Format of research proposal, a presentation and assessment
by a review committee
Unit 4: Nature of Intellectual Property: Patents, Designs, Trade and Copyright. Process of
Patenting and Development: technological research, innovation, patenting, development.
International Scenario: International cooperation on Intellectual Property. Procedure for
grants of patents, Patenting under PCT.
Unit 5: Patent Rights: Scope of Patent Rights. Licensing and transfer of technology. Patent
information and databases. Geographical Indications.
Unit 6: New Developments in IPR: Administration of Patent System. New developments in
IPR; IPR of Biological Systems, Computer Software etc. Traditional knowledge Case
Studies, IPR and IITs.
References:
 Stuart Melville and Wayne Goddard, “Research methodology: an introduction for
science & engineering students’”
 Wayne Goddard and Stuart Melville, “Research Methodology: An Introduction”
[ 14 ]
 Ranjit Kumar, 2nd Edition, “Research Methodology: A Step by Step Guide for
beginners”
 Mayall , “Industrial Design”, McGraw Hill, 1992.
 Niebel , “Product Design”, McGraw Hill, 1974.
 Asimov , “Introduction to Design”, Prentice Hall, 1962.
 Robert P. Merges, Peter S. Menell, Mark A. Lemley, “ Intellectual Property in New
Technological Age”, 2016.
Semester II
Core 3 - Finite Element Method in Structural Engineering(Credits- 3:0:0 = 3)
Teaching Scheme

1. Use Finite Element Method for structural analysis.
2. Execute the Finite Element Program/ Software.
3. Solve continuum problems using finite element analysis.
Syllabus Contents:
 Introduction: History andApplications. Spring andBar Elements, Minimum Potential Energy
Principle, Direct Stiffness Method, Nodal Equilibrium equations, Assembly ofGlobal Stiffness
Matrix, Element Strain andStress.
 Beam Elements: Flexure Element, Element Stiffness Matrix, Element Load Vector.
 Method of Weighted Residuals: GalerkinFinite Element Method, Application to Structural
Elements, Interpolation Functions, Compatibility andCompleteness Requirements, Polynomial
Forms, Applications.
 Types:Triangular Elements, Rectangular Elements, Three-Dimensional Elements, Isoparametric
Formulation, Axi-Symmetric Elements, Numerical Integration, Gaussian Quadrature.
 Application to Solid Mechanics: Plane Stress, CST Element, Plane Strain Rectangular Element,
Isoparametric Formulation of the Plane Quadrilateral Element, Axi- Symmetric Stress Analysis,
Strain and Stress Computations.
 Computer Implementationof FEM procedure, Pre-Processing, Solution, Post-Processing, Use
of Commercial FEA Software.
Reference Books:
 Finite Element Analysis, Seshu P., Prentice-Hall of India,2005.
 Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis, Cook R. D., Wiley J., New York, 1995.
 Fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis, Hutton David, Mc-Graw Hill, 2004.
 Finite Element Analysis, Buchanan G.R., McGraw Hill Publications, New York, 1995.
 Finite Element Method, Zienkiewicz O.C. & Taylor R.L. Vol. I, II & III, Elsevier, 2000.
 Finite Element Methods in Engineering, Belegundu A.D., Chandrupatla, T.R., Prentice Hall
India, 1991.
[ 15 ]
Core 4 – Structural Dynamics (Credits - 3:0:0 = 3)
Teaching Scheme

1. Analyze and study dynamics response of single degree freedom system using fundamental
theoryand equation of motion.
2. Analyze and study dynamics response ofMulti degreefreedom system using fundamental theory
and equation of motion.
3. Use the available software for dynamic analysis.
Syllabus Contents:
 Introduction: Objectives, Importance ofVibration Analysis, Nature ofExciting
Forces,Mathematical Modeling ofDynamic Systems.
 Single Degree of Freedom System:Free andForced Vibration with and without Damping,
Response to Harmonic Loading, Response to General Dynamic Loading using Duhamel’s
Integral, Fourier Analysis for Periodic Loading, State Space Solution for Response.
 Numerical Solution to Response using Newmark Method and Wilson Method, Numerical
Solution for State Space Response using Direct Integration.
 Multiple Degree of Freedom System (Lumped parameter): Two Degree of Freedom System,
Multiple Degree of Freedom System, Inverse Iteration Method for Determination ofNatural
Frequencies andMode Shapes, Dynamic Response by Modal Superposition Method, Direct
Integration ofEquation ofMotion.
 Multiple Degree of Freedom System (Distributed Mass and Load): Single Span Beams, Free
andForced Vibration, Generalized Single Degree of Freedom System.
 Special Topics in Structural Dynamics(Concepts only): Dynamic Effects ofWind Loading,
Moving Loads, Vibrations caused by Traffic, Blasting andPile Driving, Foundations for
Industrial Machinery, Base Isolation.
Reference Books:
 Dynamics of Structures, Clough R. W. and Penzien J., Mc Graw Hill.
 Structural Dynamics andIntroduction to Earthquake Engineering, Chopra A. K.
 Vibration ofStructures - Application in Civil Engineering Design, Smith J. W., Chapman and
Hall.
 Dynamics of Structures, Humar J. L., Prentice Hall.
 Structural Dynamics - Theory andComputation, Paz Mario, CBS Publication.
 Dynamics ofStructures, Hart and Wong.
Program Elective III– Advanced Steel Design (Credits - 3:0:0 = 3)
Teaching Scheme
[ 16 ]

1. Design steel structures/ components by different design processes.
2. Analyze and design beams and columns for stability and strength, and drift.
3. Design welded and bolted connections.
Syllabus Contents:
 Properties ofSteel:Mechanical Properties, Hysteresis, Ductility.
HotRolled Sections: compactness and non-compactness, slenderness, residual stresses.
 Design ofSteel Structures: Inelastic Bending Curvature, Plastic Moments, Design Criteria
Stability, Strength, Drift.
 Stability ofBeams:Local Buckling ofCompression Flange &Web, Lateral Torsional Buckling.
 Stability of Columns: Slenderness Ratio, Local Buckling ofFlanges andWeb, Bracing ofColumn
about Weak Axis.
 Method ofDesigns: Allowable Stress Design, Plastic Design, Load andResistance Factor Design;
 Strength Criteria:Beams - Flexure, Shear, Torsion, Columns - Moment Magnification Factor,
Effective Length,PM Interaction, Biaxial Bending, Joint Panel Zones.
Drift Criteria: P Effect, Deformation Based Design;
Connections:Welded, Bolted, Location Beam Column, Column Foundation, Splices.
Reference Books:
 Design of Steel Structures - Vol. II, Ramchandra. Standard Book House, Delhi.
 Design of Steel Structures - Arya A. S., Ajmani J. L., Nemchand and Bros., Roorkee.
 The Steel Skeleton- Vol. II, Plastic Behaviour and Design - Baker J. F., Horne M. R., Heyman
J., ELBS.
 Plastic Methods of Structural Analysis, Neal B. G., Chapman and Hall London.
 IS 800: 2007 – General Construction in Steel - Code of Practice, BIS, 2007.
 SP – 6 - Handbook ofStructural Steel Detailing, BIS,1987
Program Elective III – Design of Formwork(Credits - 3:0:0 = 3)

Teaching Scheme

1. Select proper formwork, accessories and material.
2. Design the form work for Beams, Slabs, columns, Walls and Foundations.
3. Design the form work for Special Structures.
4. Understand the working of flying formwork.
5. Judge the formwork failures through case studies.
Syllabus Content:
 Introduction:Requirements andSelection of Formwork.
 Formwork Materials- Timber, Plywood, Steel, Aluminium, Plastic, and Accessories. Horizontal
and Vertical Formwork Supports.
 Formwork Design: Concepts, Formwork Systems and Design for Foundations, Walls, Columns,
Slab andBeams.
 Formwork Design for Special Structures: Shells, Domes, Folded Plates, Overhead
WaterTanks, Natural Draft Cooling Tower, Bridges.
[ 17 ]
 Flying Formwork: Table Form, Tunnel Form, Slip Form, Formwork for Precast Concrete,
Formwork Management Issues –Pre- andPost-Award.
 Formwork Failures:Causes and Case studies in Formwork Failure, Formwork Issues in Multi-
Story Building Construction.
Reference Books:
 Formwork for Concrete Structures, Peurify, Mc Graw Hill India, 2015.

 Formwork for Concrete Structures, Kumar NeerajJha, Tata McGraw Hill Education, 2012.
 IS 14687: 1999, False workfor Concrete Structures - Guidelines, BIS.
Program Elective III – Design of High Rise Structures (Credits - 3:0:0 = 3)
Teaching Scheme

1. Analyse, design and detail Transmission/ TV tower, Mast and Trestles with different loading
conditions.
2. Analyse, design and detail the RC and Steel Chimney.
3. Analyse. design and detail the tall buildings subjected to different loading conditions using
relevant codes.
Syllabus Content:
 Design of transmission/ TV tower, Mast and trestles: Configuration, bracing system, analysis
and design for vertical transverse and longitudinal loads.
 Analysis and Design of RC and Steel Chimney, Foundation design for varied soil strata.
 Tall Buildings: Structural Concept, Configurations, various systems, Wind and Seismic loads,
Dynamic approach, structural design considerations and IS code provisions. Firefighting design
provisions.
 Applicationof software in analysis and design.
Reference Books:
 Structural Design of Multi-storeyed Buildings, Varyani U. H., 2nd Ed., SouthAsian Publishers,
New Delhi, 2002.
 Structural Analysis and Design of Tall Buildings, Taranath B. S., Mc Graw Hill, 1988.
 Illustrated Design of Reinforced ConcreteBuildings(GF+3storeyed), Shah V. L. &Karve S. R.,
Structures Publications, Pune, 2013.
 Design of Multi Storeyed Buildings, Vol. 1 & 2, CPWD Publications, 1976.
 Tall Building Structures, Smith Byran S. and Coull Alex, Wiley India. 1991.
 High Rise Building Structures, Wolfgang Schueller, Wiley., 1971.
 Tall Chimneys, Manohar S. N., Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi
[ 18 ]
Program Elective IV – Design of Advanced ConcreteStructures (Credits - 3:0:0 = 3)
Teaching Scheme

1. Analyse the special structures by understanding their behaviour.
2. Design and prepare detail structural drawings for execution citing relevant IS codes.
Syllabus Contents:
 Design philosophy, Modeling of Loads, Material Characteristics.
 Reinforced Concrete - P-M, M-phi Relationships, Strut-and- Tie Method, Design of Deep Beam
and Corbel, Design of Shear Walls, Compression Field Theory for Shear Design, Design against
Torsion; IS, ACI and Eurocode.
 Steel Structures -- Stability Design, Torsional Buckling - Pure, Flexural and Lateral, Design
ofBeam-Columns, Fatigue Resistant Design, IS code, AISC Standards and Eurocode.
References Books:
 Reinforced Concrete Design, Pillai S. U. and MenonD., Tata McGraw-Hill, 3rd Ed, 1999.
 Design of Steel Structures, SubramaniamN., Oxford University Press, 2008.
 Reinforced Concrete Structures, Park R.and PaulayT. , John Wiley & Sons, 1995.
 Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design, Varghese P. C., Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
 Unified Theory of Concrete Structures, Hsu T. T. C. and Mo Y. L., John Wiley & Sons, 2010.
 Steel Structures Design and Behavior Emphasizing Load and Resistance Factor Design, Salmon
C. G., Johnson J. E. and Malhas F. A., Pearson Education, 5th Ed, 2009.
 Design ofSteel Structures - Vol. II, Ramchandra. Standard Book House, Delhi.
 Plastic Methods of Structural Analysis, Neal B.G., Chapman and Hall London.
Program Elective IV – Advanced Design ofFoundations (Credits- 3:0:0 = 3)
Teaching Scheme

1. Decide the suitability of soil strata for different projects.
2. Design shallow foundations deciding the bearing capacityof soil.
3. Analyze and design the pile foundation.
4. Understand analysis methods for well foundation.
Syllabus Contents:
 Planning of Soil Explorationfor Different Projects, Methods of Subsurface Exploration, Methods of
Borings along with Various Penetration Tests.
[ 19 ]
 Shallow Foundations, Requirements for Satisfactory Performance of Foundations, Methods of

Estimating Bearing Capacity, Settlements of Footings and Rafts, Proportioning of Foundations using
Field Test Data, Pressure - Settlement Characteristics from Constitutive Laws.
 Pile Foundations, Methods of Estimating Load Transfer of Piles, Settlements of Pile Foundations,
Pile Group Capacity and Settlement, Laterally Loaded Piles, Pile Load Tests, Analytical Estimation
of Load- Settlement Behaviorof Piles, Proportioning of Pile Foundations, Lateral and Uplift
Capacity of Piles.
 Well Foundation, IS and IRC Code Provisions, Elastic Theory and Ultimate Resistance Methods.
 Tunnels and Arching in Soils, Pressure Computations around Tunnels.

Open Cuts, Sheeting and Bracing Systems in Shallow and Deep Open Cuts in Different Soil Types.
 Coffer Dams, Various Types, Analysis and Design, Foundations under uplifting loads, Soil-structure
interaction
Reference Books:
 Design of foundation system, N.P. Kurian, Narosa Publishing House
 Foundation Analysis and Design, J. E. Bowles, Tata McGraw Hill New York
 Analysis and Design of Substructures, Sawmi Saran, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd, New
Delhi.
Program Elective IV – Soil Structure Interaction (Credits- 3:0:0 = 3)

Teaching Scheme

1. Understandsoil structure interaction concept and complexities involved.
2. Evaluate soil structure interaction for different types of structure under various conditions of
loading and subsoil characteristics.
3. Prepare comprehensive design oriented computer programs for interaction problems based on
theory of sub grade reaction such as beams, footings, rafts etc.
4. Analyze different types of frame structure founded on stratified natural deposits with linear and
non-linear stress-strain characteristics.
5. Evaluate action of group of piles considering stress-strain characteristics of real soils.
Syllabus Contents:
 Critical Study of Conventional Methods of Foundation Design, Nature and Complexities of Soil
Structure Interaction.
 Application of Advanced Techniques of Analysis such as FEM and Finite Difference Method.
 Relaxation and Interaction for the Evaluation of Soil Structure Interaction for Different Types of
Structure under various Conditions of Loading and Subsoil Characteristics.
 Preparation of Comprehensive Design Oriented Computer Programs for Specific Problems,
Interaction Problems based on Theory of Sub Grade Reaction Such as Beams, Footings, Rafts
Etc.
 Analysis of Different Types of Frame Structures Founded on Stratified Natural Deposits with
Linear and Non-Linear Stress-Strain Characteristics.
[ 20 ]
 Determination of Pile Capacities and Negative Skin Friction, Action ofGroup of

PilesConsidering Stress-Strain Characteristics of Real Soils, Anchor Piles and Determination of
Pullout Resistance.
Reference Books:
 Analytical and Computer Methods in Foundation, Bowels J.E.,McGraw Hill Book Co., New
York, 1974.
 Numerical Methods in Geotechnical Engineering, Desai C.S. and Christian J.T., McGraw Hill
Book Co., New York.
 Soil Structure Interaction - The real behaviour of structures, Institution of Structural Engineers.
 Elastic Analysis of Soil Foundation Interaction, Developments in Geotechnical Engg. Vol-17,
Elsevier Scientific Publishing Company.
 Elastic Analysis of Soil-Foundation Interaction, Selvadurai A.P.S., Elsevier Scientific
Publishing Company.
 Analysis & Design of substructures, Swami Saran, Oxford & IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.
 Design of Foundation System- Principles & Practices, Kurian N. P., Narosa Publishing
Core Lab 3 – Testing Lab(Credits- 0:0:4 = 2)

Teaching Scheme
Lectures: 2 hrs/week,

1. Understand the response of structures.
2. Prepare the models.
3. Conduct model testing for static loading
4. Conduct model testing for free and forced vibrations
Syllabus Content:
 Response of structures and its elements against extreme loading events.
 Model Testing: Static - testing ofplates, shells, and framesmodels.
 Model Testing: Free and forced vibrations, Evaluation of dynamic modulus.
 Beam vibrations, Vibration isolation, Shear wall building model, Time and frequency-domain
study, Vibration Characteristics of RC Beams using Piezoelectric Sensors etc.
Core Lab 4 – Numerical Analysis Lab (Credits- 0:0:4 = 2)

Teaching Scheme

1. Find Roots of non-linear equations by Bisection method and Newton’s method.
2. Do curve fitting by least square approximations
3. Solve the system of Linear Equations using Gauss - Elimination/ Gauss - Seidal Iteration/
Gauss - Jorden Method
4. To Integrate Numerically Using Trapezoidal and Simpson’s Rules
5. To Find Numerical Solution of Ordinary Differential Equations by Euler’s Method,
Runge- KuttaMethod.
[ 21 ]
Syllabus Contents:
 Find the Roots of Non-Linear Equation Using Bisection Method.
 Find the Roots of Non-Linear Equation Using Newton’s Method.
 Curve Fitting by Least Square Approximations.
 Solve the System of Linear Equations Using Gauss - Elimination Method.
 Solve the System of Linear Equations Using Gauss - Seidal Iteration Method.
 Solve the System of Linear Equations Using Gauss - Jorden Method.
 Integrate numerically using Trapezoidal Rule.
 Integrate numerically using Simpson’s Rules.
 Numerical Solution of Ordinary Differential Equations By Euler’s Method.
 Numerical Solution of Ordinary Differential Equations ByRunge- Kutta Method.
Core - Mini Project (Credits- 0:0:4 = 2)
Teaching Scheme
Lectures: 4hrs/week
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Identify structural engineering problems reviewing available literature.
2. Study different techniques used to analyze complex structural systems.
3. work on the solutions given and present solution by using his/her technique applying
engineering principles.
Syllabus Contents:
Mini Project will have mid semester presentation and end semester presentation. Mid semester
presentation will include identification of the problem based on the literature review on the topic
referring to latest literature available.
End semester presentation should be done along with the report on identification of topic for the
work and the methodology adopted involving scientific research, collection and analysis of data,
determining solutions highlighting individuals’ contribution.
Continuous assessment ofMini Project at Mid Sem and End Sem will be monitored by the
departmental committee.
Program Elective V - Design of Prestressed Concrete Structures

(Credits- 3:0:0 = 3)
Teaching Scheme

1. Find out losses in the prestressed concrete. Understand the basic aspects of prestressed concrete
fundamentals, including pre and post-tensioning processes.
2. Analyseprestressed concrete deck slab and beam/ girders.
3. Design prestressed concrete deck slab and beam/ girders.
4. Design of end blocks for prestressed members.
[ 22 ]
Syllabus Contents:
 Introduction to prestressed concrete: types of prestressing, systems and devices, materials,
losses in prestress. Analysis of PSC flexural members: basic concepts, stresses at transfer and
service loads, ultimate strength in flexure, code provisions.
 Statically determinate PSC beams: design for ultimate and serviceability limit states for
flexure, analysis and design for shear and torsion, code provisions.
 Transmission of prestress in pretensioned members; Anchorage zone stresses for posttensioned
members.
 Statically indeterminate structures - Analysis and design - continuous beams and frames,
choice of cable profile, linear transformation andconcordancy.
 Composite construction with precast PSC beams and cast in-situ RC slab - Analysis and design,
creep and shrinkage effects. Partial prestressing - principles, analysis and design concepts, crack-
width calculations
 Analysis and designof prestressed concrete pipes, columns with moments.
References:
• Design of Prestressed Concrete Structures, Lin T.Y., Asia Publishing House, 1955.
• Prestressed Concrete, Krishnaraju N., Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1981.
• Limited State Design of PrestressedConcrete,GuyanY., Applied Science Publishers, 1972.
• IS: 1343- Code of Practice for Prestressed Concrete
• IRC: 112
Program Elective V - Analytical and Finite Element Analysis of

Laminated Composite Plates(Credits- 3:0:0 = 3)
Teaching Scheme
Course outcomes:At the end of the course, students will be able to

1. Analyse the rectangular composite plates using the analyticalmethods.
2. Analyse the composite plates using advanced finite elementmethod.
3. Develop the computer programs for the analysis of composite plates.
Syllabus Contents:
 Introduction: Displacement Field Approximations for Classical Laminated Plate Theory (CLPT)
and First Order Shear Deformation Theory (FSDT), Analytical Solutions for Bending
ofRectangular Laminated Plates using CLPT.
 Governing Equations. Navier Solutions of Cross-Ply and Angle-Ply Laminated Simply-
Supported Plates, Determination of Stresses. Levy Solutions for Plates with Other Boundary
Conditions, Analytical Solutions for Bending of Rectangular Laminated PlatesUsing FSDT.
 Finite Element Solutions for Bending ofRectangular Laminated Plates using CLPT.
 Introduction to Finite Element Method, Rectangular Elements, Formation of Stiffness Matrix,
Formation of Load Vector, Numerical Integration, Post Computation of Stresses.
[ 23 ]
 Finite Element Solutions for Bending ofRectangular Laminated Plates using FSDT.
Finite Element Model, C0Element Formulation, Post Computation of Stresses.
 Analysis ofRectangular Composite Plates using Analytical Methods.
References:
 Mechanics of Laminated Composites Plates and Shells, Reddy J. N., CRC Press.
Program Elective V - Fracture Mechanics of Concrete Structures

(Credits- 3:0:0 = 3)
Teaching Scheme

1. Identify and classify cracking of concrete structures based on fracture mechanics.
2. Implement stress intensity factor for notched members
3. apply fracture mechanics models to high strength concrete and FRC structures.
4. Compute J-integral for various sections understanding the concepts of LEFM.
Syllabus Contents:
 Introduction:Basic Fracture Mechanics, Crack in a Structure, Mechanisms ofFracture andCrack
Growth, Cleavage Fracture, Ductile Fracture, Fatigue Cracking, Environment assisted Cracking,
Service Failure Analysis.
 Stress at Crack Tip: Stress at Crack Tip, Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics, Griffith’s Criteria,
Stress Intensity Factors, Crack Tip Plastic Zone, Erwin’s Plastic Zone Correction, R curves,
Compliance, J Integral, Concept of CTOD and CMD.
 Material Models: General Concepts, Crack Models, BandModels, Models based on Continuum
Damage Mechanics, Applications to High Strength Concrete, FibreReinforced Concrete, Crack
Concepts andNumerical Modeling.
Reference Books:
1. Fracture Mechanics, Suri C. T. and Jin Z.H., 1st Edition, Elsevier Academic Press, 2012.
2. Elementary Engineering Fracture Mechanics, BroekDavid, 3rd Rev. Ed. Springer, 1982.
3. Fracture Mechanics of Concrete Structures – Theory and Applications, Elfgreen L., RILEM
Report, Chapman and Hall, 1989.
4. Fracture Mechanics – Applications to Concrete, Victor, Li C., Bazant Z. P., ACI SP 118, ACI
Detroit, 1989.
Program Elective III - Design of Masonry Structures(Credits- 3:0:0 = 3)
Teaching Scheme
[ 24 ]

1. Understand the masonry design approaches.
2. Analyse Reinforced Masonry Members.
3. Determine interactions between members.
4. Determine shear strength and ductility of Reinforced Masonry members.
5. Check the stability of walls
6. Perform elastic and Inelastic analysis of masonry walls.
Syllabus Contents:
 Introduction:Historical Perspective, Masonry Materials, MasonryDesign Approaches, Overview
of Load Conditions, Compression Behaviour of Masonry, Masonry Wall Configurations,
Distribution ofLateral Forces.
 Flexural Strengthof Reinforced Masonry Members: In planeand Out-of-plane Loading.
 Interactions: Structural Wall, Columns and Pilasters, Retaining Wall, Pier and Foundation.
 Shear Strengthand Ductility of Reinforced Masonry Members.
 Prestressed Masonry - Stability of Walls, Coupling of Masonry Walls, Openings, Columns,
Beams.
 Elastic andInelastic Analysis, Modeling Techniques, Static PushOver Analysis and use of
Capacity Design Spectra.
Reference Books:
1. Design of Reinforced Masonry Structures, Narendra Taly, ICC, 2nd Edn,
2. Masonry Structures: Behavior and Design, Hamid Ahmad A. and Drysdale Robert G., 1994.
3. Mechanics of Masonry Structures, Editor: Maurizio Angelillo, 2014.
4. Earthquake-resistant Design of Masonry Buildings,Toma evi Miha, Imperial College Press, 1999.
Program Elective IV - Design ofIndustrial Structures(Credits- 3:0:0 = 3)
Teaching Scheme
ourse Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Design Steel Gantry Girders.
2. Design Steel Portal, Gable Frames.
3. Design Steel Bunkers and Silos.
4. Design Chimneys and Water Tanks.
Syllabus Contents:
 Steel Gantry Girders – Introduction, loads acting on gantry girder, permissible stress, types of
gantry girders and crane rails, crane data, maximum moments and shears, construction detail,
design procedure.
 Portal Frames – Design of portal frame with hinge base, design of portal frame with fixed base -
Gable Structures – Lightweight Structures
 Steel Bunkers and Silos – Design of square bunker – Jansen’s andAiry’s theories – IS Code
provisions – Design of side plates – Stiffeners – Hooper – Longitudinal beams Design of
cylindrical silo – Side plates – Ring girder – stiffeners.
[ 25 ]
 Chimneys – Introduction, dimensions of steel stacks, chimney lining, breech openings and
access ladder, loading and load combinations, design considerations, stability consideration,
design of base plate, design of foundation bolts, design of foundation.
 Water Tanks – Design of rectangular riveted steel water tank – Tee covers – Plates – Stays –
Longitudinal and transverse beams –Design of staging – Base plates – Foundation and anchor
bolts –
 Design of pressed steel water tank – Design of stays – Joints – Design of hemispherical bottom
water tank – side plates – Bottom plates – joints – Ring girder –Design of staging and foundation.
Reference Books:
 Design of Steel Structure, Punmia B. C., Jain Ashok Kr., Jain Arun Kr., 2nd Ed., Lakshmi
Publishers, 1998.
 Design of Steel Structures, Ram Chandra, 12th Ed., Standard Publishers, 2009.
 Design of Steel Structures, Subramaniyam.
Program Elective V - Design of Plates and Shells(Credits- 3:0:0 = 3)
Teaching Scheme
Lectures: 3 hrs/week, –
1. Analyse and design prismatic folded plate systems.
2. Analyse and design shells using approximate solutions
3. Analyse and Design Cylindrical Shells
4. Design Doubly Curved Shells using Approximate Solutions.
Syllabus Contents:
 Prismatic folded Plate Systems
 Shell Equations
 Approximate Solutions
 Analysis and Design of Cylindrical Shells
 Approximate Design methods for Doubly Curved Shells.
Reference Books:
 Theory of Plates and Shells, Timoshenko and Woinowsky-Krieger S., Tata Mc Graw Hill
Edition, 2010.
 Design and Construction of Concrete Shell Roofs, Ramaswamy G. S., 1st Edition, 2005.
 Design of Reinforced Concrete Shells & Folded Plate, Varghese P. C., 1st Edition, PHI.
 Design of Plate and Shell Structures, Jawad Maan H., Springer Science.
Core - Dissertation I (Credits- 0:0:20 = 10)
Teaching Scheme
Lectures: 3hrs/week Mid Sem Evaluation weightage - 30%
End Sem Evaluation weightage - 70%
[ 26 ]
 Identify structural engineering problems reviewing available literature.
 Identify appropriate techniques to analyze complex structural systems.
 Apply engineering and management principles through efficient handling of project
Syllabus Contents:
Dissertation-I will have mid semester presentation and end semester presentation. Mid semester
presentation will include identification of the problem based on the literature review on the topic
referring to latest literature available.
End semester presentation should be done along with the report on identification of topic for the
work and the methodology adopted involving scientific research, collection and analysis of data,
determining solutions and must bring out individualscontribution.
Continuous assessment of Dissertation – I and Dissertation – II at Mid Sem and End Sem will be
monitored by the departmental committee.
Core - Dissertation II (Credits- 0:0:32 = 16)
Teaching Scheme
Contact Hours: 3hrs/week
1. Solve complex structural problems by applying appropriate techniques and tools.
2. Exhibit good communication skill to the engineering community and society.
3. Demonstrate professional ethics and work culture.
Syllabus Contents:
Dissertation – II will be extension of the to work on the topic identified in Dissertation – I.
Continuous assessment should be done of the work done by adopting the methodology decided
involving numerical analysis/ conduct experiments, collection and analysis of data, etc.There will be
presubmission seminar at the end of academic term. After the approval the student has to submit the
detail report and external examiner is called for the viva-voce to assess along with guide.
OPEN ELECTIVES
Business Analytics
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
Course Code
Course Name Business Analytics
Credits
Prerequisites
Total Number of Lectures: 48
[ 27 ]
Course objective
1. Understand the role of business analytics within an organization.
2. Analyze data using statistical and data mining techniques and understand relationships between the
underlying business processes of an organization.
3. To gain an understanding of how managers use business analytics to formulate and solve business
problems and to support managerial decision making.
4. To become familiar with processes needed to develop, report, and analyze business data.
5. Use decision-making tools/Operations research techniques.
6. Mange business process using analytical and management tools.
7. Analyze and solve problems from different industries such as manufacturing, service, retail,
software, banking and finance, sports, pharmaceutical, aerospace etc.
LECTURE WITH BREAKUP NO. OF

LECTURES
Unit1:
Business analytics: Overview of Business analytics, Scope of Business analytics,

Business Analytics Process, Relationship of Business Analytics Process and
organisation, competitive advantages of Business Analytics.
Statistical Tools: Statistical Notation, Descriptive Statistical methods, Review of 9

probability distribution and data modelling, sampling and estimation methods overview.
Unit 2:
Trendiness and Regression Analysis: Modelling Relationships and Trends in Data,

simple Linear Regression.
Important Resources, Business Analytics Personnel, Data and models for Business
analytics, problem solving, Visualizing and Exploring Data, Business Analytics 8
Technology.
Unit 3:
Organization Structures of Business analytics, Team management, Management Issues,

Designing Information Policy, Outsourcing, Ensuring Data Quality, Measuring
contribution of Business analytics, Managing Changes.
Descriptive Analytics, predictive analytics, predicative Modelling, Predictive analytics 9

analysis, Data Mining, Data Mining Methodologies, Prescriptive analytics and its step in
the business analytics Process, Prescriptive Modelling, nonlinear Optimization.
Unit 4:
Forecasting Techniques: Qualitative and Judgmental Forecasting, Statistical Forecasting

Models, Forecasting Models for Stationary Time Series, Forecasting Models for Time
Series with a Linear Trend, Forecasting Time Series with Seasonality, Regression
[ 28 ]
Forecasting with Casual Variables, Selecting Appropriate Forecasting Models. 10
Monte Carlo Simulation and Risk Analysis: Monte Carle Simulation Using Analytic
Solver Platform, New-Product Development Model, Newsvendor Model, Overbooking
Model, Cash Budget Model.
Unit 5:
Decision Analysis: Formulating Decision Problems, Decision Strategies with the without 8
Outcome Probabilities, Decision Trees, The Value of Information, Utility and Decision
Making.
Unit 6:
Recent Trends in : Embedded and collaborative business intelligence, Visual data 4

recovery, Data Storytelling and Data journalism.
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Students will demonstrate knowledge of data analytics.

2. Students will demonstrate the ability of think critically in making decisions based on data and deep
analytics.
3. Students will demonstrate the ability to use technical skills in predicative and prescriptive modeling
to support business decision-making.
4. Students will demonstrate the ability to translate data into clear, actionable insights.
Reference:
1. Business analytics Principles, Concepts, and Applications by Marc J. Schniederjans, Dara G.
Schniederjans, Christopher M. Starkey, Pearson FT Press.
2. Business Analytics by James Evans, persons Education.
OPEN ELECTIVES
Industrial Safety
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
Unit-I: Industrial safety: Accident, causes, types, results and control, mechanical and electrical
hazards, types, causes and preventive steps/procedure, describe salient points of factories act 1948
for health and safety, wash rooms, drinking water layouts, light, cleanliness, fire, guarding, pressure
vessels, etc, Safety color codes. Fire prevention and firefighting, equipment and methods.
Unit-II: Fundamentals of maintenance engineering: Definition and aim of maintenance engineering,

Primary and secondary functions and responsibility of maintenance department, Types of
maintenance, Types and applications of tools used for maintenance, Maintenance cost & its relation
with replacement economy, Service life of equipment.
[ 29 ]
Unit-III: Wear and Corrosion and their prevention: Wear- types, causes, effects, wear reduction
methods, lubricants-types and applications, Lubrication methods, general sketch, working and
applications, i. Screw down grease cup, ii. Pressure grease gun, iii. Splash lubrication, iv. Gravity
lubrication, v. Wick feed lubrication vi. Side feed lubrication, vii. Ring lubrication, Definition,
principle and factors affecting the corrosion. Types of corrosion, corrosion prevention methods.
Unit-IV: Fault tracing: Fault tracing-concept and importance, decision treeconcept, need and
applications, sequence of fault finding activities, show as decision tree, draw decision tree for
problems in machine tools, hydraulic, pneumatic,automotive, thermal and electrical equipment’s
like, I. Any one machine tool, ii. Pump iii. Air compressor, iv. Internal combustion engine, v. Boiler,
vi. Electrical motors, Types of faults in machine tools and their general causes.
Unit-V: Periodic and preventive maintenance: Periodic inspection-concept and need, degreasing,
cleaning and repairing schemes, overhauling of mechanical components, overhauling of electrical
motor, common troubles and remedies of electric motor, repair complexities and its use, definition,
need, steps and advantages of preventive maintenance. Steps/procedure for periodic and preventive
maintenance of: I. Machine tools, ii. Pumps, iii. Air compressors, iv. Diesel generating (DG) sets,
Program and schedule of preventive maintenance of mechanical and electrical equipment,
advantages of preventive maintenance. Repair cycle concept and importance
Reference:
1. Maintenance Engineering Handbook, Higgins & Morrow, Da Information Services.
2. Maintenance Engineering, H. P. Garg, S. Chand and Company.
3. Pump-hydraulic Compressors, Audels, Mcgrew Hill Publication.
4. Foundation Engineering Handbook, Winterkorn, Hans, Chapman & Hall London.
OPEN ELECTIVES
Operations Research
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to
1. Students should able to apply the dynamic programming to solve problems of discreet and
continuous variables.
2. Students should able to apply the concept of non-linear programming
3. Students should able to carry out sensitivity analysis
4. Student should able to model the real world problem and simulate it.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:
Optimization Techniques, Model Formulation, models, General L.R Formulation, Simplex
Techniques, Sensitivity Analysis, Inventory Control Models
Unit 2
Formulation of a LPP - Graphical solution revised simplex method - duality theory - dual simplex
method - sensitivity analysis - parametric programming
Unit 3:
Nonlinear programming problem - Kuhn-Tucker conditions min cost flow problem - max flow
problem - CPM/PERT
Unit 4
[ 30 ]
Scheduling and sequencing - single server and multiple server models - deterministic inventory
models - Probabilistic inventory control models - Geometric Programming.
Unit 5
Competitive Models,Single and Multi-channel Problems, Sequencing Models, Dynamic
Programming, Flow in Networks, Elementary Graph Theory, Game Theory Simulation
References:
1. H.A. Taha, Operations Research, An Introduction, PHI, 2008
2. H.M. Wagner, Principles of Operations Research, PHI, Delhi, 1982.
3. J.C. Pant, Introduction to Optimisation: Operations Research, Jain Brothers, Delhi, 2008
4. Hitler Libermann Operations Research: McGraw Hill Pub. 2009
5. Pannerselvam, Operations Research: Prentice Hall of India 2010
6. Harvey M Wagner, Principles of Operations Research: Prentice Hall of India 2010
Open Elective
Cost Management of Engineering Projects
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
Introduction and Overview of the Strategic Cost Management Process
Cost concepts in decision-making; Relevant cost, Differential cost, Incremental cost and Opportunity
cost. Objectives of a Costing System; Inventory valuation; Creation of a Database for operational
control; Provision of data for Decision-Making.
Project: meaning, Different types, why to manage, cost overruns centres, various stages of project
execution: conception to commissioning. Project execution as conglomeration of technical and non-
technical activities. Detailed Engineering activities. Pre project execution main clearances and
documents Project team: Role of each member. Importance Project site: Data required with
significance. Project contracts. Types and contents. Project execution Project cost control. Bar charts
and Network diagram. Project commissioning: mechanical and process
Cost Behavior and Profit Planning Marginal Costing; Distinction between Marginal Costing and
Absorption Costing; Break-even Analysis, Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis. Various decision-making
problems. Standard Costing and Variance Analysis. Pricing strategies: Pareto Analysis. Target
costing, Life Cycle Costing. Costing of service sector. Just-in-time approach, Material Requirement
Planning, Enterprise Resource Planning, Total Quality Management and Theory of constraints.
Activity-Based Cost Management, Bench Marking; Balanced Score Card and Value-Chain Analysis.
Budgetary Control; Flexible Budgets; Performance budgets; Zero-based budgets. Measurement of
Divisional profitability pricing decisions including transfer pricing.
Quantitative techniques for cost management, Linear Programming, PERT/CPM, Transportation

problems, Assignment problems, Simulation, Learning Curve Theory.
References:
1. Cost Accounting A Managerial Emphasis, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi
2. Charles T. Horngren and George Foster, Advanced Management Accounting
3. Robert S Kaplan Anthony A. Alkinson, Management & Cost Accounting
[ 31 ]
4. Ashish K. Bhattacharya, Principles & Practices of Cost Accounting A. H. Wheeler publisher

5. N.D. Vohra, Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw Hill Book Co. Ltd.
Open Elective
Composite Materials
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
UNIT–I: INTRODUCTION: Definition – Classification and characteristics of Composite materials.

Advantages and application of composites. Functional requirements of reinforcement and matrix.
Effect of reinforcement (size, shape, distribution, volume fraction) on overall composite
performance.
UNIT – II: REINFORCEMENTS: Preparation-layup, curing, properties and applications of glass
fibers, carbon fibers, Kevlar fibers and Boron fibers. Properties and applications of whiskers, particle
reinforcements. Mechanical Behavior of composites: Rule of mixtures, Inverse rule of mixtures.
Isostrain and Isostress conditions.
UNIT – III: Manufacturing of Metal Matrix Composites: Casting – Solid State diffusion technique,
Cladding – Hot isostatic pressing. Properties and applications. Manufacturing of Ceramic Matrix
Composites: Liquid Metal Infiltration – Liquid phase sintering. Manufacturing of Carbon – Carbon
composites: Knitting, Braiding, Weaving. Properties and applications.
UNIT–IV: Manufacturing of Polymer Matrix Composites: Preparation of Moulding compounds and
prepregs – hand layup method – Autoclave method – Filament winding method – Compression
moulding – Reaction injection moulding. Properties and applications.
UNIT – V: Strength: Laminar Failure Criteria-strength ratio, maximum stress criteria, maximum
strain criteria, interacting failure criteria, hygrothermal failure. Laminate first play failure-insight
strength; Laminate strength-ply discount truncated maximum strain criterion; strength design using
caplet plots; stress concentrations.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Material Science and Technology – Vol 13 – Composites by R.W.Cahn – VCH, West
Germany.
2. Materials Science and Engineering, An introduction. WD Callister, Jr., Adapted by R.
Balasubramaniam, John Wiley & Sons, NY, Indian edition, 2007.
References:
1. Hand Book of Composite Materials-ed-Lubin.
2. Composite Materials – K.K.Chawla.
3. Composite Materials Science and Applications – Deborah D.L. Chung.
4. Composite Materials Design and Applications – Danial Gay, Suong V. Hoa, and Stephen W.
Tasi.
Open Elective
Waste to Energy
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
Unit-I: Introduction to Energy from Waste: Classification of waste as fuel – Agro based, Forest
residue, Industrial waste - MSW – Conversion devices – Incinerators, gasifiers, digestors
[ 32 ]
Unit-II: Biomass Pyrolysis: Pyrolysis – Types, slow fast – Manufacture of charcoal – Methods -
Yields and application – Manufacture of pyrolytic oils and gases, yields and applications.
Unit-III: Biomass Gasification: Gasifiers – Fixed bed system – Downdraft and updraft gasifiers –
Fluidized bed gasifiers – Design, construction and operation – Gasifier burner arrangement for
thermal heating – Gasifier engine arrangement and electrical power – Equilibrium and kinetic
consideration in gasifier operation.
Unit-IV: Biomass Combustion: Biomass stoves – Improved chullahs, types, some exotic designs,
Fixed bed combustors, Types, inclined grate combustors, Fluidized bed combustors, Design,
construction and operation - Operation of all the above biomass combustors.
Unit-V: Biogas: Properties of biogas (Calorific value and composition) - Biogas plant technology
and status - Bio energy system - Design and constructional features - Biomass resources and their
classification - Biomass conversion processes - Thermo chemical conversion - Direct combustion -
biomass gasification - pyrolysis and liquefaction - biochemical conversion - anaerobic digestion -
Types of biogas Plants – Applications - Alcohol production from biomass - Bio diesel production -
Urban waste to energy conversion - Biomass energy programme in India.
References:
1. Non Conventional Energy, Desai, Ashok V., Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1990.
2. Biogas Technology - A Practical Hand Book - Khandelwal, K. C. and Mahdi, S. S., Vol. I & II,
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., 1983.
3. Food, Feed and Fuel from Biomass, Challal, D. S., IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., 1991.
4. Biomass Conversion and Technology, C. Y. WereKo-Brobby and E. B. Hagan, John Wiley &
Sons, 1996.
AUDIT 1 and 2: ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING
Course objectives:
Students will be able to:
1. Understand that how to improve your writing skills and level of readability
2. Learn about what to write in each section
3. Understand the skills needed when writing a Title
Ensure the good quality of paper at very first-time submission
Syllabus
Units CONTENTS Hours
1 Planning and Preparation, Word Order, Breaking up long sentences, Structuring 4
Paragraphs and Sentences, Being Concise and Removing Redundancy, Avoiding
Ambiguity and Vagueness
2 Clarifying Who Did What, Highlighting Your Findings, Hedging and Criticising, 4
Paraphrasing and Plagiarism, Sections of a Paper, Abstracts. Introduction
3 Review of the Literature, Methods, Results, Discussion, Conclusions, The Final Check. 4
4 key skills are needed when writing a Title, key skills are needed when writing an 4
Abstract, key skills are needed when writing an Introduction, skills needed when
writing a Review of the Literature,
5 skills are needed when writing the Methods, skills needed when writing the Results, 4
skills are needed when writing the Discussion, skills are needed when writing the
Conclusions
6 useful phrases, how to ensure paper is as good as it could possibly be the first- time 4
submission
[ 33 ]
Suggested Studies:
1. Goldbort R (2006) Writing for Science, Yale University Press (available on Google Books)
2. Day R (2006) How to Write and Publish a Scientific Paper, Cambridge University Press
3. Highman N (1998), Handbook of Writing for the Mathematical Sciences, SIAM.
Highman’sbook .
4. Adrian Wallwork , English for Writing Research Papers, Springer New York Dordrecht
Heidelberg London, 2011
AUDIT 1 and 2: DISASTER MANAGEMENT
Course Objectives: -Students will be able to:

1. learn to demonstrate a critical understanding of key concepts in disaster risk reduction and
humanitarian response.
2. critically evaluate disaster risk reduction and humanitarian response policy and practice from multiple
perspectives.
3. develop an understanding of standards of humanitarian response and practical relevance in
specific types of disasters and conflict situations.
4. critically understand the strengths and weaknesses of disaster management approaches,
planning and programming in different countries, particularly their home country or the countries
they work in
Syllabus
1 Introduction 4
Disaster: Definition, Factors And Significance; Difference Between Hazard And
Disaster; Natural And Manmade Disasters: Difference, Nature, Types And Magnitude.
2 Repercussions Of Disasters And Hazards: Economic Damage, Loss Of Human And 4
Animal Life, Destruction Of Ecosystem.
Natural Disasters: Earthquakes, Volcanisms, Cyclones, Tsunamis, Floods, Droughts
And Famines, Landslides And Avalanches, Man-made disaster: Nuclear Reactor
Meltdown, Industrial Accidents, Oil Slicks And Spills, Outbreaks Of Disease And
Epidemics, War And Conflicts.
3 Disaster Prone Areas In India 4
Study Of Seismic Zones; Areas Prone To Floods And Droughts, Landslides And
Avalanches; Areas Prone To Cyclonic And Coastal Hazards With Special Reference
To Tsunami; Post-Disaster Diseases And Epidemics
4 Disaster Preparedness And Management 4
Preparedness: Monitoring Of Phenomena Triggering A Disaster Or Hazard;
Evaluation Of Risk: Application Of Remote Sensing, Data From Meteorological And
Other Agencies, Media Reports: Governmental And Community Preparedness.
5 Risk Assessment 4
Disaster Risk: Concept And Elements, Disaster Risk Reduction, Global And National
Disaster Risk Situation. Techniques Of Risk Assessment, Global Co-Operation In
Risk Assessment And Warning, People’s Participation In Risk Assessment. Strategies
for Survival.
[ 34 ]
6 Disaster Mitigation 4
Meaning, Concept And Strategies Of Disaster Mitigation, Emerging Trends In
Mitigation. Structural Mitigation And Non-Structural Mitigation, Programs Of
Disaster Mitigation In India.
SUGGESTED READINGS:
1. R. Nishith, Singh AK, “Disaster Management in India: Perspectives, issues and strategies “’New
Royal book Company.
2. Sahni, PardeepEt.Al. (Eds.),” Disaster Mitigation Experiences And Reflections”, Prentice Hall Of
India, New Delhi.
3. Goel S. L. , Disaster Administration And Management Text And Case Studies” ,Deep &Deep
Publication Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
AUDIT 1 and 2: SANSKRIT FOR TECHNICAL KNOWLEDGE

Course Objectives
1. To get a working knowledge in illustrious Sanskrit, the scientific language in the world
2. Learning of Sanskrit to improve brain functioning
3. Learning of Sanskrit to develop the logic in mathematics, science & other subjects
enhancing the memory power
4. The engineering scholars equipped with Sanskrit will be able to explore the
huge knowledge from ancient literature
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours
1  Alphabets in Sanskrit, 8
 Past/Present/Future Tense,
 Simple Sentences
2  Order 8
 Introduction of roots
 Technical information about Sanskrit Literature
3  Technical concepts of Engineering-Electrical, Mechanical, 8
Architecture, Mathematics
Suggested reading
1. “Abhyaspustakam” – Dr.Vishwas, Samskrita-Bharti Publication, New Delhi
2. “Teach Yourself Sanskrit” Prathama Deeksha-VempatiKutumbshastri, Rashtriya Sanskrit
Sansthanam, New Delhi Publication
3. “India’s Glorious Scientific Tradition” Suresh Soni, Ocean books (P) Ltd., New Delhi.
Course Output
Students will be able to
1. Understanding basic Sanskrit language
2. Ancient Sanskrit literature about science & technology can be understood
3. Being a logical language will help to develop logic in students
[ 35 ]
AUDIT 1 and 2: VALUE EDUCATION

Course Objectives
1.Understand value of education and self- development
2. Imbibe good values in students
3. Let the should know about the importance of character
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours

1  Values and self-development –Social values and individual attitudes. 4
Work ethics, Indian vision of humanism.
 Moral and non- moral valuation. Standards and principles.
 Value judgements
2  Importance of cultivation of values. 6
 Sense of duty. Devotion, Self-reliance. Confidence, Concentration.
Truthfulness, Cleanliness.
 Honesty, Humanity. Power of faith, National Unity.
 Patriotism.Love for nature ,Discipline
3  Personality and Behavior Development - Soul and Scientific attitude. 6
Positive Thinking. Integrity and discipline.
 Punctuality, Love and Kindness.
 Avoid fault Thinking.
 Free from anger, Dignity of labour.
 Universal brotherhood and religious tolerance.
 True friendship.
 Happiness Vs suffering, love for truth.
 Aware of self-destructive habits.
 Association and Cooperation.
 Doing best for saving nature
4  Character and Competence –Holy books vs Blind faith. 6
 Self-management and Good health.
 Science of reincarnation.
 Equality, Nonviolence ,Humility, Role of Women.
 All religions and same message.
 Mind your Mind, Self-control.
 Honesty, Studying effectively
Suggested reading
1 Chakroborty, S.K. “Values and Ethics for organizations Theory and practice”, Oxford University
Press, New Delhi
Course outcomes
1.Knowledge of self-development
2.Learn the importance of Human values
3.Developing the overall personality
[ 36 ]
AUDIT 1 and 2: CONSTITUTION OF INDIA

Course Objectives:
1. Understand the premises informing the twin themes of liberty and freedom from a civil rights
perspective.
2. To address the growth of Indian opinion regarding modern Indian intellectuals’ constitutional
role and entitlement to civil and economic rights as well as the emergence of nationhood in
the early years of Indian nationalism.
3. To address the role of socialism in India after the commencement of the Bolshevik
Revolution in 1917 and its impact on the initial drafting of the Indian Constitution.
Syllabus
Units Content Hours
 History of Making of the Indian Constitution:
1 History 4
Drafting Committee, ( Composition & Working)
 Philosophy of the Indian Constitution:
2 Preamble 4
Salient Features
 Contours of Constitutional Rights & Duties:
 Fundamental Rights
 Right to Equality
 Right to Freedom
 Right against Exploitation
3 4
 Right to Freedom of Religion
 Cultural and Educational Rights
 Right to Constitutional Remedies
 Directive Principles of State Policy
 Fundamental Duties.
 Organs of Governance:
 Parliament
 Composition
 Qualifications and Disqualifications
 Powers and Functions
4  Executive 4
 President
 Governor
 Council of Ministers
 Judiciary, Appointment and Transfer of Judges, Qualifications
 Local Administration:
 District’sAdministration head: Role and Importance,
 Municipalities: Introduction, Mayor and role of Elected Representative, CEO of
Municipal Corporation.
5  Pachayati raj: Introduction, PRI: ZilaPachayat. 4
 Elected officials and their roles, CEO ZilaPachayat: Position and role.
 Block level: Organizational Hierarchy (Different departments),
 Village level: Role of Elected and Appointed officials,
 Importance of grass root democracy
[ 37 ]
 Election Commission:
 Election Commission: Role and Functioning.
6  Chief Election Commissioner and Election Commissioners. 4
 State Election Commission: Role and Functioning.
 Institute and Bodies for the welfare of SC/ST/OBC and women.
Suggested reading
1. The Constitution of India, 1950 (Bare Act), Government Publication.
2. Dr. S. N. Busi, Dr. B. R. Ambedkar framing of Indian Constitution, 1st Edition, 2015.
3. M. P. Jain, Indian Constitution Law, 7th Edn., Lexis Nexis, 2014.
4. D.D. Basu, Introduction to the Constitution of India, Lexis Nexis, 2015.
Course Outcomes:

1. Discuss the growth of the demand for civil rights in India for the bulk of Indians before the
arrival of Gandhi in Indian politics.
2. Discuss the intellectual origins of the framework of argument that informed the conceptualization
of social reforms leading to revolution in India.
3. Discuss the circumstances surrounding the foundation of the Congress Socialist Party [CSP]
under the leadership of Jawaharlal Nehru and the eventual failure of the proposal of direct
elections through adult suffrage in the Indian Constitution.
4. Discuss the passage of the Hindu Code Bill of 1956.
AUDIT 1 and 2: PEDAGOGY STUDIES
Course Objectives:
4. Review existing evidence on the review topic to inform programme design and policy
making undertaken by the DfID, other agencies and researchers.
5. Identify critical evidence gaps to guide the development.
Syllabus
Units Content Hours
 Introduction and Methodology:
 Aims and rationale, Policy background, Conceptual framework and
terminology
1 4
 Theories of learning, Curriculum, Teacher education.
 Conceptual framework, Research questions.
 Overview of methodology and Searching.
 Thematic overview: Pedagogical practices are being used by teachers in formal
2 and informal classrooms in developing countries. 2
 Curriculum, Teacher education.
 Evidence on the effectiveness of pedagogical practices
3 4
 Methodology for the in depth stage: quality assessment of included studies.
[ 38 ]
 How can teacher education (curriculum and practicum) and the school
curriculum and guidance materials best support effective pedagogy?
 Theory of change.
 Strength and nature of the body of evidence for effective pedagogical
practices.
 Pedagogic theory and pedagogical approaches.
 Teachers’ attitudes and beliefs and Pedagogic strategies.
 Professional development: alignment with classroom practices and follow-
up support
 Peer support
4 4
 Support from the head teacher and the community.
 Curriculum and assessment
 Barriers to learning: limited resources and large class sizes
 Research gaps and future directions
 Research design
 Contexts
5  Pedagogy 2
 Teacher education
 Dissemination and research impact.
Suggested reading
1. Ackers J, Hardman F (2001) Classroom interaction in Kenyan primary schools, Compare, 31 (2):
245-261.
2. Agrawal M (2004) Curricular reform in schools: The importance of evaluation, Journal of
Curriculum Studies, 36 (3): 361-379.
3. Akyeampong K (2003) Teacher training in Ghana - does it count? Multi-site teacher education
research project (MUSTER) country report 1. London: DFID.
4. Akyeampong K, Lussier K, Pryor J, Westbrook J (2013) Improving teaching and learning of
basic maths and reading in Africa: Does teacher preparation count? International Journal
Educational Development, 33 (3): 272–282.
5. Alexander RJ (2001) Culture and pedagogy: International comparisons in primary education.
Oxford and Boston: Blackwell.
6. Chavan M (2003) Read India: A mass scale, rapid, ‘learning to read’ campaign.
7. www.pratham.org/images/resource%20working%20paper%202.pdf.
Course Outcomes:
Students will be able to understand:

1. What pedagogical practices are being used by teachers in formal and informal classrooms in
developing countries?
2. What is the evidence on the effectiveness of these pedagogical practices, in what conditions, and
with what population of learners?
3. How can teacher education (curriculum and practicum) and the school curriculum and guidance
materials best support effective pedagogy?
[ 39 ]
AUDIT 1 and 2: STRESS MANAGEMENT BY YOGA

Course Objectives
1. To achieve overall health of body and mind
2. To overcome stress
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours
1  Definitions of Eight parts of yog. ( Ashtanga ) 8
2  Yam and Niyam. 8

Do`s and Don’t’s in life.
i) Ahinsa, satya, astheya, bramhacharya and aparigraha
ii) Shaucha, santosh, tapa, swadhyay, ishwarpranidhan
3  Asan and Pranayam 8
i) Various yog poses and their benefits for mind & body
ii)Regularization of breathing techniques and its effects-Types of pranayam
Suggested reading
1. ‘Yogic Asanas for Group Tarining-Part-I” :Janardan Swami Yogabhyasi Mandal, Nagpur
2. “Rajayoga or conquering the Internal Nature” by Swami Vivekananda, AdvaitaAshrama
(Publication Department), Kolkata
Course Outcomes:
1. Develop healthy mind in a healthy body thus improving social health also
2. Improve efficiency
AUDIT 1 and 2: PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT THROUGH LIFE ENLIGHTENMENT

SKILLS
Course Objectives
1. To learn to achieve the highest goal happily
2. To become a person with stable mind, pleasing personality and determination
3. To awaken wisdom in students
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours
1 Neetisatakam-Holistic development of personality 8
 Verses- 19,20,21,22 (wisdom)
 Verses- 29,31,32 (pride & heroism)
 Verses- 26,28,63,65 (virtue)
 Verses- 52,53,59 (dont’s)
 Verses- 71,73,75,78 (do’s)
2  Approach to day to day work and duties. 8
 Shrimad BhagwadGeeta: Chapter 2-Verses 41, 47,48,
 Chapter 3-Verses 13, 21, 27, 35, Chapter 6-Verses 5,13,17,
23, 35,
 Chapter 18-Verses 45, 46, 48.
[ 40 ]
3  Statements of basic knowledge. 8

 Shrimad BhagwadGeeta: Chapter2-Verses 56, 62, 68
 Chapter 12 -Verses 13, 14, 15, 16,17, 18
 Personality of Role model. Shrimad BhagwadGeeta:
Chapter2-Verses 17, Chapter 3-Verses 36,37,42,
 Chapter 4-Verses 18, 38,39
 Chapter18 – Verses 37,38,63
Suggested reading
1. “Srimad Bhagavad Gita” by Swami SwarupanandaAdvaita Ashram (Publication
Department), Kolkata
2. Bhartrihari’s Three Satakam (Niti-sringar-vairagya) by P.Gopinath,
Rashtriya Sanskrit Sansthanam, New Delhi.
Course Outcomes
1. Study of Shrimad-Bhagwad-Geeta will help the student in developing his personality and achieve
the highest goal in life
2. The person who has studied Geeta will lead the nation and mankind to peace and prosperity
3. Study of Neetishatakam will help in developing versatile personality of students.
[ 41 ]
Specialization: GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1. To make students learn the principles of soil and rock mechanics. Understand different problems
associated with geotechnical engineering. Explain how to select design soil/rock parameters for
design purpose based on the subsurface exploration. Develop Analysis and Design procedure for
various geotechnical structures.
2. Students should gain competency in the design of shallow/deep foundations, earth retaining
structures, embankment and earthen dams, underground structures. Can assess stability of slopes
and apply preventive measures for stability.
COURSE OUTCOMES (POs):

1. Students will learn soil and rock behavior. Students will be able to perform various laboratory
and in-situ tests on soil/rock to find out design parameters.
2. Students can design shallow/deep foundations, earth retaining structures, embankment and
earthen dams, tunnel support systems for given site conditions.
3. Student can compute factor of safety to assess stability of slopes and apply preventive measures
for stability.
4. Student can develop numerical models to estimate response of various geotechnical structures
under different loadings.
Semester I
Sr. Course Teaching Scheme
Course Name Credits
No. Type/Code Th Tuto Lab
1. Core-I Advanced Soil Mechanics 3 -- -- 3
2. Core-II Advanced Foundation Engineering 3 -- -- 3
1. Soil Structure Interaction
Program
3. 2. Ground Improvement Techniques 3 -- -- 3
Elective-I
3. Pavement Analysis and Design
1. FEM in Geomechanics
Program
4. 2. Environmental Geotechnology 3 -- -- 3
Elective-II
3. Critical Soil Mechanics
5. Core Core Lab I - -- -- 4 2
6. Core Core Lab II - -- -- 4 2
7. MLC 1 Research Methodology 1 -- -- 1
8. MLC 2 Research Methodology and IPR 1 -- -- 1
9. Audit 1 Audit course 0 0
Total 14 -- 4 18
[ 42 ]
Semester II

Course Name Credits
1. Core-III Dynamics of soils and foundations 3 -- -- 3

Core-IV Subsurface investigations and
2. 3 -- -- 3
instrumentation
1. Offshore Geotechnical
Engineering/marine Geotechniques
Program
3. 2. Computational Geomechanics 3 -- -- 3
Elective-III
3. Engineering rock mechanics
1. Earth Retaining Structures

2. Design of underground excavations
Program
4. 3. Physical and Constitutive Modelling on 3 -- -- 3
Elective-IV
Geomechanics
5. Core Core Lab III - -- -- 4 2

6. Core Core Lab IV - -- -- 4 2
7. Core Mini Project -- -- 4 2
8. Audit 2 Audit course 0 0
Total 12 -- 8 18
Semester III

Course Name Credits
No. Type/Code
Th Tuto Lab
1. Stability analysis of slopes
Program
1 2. Foundations on weak rocks 3 3
Elective-IV
3. Geotechnical earthquake engineering
2 Open Electives 3 3
6. Waste to Energy
Dissertation Stage–I
3 10
(to be continued next semester)
Total 16
[ 43 ]
Semester IV

Course Name Credits
Dissertation final Stage
16
(continued from III semester)
Total 16

Audit course 1 & 2
4. Value Education
6. Pedagogy Studies
Core-I ADVANCED SOIL MECHANICS

Teaching Scheme
Lectures: 3 hrs/ week
COURSE OUTCOME
 The students obtain the complete knowledge on strength of soil mass
 The students are able to develop mathematical models for solving different problems in
soil mechanics
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Compressibility of soils: consolidation theory (one, two, and three dimensional
consolidation theories), consolidation in layered soil and consolidation for time dependent loading,
determination of coefficient of consolidation (Casagrande method and Taylors method)
Unit II: Strength behavior of soils; Mohr Circle of Stress; UU, CU, CD tests, drained and
undrained behavior of sand and clay, significance of pore pressure parameters; determination of
shear strength of soil; Interpretation of triaxial test results.
Unit III: Stress path; Drained and undrained stress path; Stress path with respect to different
initial state of the soil; Stress path for different practical situations.
Unit IV: Critical state soil mechanics; Critical state parameters; Critical state for normally
[ 44 ]
consolidated and over consolidated soil; Significance of Roscoe and Hvorslev state boundary
surface; drained and undrained plane. critical void ratio; effect of dilation in sands; different
dilation models.
Unit V: Elastic and plastic deformations: elastic wall; introduction to yielding and hardening;
yield curve and yield surface, associated and non-associated flow rule.
References:
Atkinson, J.H. and Bransby, P.L, The Mechanics of Soils: An introduction to Critical soil
mechanics, McGraw Hill, 1978.
Atkinson J.H, An introduction to the Mechanics of soils and Foundation, McGraw- Hill Co., 1993.
Das, B.M., Advanced Soil Mechanics, Taylor and Francis, 2nd Edition, 1997.
Wood, D.M., Soil Behavior and Critical State Soil Mechanics, Cambridge University Press, 1990.
Craig, R.F., Soil Mechanics, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co. Ltd., 1987.
Terzaghi, K., and Peck, R.B., Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice, John Wiley & Sons, 1967.
Lambe, T.W. and Whitman, R.V., Soil Mechanics, John Wiley & Sons, 1979.
Core –II ADVANCED FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Teaching Scheme
COURSE OUTCOME
 The students will be able to decide the type of foundations to be recommended for
construction of different engineering structures
 The students will be able to design different types of foundations
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Planning of soil exploration for different projects, methods of subsurface exploration,
methods of borings along with various penetration tests
Unit II: Shallow foundations, requirements for satisfactory performance of foundations, methods
of estimating bearing capacity, settlements of footings and rafts, proportioning of foundations
using field test data, IS codes.
Unit III: Pile foundations, methods of estimating load transfer of piles, settlements of pile
foundations, pile group capacity and settlement, negative skin friction of piles, laterally loaded
piles, pile load tests, analytical estimation of load- settlement behavior of piles, proportioning of
pile foundations, lateral and uplift capacity of piles.
Unit IV: Well foundation, IS and IRC codal provisions, elastic theory and ultimate resistance
methods
Unit V: Foundations on problematic soils: Foundations for collapsible and expansive soil
Unit VI: Coffer dams, various types, analysis and design Foundations under uplifting loads
References:
 Bowles. J.E., Foundation Analysis and Design, Tata McGraw-Hill International Edition,
5th Edn, 1997.
 Das B.M., Shallow Foundations: Bearing capacity and settlement, CRC Press, 1999.
[ 45 ]
 Tomlinson M.J., Pile design and construction Practice, Chapman and Hall Publication,
1994.
 Poulos, H. G. and Davis, F. H., “Pile Foundation Analysis and Design”, Wiley and Sons.
1980
Core –III DYNAMICS OF SOILS AND FOUNDATIONS

Teaching Scheme
COURSE OUTCOME
 Students understands theory of vibration and resonance phenomenon, dynamic
amplification.
 Students understand propagation of body waves and surface waves through soil.
 Student exposed to different methods for estimation of dynamic soil properties required for
design purpose.
 Students can predict dynamic bearing capacity and assess liquefaction potential of any site.
 Students apply theory of vibrations to design machine foundation based on dynamic soil
properties and bearing capacity.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Fundamentals of vibrations: single, two and multiple degree of freedom systems,
vibration isolation, vibration absorbers, vibration measuring instruments
Unit II: Wave propagation: elastic continuum medium, semi-infinite elastic continuum
medium,soil behaviour under dynamic loading.
Unit III: Liquefaction of soils: liquefaction mechanism, factors affecting liquefaction, studies by
dynamic tri-axial testing, oscillatory shear box, shake table and blast tests, assessment of
liquefaction potential.
Unit IV: Dynamic elastic constants of soil: determination of dynamic elastic constants, various
methods including block resonance tests, cyclic plate load tests, wave propagation tests,
oscillatory shear box test.
Unit V: Machine foundations: Design criteria for machine foundations; Elastic homogeneous
half space and lumped parameter solutions, analysis and design of foundations for reciprocating
and impact type machines, turbines, effect of machine foundation on adjoining structures.
Unit VI: Bearing capacity of foundations: Introduction to bearing capacity of dynamically
loaded foundations, such as those of water towers, chimneys and high rise buildings, response of
pile foundations.
References:
 Das, B.M., “Fundamentals of Soil Dynamics”, Elsevier,1983.
 Steven Kramer, “Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering”, Pearson,2008.
 Prakash, S., Soil Dynamics, McGraw Hill, 1981.
 Kameswara Rao, N.S.V., Vibration analysis and foundation dynamics, Wheeler
Publication Ltd., 1998.
[ 46 ]
 Richart, F.E. Hall J.R and Woods R.D., Vibrations of Soils and Foundations, Prentice Hall
Inc., 1970.
 Prakash, S. and Puri, V.K., Foundation for machines: Analysis and Design, John Wiley &
Sons, 1998
Core-IV SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION AND INSTRUMENTATION

Teaching Scheme
COURSE OUTCOME
 Students can plan subsurface investigation based on the requirement of civil engineering
project and site condition. Can finalize depth and number of boreholes
 Students can execute different subsurface exploration tests, collect disturbed/undisturbed
samples for laboratory tests and can suggest design parameters.
 Student exposed to different methods for estimation of dynamic soil properties required for
design purpose.
 Students can develop instrumentation scheme for monitoring of critical sites
References:
 Bowles, J.E., Foundation Analysis and Design, McGraw-Hill International Edition, 1997.
 Schnaid, F., “ In Situ Testing in Geomechanics”, Taylor and Francis.
PE-I SOIL STRUCTURE INTERACTIONS

Teaching Scheme
COURSE OUTCOME
 Students can apply different soil response models for specific problem based on the
requirement.
 Students can analyze footings/rafts resting on soil as beams/plates on elastic foundation
and work out design bending moments/shear and displacements.
 Student can compute pile response for various loading condition for design purpose.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Soil-Foundation Interaction: Introduction to soil-foundation interaction problems, Soil

behavior, Foundation behavior, Interface behavior, Scope of soil foundation interaction analysis,
soil response models, Winkler, Elastic continuum, Two parameter elastic models, Elastic plastic
behavior, Time dependent behavior.
Unit II: Beam on Elastic Foundation- Soil Models: Infinite beam, Two parameters, Isotropic
[ 47 ]
elastic half space, Analysis of beams of finite length, Classification of finite beams in relation to
their stiffness.
Unit III: Plate on Elastic Medium: Thin and thick plates, Analysis of finite plates, Numerical
analysis of finite plates, simple solutions.
Unit IV: Elastic Analysis of Pile: Elastic analysis of single pile, Theoretical solutions for
settlement and load distributions, Analysis of pile group, Interaction analysis, Load distribution in
groups with rigid cap.
Unit V: Laterally Loaded Pile: Load deflection prediction for laterally loaded piles, Subgrade
reaction and elastic analysis, Interaction analysis, Pile-raft system, Solutions through influence
charts. An introduction to soil-foundation interaction under dynamic loads.
References:
 Selvadurai, A.P.S, Elastic Analysis of Soil-Foundation Interaction, Elsevier, 1979.
 Poulos, H.G., and Davis, E.H., Pile Foundation Analysis and Design, John Wiley,1980.
 Scott, R.F., Foundation Analysis, Prentice Hall, 1981.
 Structure Soil Interaction - State of Art Report, Institution of Structural Engineers, 1978.
 ACI 336. (1988), Suggested Analysis and Design Procedures for combined footings and
Mats, American Concrete Institute.
PE-I GROUND IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES

Teaching Scheme
COURSE OUTCOME
 At the completion of the course the students will be able to understand the different types
of ground modification can be done depending upon the site Pcondition, type and purpose
of structure to be constructed.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Introduction: situations where ground improvement becomes necessary

Unit II: Mechanical modification: dynamic compaction, impact loading, compaction by blasting,
vibro-compaction; pre-compression, stone columns; Hydraulic modification: dewatering systems,
preloading and vertical drains, electro-kinetic dewatering
Unit III: Chemical modification; modification by admixtures, stabilization using industrial
wastes, grouting
Unit IV: Thermal modification: ground freezing and thawing.
Unit V: Soil reinforcement: Reinforced earth, basic mechanism, type of reinforcements, selection
of stabilisation/improvement of ground using Geotextiles, Goegrid, geomembranes, geocells,
geonets, and soil nails.
Unit VI: Application of soil reinforcement: shallow foundations on reinforced earth, design of
reinforced earth retaining walls, reinforced earth embankments structures, wall with reinforced backfill,
analysis and design of shallow foundations on reinforced earth, road designs with geosynthetics
[ 48 ]
References:
 Hausmann, M.R., Engineering Principles of Ground Modification, McGraw-Hill
International Editions, 1990.
 Yonekura, R., Terashi, M. and Shibazaki, M. (Eds.), Grouting and Deep Mixing, A.A.
Balkema, 1966.
 Moseley, M.P., Ground Improvement, Blackie Academic & Professional, 1993.
 Xanthakos, P.P., Abramson, L.W. and Bruce, D.A., Ground Control and Improvement,
John Wiley & Sons, 1994.
 Koerner, R. M., Designing with Geosynthetics, Prentice Hall Inc. 1998.
 Shukla, S.K., Yin, Jian-Hua, “Fundamentals of Geosynthetic Engineering”, Taylor & Francis.
PE-I PAVEMENT ANALYSIS AND DESIGN

Teaching Scheme
COURSE OUTCOME
 The students will be able to design flexible as well rigid pavements
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Philosophy of design of flexible and rigid pavements,

Unit II: analysis of pavements using different analytical methods,
Unit III: selection of pavement design input parameters – traffic loading and volume,
Unit IV: material characterization, drainage, failure criteria, reliability,
Unit V: design of flexible and rigid pavements using different methods,
Unit VI: comparison of different pavement design approaches, design of overlays and drainage
system.
References:
 Yang and H. Huang, Pavement Analysis and Design, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2004.
 Yoder and Witzech, Pavement Design, McGraw-Hill, 1982.
 Sharma and Sharma, Principles and Practice of Highway Engg., Asia Publishing House,
1980.
 Teng, Functional Designing of Pavements, McGraw- Hill, 1980.
PE-2 FEM IN GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING
Teaching Scheme
COURSE OUTCOME
 Students can understand basic stress-strain relationshipfor soil and develop Stress-
deformation analysis.
 Students can develop finite element formulation for different geotechnical problems
including shallow foundation, seepage and consolidation problems.
Syllabus Contents:
[ 49 ]
Unit I: Stress-deformation analysis: One dimensional, Two dimensional and Three-dimensional

formulations.
Unit II: Discretization of a Continuum, Elements, Strains, Stresses, Constitutive, Relations,
Hooke’s Law, Formulation of Stiffness Matrix, Boundary Conditions, Solution Algorithms.
Unit III: Principles of discretization, element stiffness and mass formulation based on direct,
variational and weighted residual techniques and displacements approach, Shape functions and
numerical integrations, convergence.
Unit IV: Displacement formulation for rectangular, triangular and isoparametric elements for
two dimensional and axisymmetric stress analysis.
Unit V: Settlement Analysis, 2-D elastic solutions for homogeneous, isotropic medium, Steady
Seepage Analysis: Finite element solutions of Laplace’s equation, Consolidation Analysis:
Terzaghi consolidation problem, Choice of Soil Properties for Finite Element Analysis
References:
 O.C. Zienkiewicz and R.L. Taylor, Finite element methods Vol I & Vol II, McGraw
Hill,1989,1992.
 K.J. Bathe, Finite element procedures, PHI Ltd., 1996.
 David M Potts and LidijaZdravkovic, “Finite Element Analysis in Geotechnical
Engineering Theory and Apllication”, Thomas Telford. 1999
PE-2 ENVIRONMENTAL GEOTECHNOLOGY

Teaching Scheme
COURSE OUTCOME
 Students can understand Soil-environment interaction, Soil mineralogy and Mechanisms
of soil-water interaction
 Students can lean ground water flow and predict contaminant transportphenomenon. Can
apply remediation techniques for contaminated site.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Soil as a multiphase system; Soil-environment interaction; Properties of water in relation

to the porous media; Water cycle with special reference to soil medium.
Unit II: Soil mineralogy; significance of mineralogy in determining soil behavior; Mineralogical
characterization.
Unit III: Mechanisms of soil-water interaction: Diffuse double layer models; Force of attraction
and repulsion; Soil-water-contaminant interaction; Theories of ion exchange; Influence of organic
and inorganic chemical interaction.
Unit IV: Concepts of waste containment; Sources, production and classification of wastes,
Environmental laws and regulations, physico-chemical properties of soil, ground water flow and
contaminant transport,desirable properties of soil; contaminant transport and retention;
contaminated site remediation.
[ 50 ]
Unit V: Soil characterization techniques; volumetric water content; gas permeation in soil;
electrical and thermal properties; pore-size distribution; contaminant analysis. contaminated site
characterization, estimation of landfill quantities, landfill site location, design of various landfill
components such as liners, covers, leachate collection and removal, gas generation and
management, ground water monitoring, end uses of landfill sites, slurry walls and barrier systems,
design and construction, stability, compatibility and performance, remediation technologies,
stabilization of contaminated soils and risk assessment approaches.
References:
 Mitchell, J.K and Soga, K., Fundamentals of Soil Behavior, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2005.
 Fang, H-Y., Introduction to Environmental Geotechnology, CRC Press,1997.
 Daniel, D.E, Geotechnical Practice for Waste Disposal, Chapman and Hall, 1993.
 Rowe, R.K., Quigley, R.M. and Booker, J.R., Clay Barrier Systems for Waste Disposal
Facilities, E & FN Spon, 1995.
 Rowe, R.K, Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering Handbook, Kluwer
Academic Publishers, 2001.
 Reddi, L.N. and Inyang, H.F, Geoenvironmental Engineering - Principles and
Applications, Marcel Dekker Inc, 2000.
 Sharma, H.D. and Lewis, S.P, Waste Containment Systems, Waste Stabilization and
Landfills: Design and Evaluation, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 1994.
PE-2 CRITICAL SOIL MECHANICS

Teaching Scheme
COURSE OUTCOME
 At the completion of the course the students will be able to decide the type of mathematical
models to be used for analyzing the behavior of soil mass at critical state
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Soil Behavior: State of stress and strain in soils, Stress and strain paths and invariants,
behavior of soils under different laboratory experiments
Unit II: The Critical state line and the Roscoe surface: Families of undrained tests, Families of
drained tests, the critical state line, drained and undrained surfaces, The Roscoe surface
Unit III: Behavior of Overconsolidated samples: The Hvorslev surface: Behaviour of
overconsolidated samples, drained and undrained tests, The Hvorslev surface, complete State
Boundary Surface, Volume changes and pore water pressure changes
Unit IV: Behaviour of Sands: The critical state line for sands, Normalized plots, the effect of
dilation, Consequences of Taylor's model
Unit V: Behaviour of Soils before Failure: Elastic and plastic deformations, Plasticity theory,
Development of elastic-plastic model based on critical state soil mechanics, The Cam-clay model,
The modified Cam-clay model
[ 51 ]
References:
 J. H. Atkinson and P. L. Bransby, “The mechanics of soils: An introduction to critical state
soil mechanics”, McGraw Hill, 1978
 D. M. Wood, “Soil behaviour and critical state soil mechanics”, Cambridge University
Press, 1990
 B. M. Das, “Fundamental of geotechnical engineering”, Cengage Learning, 2013
Teaching Scheme
Lectures: 1hrs/week
Course Outcomes:
 Understanding that when IPR would take such important place in growth of individuals &
nation, it is needless to emphasis the need of information about Intellectual Property Right
to be promoted among students in general & engineering in particular.
Understand that IPR protection provides an incentive to inventors for further research work and
investment in R & D, which leads to creation of new and better products, and in turn brings about,
economic growth and social benefits.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1: Meaning of research problem, Sources of research problem, Criteria Characteristics of
a good research problem, Errors in selecting a research problem, Scope and objectives of
research problem.
International Scenario: International cooperation on Intellectual Property. Procedure for grants
of patents, Patenting under PCT.
[ 52 ]

IPR; IPR of Biological Systems, Computer Software etc. Traditional knowledge Case Studies,
IPR and IITs.
References:
 Stuart Melville and Wayne Goddard, “Research methodology: an introduction for science
& engineering students’”
 Ranjit Kumar, 2nd Edition , “Research Methodology: A Step by Step Guide for beginners”
T. Ramappa, “Intellectual Property Rights Under WTO”, S. Chand, 2008
PE-III MARINE GEOTECHNIQUES

Teaching Scheme
COURSE OUTCOME
Students can execute investigation program for marine soil deposits and select necessary design
parameters. Design suitable marine foundation as per project requirement. Can develop numerical model
for response of marine foundation for offshore conditions.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Marine soil deposits: Offshore environment, Offshore structures and foundations,
Specific problems related to marine soil deposits, Physical and engineering properties of marine
soils
Unit II: Behavior of soils subjected to repeated loading: Effect of wave loading on offshore
foundations, Behavior of sands and clays under cyclic loading, Laboratory experiments including
repeated loading, Cyclic behavior of soils based on fundamental theory of mechanics,
Approximate engineering methods which can be used for practical cases
Unit III: Site Investigation in the case of marine soil deposits: Challenges of site investigation
in marine environment, Different site investigation techniques, sampling techniques, Geophysical
methods, Recent advancements in site investigation and sampling used for marine soil deposits
Unit IV: Foundations in marine soil deposits: Different offshore and nearshore foundations,
Gravity platforms, Jack-up rigs, pile foundations. cassions, spudcans
Unit V: Numerical modeling of marine foundations subjected to wave loading: Numerical
modeling of cyclic behavior of soils, empirical models, elastic-plastic models, FEM analysis of
marine foundations subjected to wave loading
[ 53 ]
References:
 H. G. Poulos. “Marine Geotechnics”, Unwin Hyman Ltd, London, UK, 1988
 D. V. Reddy and M. Arockiasamy, “Offshore Structures”, Volume: 1, R.E. Kreiger Pub
and Co., 1991
 D. Thomson and D. J. Beasley, “Handbook of Marine Geotechnical Engineering”, US
Navy, 2012
PE-III COMPUTATIONAL GEOMECHANICS

Teaching Scheme
COURSE OUTCOME
 Students can understand different numerical and statistical tools for analyzing various
geotechnical engineering problems.
 Students can apply probabilistic approach for selection of design parameters and compute
their impact on risk assessment
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Solution of Non-linear Equations: Bisection, False Position, Newton-Raphson,

Successive approximation method, Iterative methods
Unit II: Solution of Linear Equations: Jacobi’s method, Gauss Seidal method, Successive over
relaxation method.
Unit III: Finite Difference Method: Two point Boundary value problems – Disichlet conditions,
Neumann conditions; ordinary and partial differential equations.
Unit IV: Finite Element Method: Fundamentals, Constitutive finite element models for soils.
Unit V: Correlation and Regression Analysis: Correlation - Scatter diagram, Karl Pearson
coefficient of correlation, Limits of correlation coefficient; Regression –Lines of regression,
Regression curves, Regression coefficient, Differences between correlation and regression
analysis.
Unit VI: One-dimensional Consolidation - Theory of consolidation, Analytical procedures,
Finite difference solution procedure for multilayered systems, Finite element formulation
Unit VII: Flow Through Porous Media - Geotechnical aspects, Numerical methods,
Applications and Design analysis, Flow in jointed media.
Unit VIII: Risk assessment in Geotechnical Engg. - Probabilistic site characterisation and
design of foundations
References:
 S. Chandrakant., Desai and John T. Christian, “Numerical Methods in Geotechnical
Engineering”, Mc. Graw Hill Book Company, 1977.
 M.K. Jain, S.R.K. Iyengar and R.K. Jain, “Numerical Methods for Scientific and Engineering
computations”, Third edition, New Age International (P) Ltd. Publishers, New Delhi.
 D.J. Naylor and G.N. Pande, “Finite Elements in Geotechnical Engineering”, Pineridge
[ 54 ]
Press Ltd., UK.

 Sam Helwany, “Applied soil mechanics”, John Wiley & sons, Inc,
PE-III PHYSICAL AND CONSTITUTIVE MODELLING ON GEOMECHANICS

Teaching Scheme
COURSE OUTCOME
 Students can understand theory of plasticity and various yield criteria and flow rule.
 Students can apply critical state conceptto consolidation and triaxial soil behavior.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Role of constitutive modeling; Importance of laboratory testing with relation to

constitutive modeling; Elasticity: linear, quasi linear, anisotropic;
Unit II: Plasticity basics: yield criteria, flow rule, plastic potential, hardening/softening; Rate
Independent Plasticity: mohr-coulomb, nonlinear failure criteria, Drucker Prager, and cap models;
Unit III: Critical state soil mechanics: critical state concept, cam clay models, simulation of
single element test using cam clay,
Unit IV: Consolidation, drained and undrained triaxial test; Stress dilatancy theory;
Unit V: Work hardening plasticity theory: formulation and implementation; Applications of
elasto-plastic models; Special Topics: hypoelasticity-plasticity, disturbed state concept.
References:
 Hicher and Shao, “Constitutive Modeling of Soils and Rocks”, John Wiley. 2008
 C.S. Desai and H. J. Siriwardane, “Constitutive Laws for Engineering Materials with
Emphasis on Geologic Materials”, Prentice-Hall, Inc., New Jersey. 1984
 David M Potts and LidijaZdravkovic, “Finite Element Analysis in Geotechnical
Engineering Theory and Application”, Thomas Telford. 1999
 C.S. Desai, “Mechanics of Materials and Interfaces: The Disturbed State Concept”, CRC
Press LLC. 2000
 A.P.S. Selvadurai, M.J. Boulon, “Mechanics of Geomaterial Interfaces, Elsevier.
PE-V DESIGN OF UNDERGROUND EXCAVATIONS

Teaching Scheme
COURSE OUTCOME
 Students can understand the use of elastic and plastic analysis in the design of underground
support system.
 Students will have idea about the field tests generally conducted during and after
construction of under structures.
[ 55 ]
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Introduction, planning of and exploration for various underground construction projects,
stereographic projection method, principle and its application in underground excavation design.
Unit II: Elastic stress distribution around tunnels, stress distribution for different shapes and under
different in-situ stress conditions, Greenspan method, design principles, multiple openings,
openings in laminated rocks, elasto-plastic analysis of tunnels, Daemen’s theory
Unit IIII: Application of rock mass classification systems, ground conditions in tunneling,
analysis of underground openings in squeezing and swelling ground, empirical methods,
estimation of elastic modulus and modulus of deformation of rocks; uniaxial jacking / plate
jacking tests, radial jacking and Goodman jacking tests, long term behaviour of tunnels and
caverns, New Austrian Tunneling Method (NATM), Norwegian Tunneling Method (NTM),
construction dewatering.
Unit IV: Rock mass-tunnel support interaction analysis, ground response and support reaction
curves, Ladanyi’selasto-plastic analysis of tunnels, design of various support systems including
concrete and shotcrete linings, steel sets, rock bolting and rock anchoring, combined support
systems, estimation of load carrying capacity of rock bolts
Unit V: In-situ stress, flat jack, hydraulic fracturing and over coring techniques and USBM type
drill hole deformation gauge, single and multi-point bore hole extensometers, load cells, pressure
cells, etc. Instrumentation and monitoring of underground excavations, during and after
construction, various case studies
References:
Hoek, E and and Brown, E. T.,” Underground Excavations in Rocks”, Institute of Mining
Engineering.
Obert, L. and Duvall, W.I., “Rock Mechanics and Design of Structures in Rocks”, John Wiley.
Singh, B. and Goel, R.K.,”Rock Mass Classification- A Practical Engineering Approach”,
Elsevier.
Singh, B. and Goel, R.K., “Tunnelling in Weak Rocks”, Elsevier
PE- IV EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURES

Teaching Scheme
COURSE OUTCOME
 The students will be able to do analysis and design of different types of retaining
strcuctures
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Earth Pressure: Rankine and Coulomb theories, active, passive and pressure at rest;
concentrated surcharge above the back fill, earth pressure due to uniform surcharge, earth pressure
of stratified backfills, saturated and partially saturated backfill.
Unit II: Retaining walls:Proportioning of retaining walls, stability of retaining walls,
[ 56 ]
mechanically stabilized retaining walls/reinforced earth retaining walls
Unit III: Sheet Pile wall: free earth system, fixed earth system
Unit IV: Bulkheads: bulkheads with free and fixed earth supports, equivalent beam method,
Anchorage of bulkheads and resistance of anchor walls, spacing between bulkheads and anchor
walls, resistance of anchor plates
Unit V: Tunnel and Conduit: Stress distribution around tunnels, Types of conduits, Load on
projecting conduits; Arching and Open Cuts: Arching in soils,
Unit VI: Braced excavations: Earth pressure against bracings in cuts, Heave of the bottom of cut
in soft clays
References:
 Das, Braja M., “Principles of Foundation Engineering”, PWS Publishing. 1998
 Bowles. J.E., Foundation Analysis and Design, Tata McGraw-Hill International Edition,
5th Edn, 1997.
PE-IV ENGINEERING ROCK MECHANICS

Teaching Scheme
COURSE OUTCOME
The students will be able to perform various laboratory tests on rock and classify rock mass. Be
able to predict strength of rock mass with respect to various Civil Engineering applications
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Rock: Formation of rocks, Physical properties, Classification of rocks and rock masses,
Elastic constants of rock; Insitu stresses in rock
Unit II: Rock Testing: Laboratory and Field tests
Unit III: Discontinuities in Rock Masses: Discontinuity orientation, Effect of discontinuities on
strength of rock ;
Unit IV: Strength Behaviour: Compression, Tension and Shear, Stress-Strain relationships,
Rheological behavior ;
Unit V: Strength/ Failure Criterion: Mohr-Coulomb, Griffith theory, Hoek and Brown, strength
and other strength criteria. Stresses in rock near underground openings;
Unit VI: Application of rock mechanics in Civil Engineering: Rock tunneling, rock slope
stability, bolting, blasting, grouting and rock foundation design. Modern modelling techniques &
analyses in rocks.
References:
 Hudson J.A. and J.P. Harrison. Engineering Rock Mechanics: an Introduction to the
[ 57 ]
Principles, 1997. Elsevier, Oxford

 Goodman, R.E. Introduction to Rock Mechanics, John Wiley & Sons.
 Ramamurthy, T., “Engineering in Rocks”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.
 Jaeger, J.C. and Cook, N.G.W, Fundamentals of Rock Mechanics, Chapman and Hall,
1976.
 Wyllie, D.C., Foundations on Rock, E & FN Spon. 2nd Edition, 1992.
STABILITY ANALYSIS OF SLOPES

Teaching Scheme
COURSE OUTCOME
 Student will be able to check the stability of earthen dams, and the safety measures to be
undertaken to prevent the instability of slopes, earthen dams and embankments
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Slopes: Types and causes of slope failures, mechanics of slope failure, failure modes.
Unit II: Stability analysis: infinite and finite slopes with or without water pressures; concept of
factor of safety, pore pressure coefficients, Mass analysis, Wedge methods, friction circle method ;
Method of slices, Bishop’s method, Janbu’s method, Morgenstern and Price, Spencer’s method
Unit III: Stability analysis in the presence of seepage: two dimensional flow – Laplace equation
and it’s solution, graphical method, determination of phreatic line, flow nets in homogeneous and
zoned earth dams under steady seepage and draw-down conditions, seepage control in earth dams,
influence of seepage on slope stability stability analysis of dam body during steady seepage
Unit IV: Strengthening measures: stabilization of slopes by drainage methods, surface and
subsurface drainage, use of synthetic filters, retaining walls, stabilization and strengthening of
slopes, shotcreting, rock bolting and rock anchoring, instrumentation and monitoring of slopes,
slope movements, warning devices, maintenance of slopes
References:
 Chowdhary R and ChowdharyI , ”Geotechnical Slope Analysis”, CRC Press.
 Harr M.E.,” Ground Water and Seepage”, McGraw Hill. 1962
FOUNDATIONS ON WEAK ROCKS

Teaching Scheme
COURSE OUTCOME
The students will be able to classify different types of rock mass and design different types of
foundations placed over rock mass.
[ 58 ]
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Engineering properties of weak rocks, different rock mass classification systems, relative
merits and demerits
Unit II: Failure criteria for weak rocks, bi-linear Mohr-Coulomb failure criterion, Hoek and
Brown criterion and modified Hoek and Brown failure criterion etc.
Unit III: Effect of structural planes on rock foundations, possible modes of failure of foundations
on rocks/ rock masses, determination of in-situ shear strength of rocks and rock masses
Unit IV: Requirements for satisfactory performance of foundations, bearing capacity of
foundations on rocks and rock masses, allowable bearing pressure of rock foundations using a
nonlinear failure criterion, monotonic and cyclic plate load tests
Unit V: Pressure-settlement characteristics, effect of layering, anisotropy, heterogeneity andin-
elasticity
Unit VI: Shallow foundations, shallow foundations on sloping ground, raft foundations, stilt
foundations, foundations for suspension bridges, transmission line towers, framed buildings etc,
treatment of foundations - open joints, solution cavities, weak seams
Unit VII: Piles in weak rocks, bearing capacity and settlement of piles, piles in stratified rock
masses, field load tests on piles in weak rocks, behaviour of bored / driven piles in soft /
weathered rocks
References:
 Wyllie Duncan C.,” Foundations on Rock: Engineering Practice”, E&FN Spon, Taylor and
Francis.
 Hudson J.A. and J.P. Harrison. Engineering Rock Mechanics: an Introduction to the
Principles, 1997. Elsevier, Oxford
 Singh, B. and Goel, R.K.,”Rock Mass Classification- A Practical Engineering Approach”,
Elsevier .
 Ramamurthy, T., “Engineering in Rocks”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.
 Hoek, E., “Practical Rock Engineering”, Rock science.
GEOTECHNICAL EARTHQUAKE ENGINEERING

Teaching Scheme
COURSE OUTCOME
 Students will know the causes and quantification of earthquake.
 Student will be exposed to the effect of earthquake and the design criterions to be followed
for the design different geotechnical structures
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Earthquake seismology – Causes of earthquake, Plate tectonics, Earthquake fault

sources,Seismic waves, Elastic rebound theory, Quantification of earthquake, Intensity and
magnitudes, Earthquake source models.
[ 59 ]
Unit II: Earthquake ground motion – Seismograph, Characteristics of ground motion, Effect of
localsite conditions on ground motions, Design earthquake, Design spectra, Development of
sitespecification and code-based design.
Unit III: Ground response analysis – One-dimensional ground response analysis: Linear
approaches,Equivalent linear approximation of non-linear approaches, Computer code “SHAKE”.
Unit IV: Liquefaction and lateral spreading - Liquefaction related phenomena,
Liquefactionsusceptibility: Historical, Geological, Compositional and State criteria. Evaluation
ofliquefaction by cyclic stress and cyclic strain approaches, Lateral deformation and spreading,
Criteria for mapping liquefaction hazard zones.
Unit V: Seismic design of foundations, Seismic slope stability analysis: Internal stability and
weakening instability and Seismic design of retaining walls.
References:
 Steven Kramer, “Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering”, Pearson,2008.
 Seco e Pinto, P., Seismic behaviour of ground and Geotechnical structure, A. A.
 Naeim, F., The Seismic Design Handbook, Kluwer Academic Publication, 2ndEdition, 2001.
 Ferrito, J.M, Seismic design criteria for soil liquefaction, Tech. Report of NavalFacilities
service centre, Port Hueneme, 1997.
Lab-I (Soil Mechanics-I)

Lab: 3hrs/week
List of Practicals:
1. Determination of Moisture Content and Specific gravity of soil
2. Grain Size Distribution Analysis and Hydrometer Analysis
3. Atterberg Limits (Liquid Limit, Plastic limit, Shrinkage limit)
4. Visual Classification Tests
5. Vibration test for relative density of sand
6. Standard and modified proctor compaction test
7. Falling head permeability test and Constant head permeability test
8. Consolidation test
Lab-II (Soil Mechanics-II)
Lab: 3hrs/week
List of Practicals:
1. Unconfined compression test
2. Direct shear test
3. Tri-axial compression test – UU, CU, CD tests
4. Laboratory vane shear test
5. Field Vane shear test
6. Field direct shear test
Lab-III (Sub soil exploration)
Lab: 3hrs/week
[ 60 ]
List of Practicals:
1. Exploratory borings by different methods including auger boring, wash boring, percussion
drilling and rotary drilling.
4. Standard penetration test
5. Dynamic cone penetration test
6. Static cone penetration test
7. Plate load test
8. Pressure meter test
9. Geophysical exploration tests
Lab-IV(Soil dynamics)
Lab: 3hrs/week
List of Practicals:
1. Spectral analysis of surface waves (SASW) Test / Multi-channel analysis of surface waves
(MASW)test
2. Seismic cross-hole test
3. Seismic down-hole / up-hole test
4. Seismic dilatometer test
5. Resonant column test
6. Piezoelectric bender element test
7. Cyclic triaxialtest
8. Cyclic direct shear test
OPEN ELECTIVES
Business Analytics
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
Course Code
Credits
Prerequisites
Course objective

2. Analyze data using statistical and data mining techniques and understand relationships
between the underlying business processes of an organization.
3. To gain an understanding of how managers use business analytics to formulate and solve
business problems and to support managerial decision making.
[ 61 ]

LECTURE WITH BREAKUP NO. OF LECTURES
Unit1:
Business analytics: Overview of Business analytics, Scope of Business

analytics, Business Analytics Process, Relationship of Business
Analytics Process and organisation, competitive advantages of Business
Analytics. 9
Statistical Tools: Statistical Notation, Descriptive Statistical methods,
Review of probability distribution and data modelling, sampling and
estimation methods overview.
Unit 2:
Trendiness and Regression Analysis: Modelling Relationships and

Trends in Data, simple Linear Regression.
Important Resources, Business Analytics Personnel, Data and models for

8
Business analytics, problem solving, Visualizing and Exploring Data,
Business Analytics Technology.
Unit 3:
Organization Structures of Business analytics, Team management,

Management Issues, Designing Information Policy, Outsourcing,
Ensuring Data Quality, Measuring contribution of Business analytics,
Managing Changes. 9
Descriptive Analytics, predictive analytics, predicative Modelling,
Predictive analytics analysis, Data Mining, Data Mining Methodologies,
Prescriptive analytics and its step in the business analytics Process,
Prescriptive Modelling, nonlinear Optimization.
Unit 4:
Forecasting Techniques: Qualitative and Judgmental Forecasting,

Statistical Forecasting Models, Forecasting Models for Stationary Time
Series, Forecasting Models for Time Series with a Linear Trend,
Forecasting Time Series with Seasonality, Regression Forecasting with 10
Casual Variables, Selecting Appropriate Forecasting Models.
[ 62 ]
Monte Carlo Simulation and Risk Analysis: Monte Carle Simulation

Using Analytic Solver Platform, New-Product Development Model,
Newsvendor Model, Overbooking Model, Cash Budget Model.
Unit 5:
Decision Analysis: Formulating Decision Problems, Decision Strategies 8

with the without Outcome Probabilities, Decision Trees, The Value of
Information, Utility and Decision Making.
Unit 6:
Recent Trends in : Embedded and collaborative business intelligence, 4

Visual data recovery, Data Storytelling and Data journalism.
COURSE OUTCOMES

2. Students will demonstrate the ability of think critically in making decisions based on data
and deep analytics.
3. Students will demonstrate the ability to use technical skills in predicative and prescriptive
modeling to support business decision-making.
Reference:
OPEN ELECTIVES
Industrial Safety
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week

[ 63 ]
Reference:
OPEN ELECTIVES
Operations Research
Teaching Scheme
_________________________________________________________________________________
[ 64 ]
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:
Unit 2
Unit 3:
problem - CPM/PERT
Unit 4
Unit 5
References:
Open Elective
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
[ 65 ]
References:
Open Elective
Composite Materials
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week

performance.

[ 66 ]
TEXT BOOKS:
Germany.
References:
Tasi.
Open Elective
Waste to Energy
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
[ 67 ]
References:
2. Biogas Technology - A Practical Hand Book - Khandelwal, K. C. and Mahdi, S. S., Vol. I &
II, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., 1983.
Sons, 1996.

Course objectives:
Syllabus
1 Planning and Preparation, Word Order, Breaking up long 4
sentences, Structuring Paragraphs and Sentences, Being Concise
and Removing Redundancy, Avoiding Ambiguity and Vagueness
2 Clarifying Who Did What, Highlighting Your Findings, Hedging 4
and Criticising, Paraphrasing and Plagiarism, Sections of a Paper,
Abstracts. Introduction
3 Review of the Literature, Methods, Results, Discussion, 4
Conclusions, The Final Check.
4 key skills are needed when writing a Title, key skills are needed 4
when writing an Abstract, key skills are needed when writing an
Introduction, skills needed when writing a Review of the Literature,
5 skills are needed when writing the Methods, skills needed when 4
writing the Results, skills are needed when writing the Discussion,
skills are needed when writing the Conclusions
6 useful phrases, how to ensure paper is as good as it could possibly 4
be the first- time submission
[ 68 ]
Suggested Studies:
3. Highman N (1998), Handbook of Writing for the Mathematical Sciences, SIAM.
Highman’sbook .

2. critically evaluate disaster risk reduction and humanitarian response policy and practice from
multiple perspectives.

they work in
Syllabus
1 Introduction 4
Disaster: Definition, Factors And Significance; Difference Between
Hazard And Disaster; Natural And Manmade Disasters: Difference,
Nature, Types And Magnitude.
2 Repercussions Of Disasters And Hazards: Economic Damage, Loss 4
Of Human And Animal Life, Destruction Of Ecosystem.
Natural Disasters: Earthquakes, Volcanisms, Cyclones, Tsunamis,
Floods, Droughts And Famines, Landslides And Avalanches, Man-
made disaster: Nuclear Reactor Meltdown, Industrial Accidents, Oil
Slicks And Spills, Outbreaks Of Disease And Epidemics, War And
Conflicts.
Study Of Seismic Zones; Areas Prone To Floods And Droughts,
Landslides And Avalanches; Areas Prone To Cyclonic And Coastal
Hazards With Special Reference To Tsunami; Post-Disaster Diseases
And Epidemics
Preparedness: Monitoring Of Phenomena Triggering A Disaster Or
Hazard; Evaluation Of Risk: Application Of Remote Sensing, Data
[ 69 ]
From Meteorological And Other Agencies, Media Reports:

Governmental And Community Preparedness.
5 Risk Assessment 4
Disaster Risk: Concept And Elements, Disaster Risk Reduction, Global
And National Disaster Risk Situation. Techniques Of Risk Assessment,
Global Co-Operation In Risk Assessment And Warning, People’s
Participation In Risk Assessment. Strategies for Survival.
Meaning, Concept And Strategies Of Disaster Mitigation, Emerging
Trends In Mitigation. Structural Mitigation And Non-Structural
Mitigation, Programs Of Disaster Mitigation In India.
SUGGESTED READINGS:
Royal book Company.
2. Sahni, PardeepEt.Al. (Eds.),” Disaster Mitigation Experiences And Reflections”, Prentice Hall Of
India, New Delhi.
Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours
2  Order 8
[ 70 ]
Suggested reading
2. “Teach Yourself Sanskrit” Prathama Deeksha-VempatiKutumbshastri, Rashtriya Sanskrit
Course Output
Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours

[ 71 ]

Suggested reading
Press, New Delhi
Course outcomes
Course Objectives:
perspective.
Syllabus
Units Content Hours
1 History 4
2 Preamble 4
Salient Features
3  Right to Equality 4
[ 72 ]

 Parliament
 Composition

4  Executive 4
 President
 Governor
 District’s Administration head: Role and Importance,
 Municipalities: Introduction, Mayor and role of Elected Representative, CEO
of Municipal Corporation.
5  Pachayati raj: Introduction, PRI: ZilaPachayat. 4
 Elected officials and their roles, CEO ZilaPachayat: Position and role.


Suggested reading
Course Outcomes:

[ 73 ]
Course Objectives:
Syllabus
Units Content Hours
terminology
1 4
 Thematic overview: Pedagogical practices are being used by teachers in
2 formal and informal classrooms in developing countries. 2
3 4
 Strength and nature of the body of evidence for effective pedagogical practices.
 Professional development: alignment with classroom practices and follow-up
support
 Peer support
4 4
 Research design
 Contexts
5 2
 Pedagogy
[ 74 ]
Dissemination and research impact.

Suggested reading
245-261.
Course Outcomes:


Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours

Suggested reading
1. ‘Yogic Asanas for Group Tarining-Part-I” :Janardan Swami Yogabhyasi Mandal, Nagpur
2. “Rajayoga or conquering the Internal Nature” by Swami Vivekananda, AdvaitaAshrama
[ 75 ]
Course Outcomes:
AUDIT 1 and 2: PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT THROUGH LIFE

ENLIGHTENMENT SKILLS
Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours
 Verses- 71,73,75,78 (do’s)
 Shrimad BhagwadGeeta : Chapter 2-Verses 41, 47,48,
 Chapter 3-Verses 13, 21, 27, 35, Chapter 6-Verses 5,13,17, 23, 35,
 Shrimad BhagwadGeeta: Chapter2-Verses 56, 62, 68
 Chapter 12 -Verses 13, 14, 15, 16,17, 18
 Personality of Role model. Shrimad BhagwadGeeta:
Suggested reading
1. “Srimad Bhagavad Gita” by Swami SwarupanandaAdvaita Ashram (Publication
Course Outcomes
[ 76 ]
M. Tech (Civil Engineering)
Model Curriculum Structure
Specialization: HYDRAULIC ENGINEERING
PROGRAM OBJECTIVES
1. To learn the principles, processes and design of pressurized and free surface system.
2. To achieve competency in the pipe network design, analysis of channel networks, pressure rise in
pipes due to sudden closure of valves, etc.
3. To assess the impact of climate change detection, Land use/Land cover changes on water
availability
4. Efficient use of water in irrigation under varying climate change.
5. Impact of climate change on glaciers, consumptive use of surface and ground water, and
optimum allocation of water.
6. Evaluation of various hydrologic processes including flow forecasting and the related practical
applications.
Semester I

Course Name Credits
1. Core-I Advanced Hydrology 3 -- 0 3
2. Core-II Advanced Fluid Mechanics 3 0 3
(1) Fluvial Hydraulics

Prog. (2) Hydraulic Structures
3. 3 -- -- 3
Elective-I (3) Systems Engineering
Prog. (1) Water Resources Systems Planning

4. (2) Irrigation and Drainage 3 -- -- 3
Elective-II
5 Lab 1 Fluid Mechanics 4 2
6 Lab 2 Hydrology 4 2
7. Core Research Methodology and IPR 2 -- -- 2
8. Audit 1 Audit course 1 2 0
Total 16 8 18
[ 77 ]
Semester II

Course Name Credits
No. Code/Type L T P
1. Core-III 3 0 0 3
Ground Water Engineering
2. Core-IV 3 0 0 3
Free Surface Flows
Prog.
(1) Computational Methods in Fluid Mechanics 3 -- -- 3
3. Elective-III
(2) Theory and Applications of GIS
Prog.
(1) Environmental Hydraulics 3 3
4. Elective-IV
(2) Advanced Numerical Analysis
Lab 1 Computational Fluid Dynamics 4 2
Lab 2 Open Channel Flow 4 2
5. Core Mini-Project -- -- 4 2
6. Audit 2 Audit -2 2 0
Total 14 0 12 18
Semester III

Course Name Credits
No. Code L T P
Programme- Computer Methods in Hydraulics and Hydrology

1. 3 - - 3
Elective-V Stochastic Hydrology
Programme 3. Operations Research
2. 3 - - 3
Elective-VI 4. Cost Management of Engineering Projects
6. Waste to Energy
3. Dissertation Dissertation Phase – I -- -- 20 10
Total 6 20 16
Semester-IV
Sr. Course
Course Name Teaching Scheme Credits
No. Code
1. Dissertation Dissertation Phase - II -- -- 32 16
[ 78 ]
Total -- -- -- 16
Audit course 1 & 2
4. Value Education
6. Pedagogy Studies
Core-I ADVANCED HYDROLOGY

Teaching Scheme:
COURSE OUTCOME
 To develop basic tools for analysis of hydrologic processes
 To apply time series models for hydrologic data generation and forecasting.
 To be familiar with the hydrologic design concepts and methods including estimation of
the design flows
 To assess impact of climate change and Land use/Land cover on water availability
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Introduction: Hydrologic system and hydrologic budget, fundamental laws of hydrology;
atmospheric water vapor.
Unit II: Hydrologic Inputs: Precipitation and its forms, snowfall and rainfall; measurement
techniques and space-time characteristics
Unit III: Hydrologic Abstractions: Infiltration, depression storage, evapotranspiration;
measurement techniques, space time characteristics and their modelling.
Unit IV: Stream flow: Measurement techniques, space-time characteristics, rating curves
System Approach: Unit Hydrograph IUH, GIUH
Unit V: Mathematical Modelling: Linear and Nonlinear models, Physically based models
Unit VI: Hydrological routing, Flood forecasting
Unit VII: Advanced Method of Frequency Analysis: Outliers, Time series analysis.
Unit VIII: Impact of climate change and Land use/Land cover on basin response
References:
 Chow, V.T., Maidment, D.R. and Mays, W.L., "Applied Hydrology", McGraw Hill. 1988
[ 79 ]
 Ojha, C.S.P., Berndtsson, R. and Bhunya, P., “Engineering Hydrology”, Oxford University
Press. 2008
 Wanielista, M., Kersten, R. and Eaglin, R., “Hydrology”, John Wiley. 1997
Core-II ADVANCED FLUID MECHANICS

Teaching Scheme:
COURSE OUTCOME
 To have mathematical and physical background to analyse real life problems in fluid mechanics.
 To possess skills to take up research activities involving fluid motions.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Kinematics of Flow: Equation of continuity in cartesian, polar and cylindrical coordinates,
Unit II: Standard 2D Flow Patterns: Source, sink, doublet and their combinations, construction of flows by
superposition, D’Alembert’s paradox
Unit III: Laplace Equation: Solution by graphical and relaxation methods, conformal mapping, solution by
separation of variables
Unit IV: Laminar Flow: Derivation of Navier-Stokes equations – exact solutions for flow between parallel
plates, Couette flow, flow near a suddenly accelerated plate and an oscillating plate.
Unit V: Boundary Layers: Similarity solutions of boundary layer equations, Falkner-Skan Wedge flows,
Karman’s momentum integral equations, Karman-Puhlhausen approximate solution, separation in boundary
layer under adverse pressure gradient, turbulent boundary layer.
Unit VI: Turbulent Flows: Reynolds equations of motion, semi-empirical theories of turbulence, velocity
profiles for inner, outer and overlap layers, equilibrium boundary layers.
Unit VII: Measurement of Turbulence and Statistical Theory of Turbulence: Isotropic and homogeneous
turbulence, probability density functions, correlation coefficients, decay of isotropic turbulence.
References:
 White, F.M., "Fluid Mechanics", McGraw-Hill. 1979
 Schlichting, H., "Boundary Layer Theory", McGraw-Hill. 1979
 Garde, R.J., "Turbulent Flow", Wiley Eastern Limited. 1994
 Pope, S. B., "Turbulent Flows", Cambridge University Press. 2000
 Rouse, H., "Advanced Mechanics of Fluids", John Wiley and Sons. 1959
 Ojha, C.S.P., Berndtsson, R. and Chandaramouli, P.N., “Fluid Mechanics”, Oxford University
Press. 2010
Core-IV FREE SURFACE FLOWS
[ 80 ]
Teaching Scheme:
COURSE OUTCOME
 Analysis of flows in channel networks.

 Flow measurement in rivers/channels.
 Dam break analysis
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Introduction: Free surface flows, velocity distribution, resistance relationships, specific
energy and specific force, normal and critical depths computations, governing equation and
computation of gradually varied flows.
Unit II: Hydraulic Jump: Elements of hydraulic jump, hydraulic jump in variety of situations
including contracting and expanding geometries and rise in floor levels, control of hydraulic jump
using baffle walls and cross jets.
Unit III: Supercritical Flows: Flow past deflecting boundaries, oblique shock waves.
Spatially Varied Flows: Flows past side weirs, De Marchi equations, design of side weirs, flow
past bottom racks, trench weirs and waste water gutters.
Unit IV: Aerated Flows: Bulking of flow, mechanism of air entrainments, modelling of aerated
flows, development of self-aerated flows, uniform aerated region, aeration over spillway.
Stratified Flows: Thermal stratification in water bodies including reservoirs, modelling of
stratified flows.
Unit V: Unsteady Flows: St. Venant’s equations and their solution using method of characteristics
and finite difference schemes; dam break problem, hydraulic flood routing.
Channel Transitions: Sub-critical and supercritical.
References:
 Chow, V.T., “Open Channel Hydraulics”, McGraw Hill. 1959
 Choudhary, M.H., "Open-Channel Flows", Prentice-Hall. 1994
 Ranga Raju, K.G., “Flow Through Open Channels, Tata McGraw Hill. 2003
 Chanson, H., “The Hydraulics of Open Channel Flow: An Introduction”, Elsevier. 2004
 French, R.H., "Open-Channel Hydraulics", McGraw-Hill. 1994
 Wood, I.R., “Air entrainment in free-surface flows”, A.A. balkema. 1991
[ 81 ]
MODELING, SIMULATION AND OPTIMIZATION

Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Systems and Models: Fundamentals of systematic approach, system modelling,

classification of models, model structure, Linear, non-linear, time-invariant, time variant models,
State-space models, Distributed parameter models, System synthesis, Direct and inverse problems,
Role of optimization, Role of computers, examples from hydrology/water resources engineering
Unit II: Regression Analysis: Linear and Multiple Regression analysis, analysis of residues, tests
of goodness of fit, Parsimony criterion, role of historical data, examples from hydrology/ water
resources engineering
Unit III: Spatial Distribution: Polynomial surfaces, Kringing, Spline functions, Cluster Analysis
Unit IV: Time Series Analysis: Auto-cross correlation analysis, identification of trend, spectral
analysis, identification of dominant cycles, smoothening techniques, Filters, time series of rainfall
and stream flow.
Unit V: Random Variables: Basic concepts, probability density distribution functions, Expectation
and standard deviation of discrete and continuous random variables and their functions, covariance
and correlation, commonly used theoretical probability distributions (uniform, normal, binomial,
poisons and negative exponential), Fitting distribution to raw data, Chi-square and Kolmogrov-
Smirnov;s tests of the goodness of fit, Central Limit theorm, various algorithms for generation of
random numbers.
Unit VI: Monte Carlo Simulations: Basic concepts, generation of synthetic observations, statistical
interpretation of output, Evaluation of definite integrals.
Unit VII: Optimization: Introduction, Classical methods, Linear Programming, Dynamic
Programming, Non-linear optimization, Constrained optimization techniques
[ 82 ]
References:
 Ljung, L., "System Identification Theory for the Users", Prentice Hall. 1999
 Daniel, C. and Wood, P.S., "Fitting Equations to Data", John Wiley Interscience. 1980
 Law, A.M. and Kelton, W.D., "Simulation Modeling and Analysis", Tata McGraw Hill. 2007
 Rao S. S., “Engineering Optimization, Theory and Practice”, New Age International
Publishers. 2012
 Deb, K., “Optimization for Engineering design”, Prentice Hall of India. 2006
 Vedula S. and Mujumdar P. P. “Water Resources Systems”, Tat McGraw Hill. 2005
Core-III GROUNDWATER ENGINEERING

Teaching Scheme:
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 The objective of this course is enable to the student to understand the basic empirical
knowledge of the residence and movement of groundwater, as well as a number of
quantitative aspects.
 At the end of the course, one should be able to evaluate the aquifer parameters and
groundwater level variations for different hydro-geological boundary conditions.
COURSE OUTCOME
 Students are able to understand aquifer properties and movement of ground water flow
after the completion of the course. It imparts exposure towards well design and practical
problems of ground water aquifers.
[ 83 ]
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Introduction: Definition of groundwater, role of groundwater in hydrological cycle,

groundwater bearing formations, classification of aquifers, flow and storage characteristics of
aquifers, Darcy’s law, anisotropy and heterogeneity.
Unit II: Governing Equations for Groundwater Flow: Dupuit-Forchheimer assumptions, general
differential equations governing groundwater flows, analytical solutions.
Unit III: Wells and Well Hydraulics: Different types of wells, construction of wells, steady and
unsteady state solutions for confined, unconfined and leaky aquifers, effect of boundaries, method
of images, pumping test analysis.
Unit IV: Groundwater Conservation: Regional groundwater budget; resource assessment;
estimation of recharge, Indian practice for artificial recharge
Unit V: Groundwater Quality: General problem of contamination of groundwater, sources,
remedial and preventive measures, seawater intrusion in coastal aquifers.
Unit VI: Groundwater Flow Modelling: Role of groundwater flow models, reference to hydraulic,
Hele-Shaw and analog models, introduction to numerical modeling.
Unit VII: Planning of Groundwater Development: constraints on the development, role of flow
models, optimal groundwater development.
References:
 Todd, D.K., "Groundwater Hydrology", John Wiley. 1959
 Bear, J., "Hydraulics of Groundwater", McGraw. 1979
 Bouwer, H., "Groundwater Hydrology", McGraw Hill. 1978
 Walton, W.C., "Groundwater Resources Evaluation", McGraw Hill. 1970
 Freeze and Cherry, "Groundwater", Prentice Hall. 1979
 Driscoll, F.G., "Ground Water and Wells", Johnson Division. 1986
 Raghunath, H. M., "Ground Water", New Age International (P) Limited. 2007
PE-I FLUVIAL HYDRAULICS

Teaching Scheme:
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 Application of principles of fluid mechanics to the solution of problems encountered in

both natural and constructed water systems.
 Use of model studies and computers in solving a host of problems in river engineering.
COURSE OUTCOME
 Exposure to resistance laws in mobile bed channels/rivers.

 Scour around bridge piers
 Design of river protection works
[ 84 ]
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: The sediment problems, properties of sediments, incipient motion of uniform and non-
uniform sediments.
Unit II: Bed forms and channel resistance.
Unit III: Bed load and suspended load transport for uniform and non-uniform bed material, total
load equations, sediment sampling.
Unit IV: Stable channel design and sediment control.
Unit V: Bed level variations, local scour, degradation, aggradation and reservoir sedimentation.
Unit VI: Physical and mathematical models.
Unit VII: Design of guide bunds and other river training banks.
References:
 Garde, R.J., “River Morphology”, New International Publishers. 2006
 Julien, P.Y., “Erosion and Sedimentation”, Cambridge University Press. 1998
 Jansen, P.P.H., “Principals of River Engineering”, VSSD Publications. 1994
 Garde, R.J. and Ranga Raju, K.G., "Mechanics of Sediment Transportation and Alluvial
Stream Problems", Wiley Eastern Limited. 2006
PE-IHYDRAULIC STRUCTURES
Teaching Scheme:
COURSE OUTCOME
 Analysis and design of various types of hydraulic structures
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Introduction: Hydraulic structures for water resources projects.

Unit II: Embankment Dams: Types, design considerations, seepage analysis and control, stability
analysis, construction techniques.
Unit III: Gravity Dams: Forces acting on failure of a gravity dam, stress analysis, elementary
profile, design of gravity dam, other functional features of a gravity dam.
Unit IV: Dam Outlet Works: Types of outlet structures, ogee spillway, chute spillway, siphon
spillway, side channel spillway, Labyrinth and Pianokey weir.
Unit V: Terminal Structures: Hydraulic jump types, stilling basin, roller bucket, ski jump basin,
baffled spillway, drop structure
Unit VI: Hydraulic Modeling: Basic principles, dimensional analysis, design of physical models
[ 85 ]
of hydraulic structures
References:
 Peterka, A.J, “Hydraulic Design of Stilling Basins and Energy Dissipators”, USBR
Engineering Monographs No. 25”. 1984
 Design of Small Dams", Third Edition, Water Resources Technical Publication – US
Bureau of Reclamation. 1987
 Singh, B., and Varshney, R.S., "Embankment Dam and Engineering", Nem Chand and
Brothers. 2004
 Novak, P. and Nalluri, C., “Hydraulic Structures”, Edition 4, Taylor & Francis. 2007
 Creager, Justin and Hinds, “Engineering for Dams”, Vol. I and II, John Wiley.
PE-ISYSTEMS ENGINEERING
Teaching Scheme:
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 Students will be introduced to application of systems concept to water resources planning

and management. Optimization technique for modeling water resources systems and
advanced optimization techniques to cover the socio-technical aspects will be taught.
COURSE OUTCOME
 At the completion of the course the students will be able to understand the system
behaviors and know how to apply the various simulation and optimization techniques to
achieve optimum utilisation of water resources
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Definitions and components of a system, system control, systems modelling and model
development.
Unit I: System synthesis. economic analysis, conflicts and role of optimization in their resolution.
Unit II: Unconstrained optimization – analytical and numerical.
Unit III: Constrained optimization – analytical and numerical.
Unit IV: Integer programming.
Unit V: Geometric programming.
Unit VI: Linear programming.
Unit VII: Dynamic programming.
Unit VIII: Stochastic programming.
[ 86 ]
References:
 Aguilera, R.J., "Systems Analysis and Design", Prentice Hall. 1973
 Ossenbruggen, P. J., "Systems Analysis for Civil Engineering", John Wiley. 1984
 de Neufrille, R., "Systems Analysis for Engineer" , McGraw Hill. 1971
 Rao, S.S., "Engineering Optimization – Theory and Practice", New Age International (P)
Ltd. 1999
 Hamdy, A.T., "Operations Research – An Introduction", Prentice Hall. 1997
PE-II WATER RESOURCES SYSTEMS PLANNING

Teaching Scheme:
COURSE OUTCOME
 Optimum utilsation of surface and subsurface water

 Rational allocation of reservoir water
 Exposure to various algorithms to solve linear as well as non-linear problems.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Introduction: Water resources planning process, multi-objective planning.

Unit II: Evaluation of Water Plans: Basic concepts of engineering economics, welfare economics,
economic comparison of alternatives.
Unit III: Water Plan Optimization: Plan formulation, objective functions and constraint, analytical
optimization, numerical optimization, linear programming, dynamic programming, simulation,
planning under uncertainty.
Unit IV: Deterministic River Basin Modeling: Stream flow modeling, estimation of reservoir
storage requirements – dead storage, active storage for water supply/ irrigation / power generation,
flood storage, optimal allocation.
Unit V: Conjunctive Use/Groundwater Management Models: LP based conjunctive use modeling,
aquifer response models, link - simulation, embedded, matrix response based models, soft
modeling.
Unit VI: Water Quality Management Models: Basic water quality modeling, objectives of
management, control alternatives, optimal plans.
[ 87 ]
References:
 Hall, W.A. and Dracup, J.A., "Water Resources Systems Engineering", McGraw Hill Book
Company. 1970
 Loucks, D.P., "Water Resource Systems Planning and Analysis", Prentice Hall. 1981
 Maass et al., "Design of Water-Resource Systems", Harvard University Press. 1962
 Vedula S. and Mujumdar, P.P., "Water Resources Systems", Tata McGraw Hill. 2005
PE-II IRRIGATION AND DRAINAGE

Teaching Scheme:
COURSE OUTCOME
 Assessment of crop water requirement

 Optimum scheduling of irrigation
 Management of salinity problems and leaching process.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Introduction, objectives of irrigation, type of irrigation and suitability; selection of

irrigation method.
Unit II: Irrigation requirement, water balance, soil water relationships, water storage zone,
infiltration.
Unit III: Flow of moisture through root zone, soil physical and chemical properties, crop
evaporative and drainage requirements, irrigation efficiency and uniformity.
Unit IV: Surface irrigation systems, types of surface systems, basin irrigation, border irrigation,
furrow irrigation, field measurement techniques, flow measurement, flumes, weirs, irrigation
events, advance, wetting, depletion and recession phases.
Unit V: Infiltration, infiltrometer, ponding methods, soil water, tensiometers, neutron probe, time
domain reflectometer, evapotranspiration, crop coefficient, leaf area index, FAO guide lines on
evapotranspiration estimation.
Unit VI: Fundamentals of surface irrigation hydraulics, continuity equation, momentum equation
Unit VII: Hydrodynamic model, zero inertia model, kinematic wave model.
Unit VIII: Drainage principles, need for drainage, steady state equations, Hooghoudt, Kirkham,
Dagan and Ernst equations.
[ 88 ]
Unit IX: Salt balance, water and salt balance of the root zone, salt equilibrium equation and
leaching requirement, leaching efficiency.
References:
Walker, W.R., and Skogerboe, G.V., "Surface Irrigation Theory and Practice", Prentice Hall, INC.
1987
•Drainage Principles and Applications, "International Institute for Land Reclamation and
Improvement", Wageningen. 1973
•Michael, A.M., "Irrigation: Theory and Practice", Vikas Publishing House. 1978
•Asawa, G.L., "Irrigation Engineering", New Age International Publishers. 1996
•Majumdar, D.K., “Irrigation Water Management”, PHI Learning. 2009
•Luthin, J.N., "Drainage Engineering", John Wiley. 1966
PE-III COMPUTATIONAL METHODS IN FLUID MECHANICS
Teaching Scheme:
COURSE OUTCOME
 To analyse flow field in a variety of practical situations without going for physical model
setup
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Review of numerical techniques like method of characteristics, finite difference method.
Unit II: Finite element method.
Unit III: Modelling of steady state flow and hydraulic transients in pipes.
Unit IV: Modelling of non-uniform, transient spatially varied flows in open channels.
Unit V: Numerical solutions for Navier-Stokes, boundary layer and Reynolds equations.
Unit VI: Modelling of groundwater flow and contaminant transport in groundwater.
References:
 Anderson, "Computational Fluid Mechanics and Heat Transfer", McGraw Hill. 1984
 Chung, T. J., "Finite Element Analysis in Fluid Dynamics", McGraw Hill. 1978
 Anderson, &Weessner, "Applied Groundwater Modelling", Academic Press. 1992
 Chaudhary, H. M., "Applied Hydraulic Transient", McGraw Hill. 1976
 Streeter and Wylie, "Fluid Transients", McGraw Hill. 1976
 Smith, G.D., "Numerical Solution of Partial Differential Equations-FDM". 1985
[ 89 ]
PE-III THEORY AND APPLICATIONS OF GIS

Teaching Scheme:
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To teach the principles and applications of remote sensing, GPS and GIS in the context of
water resources. At the end of the course, the student will appreciate the importance of
remote sensing and GIS in solving the spatial problems in water resources.
COURSE OUTCOME
 Introduce the technology and principles of Satellite Imaging

 Theoretical explanations on Image processing and information extraction from Satellite
Data Products
 Functional elucidation of GIS integrating Satellite Data Products into the GIS platform for
Decision making
 Potential of remote sensing and GIS is solving problems in water resources through case
studies.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Introduction, Geographical concepts and Terminology, Difference between Image

Processing system and GIS, Utility of GIS.
Unit II: Various GIS packages and their salient features, Essentials components of GIS, Data
acquisition through scanners and digitizers
Unit III: Raster and Vector Data: Introduction, Descriptions: Raster and Vector data, Raster
Versus Vector, Raster to Vector conversion, Remote Sensing Data in GIS, Topology and Spatial
Relationships, Data storage verification and editing
Unit IV: Data preprocessing, Georeferencing, Data compression and reduction techniques,
Runlength encoding, Interpolation of data, Database Construction, GIS and the GPS, Data Output
Database structure, Hierarchical data, Network systems, Relational database, Database
management, Data manipulation and analysis
Unit V: Spatial and mathematical operations in GIS, Overlay, Query based, Measurement and
statistical modelling, Buffers, Spatial Analysis, Statistical Reporting and Graphing
Unit VI: Programming languauges in GIS, Virtual GIS, Web GIS
Unit VII: Application of GIS to various natural resources mapping and monitoring and
engineering problems
References:
[ 90 ]
 Burrough, P.A. and Mc Donnel, R.A., “Principles of Geographic Information System”,

Oxford University Press. 2000
 Chrisman, Nicholas R., “Exploring Geographic Information Systems”, John Wiley. 2002
 Demers, Michael N., “Fundamentals of Geographic Information System”, 2nd Ed. Wiley.
2008
 Ghosh, S.K. and Chandra, A.M., “Remote Sensing and GIS”, Narosa Publishing House.
2008
 Lo, C.P. and Young, A.K.W., “Concepts and Techniques of Geographical Information
System”, Prentice Hall India. 2002
 Longley, Paul A, Goodchild, Michael F., Maguire, David J. and Rhind, David W.,
“Geographic Information Systems and Science”, Wiley. 2001
PE-IV ENVIRONMENTAL HYDRAULICS

Teaching Scheme:
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To apply the knowledge of fluid mechanics to analyze and predict mixing in natural
bodies of water.
 To study the hydrodynamic aspects of water quality management in natural bodies of
water.
COURSE OUTCOME
 The students will be able to gain a basic knowledge of advection-dispersion processes

in the environment.
 They will gain the skills to take up research activities in solving environmental
problems involving fluid motions.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Introduction and scope, review of basic principles of engineering fluid mechanics,
continuity, momentum, and energy equations, steady flow through pipes- hydraulic gradient
and total energy line, basics of open channel flow; Ground water, well hydraulics, well
design and constructions,
Unit II: Parallel, compound and equivalent pipes, head losses in pipes, design of pressurized
conduits,
Unit III: Various forms of mixing in the environment, modeling of the mixing process:
[ 91 ]
advection dispersion equation, Various forms of advection dispersion eq. and its solution.
Unit IV: Special cases of mixing, density stratified flow, tide, etc.
Unit V: Mass transfer in gas-liquid and liquid -liquid system with special emphasis on
aeration
Unit VI: Project presentation
References:
 Roberson, J.A., Cassidy, J.J., Chaudhry, M.H. “Hydraulic Engineering”, 2nd Edition,
Wiley. 1998
 Chadwick, A., Morfett, J., Borthwick, M. “Hydraulics in Civil and Environmental
Engineering”, 5th Edition, CRC Press. 2004
 Lee, C. C., Lin, S.D. “Handbook of Environmental Engineering Calculations”,
McGraw Hill. 2007
 Schnoor, J.L., Environmental Modeling: Fate of Chemicals in Water, Air and Soil,
John Wiley & Sons, New York. 1996
PE-V COMPUTER METHODS IN HYDRAULICS AND HYDROLOGY

Teaching Scheme:

COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To develop skills of the students in software usage for simulation of various hydrologic and
hydraulic processes
COURSE OUTCOME
 To be able to apply the computational knowledge in the field of water resources systems.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit I: Basic: Introduction to computer programming and computation with Matlab.

Unit II: Open channel flow: Estimation of normal and critical depth; uniform flow computations;
computation of water surface profile (WSP) - gradually varied flow estimation using standard step
and direct step methods, WSP in presence of hydraulic structures; unsteady flow - Saint-Venant
equation, kinematic wave routing, diffusion routing, overland flow; steady and unsteady modelling
using HEC-RAS.
Unit III: Groundwater hydrology: Solving groundwater flow equation - saturated and unsaturated
flow, Richards’ equation, Green-Ampt infiltration model; introduction to MODFLOW.
[ 92 ]
Unit IV: Surface water hydrology: Estimation of Unit hydrographs; lumped and distributed flow
routing; hydrologic statistics - parameter estimation, time series analysis, frequency analysis,
geostatistics; hydrologic modelling using HEC-HMS/SWAT.
Unit V: Closed conduit flow: Steady and unsteady state modeling; pipe network analysis;
introduction to EPANET.
Unit VI: Application of soft computing methods and GIS in Hydraulic and Hydrologic modeling.
References:
 Chow V.T., Maidment D.R. and Mays L.W. (1988), Applied Hydrology, McGraw-Hill.
1988
 Todd D.K. and Mays L.W. (2008), Groundwater Hydrology, 3rd Edition, John Wiley &
Sons. 2008
 Chaudhry M.H. (2007), Open-Channel Flow, 2nd Edition, Springer, 2007
 Pratap R. (2010), Getting started with Matlab, Oxford. 2010
 P.K. Swamee and Sharma A.K. (2008), Design of water supply pipe networks, John Wiley
& Sons. 2008

Teaching Scheme
Lectures: 1hrs/week
Course Outcomes:
 Understand that IPR protection provides an incentive to inventors for further research work
and investment in R & D, which leads to creation of new and better products, and in turn
brings about, economic growth and social benefits.
[ 93 ]
Syllabus Contents:
research problem.
IPR and IITs.
References:
 Ranjit Kumar, 2nd Edition, “Research Methodology: A Step by Step Guide for beginners”
Lab- I(Fluid Mechanics)
Lab: 4 hrs/week
List of Practicals:
1. To study the surface profile and the total head distribution in a forced vortex flow.
2. To study the flow behavior in a pipe bend and to calibrate the pipe bend (i.e., bend or
elbow meter) for discharge measurement.
[ 94 ]
3. To study the boundary layer velocity profile, and to determine the exponent in the power
law of velocity distribution, boundary layer thickness and displacement thickness.
4. To study the velocity distribution in a pipe flow and to estimate the energy and momentum
correction factors.
5. To study velocity distribution and Reynolds stresses in turbulent flow
Lab-II Hydrology
Lab: 4 hrs/week
List of Practicals:
1. Downloading and processing of remote sensing products

2. The hands on experiments in the image processing, GIS platforms
3. Georeferencing of toposheet and creating vector layers(MapInfo/ArcGIS)
4. Creation of attribute tables and layout preparation (MapInfo/ArcGIS)
5. Creation of Digital Elevation Model using Vertical Mapper.
6. GPS Survey and its data transformation into GIS environment.
7. Converting *.tab file to *.shp& vice versa using Universal Translator.
8. Use of D8 pointer algorithm for deriving flow direction, flow accumulation and
watersheddelineation.
Lab-IIIComputational Fluid Dynamics
Lab: 4 hrs/week
List of Practicals:
Exposure to software’s such as ANSYS, FLUENT, creation of Geometry, Mesh, description of

boundary condition and solution of flow problems in 1D, 2D and 3D. typical examples should
include flow around sphere, cylinders, bridge piers etc.
Lab-IV Open Channel Flow

Lab: 4 hrs/week
List of Practicals:
1. To calibrate a broad-crested weir and study the pressure distribution at the upstream end of
the weir.
2. To study the characteristics of a hydraulic jump.
3. To study the velocity distribution downstream of an expansion (with and without splitter
plates) in a channel.
4. To obtain pressure distribution over spillway profile
5. To study energy dissipation using baffle blocks
6. To study air entrainment in open channel flow
7. To study the velocity distribution in an open channel and to estimate the energy and
momentum correction factors.
OPEN ELECTIVES
Business Analytics
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
[ 95 ]
Course Code
Credits
Prerequisites
Course objective


LECTURES
Unit1:
probability distribution and data modelling, sampling and estimation methods
overview.
Unit 2:
Trendiness and Regression Analysis: Modelling Relationships and Trends in
[ 96 ]
Data, simple Linear Regression.

Important Resources, Business Analytics Personnel, Data and models for 8
Business analytics, problem solving, Visualizing and Exploring Data, Business
Analytics Technology.
Unit 3:
Organization Structures of Business analytics, Team management, Management
Issues, Designing Information Policy, Outsourcing, Ensuring Data Quality,
Measuring contribution of Business analytics, Managing Changes.
Descriptive Analytics, predictive analytics, predicative Modelling, Predictive 9

analytics analysis, Data Mining, Data Mining Methodologies, Prescriptive
analytics and its step in the business analytics Process, Prescriptive Modelling,
nonlinear Optimization.
Unit 4:
Forecasting Techniques: Qualitative and Judgmental Forecasting, Statistical
Forecasting Models, Forecasting Models for Stationary Time Series, Forecasting
Models for Time Series with a Linear Trend, Forecasting Time Series with
Seasonality, Regression Forecasting with Casual Variables, Selecting
Appropriate Forecasting Models. 10
Monte Carlo Simulation and Risk Analysis: Monte Carle Simulation Using
Analytic Solver Platform, New-Product Development Model, Newsvendor
Model, Overbooking Model, Cash Budget Model.
Unit 5:
Decision Analysis: Formulating Decision Problems, Decision Strategies with the 8
without Outcome Probabilities, Decision Trees, The Value of Information, Utility
and Decision Making.
Unit 6:
COURSE OUTCOMES

and deep analytics.
[ 97 ]
Reference:

OPEN ELECTIVES
Industrial Safety
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week

[ 98 ]

Reference:
OPEN ELECTIVES
Operations Research
Teaching Scheme
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:
Unit 2
Unit 3:
problem - CPM/PERT
Unit 4
Unit 5
References:
Open Elective
[ 99 ]
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week

References:
5. Ashish K. Bhattacharya, Principles & Practices of CostAccounting A. H. Wheeler publisher
Open Elective
Composite Materials
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week

performance.
[ 100 ]

TEXT BOOKS:
Germany.
References:
Tasi.
Open Elective
Waste to Energy
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
[ 101 ]
References:
Sons, 1996.

Course objectives:
Syllabus
Suggested Studies:
[ 102 ]
3. Highman N (1998), Handbook of Writing for the Mathematical Sciences, SIAM. Highman’s
book .

they work in
Syllabus
1 Introduction 4
Disaster; Natural And Manmade Disasters: Difference, Nature, Types And
Magnitude.
2 Repercussions Of Disasters And Hazards: Economic Damage, Loss Of 4
Human And Animal Life, Destruction Of Ecosystem.
Natural Disasters: Earthquakes, Volcanisms, Cyclones, Tsunamis, Floods,
Droughts And Famines, Landslides And Avalanches, Man-made disaster:
Nuclear Reactor Meltdown, Industrial Accidents, Oil Slicks And Spills,
Outbreaks Of Disease And Epidemics, War And Conflicts.
Avalanches; Areas Prone To Cyclonic And Coastal Hazards With Special
Reference To Tsunami; Post-Disaster Diseases And Epidemics
Evaluation Of Risk: Application Of Remote Sensing, Data From Meteorological
And Other Agencies, Media Reports: Governmental And Community
Preparedness.
5 Risk Assessment 4
Disaster Risk: Concept And Elements, Disaster Risk Reduction, Global And
National Disaster Risk Situation. Techniques Of Risk Assessment, Global Co-
Operation In Risk Assessment And Warning, People’s Participation In Risk
Assessment. Strategies for Survival.
Mitigation. Structural Mitigation And Non-Structural Mitigation, Programs Of
[ 103 ]
Disaster Mitigation In India.
SUGGESTED READINGS:
Royal book Company.
2. Sahni, Pardeep Et.Al. (Eds.),” Disaster Mitigation Experiences And Reflections”, Prentice Hall Of
India, New Delhi.
Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours
2  Order 8
Suggested reading
2. “Teach Yourself Sanskrit” Prathama Deeksha-Vempati Kutumbshastri, Rashtriya Sanskrit
Course Output
[ 104 ]
Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours

 Patriotism. Love for nature ,Discipline
 Equality,Nonviolence ,Humility, Role of Women.
Suggested reading
Press, New Delhi
Course outcomes
[ 105 ]

Course Objectives:
perspective.
Syllabus
Units Content Hours
1 History 4
2 Preamble 4
Salient Features
3 4
 Parliament
 Composition
4  Executive 4
 President
 Governor
5 4
 Pachayati raj: Introduction, PRI: Zila Pachayat.
 Elected officials and their roles, CEO Zila Pachayat: Position and role.
[ 106 ]

Suggested reading
Course Outcomes:

Course Objectives:
Syllabus
Units Content Hours
terminology
1 4
3  How can teacher education (curriculum and practicum) and the school 4
[ 107 ]

practices.
up support
 Peer support
4 4
 Research design
 Contexts
5  Pedagogy 2
[ 108 ]
Suggested reading
245-261.
Course Outcomes:


Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours

ii)Regularization of breathing techniques and its effects-
Types of pranayam
Suggested reading
1. ‘Yogic Asanas for Group Tarining-Part-I” : Janardan Swami Yogabhyasi Mandal, Nagpur
[ 109 ]
2. “Rajayoga or conquering the Internal Nature” by Swami Vivekananda, Advaita Ashrama

Course Outcomes:
AUDIT 1 and 2: PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT THROUGH

LIFE ENLIGHTENMENT SKILLS
Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours
 Verses- 71,73,75,78 (do’s)

 Shrimad Bhagwad Geeta : Chapter 2-Verses 41, 47,48,
23, 35,
 Shrimad Bhagwad Geeta: Chapter2-Verses 56, 62, 68
 Chapter 12 -Verses 13, 14, 15, 16,17, 18
 Personality of Role model. Shrimad Bhagwad Geeta:
Chapter2-Verses 17,Chapter 3-Verses 36,37,42,
Suggested reading
1. “Srimad Bhagavad Gita” by Swami Swarupananda Advaita Ashram (Publication
[ 110 ]
Course Outcomes
[ 111 ]
MODEL CURRICULUM
of
MECHANICAL

www.aicte-india.org
[ 112 ]
M. Tech. (Mechanical Engineering) Specialization: Design Engineering
Semester I
Sr. Course
Course Name
No. Type/Code
1. Core-I Advanced Stress Analysis
2. Core-II Advanced Vibrations and Acoustics
1. Advanced Machine Design

Programme Elective-I
3. 2. Design for Manufacturing and Assembly
*See Notes
3. Mathematical Methods in Engineering
Programme Elective- 1. Advanced Engineering Materials
4. II 2. Mechanics of Composite Materials
*See Notes 3. Analysis and Synthesis of Mechanisms
5. Core Lab-I
6. Core Lab-II
7. Core Research Methodology and IPR
8. Audit Audit Course - 1
Semester II
Sr. Course
Course Name
No. Code/Type
1.
Core-III Finite Element Method
2.
Core-IV Computer Aided Design
Programme Elective- 1. Tribology in Design
3.
III 2. Robotics
[ 113 ]
################################
*See Notes 3. Fracture Mechanics
Programme Elective- 1. Multi-body Dynamics

4. IV 2. Condition Based Monitoring
*See Notes 3. Optimization Techniques in Design
5. Core Lab-III
6. Core Lab-IV
7. Audit Audit -2
8. Mini-Project
Core
Semester III
Sr. Course
Course Name
No. Code
Programme-Elective-
1. Advanced Finite Element Method
1. V
2. Advanced Metallurgy
* See Notes
2. Open Elective
6. Waste to Energy
Semester IV
Sr. Course
Course Name
No. Code
Audit course 1 & 2

4. Value Education
6. Pedagogy Studies
[ 114 ]
Model Curriculum for PG Programme in M. Tech. Mechanical Engineering Specialization:
Thermal Engineering
L – Theory lecture, T – Tutorial; P – lab work: Numbers under teaching scheme indicate contact
clock hours
Curriculum Structure – Semester-wise
Semester I
Teaching Scheme
Sr. Course
Course Name Credits
No. Type/Code
L T P
1. Core-I Thermodynamics and Combustion 3 -- -- 3
2. Core-II Advanced Fluid Dynamics 3 -- -- 3
Programme 1. Nuclear Engineering

3. Elective-I 2. Energy Conservation and Management. 3 -- -- 3
*See Notes
Programme 1. Air Conditioning System Design
4. Elective-II 2. Gas Turbines 3 -- -- 3
*See Notes
5. Core Lab-I Thermal Engineering Lab Practice-I -- -- 4 2
6. Core Lab-II Thermal Engineering Lab Practice-II -- -- 4 2
8. Audit Audit Course - 1 2 -- -- 0
Total 16 -- 8 18
[ 115 ]
Semester II
Sr. Course Teaching Scheme Credits

Course Name
No. Code/Type
L T P
1. Advanced Heat Transfer
Core-III 3 -- -- 3
2.
Core-IV Steam Engineering 3 -- -- 3
Programme
1. Refrigeration and cryogenics
3. Elective-III 3 -- -- 3
2. Design of Heat Exchangers
*See Notes
Programme
1. Computational Fluid Dynamics
4. Elective-IV 3 -- -- 3
2. Modelling of IC Engines
*See Notes
5. Core Lab-III Thermal Engineering -III -- -- 4 2
6. Core Lab-IV Thermal Engineering-IV -- -- 4 2
7. Audit Audit- 2 2 -- -- 0
8. Mini-Project -- -- 4 2
Core
Total 14 -- 12 18
Semester III

Course Name Credits
No. Code
L T P
Programme- 1. Design of Solar and Wind System
1. Elective-V 2. Advanced Mathematical Methods in 3 -- -- 3
* See Notes Engineering
2. Open Elective 3. Operations Research 3 -- -- 3
6. Waste to Energy
Total 6 -- -- 16
[ 116 ]
Semester-IV
Course Name Credits
No. Code L T P
Total -- -- 32 16
*Notes:
1. List of programme electives is indicative. The University may decide this depending on
facilities and expertise available with them. But the number of courses under this list must be
as large as possible with minimum three being offered at beginning of any semester out of
which a student would choose any one.
2. Lab sessions may be conducted for core courses of individual semesters as shown in the
structure but marks of evaluation will be reported as consolidated under single head.
Contents of the courses listed in the structure are given on following pages
Audit course 1 & 2

4. Value Education
6. Pedagogy Studies
Thermodynamics and Combustion

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course:
1. Student will get Knowledge of exergy, basic laws governing energy conversion in multi-
component systems and application of chemical thermodynamics.
2. Student will be aware about advanced concepts in thermodynamics with emphasis on
thermodynamic relations, equilibrium and stability of multiphase multi-component
117
systems.
3. Student will be aware about the molecular basis of thermodynamics.
4. To present theoretical, semi-theoretical and empirical models for the prediction of

thermodynamic properties.
5. Student will be acquire the confidence in analyze the motion of combusting and non-
combusting fluids whilst accounting for variable specific heats, non-ideal gas properties,
chemical non-equilibrium and compressibility
6. Student should apply the fundamental principles of thermodynamics to non-ideal models
of numerous engineering devices
7. Student can use a systems approach to simplify a complex problem
Syllabus Contents:
 First law and State postulates, Second law and Entropy, Availability and Irreversibility,
Transient flow analysis
 Nonreactive Ideal-Gas Mixture, PvT Behavior of Real gases and Real Gas mixture
 Generalized Thermodynamic Relationship
 Combustion and Thermo-chemistry, Second law analysis of reacting mixture, Availability
analysis of reacting mixture,Chemical equilibrium
 Statistical thermodynamics, statistical interpretations of first and second law and Entropy,
 Third law of thermodynamics, Nerst heat theorem.
References:
1. Cengel, “Thermodynamics”, Tata McGraw Hill Co., New Delhi, 1980.

2. Howell and Dedcius, “Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics”, McGraw Hill Inc.,
U.S.A.
3. Van Wylen & Sonntag, “Thermodynamics”, John Wiley and Sons Inc., U.S.A.
4. Jones and Hawkings, “Engineering Thermodynamics”, John Wiley and Sons Inc., U.S.A,
2004.
5. Holman, “Thermodynamics”, McGraw Hill Inc., New York, 2002.
6. Faires V.M. and Simmag, “Thermodynamics”, Macmillan Publishing Co. Inc., U.S.A.
7. Rao Y.V.C., “Postulational and Statistical Thermodynamics”, Allied Publishers Inc, 1994.
Advanced Fluid Dynamics

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
1. The Students shall be able to understand and define the fluid flow problems along with
range of governing parameters
2. The student shall be eligible to take up the fluid flow problems of industrial base.
3. The students shall be able to devise the experiments in the field of fluid mechanics.
[ 118 ]
4. The Students shall be able understand the flow patterns and differentiate between the flow
regimes and its effects.
Syllabus Contents:
 Governing equations in Fluid Dynamics: Derivation of Continuity and Momentum

equations using integral and differential approach, dimensionless form of governing
equations, special forms of governing equations, integral quantities
 Exact Solutions of Navier-Stokes Equations: Fully developed flows, parallel flow in
straight channel, Couette flow, Creeping flows
 Potential Flow: Kelvin's theorem, Irrotational flow, Stream function-vorticity approach,
 Laminar Boundary layers: Boundary layer equations, flow over flat plate, Momentum
integral equation for boundary layer, approximate solution methodology for boundary
layer equations
 Turbulent Flow: Characteristics of turbulent flow, laminar turbulent transition, time mean
motion and fluctuations, derivation of governing equations for turbulent flow, shear stress
models, universal velocity distribution
 Experimental Techniques: Role of experiments in fluid, layout of fluid flow experiments,
sources of error in experiments, data analysis, design of experiments, review of probes and
transducers, Introduction to Hot wire Anemometry, Laser Doppler Velocimetry and
Particle Image Velocimetry
References:
1. Muralidhar and Biswas, Advanced Engineering Fluid Mechanics, , Alpha Science

International, 2005
2. Irwin Shames, Mechanics of Fluids, , McGraw Hill, 2003
3. Fox R.W., McDonald A.T , Introduction to Fluid Mechanics, John Wiley and Sons Inc,
1985
4. Pijush K. Kundu, Ira M Kohen and David R. Dawaling, Fluid Mechanics, Fifth Edition,
2005
Nuclear Engineering
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
1. Student will understand the basic concepts and processes taking place inside a nuclear
reactor, such as nuclear fission, neutron production, scattering, diffusion, slowing down
119
and absorption.
2. The student will also be familiar with concepts of reactor criticality, the relationship
between the dimension and fissile material concentration in a critical geometry.
3. The student will also be familiar with Time dependent (transient) behaviour of power
reactor in non-steady state operation and the means to control the reactor.
4. The student will also be familiar with concepts of heat removal from reactor core, reactor
safety and radiation protection.
Syllabus Contents:
 Basics of nuclear fission and power from fission

Radioactivity, nuclear reactions, cross sections, nuclear fission, power from fission,
conversion and breeding
Neutron transport and diffusion
Neutron transport equation, diffusion theory approximation, Fick’s law, solutions to
diffusion equation for point source, planar source, etc., energy loss in elastic collisions,
neutron slowing down
Multigroup, multiregion diffusion equation, concept of criticality
Solution of multigroup diffusion equations in one region and multiregion reactors, concept
of criticality of thermal reactors
Reactor kinetics and control
Derivation of point kinetics equations, inhour equation, solutions for simple cases of
reactivity additions, fission product poison, reactivity coefficients
Heat removal from reactor core
Solution of heat transfer equation in reactor core, temperature distribution, critical heat flux
Reactor safety, radiation protection
Reactor safety philosophy, defence in depth, units of radioactivity exposure, radiation
protection standards
References:
1. Introduction to Nuclear Engineering (3rd Edition) by John R. Lamarsh, Anthony J.Barrata,

Prentice Hall, (2001)
2. Introduction to Nuclear Reactor Theory, by John R. Lamarsh, Addison-Wesley, 1966)
3. Nuclear Reactor Analysis, by James J. Duderstadt and Lewis J. Hamilton, John
Wiley(1976)
Energy Conservation and Management

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
[ 120 ]
1. The student should acquire insight about the importance of energy

2. The student should capable to analyze all scenarios from energy consumption
3. The student should generate scenarios of energy consumption and predict the future trend
4. The student should Suggest and plan energy conservation solutions
Syllabus Contents:
 The energy market, energy scenario, planning, utilization pattern and future strategy,
Importance of energy management.
 Energy auditing- methodology and analysis,
 Energy economics,
 Energy conservation in industries, Cogeneration, Combined heating and power systems,
 Relevant international standards and laws.
References:
1. L.C. Witte, P.S. Schmidt, D.R.Brown, “Industrial Energy Management and Utilization”,
Hemispherical Publication, 1988.
2. Callaghan “Energy Conservation”.
3. D.A. Reeg, “Industrial Energy Conservation”, Pergamon Press, 1980.
4. T.L. Boyen, “Thermal Energy Recovery” Wiley, 1980.
5. L.J. Nagrath, “Systems Modeling and Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1982.
6. W.C. Turner, “Energy Management Handbook “, Wiley, New York, 1982.
7. I.G.C. Dryden, “The Efficient Use of Energy “, Butterworth, London, 1982.
8. R. Loftnen, Van Nostrarid Reinhold C. “Energy Handbook”, 1978.
9. TERI Publications.
Air conditioning system Design
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
1. Student should understand construction and design features Air-conditioning system.

121
2. Student should understand various types and its adoptability in the various environment
and application areas.
3. Student should understand various health issues
4. Student should design seasonal energy efficient system
Syllabus Contents:
 Air conditioning systems,

 various air-conditioning processes,
 Enthalpy deviation curve, psychrometry , SHF, dehumidified air quantity, human comfort,
indoor air quality,
 Design conditions and load calculations, air distribution, pressure drop, duct design, fans
&, blowers,
 Performance & selection, noise control.
References:
1. ASHRAE Handbook.
2. “Handbook of air-conditioning system design”, Carrier Incorporation, McGraw Hill Book
Co.,
3. U.S.A, 1965.
4. “Refrigeration and air-conditioning”, ARI, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 1993.
5. Norman C. Harris, “Modern Air Conditioning”, New York, McGraw-Hill,1974.
6. Jones W.P., “Air Conditioning Engineering”, Edward Arnold Publishers Ltd., London,
1984.
7. Hainer R.W., “Control Systems for Heating, Ventilation and Air-Conditioning”, Van
Nostrand
8. Reinhold Co., New York, 1984. 7. Arora C.P., “Refrigeration & Air Conditioning”, Tata
Mc Graw Hill, 1985.
9. Manohar Prasad, “Refrigeration & Air Conditioning”, New Age Publishers.
10. Stoecker, “Refrigeration & Air Conditioning”, Mc Graw Hill, 1992.
11. 10. Stoecker, “Design of Thermal Systems”, Mc Graw Hill, 1992.
Gas Turbines
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
1. Student should understand construction and design features of gas turbines as used for
[ 122 ]
power generation.
2. Student should understand thermodynamics cycles a, and different sizes and layouts of gas
turbine plant
3. Able to understand thermodynamics and fluid mechanics component for enhancing the
efficiency and effectively of gas turbines
Syllabus Contents:
 Introduction, Cycles, Performance characteristics and improvement,

 Gas dynamics, Centrifugal, axial and mixed flow compressor, principles and
characteristics, Turbine construction, Blade materials, manufacturing techniques, blade
fixing,
 Problems of high temperature operation, blade cooling, practical air cooled blades
Combustion Systems, various fuels and fuel systems,
 Jet propulsion cycles and their analysis, parameters affecting performance, thrust
augmentation, environmental considerations and applications.
References:
1. H Cohen, GFC Rogers and HIH Saravanamuttoo, “Gas Turbine Theory”, Pearson
Education, 2000.
2. V. Ganesan, “Gas Turbines”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.
3. S.M.Yahya “Turbines, Compressors and Fans”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1992.
4. Vincent “The theory and design of Gas Turbine and Jet Engines”, McGraw Hill, 1950.
5. W W Bathic, “Fundamentals of Gas Turbines”, John Wiley and Sons.

Teaching Scheme
Lectures: 1hrs/week
Course Outcomes:

123
Syllabus Contents:

research problem.



IPR and IITs.
References:
 Ranjit Kumar, 2 nd Edition, “Research Methodology: A Step by Step Guide for beginners”
[ 124 ]

125
Advanced Heat Transfer

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Course Outcomes:
1. The students are expected to understand the subject of Heat Transfer in detail with
capability to solve Industrial Problems. This will also create the base and interest among
the students to carry out the Future Research
Syllabus Contents:
 Conduction- one and two dimensional,

 Fins, conduction with heat source, unsteady state heat transfer,
 Natural and forced convection, integral equation, analysis and analogies,
 Transpiration cooling, ablation heat transfer, boiling, condensation and two phase flow
mass transfer, cooling, fluidized bed combustion,
 Heat pipes, Radiation, shape factor, analogy, shields,
 Radiation of gases & vapours.
References:
1. J.P. Holman, “Heat Transfer”, McGraw Hill Book Company, New York, 1990.
2. Incropera and Dewitt, “Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer”, John Wiley and Sons,
NewYork, 2000.
3. Frank Kreith, “Principles of Heat Transfer”, Harper and Row Publishers, New York, 1973.
4. Donald Q. Kern “Process Heat Transfer”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd.,
New Delhi, 1975.
5. Gupta and Prakash, “Engineering Heat Transfer”, New Chand and Bros, Roorkee (U.P.)
India, 1996.
6. R.C. Sachdeva “Fundamentals of Engineering Heat and Mass Transfer”, Wiley Eastern
Ltd., India,
Steam Engineering
Teaching Scheme
[ 126 ]
Course Outcomes:
1. Students will have the ability to explain working of different boilers and significance of
mountings and accessories.
2. Students will have the ability to use techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools
necessary for boiler performance assessment.
3. Students will have a theoretical and practical background in thermal systems, and will have
a good understanding of energy conservation fundamentals. Students will have the ability
to analyze thermal systems for energy conservation.
4. Students will have the ability to design a steam piping system, its components for a process
and also design economical and effective insulation.
5. Students will have the ability to analyze a thermal system for sources of waste heat design
a systems for waste heat recovery.
6. Students will have the ability to design and develop controls and instrumentation for
effective monitoring of the process.
Syllabus Contents:
 Introduction (7 hrs)
Fundamentals of steam generation, Quality of steam, Use of steam table, Mollier Chart
Boilers ,Types, Mountings and Accessories, Combustion in boilers, Determination of
adiabatic flame temperature, quantity of flue gases, Feed Water and its quality, Blow
down; IBR, Boiler standards
 Piping & Insulation (8 hrs)

Water Line, Steam line design and insulation; Insulation-types and application, Economic
thickness of insulation, Heat savings and application criteria, Refractory-types, selection
and application of refractory, Heat loss.
 Steam Systems (8 hrs)

Assessment of steam distribution losses, Steam leakages, Steam trapping, Condensate and
flash steam recovery system, Steam Engineering Practices; Steam Based Equipments /
Systems.
 Boiler Performance Assessment (8hrs)

Performance Test codes and procedure, Boiler Efficiency, Analysis of losses; performance
evaluation of accessories; factors affecting boiler performance.
 Energy Conservation and Waste Minimization,(5hrs)

Energy conservation options in Boiler; waste minimization, methodology; economical
viability of waste minimization
 Instrumentation & Control (6hrs)

Process instrumentation; control and monitoring. Flow, pressure and temperature
measuring and controlling instruments, its selection
127
References:
1. T. D. Estop, A. McConkey, Applied Thermodynamics, Parson Publication

2. Domkundwar; A Course in Power Plant Engineering; Dhanapat Rai and Sons
3. Yunus A. Cengel and Boles, “Engineering Thermodynamics “,Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Co. Ltd
4. Book II - Energy Efficiency in Thermal Utilities; Bureau of Energy Efficiency
5. Book IV - Energy Performance Assessment for Equipment & Utility Systems; Bureau of
Energy Efficiency
6. Edited by J. B. Kitto & S C Stultz; Steam: Its Generation and Use; The Babcock and
Wilcox Company
7. P. Chatopadhyay; Boiler Operation Engineering: Questions and Answes; Tata McGrawHill
Education Pvt Ltd, N Delhi
Refrigeration and Cryogenics

Teaching Scheme
Lectures: 3 hrs/week, Tutorial:1hr/week
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will demonstrate the ability:
1. To learn the basics of refrigeration and cryogenics and its application area.
2. To design the refrigeration systems for domestic and industrial applications like cold
storages
3. To learn about ODP, GWP and related environment issues
Syllabus Contents:
 Vapour compression refrigeration, actual cycle, second law efficiency,

 Multistage compression with inter-cooling, Multi-evaporator systems, Cascade systems,
 Performance characteristics and capacity control of reciprocating and centrifugal
compressors, screw compressor and scroll compressor,
 Design, selection of evaporators, condensers, control systems, motor selection,
 Refrigerants, alternative refrigerants, CFC/HCFC phase-out regulations,
 Refrigeration applications, food preservation, transport,
 Introduction to Vapor absorption refrigeration, single effect and double effect systems,
 Gas liquefaction systems - Linde-Hampson, Linde dual pressure, Claude cycle.
[ 128 ]
References:
1. R.J.Dossat, “Principles of Refrigeration”, Pearson Education Asia, 2001.

2. C.P.Arora, “Refrigeration and Air-conditioning”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2000.
3. Stoecker & Jones, “Refrigeration and Air-conditioning”, McGraw Hill Book Company,
New York, 1982.
4. Jordan & Priester, “Refrigeration and Air-conditioning”.
5. A.R.Trott, “Refrigeration and Air-conditioning”, Butterworths, 2000.
6. J.L.Threlkeld, “Thermal Environmental Engineering”, Prentice Hall, 1970.
7. R.Barron, “Cryogenic systems”, McGraw–Hill Company, New Yourk, 1985.
8. G.G.Hasseldon. “Cryogenic Fundamentals”, Academic Press.
9. Bailey, “Advanced Cryogenics”, Plenum Press, London, 1971.
10. W.F.Stoecker, “Industrial Refrigeration Handbook”, McGraw-Hill, 1998.
11. John A.Corinchock, “Technician’s Guide to Refrigeration systems”, McGrawHill.
12. P.C.Koelet, “Industrial Refrigeration: Principles, Design and Applications”, Macmillan,
1992.
13. ASHRAE HANDBOOKS (i) Fundamentals (ii) Refrigeration.
14. Graham Walker, “Miniature Refrigerators for Cryogenic Sensors and Cold Electronics”,
Clarendon Press, 1989
Design of Heat Exchangers

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
1. Students will demonstrate a basic understanding of several types of heat exchangers that
will include shell-and-tube, double pipe, plate-and-frame, finned tube, and plate-fin heat
exchangers, Heat pipes.
2. Students will design and analyses of shell-and-tube double pipe, compact, plate heat
exchangers.
3. Students will demonstrate the performance degradation of heat exchangers subject to
fouling.
Syllabus Contents:
 Heat Exchangers – Classification according to transfer process, number of fluids, surface

compactness, and construction features. Tubular heat exchanger, plate type heat
exchangers, extended surface heat exchangers, heat pipe, Regenerators. Classification
according to flow arrangement: counter flow, parallel flow, cross flow exchanger.
 Heat exchanger design methodology, assumption for heat transfer analysis, problem
129
formulation, e-NTU method, P-NTU method, Mean temperature difference method,

fouling of heat exchanger, effects of fouling, categories of fouling, fundamental processes
of fouling.
 Double Pipe Heat Exchangers: Thermal and Hydraulic design of inner tube, Thermal and
hydraulic analysis of Annulus, Total pressure drop
 Compact Heat Exchangers: Thermal and Hydraulic design of compact heat exchanger
 Shell and Tube heat exchangers – Tinker’s, kern’s, and Bell Delaware’s methods, for
thermal and hydraulic design of Shell and Tube heat exchangers
 Mechanical Design of Heat Exchangers – design standards and codes, key terms in heat
exchanger design, material selection, and thickness calculation for major components
such as tube sheet, shell, tubes, flanges and nozzles. Introduction to simulation and
optimization of heat exchangers, flow induced vibrations.
References:
1. Ramesh K. Shah and Dusan P. Sekulic, “Fundamentals of Heat Exchanger Design” John
Wiley & sons Inc., 2003.
2. D.C. Kern, “Process Heat Transfer”, McGraw Hill, 1950.
3. Sadik Kakac and Hongton Liu, “Heat Exchangers: Selection, Rating and Thermal
Design” CRC Press, 1998.
4. A .P. Frass and M.N. Ozisik, “Heat Exchanger Design”, McGraw Hill, 1984
5. Afgan N. and Schlinder E.V. “Heat Exchanger Design and Theory Source Book”.
6. T. Kuppan, “Hand Book of Heat Exchanger Design”.
7. “T.E.M.A. Standard”, New York, 1999.
8. G. Walkers, “Industrial Heat Exchangers-A Basic Guide”, McGraw Hill, 1982.
Computational Fluid Dynamics
Lectures: 3 hrs/week, Tutorial :1hr/week
Course Outcomes:
1. The students are expected to understand the subject of Computational Fluid Dynamics and
know how to use it as tool to solve the Heat Transfer and Fluid Mechanics related
Industrial Problems. This will also create the base and interest among the students to carry
out the Future Research.
[ 130 ]
Syllabus Contents:
 Introduction to CFD: Computational approach to Fluid Dynamics and its comparison

with experimental and analytical methods, Basics of PDE: Elliptic, Parabolic and
Hyperbolic Equations.
 Governing Equations: Review of Navier-Stokes Equation and simplified forms, Solution
Methodology: FDM and FVM with special emphasis on FVM, Stability, Convergence and
Accuracy.
 Finite Volume Method: Domain discretization, types of mesh and quality of mesh,
SIMPLE, pressure velocity coupling, Checkerboard pressure field and staggered grid
approach
 Geometry Modeling and Grid Generation: Practical aspects of computational modeling
of flow domains, Grid Generation, Types of mesh and selection criteria, Mesh quality, Key
parameters and their importance
 Methodology of CFDHT: Objectives and importance of CFDHT, CFDHT for Diffusion
Equation, Convection Equation and Convection-Diffusion Equation
 Solution of N-S Equations for Incompressible Flows: Semi-Explicit and Semi-Implicit
Algorithms for Staggered Grid System and Non Staggered Grid System of N-S Equations
for Incompressible Flows
References:
1. Computational Fluid Dynamics, The Basic with applications by John A. Anderson, Jr.,
McGraw Hill International editions, Mechanical Engineering series.
2. Numerical Methods in Fluid Flow & Heat Transfer by Dr. Suhas Patankar.
3. An Introduction to Computational Fluid Flow (Finite Volume Method), by H.K. Versteeg,
W.Malalasekera, Printice Hall
4. Computational Methods for Fluid Dynamics by Ferziger and Peric, Springer Publication.
5. An Introduction to Computational Fluid Mechanics by Chuen-Yen Chow, Wiley
Publication.
6. Computational Fluid Flow & Heat Transfer by Murlidhar and Sundarrajan, Narosa
Publication.
Modelling of IC Engine
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
1. Students will demonstrate a basic understanding of several types of engine models that will
include zero dimensional thermodynamic model, one dimensional and multi-dimensional,
single zone, two zone etc models.
2. Students will develop models and simulate them for diesel engine petrol engine, gas engine.
3. Students will demonstrate the performance evaluation and emission standards for such
modeled engines
131
Syllabus Contents:
 Fundamentals: Governing equations, Equilibrium charts of combustion chemistry,

chemical reaction rates, and approaches of modeling, model building and integration
methods, gas exchange through valves, engine and porting geometry, exhaust gas
recirculation, valve lift curves.
 Thermodynamic Combustion Models of CI Engines: Single zone models, premixed and
diffusive combustion models, combustion heat release using wiebe function, wall heat
transfer correlations, ignition delay, internal energy estimations, two zone model,
application of heat release analysis.
 Fuel spray behavior: Fuel injection, spray structure, fuel atomization, droplet turbulence
interactions, droplet impingement on walls.
 Modeling of charging system: Constant pressure and pulse turbo charging, compressor and
turbine maps, charge air cooler.
 Mathematical models of SI Engines: Simulation of Otto cycle at full throttle, part throttle
and supercharged conditions. Progressive combustion, Autoignition modeling, single zone
models, mass burning rate estimation, SI Engine with stratified charge. Friction in
pumping, piston assembly, bearings and valve train etc. friction estimation for warm and
warm up engines.
References:
1. Haywood, “I.C. Engines”, Mc Graw Hill.

2. Ramos J (1989) Internal Combustion Engine Modeling. Hemisphere Publishing Company
3. C. D. Rakopoulos and E. G. Giakoumis, “Diesel Engine Transient
4. Operation Principles of Operation and Simulation Analysis”, Springer, 2009.
5. V. Ganeshan, “Internal Combustion Engines”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1996.
6. P.A. Lakshminarayanan and Y. V. Aghav, “ Modelling Diesel Combustion” Springer, 2010
7. Bernard Challen and Rodica Baranescu, “Diesel Engine Reference Book” Butterworth-
Heinemann, 1999.
(DCE-III) Design of Solar and Wind Systems
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
1. Student should update about the technological status of implementation of NCES in India
2. Student should capable to analyze various techno economical obstacles in the commercial
development of NCES in India
3. Student should capable to conceptually model and design general NCES systems and
predict the long term performance.
[ 132 ]
4. Student should suggest and plan hybrid NCES solutions to conventional energy systems
Syllabus Contents:
 Conventional sources of energy, Nuclear, Alternative energy sources,

 Solar Radiation-estimation, prediction & measurement, Solar energy utilization,
 Performance of Solar flat plate collectors, concentrating collectors, thermal storage,
 Wind energy, Direct Energy conversion- PV, MHD,
 Fuel cells, thermionic, thermoelectric, Biomass, biogas, hydrogen, Geothermal.
References:
1. D.Y. Goswami, F. Kreith and J.F. Kreider, “Principle of Solar Engineering”, Taylor and
Francis, 2000.
2. Sukhatme S.P., “Solar Energy”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 1994.
3. Bansal and othes, “Non-Conventional Energy Sources”.
4. J.F. Kreider, F. Kreith, “Solar Energy Handbook”, McGraw Hill, 1981
5. J.A. Duffie and W.A. Beckman, “Solar Engineering of Thermal Processes”, John Wiley,
1991.
Advanced Mathematical Methods in Engineering
Teaching Scheme
Lectures: 3 hrs/week, Tutorial:1hr/week
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will demonstrate the ability to:
1. Students will be able to analyse and develop the mathematical model of thermal system.
2. Student should able analyse the reliability and maintainability of the series and paralle
thermal system.
3. Students will be able to solve differential equations using numerical techniques.
Syllabus Contents:
 Ordinary Differential Equations: First-order equations (Linear, Equidimensional, Separable

Exact, Homogeneous,); Second-order linear differential equations (homegeneous and
nonhomogeneous); Solution methods such as undertermined coefficients and variation o
parameters.
 Partial Differential Equations: First order partial differential equations; Second order linea
partial differential equations; Canonical forms; Fourier series, Second order equation
133
(Parabolic, Elliptic and Hyperbolic) in rectangular, cylindrical polar and spherical

coordinate systems; Solution techniques such as separation of variables, eigenfunction
expansions, integral transforms (Fourier and Laplace transforms); D'Alembert's solution for
the Wave equation; Maximum principle for Elliptic equations; Variational methods for
approximate solutions of differential equations.
 Standard discrete and continuous distributions like Binomial, Poisson, Normal, Exponential
etc. Central Limit Theorem and its significance. Some sampling distributions like c2, t, F.
 ANOVA: One – way, Two – way with/without interactions, Latin
 Squares ANOVA technique, Principles of Design Of Experiments, some standard designs
such as CRD, RBD, LSD.
 Some of the relevant topics required for ANOVA (sample estimates and test hypothesis)
may also be included.
References:
1. J.B. Doshi, “Differential Equations for Scientists and Engineers”, Narosa, 2010.
2. Peter O'Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Seventh Edition, Cengage Learning,
2012 (Indian Edition).
3. Michael Greenberg, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Second Edition, Pearson
Education, 2002 (Indian Edition).
4. Jennings. A., Matrix Computation for Engineers and Scientists. John Wiley and Sons, 1992.
5. Prem.K.Kythe, Pratap Puri, Michael R.Schaferkotter, Introduction to Partial Differential
Equations and Boundary Value problems with Mathematics, CRC Press, 2002.
6. Kreyszig, Erwin, I.S., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wiley, 1999.
7. Ramamurthy. V., Computer Aided Design in Mechanical Engineering., Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Co., 1987
8. Fundamental Concepts in the Design of Experiments, 5th Ed., by Hicks and Turner
9. Devore, Jay L., Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences, 5th edition,
Brooks- Cole (1999)
Mini project
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
1. Students will get an opportunity to work in actual industrial environment if they opt for
internship.
2. In case of mini project, they will solve a live problem using
software/analytical/computational tools.
3. Students will learn to write technical reports.
4. Students will develop skills to present and defend their work in front of technically
[ 134 ]
qualified audience.
Syllabus Contents:
 Students can take up small problems in the field of design engineering as mini project. It
can be related to solution to an engineering problem, verification and analysis of
experimental data available, conducting experiments on various engineering subjects,
material characterization, studying a software tool for the solution of an engineering
problem etc.
Thermal Engineering Lab Practice – I and II

Teaching Scheme
Practical: 4 hrs/week
Course Outcomes:
1. Students will acquire hands on experience on the various test-rigs, Experimental set up.
2. Students should able to measure the various technical parameters by instrument and by
mathematical relationship.
3. Students will able to identify the effect of various parameters on the system and able to co-
relate them.
Syllabus Contents:
 The lab practice consists of the tutorials and experiments as decided by the course
supervisors of the Program Core Courses (PCC) namely Fluid Dynamics, Advanced Heat
Transfer, Thermodynamics and Combustion, Refrigeration and Cryogenics.
Lab Practice III and IV - Thermal Engineering
Teaching Scheme
Practical: 4 hrs/week
Course Outcomes:
135
2. Students should able to measure the various technical parameters by instrument and by
mathematical relationship.
3. Students will able to identify the effect of various parameters on the system and able to
co- relate them.
Syllabus Contents:
 The lab practice consists of the tutorials and experiments as decided by the course
supervisors of the Program Core Courses (PCC) namely Design of Heat Exchangers and
Computational Fluid Dynamics, Modelling of I C Engine.
(Dissertation) Dissertation Phase-1

Teaching Scheme
Lectures: 20 hr/week
Course Outcomes:
1. Students will be exposed to self-learning various topics.

2. Students will learn to survey the literature such as books, national/international refereed
journals and contact resource persons for the selected topic of research.
3. Students will learn to write technical reports.
4. Students will develop oral and written communication skills to present and defend their
work in front of technically qualified audience.
Guidelines:
 The Project Work will start in semester III and should preferably be a problem with research
potential and should involve scientific research, design, generation/collection and analysis
of data, determining solution and must preferably bring out the individual contribution.
Seminar should be based on the area in which the candidate has undertaken the dissertation
work as per the common instructions for all branches of M. Tech. The examination shall
consist of the preparation of report consisting of a detailed problem statement and a
literature review. The preliminary results (if available) of the problem may also be discussed
in the report. The work has to be presented in front of the examiners panel set by Head and
PG coordinator. The candidate has to be in regular contact with his guide and the topic of
dissertation must be mutually decided by the guide and student.
Dissertation Phase- II
Teaching Scheme
[ 136 ]
Lectures: 32 hr/week
Course Outcomes:
1. Students will be able to use different experimental techniques.

2. Students will be able to use different software/ computational/analytical tools.
3. Students will be able to design and develop an experimental set up/ equipment/test rig.
4. Students will be able to conduct tests on existing set ups/equipments and draw logical
conclusions from the results after analyzing them.
5. Students will be able to either work in a research environment or in an industrial
environment.
6. Students will be conversant with technical report writing.
7. Students will be able to present and convince their topic of study to the engineering
community.
Guidelines:
 It is a continuation of Project work started in semester III. He has to submit the report in
prescribed format and also present a seminar. The dissertation should be presented in
standard format as provided by the department. The candidate has to prepare a detailed
project report consisting of introduction of the problem, problem statement, literature
review, objectives of the work, methodology (experimental set up or numerical details as
the case may be) of solution and results and discussion. The report must bring out the
conclusions of the work and future scope for the study. . The work has to be presented in
front of the examiners panel consisting of an approved external examiner, an internal
examiner and a guide, co-guide etc. as decided by the Head and PG coordinator. The
candidate has to be in regular contact with his guide.
OPEN ELECTIVES
Business Analytics
137
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
Course Code
Credits
Prerequisites
Course objective

LECTURES
Unit1:


overview.
Unit 2:

Important Resources, Business Analytics Personnel, Data and models for Business
analytics, problem solving, Visualizing and Exploring Data, Business Analytics 8
Technology.
[ 138 ]
Unit 3:

Measuring contribution of Business analytics, Managing Changes.
Descriptive Analytics, predictive analytics, predicative Modelling, Predictive 9

Unit 4:

Models for Time Series with a Linear Trend, Forecasting Time Series with
Seasonality, Regression Forecasting with Casual Variables, Selecting Appropriate
Forecasting Models. 10
Analytic Solver Platform, New-Product Development Model, Newsvendor Model,
Overbooking Model, Cash Budget Model.
Unit 5:

Unit 6:

COURSE OUTCOMES

and deep analytics.
Reference:

139
OPEN ELECTIVES
Industrial Safety
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week

Reference:

OPEN ELECTIVES
[ 140 ]
Operations Research
Teaching Scheme
_____________________________________________________________________
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:
Unit 2
Unit 3:
problem - CPM/PERT
Unit 4
Unit 5
References:

Open Elective
141
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week

References:

Open Elective
Composite Materials
Teaching scheme
[ 142 ]
Lecture: - 3 h/week

performance.


TEXT BOOKS:

Germany.
References:

Tasi.
Open Elective
Waste to Energy
143
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
References:
Sons, 1996.
Course objectives:
[ 144 ]

Syllabus
Suggested Studies:
book .

they work in
Syllabus
145
Uni CONTENTS Hours

ts
1 Introduction 4



Hazards With Special Reference To Tsunami; Post-Disaster Diseases And
Epidemics

Hazard; Evaluation Of Risk: Application Of Remote Sensing, Data From
Meteorological And Other Agencies, Media Reports: Governmental And
Community Preparedness.
5 Risk Assessment 4


SUGGESTED READINGS:
Royal book Company.
India, New Delhi.
[ 146 ]
Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours
2  Order 8
Suggested reading

Course Output

147
Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours

1  Values and self-development –Social values and individual 4
attitudes. Work ethics, Indian vision of humanism.

 Sense of duty. Devotion, Self-reliance. Confidence,
Concentration. Truthfulness, Cleanliness.
3  Personality and Behavior Development - Soul and Scientific 6
attitude. Positive Thinking. Integrity and discipline.
[ 148 ]
Suggested reading
Press, New Delhi
Course outcomes
Course Objectives:
perspective.
2. To address the growth of Indian opinion regarding modern Indian intellectuals’ constitutional role and
entitlement to civil and economic rights as well as the emergence of nationhood in the early years of
Indian nationalism.
3. To address the role of socialism in India after the commencement of the Bolshevik Revolution in 1917
and its impact on the initial drafting of the Indian Constitution.
Syllabus
Units Content Hours
1 History 4
2 Preamble 4
Salient Features
3 4
 Parliament
 Composition
4  Powers and Functions 4
 Executive
 President
 Governor
149

5  Pachayati raj: Introduction, PRI: Zila Pachayat. 4
Suggested reading

Course Outcomes:

1. Discuss the growth of the demand for civil rights in India for the bulk of Indians before
the arrival of Gandhi in Indian politics.
2. Discuss the intellectual origins of the framework of argument that informed the
conceptualization of social reforms leading to revolution in India.
3. Discuss the circumstances surrounding the foundation of the Congress Socialist Party
[CSP] under the leadership of Jawaharlal Nehru and the eventual failure of the proposal
of direct elections through adult suffrage in the Indian Constitution.
Course Objectives:
4. Review existing evidence on the review topic to inform programme design and policy making
undertaken by the DfID, other agencies and researchers.
Syllabus
Units Content Hours
 Aims and rationale, Policy background, Conceptual framework and terminology
1  Theories of learning, Curriculum, Teacher education.
4
[ 150 ]

 Thematic overview: Pedagogical practices are being used by teachers
2 in formal and informal classrooms in developing countries. 2
3  Theory of change. 4
practices.
support
 Peer support
4  Support from the head teacher and the community.
4
 Research design
 Contexts
5  Pedagogy 2
151
Suggested reading
1. Ackers J, Hardman F (2001) Classroom interaction in Kenyan primary schools,

Compare, 31 (2): 245-261.
3. Akyeampong K (2003) Teacher training in Ghana - does it count? Multi-site teacher
education research project (MUSTER) country report 1. London: DFID.
4. Akyeampong K, Lussier K, Pryor J, Westbrook J (2013) Improving teaching and learning
of basic maths and reading in Africa: Does teacher preparation count? International
Journal Educational Development, 33 (3): 272–282.
5. Alexander RJ (2001) Culture and pedagogy: International comparisons in primary
education. Oxford and Boston: Blackwell.
Course Outcomes:

4.
Course Objectives

Syllabus
Unit Content Hours

[ 152 ]


Types of pranayam
Suggested reading

Course Outcomes:

Course Objectives

Syllabus
Unit Content Hours


 Verses- 71,73,75,78 (do’s)
153

23, 35,
 Chapter 12 -Verses 13, 14, 15, 16,17, 18
Suggested reading

2. Bhartrihari’s Three Satakam (Niti-sringar-vairagya) by P.Gopinath, Rashtriya Sanskrit

Sansthanam, New Delhi.
Course Outcomes
[ 154 ]
Model Curriculum for PG Programme in Mechanical Engineering
Specialization: Design Engineering
L – Theory lecture, T – Tutorial; P – lab work: Numbers under ting scheme indicate contact
clock hours
Curriculum Structure – Semester-wise
Semester I
Ting Scheme
Sr. Course
Course Name Credits
No. Type/Code
L T P
1. Core-I Advanced Stress Analysis 3 -- -- 3
2. Core-II Advanced Vibrations and Acoustics 3 -- -- 3
Programme 1. Advanced Machine Design

3. Elective-I 2. Design for Manufacturing and Assembly 3 -- -- 3
*See Notes 3. Mathematical Methods in Engineering
Programme 1. Advanced Engineering Materials
4. Elective-II 2. Mechanics of Composite Materials 3 -- -- 3
*See Notes 3. Analysis and Synthesis of Mechanisms
5. Core Lab-I -- -- 4 2
6. Core Lab-II -- -- 4 2
8. Audit Audit Course - 1 2 -- -- 0
Total 16 -- 8 18
[ 155 ]
Semester II
Sr. Course Ting Scheme Credits

Course Name
No. Code/Type
L T P
1.
Core-III Finite Element Method 3 -- -- 3
2.
Core-IV Computer Aided Design 3 -- -- 3
Programme 1. Tribology in Design
3. Elective-III 2. Robotics 3 -- -- 3
*See Notes 3. Fracture Mechanics
Programme 1. Multi-body Dynamics
4. Elective-IV 2. Condition Based Monitoring 3 -- -- 3
*See Notes 3. Optimization Techniques in Design
5. Core -- -- 4 2
Lab-III
6. Core -- -- 4 2
Lab-IV
7. Audit 2 -- -- 0
Audit -2
8. Mini-Project -- -- 4 2
Core
Total 14 -- 12 18
Semester III
Sr. Course Ting Scheme

Course Name Credits
No. Code
L T P
Programme-
1. Advanced Finite Element Method
1. Elective-V 3 -- -- 3
2. Advanced Metallurgy
* See Notes
Open 3. Operations Research
2. 4. Cost Management of Engineering 3 -- -- 3
Elective
Projects
6. Waste to Energy
[ 156 ]
Total 6 -- -- 16
Semester-IV
Sr. Course Ting Scheme
Course Name Credits
No. Code L T P
Total -- -- 32 16
*Notes:
1. List of programme electives is indicative. The University may decide this depending on
facilities and expertise available with them. But the number of courses under this list must be
as large as possible with minimum three being offered at beginning of any semester out of
which a student would choose any one.
2. Lab sessions may be conducted for core courses of individual semesters as shown in the
structure but of evaluation will be reported as consolidated under single head.
Contents of the courses listed in the structure are given on following pages
Audit course 1 & 2

4. Value Education
6. Pedagogy Studies
Advanced StressAnalysis
Ting Scheme
Lectures: 3Hrs/week
Course Outcomes:
1. Students will understand the tonsorial approach of continuum mechanics and
comprehend modern research material.
2. Student will learn basic field equations such as equilibrium equations, compatibility and
constitutive relationship.
3. Students will be able to apply basic field equations to torsion, bending and two
dimensional elasticity problems, and energy methods.
4. Students will be able to solve problems in unsymmetrical bending and shear center, contact
stresses and pressurized cylinders and rotating discs.
[ 157 ]
Syllabus Contents
Unit 1: Theory of Elasticity
Analysis of stress, Analysis of stain, Elasticity problems in two dimension and three dimensions,
Mohr’s circle for three dimensional stresses. Stress tensor, Air’s stress function in rectangular and
polar coordinates.
Unit 2. Energy Methods
Energy method for analysis of stress, strain and deflection The three theorem’s -theorem of virtual
work, theorem of least work, Castiglioni’s theorem, Rayleigh Ritz method, Galekin’s method,
Elastic behavior of anisotropic materials like fiber reinforced composites.
Unit 3. Theory of Torsion
Torsion of prismatic bars of solid section and thin walled section. Analogies for torsion,
membrane analogy, fluid flow analogy and electrical analogy. Torsion of conical shaft, bar of
variable diameter, thin walled members of open cross section in which some sections are
prevented from warping, Torsion of noncircular shaft.
Unit 4. Unsymmetrical Bending and Shear Centre
Concept of shear center in symmetrical and unsymmetrical bending, stress and deflections in
beams subjected to unsymmetrical bending, shear center for thin wall beam cross section, open
section with one axis of symmetry, general open section, and closed section. .
Unit 5. Pressurized Cylinders and Rotating Disks
Governing equations, stress in thick walled cylinder under internal and external pressure, shrink fit
compound cylinders, stresses in rotating flat solid disk, flat disk with central hole, disk with
variable thickness, disk of uniform strength, Plastic action in thick walled cylinders and rotating
disc.
Unit 6. Contact stresses
Geometry of contact surfaces, method of computing contact stresses and deflection of bodies in
point contact, stress for two bodies in line contact with load normal to contact area and load
normal and tangent to contact area. Introduction to Analysis of low speed impact.
References:
1. Sadd, Martin H., Elasticity: Theory, applications and Numeric, Academic Press 05
(Text Book)
2. Boresi, A.P. and K. P. Chong, Elasticity in Engineering Mechanics, Second Edition,
John Wiley & Sons, 00
3. Budynas, R. G. Advance strength and Applied Stress Analysis, Second Edition, WCB/
McGraw Hill 1999
4. Dally, J. W. and W.F. Riley, Experimental Stress Analysis, McGraw Hill International,
Third Edition, 1991
5. Theory of Elasticity – Timoshenko and Goodier, Mc Graw Hill
6. Advanced Strength of Materials, Vol. 1,2 – Timoshenko, CBS
7. Advanced Strength of Materials – Den Harteg
Advanced Vibrations and Acoustics
[ 158 ]
Ting Scheme
Course Outcomes:
1. The student will be able to predict response of a SDOF system, damped or undamped,
subjected to simple arbitrary base or force excitations. They will be able to obtain Shock
Response Spectrum of SDOF systems for such excitations and understand use of the SRS.
2. The students will be able to write differential equations of motion for MDOF systems, and
through the technique of decoupling and orthogonal properties of natural modes, should be
able to obtain the Eigen-values and mode shapes of natural vibrations and response to
harmonic and arbitrary excitations.
3. The students will be able to obtain the Eigen-values and mode shapes of natural vibrations
of beams and response to harmonic excitations using orthogonal properties of natural
modes.
4. Student will be able to obtain natural frequencies and mode shapes of MDOF and
continuous systems using computational methods such as Rayleigh-Ritz method, Holzer
method, Dunckerley’s method, and Stodola’s method.
5. Student will know various terminologies used in acoustics and acoustic wave
transmission, derive plane and spherical wave equations, and obtain sound pressure level at
a given distance from a simple sound source of known strength.
6. Students should understand the basics of psychoacoustics, equal loudness contours, dBA
scale, loudness, pitch and timbre.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1: Transient Vibrations, Response of a single degree of freedom system to step and any
arbitrary excitation, convolution (Duhamel’s) integral, impulse response function
Unit 2: Multi degree of freedom systems, Free, damped and forced vibrations of two degree of
freedom systems, Eigen values and Eigen vectors, normal modes and their properties, mode
summation method, use of Lagrange’s equations to derive the equations of motion,
Unit 3: Continuous Systems, Natural Vibrations of beams – Differential equation of motion,
solution by the method of separation of variables, frequency parameter, natural frequencies and
mode shapes, forced vibration of simply supported beam subjected to concentrated harmonic
force at a point, Mode summation method, discretized models of continuous systems and their
solutions using Rayleigh – Ritz method
Unit 4: Vibration Control, Methods of vibration control, principle of superposition, Numerical
and computer methods in vibrations: Rayleigh, Rayleigh-Ritz and Dunkerley’s methods, matrix
iteration method for Eigen-value calculations, Holzer’s method,
Unit 5
Plane acoustic waves, Sound speed, characteristic acoustic impedance of elastic media, sound
intensity, dB scale, Transmission Phenomena, transmission from one fluid medium to another,
normal incidence, reflection at the surface of a solid, standing wave patterns, Symmetric
Spherical waves, near and far fields, simple models of sound sources, sound power,
determination of sound power and intensity levels at a point due to a simple source.
Unit 6
Psychoacoustics, Speech, mechanism of hearing, thresholds of the ear – sound intensity and
frequency, loudness, equal loudness levels, loudness, pitch and timbre, beats, masking by pure
tones, masking by noise.
[ 159 ]
References:
1. Thomson W.T., “Theory of Vibrations with applications”, George Allen and Unwh Ltd.
London, 1981.
2. S.S. Rao, Addison, “Mechanical Vibrations”, Wesley Publishing Co., 1990.
3. Leonard Meirovitch, “Fundamentals of vibrations”, McGraw Hill International Edition.
4. S. Timoshenko, “Vibration problems in Engineering”, Wiley, 1974.
5. Lawrence E. Kinsler and Austin R.Frey, “Fundamentals of acoustics”, Wiley Eastern Ltd.,
1987.
6. Michael Rettinger, “Acoustic Design and Noise Control”, Vol. I & II. , Chemical
Publishing Co., New York, 1977.
AdvancedMachineDesign
Ting Scheme
Course Outcomes:
1. Students will realize that creativity, manufacturability, assembly, maintainability,
emotions, reliability are also important aspects of design other than finding dimensions and
stresses in the highly competitive, dynamic and customer centered market.
2. Students will demonstrate the ability to identify needs of the customer and convert them in
to technical specifications of a product.
3. Students will be able to generate different ideas after identifying the need and determining
the specifications and constraints of a product for a particular purpose.
4. Students will understand the principals used while designing for manufacture, assembly,
emotions and maintenance.
5. Students will know various methods of rapid prototyping the products to test and modify
the designs.
6. Students will be able to design the components considering strength based reliability.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1: Development processes and organizations, Product Planning
Unit 2: Need Identification and problem definition, product specification, concept generation
and selection, evaluation, creativity methods, Concept testing
Unit 3: Design for manufacture, assembly, maintenance, casting, forging,
Unit 4: Design for Reliability, strength based reliability, parallel and series systems, robust
design,
Unit 5: Industrial design: Design for Emotion and experience, Introduction to retrofit and Eco
design, Human behavior in design
Unit 6: Rapid Prototyping
References:
1. George E Dieter, “Engineering Design”, McGraw Hill Company, 00.
[ 160 ]
2. Prashant Kumar, “Product Design, Creativity, Concepts and Usability”, Eastern Economy
Edition, PHI New Delhi. 12
3. Woodson T.T., “Introduction to Engineering Design”, McGraw Hill Book Company, 1966.
4. John J.C. “Design Methods”, Wiley Inter science, 1970.
5. Averill M. Law and W. David Kelton “Simulation, modelling and analysis”, McGraw Hill
Book Company, 1991.
6. Pahl, G.and W.Beitz, Engineering Design–A Systematic Approach – Springer, 2nd Ed.,
1996.
7. Product Design and development Karl T. Ulrich, Steven Eppinger
Design for Manufacturing and Assembly
Ting Scheme
1. Understand the product development cycle
2. Know the manufacturing issues that must be considered in the mechanical engineering design
process
3. Know the principles of assembly to minimize the assembly time
4. Know the effect of manufacturing process and assembly operations on the cost of product (not
included by others)
5. Be familiar with tools and methods to facilitate development of manufactural mechanical
designs
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1: Introduction Need Identification and Problem Definition, Concept Generation and
Evaluation, Embodiment Design, Selection of Materials and Shapes
Unit 2: Properties of Engineering Materials, Selection of Materials – I, Selection of Materials – II,
Case Studies – I, Selection of Shapes, Co-selection of Materials and Shapes, Case Studies – II,
Unit 3: Selection ofManufacturingProcesses, Review of Manufacturing Processes, Design for
Casting, Design for Bulk Deformation Processes, Design for Sheet Metal Forming Processes,
Design for Machining, Design for Powder Metallurgy,Design for Polymer Processing, Co-
selection of Materials and Processes, Case-Studies – III
Unit 4: Design for Assembly, Review of Assembly Processes, Design for Welding – I, Design for
Welding – II, Design for Brazing and Soldering, Design for Adhesive Bonding, Design for Joining
of Polymers, Design for Heat Treatment, Case-Studies - IV
Unit 5: Design for Reliability, Failure Mode and Effect Analysis and Quality, Design for Quality,
Design for Reliability, Approach to Robust Design, Design for Optimization,
References:
1. M F Ashby and K Johnson, Materials and Design - the art and science of material selection in
product design, Butterworth-Heinemann, 03.
2. G Dieter, Engineering Design - a materials and processing approach, McGraw Hill, NY, 00.
[ 161 ]
3. M F Ashby, Material Selection in Mechanical Design, Butterworth-Heinemann, 1999.

4. T H Courtney, Mechanical Behavior of Materials, McGraw Hill, NY, 00.
5. K G Swift and J D Booker, Process selection: from design to manufacture, London: Arnold,
1997.
6. S S Rao, Engineering Optimization: theory and practice, John Wiley, NY, 1996.
7. G Boothroyd, P Dewhurst and W Knight, Product design for manufacture and assembly, John
Wiley, NY: Marcel Dekkar, 1994.
8. J G Bralla, Handbook for Product Design for Manufacture, McGraw Hill, NY, 1998.
9. Houldcroft, Which Process – an introduction to welding and related processes and guide to their
selection, Cambridge, Abington Pub., 1990.
10. ASTM Design handbook.
[ 162 ]
Advanced Engineering Materials

Ting Scheme
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course the student will
1. Demonstarte an understanding of mechanics, physical and chemical properties of materials
including metals, ceramics, polymers and composites
2. Understand existence of imperfections and their effects on mechanical properties of
materials and cause of failure
3. Demonstrate understanding of phase diagrams and their use in predicting phase
transformation and microstructure
4. Understand and predict various types of failures using concept of fracture mechanics, creep
and effect of impact
5. Know Electrical, Thermal, Optical and Magnetic Properties of metals, ceramics, polymers
and composites
6. Understand the economic considerations in usage and recycling of materials in humen use
Syllabus Contents
Unit 1. Introduction, Atomic Structure, Interatomic Bonding and Structure of Crystalline

Solids:
Historical perspective of Materials Science. Why study properties of materials? Classification of
materials. Advanced Materials, Future materials and modern materials, Atomicstructure. Atomic
bonding in solids, Crystal structures, Crystalline and noncrystalline materials. Miller indices.
Anisotropic elasticity. Elastic behaviour of composites. Structure and properties of polymers.
Structure and properties of ceramics.
Unit 2: Imperfections in Solids and Mechanical Properties of Metals, Diffusion, Dislocations
and Strengthening Mechanisms:
Point defects. Theoretical yield point. Line defects and dislocations. Interfacial defects. Bulk or
volume defects. Atomic vibrations;
Elastic deformation. Plastic deformation. Interpretation of tensile stress-strain curves Yielding
under multiaxial stress. Yield criteria and macroscopic aspects of plastic deformation. Property
variability and design factors, Diffusion mechanisms. Steady and non-steady state diffusion.
Factors that influence diffusion. Non-equilibrium transformation and microstructure, Dislocation
and plastic deformation. Mechanisms of strengthening in metals. Recovery, recrystallization and
grain growth. Strengthening by second phase particles. Optimum distribution of particles. Lattice
resistance to dislocation motion.
Unit 3: Phase Diagrams
Equilibrium phase diagrams. Particle strengthening by precipitation. Precipitation reactions.
Kinetics of nucleation and growth. The iron-carbon system. Phase transformations.
Transformation rate effects and TTT diagrams. Microstructure and property changes in iron-
carbon system
Unit 4: Failure:
Fracture. Ductile and brittle fracture. Fracture mechanics. Impact fracture. Ductile brittle
transition. Fatigue. Crack initiation and propagation. Crack propagation rate. Creep. Generalized
creep behaviour. Stress and temperature effects
[ 163 ]
Unit 5: Applications and Processing of Metals and Alloys, Polymers, Ceramics, and
composites:
Types of metals and alloys. Fabrication of metals. Thermal processing of metals. Heat treatment.
Precipitation hardening. Types and applications of ceramics. Fabrication and processing of
ceramics, Mechanicalbehaviour of polymers. Mechanisms of deformation and strengthening of
polymers. Crystallization, melting and glass transition. Polymer types. Polymer synthesis and
processing, Particle reinforced composites. Fibre reinforced composites. Structural composites
Unit 6. Electrical, Thermal, Optical and Magnetic Properties and economic Considerations:
Electrical conduction. Semi conductivity. Super conductivity. Electrical conduction in ionic
ceramics and in polymers. Dielectric behaviour. Ferroelectricity. Piezoelectricity
Heat capacity. Thermal expansion. Thermal conductivity. Thermal stresses
Diamagnetism and Para magnetism. Ferromagnetism.Antiferromagnetism and ferrimagnetism.
Influence of temperature on magnetic behaviour. Domains and Hysteresis,
Basic concepts. Optical properties of metals. Optical properties of non-metals. Application of
optical phenomena.
Economic, Environmental and Social Issues of Material Usage - Economic considerations.
Environmental and societal considerations. Recycling issues. Life cycle analysis and its use in
design
References:
8. Materials Science and Engineering, William D. Callister, Jr, John Wiley & sons, 07
9. Modern Physical Metallurgy and Material Engineering, Science, Process, application,
Smallman R.E., Bishop R J, Butterworth Heinemann, Sixth Ed., 1999.
Mathematical Methods in Engineering
Ting Scheme
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will demonstrate their ability to:
1. apply statistical techniques to analyze multivariate functions.
2. identify and solve engineering problems by applying the knowledge of ordinary and partial
differential equations.
3. Identify nature of a given wave equation and solve by applying D’Alembert solution
and/or method of solution of method of separation of variables
Course Contents
Unit 1 : Introduction to Probability Theory
Probability Theory and Sampling Distributions. Basic probability theory along with examples.
Standard discrete and continuous distributions like Binomial, Poisson, Normal, Exponential etc.
Central Limit Theorem and its significance. Some sampling distributions like 2, t, F.
[ 164 ]
Unit 2 : Testing of Statistical Hypothesis

Testing a statistical hypothesis, tests on single sample and two samples concerning means and
variances.ANOVA: One – way, Two – way with/without interactions.
Unit 3 : Ordinary Differential Equations:

Ordinary linear differential equations solvable by direct solution methods; solvable nonlinear
ODE’s;
Unit 4: Partial Differential Equations and Concepts in Solution to Boundary Value
Problems:
First and second order partial differential equations; canonical forms
Unit 5: Major Equation Types Encountered in Engineering and Physical Sciences
Solution methods for wave equation, D’Alembert solution, potential equation, properties of
harmonic functions, maximum principle, solution by variable separation method
Text Books:
1. Ronald E, Walpole, Sharon L. Myers, Keying Ye, Probability and Statistics for Engineers
and Scientists (8th Edition), Pearson Prentice Hall, 07 (for Units I & II)
2. J. B. Doshi, Differential Equations for Scientists and Engineers, Narosa, New Delhi, 10
(for Units III & IV)
Reference Books:
1. Douglas C. Montgomery, Design and Analysis of Experiments (7th Edition), Wiley Student
Edition, 09.
2. S. P. Gupta, Statistical Methods, S. Chand & Sons, 37th revised edition, 08
3. William W. Hines, Douglas C. Montgomery, David M. Goldsman, Probability and
Statistics for Engineering, (4th Edition), Willey Student edition, 06.
4. Advanced Engineering Mathematics (9th Edition), Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley India (13)
Mechanics of Composite Materials
Ting Scheme
Course Outcomes:
The student should be able to
1. Student will be able to understand the basic concepts and difference between composite
materials with conventional materials.
2. Students will be able to understand role of constituent materials in defining the average
properties and response of composite materials on macroscopic level.
3. Students will be able to apply knowledge for finding failure envelopes and stress-strain
plots of laminates.
4. Students will be able to develop a clear understanding to utilize subject knowledge using
computer programs to solve problems at structural level.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1. Introduction Definition and
[ 165 ]
characteristics, Overview of advantage and limitations of composite materials, Significance and

objectives of composite materials, Science and technology, current status and future prospectus
Unit 2.Basic Concepts and Characteristics
Structural performance of conventional material, Geometric and physical definition, Material
response, Classification of composite materials, Scale of analysis; Micromechanics, Basic
lamina properties, Constituent materials and properties, Properties of typical composite materials
Unit 3.Elastic Behavior of Unidirectional Lamina
Stress-strain relations, Relation between mathematical and engineering constants, transformation
of stress, strain and elastic parameters
Unit 4.Strength of Unidirectional Lamina
Micromechanics of failure; failure mechanisms, Macro-mechanical strength parameters, Macro-
mechanical failure theories, Applicability of various failure theories
Unit 5.Elastic Behavior of Laminate
Basic assumptions, Strain-displacement relations, Stress-strain relation of layer within a
laminate, Force and moment resultant, General load–deformation relations, Analysis of different
types of laminates
Unit 6.Stress and Failure Analysis of Laminates
Types of failures, Stress analysis and safety factors for first ply failure of symmetric laminates,
Micromechanics of progressive failure; Progressive and ultimate laminate failure, Design
methodology for structural composite materials
References:
1. Isaac M. Daniels, Ori Ishai, “Engineering Mechaincs of Composite Materials”, Oxford
University Press, 1994.
2. Bhagwan D. Agarwal, Lawrence J. Broutman, “Analysis and Performance of fiber
composites”, John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 1990.
3. Mathews, F. L. and Rawlings, R. D., “Composite Materials: Engineering and Science”,
CRC Press, Boca Raton, 03.
4. Madhujit Mukhopadhyay, “Mechanics of Composite Materials and Structures”,
University Press, 04.
5. Mazumdar S. K., “Composaite Manufacturing – Materials, Product and Processing
Engineering”, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 02.
1. Robert M. Jones, “Mechanics of Composite Materials”, Taylor and Francis, Inc., 1999.
Analysis and Synthesis of Mechanisms
Ting Scheme
Course Outcomes:
1. To develop analytical equations describing the relative position, velocity and acceleration
of all moving links.
[ 166 ]
2. To select, configure, and synthesize mechanical components into complete systems.

3. Use kinematic geometry to formulate and solve constraint equations to design linkages for
specified tasks.
4. Formulate and solve four position synthesis problems for planar and spherical four-bar
linkages by graphical and analytical methods.
5. Analyze and animate the movement of planar and spherical four-bar linkages.
6. students will be able to apply modern computer-based techniques in the selection, analysis,
and synthesis of components and their integration into complete mechanical systems.
7. Finally Students will demonstrate ability to think creatively, participate in design
challenges, and present logical solutions.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1
Basic Concepts; Definitions and assumptions; planar and spatial mechanisms; kinematic pairs;
degree of freedom; equivalent mechanisms; Kinematic Analysis of Planar Mechanisms. Review
of graphical and analytical methods of velocity and acceleration analysis of kinematically simple
mechanisms, velocity-acceleration, analysis of complex mechanisms by the normal acceleration
and auxiliary-point methods.
Unit 2
Curvature Theory: Fixed and moving centrodes, inflection circle, Euler-Savary equation,
Bobillier constructions, cubic of stationary curvature, Ball’s point, Applications in dwell
mechanisms.
Unit 3
Kinematic Synthesis of planar mechanisms, accuracy (precision) points, Chebesychev spacing,
types of errors, Graphical synthesis for function generation and rigid body guidance with two,
three and four accuracy points using pole method, centre and circle point curves, Analytical
synthesis of four-bar and slider-crank mechanisms.
Unit 4
Freudenstein’s equation, synthesis for four and five accuracy points, compatibility condition,
synthesis of four-bar for prescribed angular velocities and accelerations using complex numbers,
three accuracy point synthesis using complex numbers.
Unit 5
Coupler Curves : Equation of coupler curve, Robert-Chebychev theorem, double points and
symmetry.
Unit 6
Kinematic Analysis of Spatial Mechanisms, Denavit-Hartenberg parameters, matrix method of
analysis of spatial mechanisms
References:
1. R.S. Hartenberg and J. Denavit, “Kinematic Synthesis of Linkages”, McGraw-Hill, New
York, 1980.
2. Robert L.Nortan ,"Design of Machinery',Tata McGraw Hill Edition
3. Hamilton H.Mabie,"Mechanisms and Dynamics of Machinery",John Wiley and sons New
York
4. S.B.Tuttle,"Mechanisms for Engineering Design" John Wiley and sons New York
[ 167 ]
5. A. Ghosh and A.K. Mallik, “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms”, Affiliated East-West
Press, New Delhi, 1988.
6. A.G. Erdman and G.N. Sandor, “Mechanism Design – Analysis and Synthesis”, (Vol. 1
and 2), Prentice Hall India, 1988.
7. A.S. Hall, “Kinematics and Linkage Design”, Prentice Hall of India.
8. J.E. Shigley and J.J. Uicker, “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms”, 2nd Edition,
McGraw-Hill, 1995.
Lab – I and Lab-II
Ting Scheme
Course Outcomes:
1. Students will be able to use various experimental techniques relevant to the subject.
3. Students will be able to function as a team member
4. Students will develop communication skills.
5. Students will be able to write technical reports.
6. Students will be able to use different software’s.
Syllabus Contents:
The lab practice consists of experiments, tutorials and assignments decided by the course
supervisors of the program core courses and program specific elective courses.
Finite Element Method
Ting Scheme
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course,
For one and two dimensional, linear, static and dynamic problems in Structural Mechanics and
Heat Transfer, the student will be able to demonstrate the learning outcomes as mentioned
below:
1. The student will be able to classify a given problem on the basis of its dimensionality as 1-
D, 2-D, or 3-D, time-dependence as Static or Dynamic, Linear or Non-linear.
2. The students will be able to develop system level matrix equations from a given
mathematical model of a problem following the Galerkin weighted residual method or
principle of stationary potential.
3. While demonstrating the process mentioned in 2 above, he will be able to identify the
primary and secondary variables of the problem and choose correct nodal degrees of
freedom and develop suitable shape functions for an element, implement Gauss-Legendre
scheme of numerical integration to evaluate integrals at element level, and assemble the
element level equations to get the system level matrix equations. He will also be able to
[ 168 ]
substitute the essential boundary conditions correctly and obtain the solution to system
level matrix equations to get the values of the field variable at the global nodes.
4. The student will be able to state three sources of errors in implementing FEM and suggest
remedies to minimize the same for a given problem, viz. Modeling errors, Approximation
errors, and numerical errors.
5. The student will be able to obtain consistent and lumped mass matrices for axial vibration
of bars and transverse vibration of beams and obtain fundamental frequency of natural
vibration using the methods mentioned in the curricula.
6. The students will be able use MATLAB for implementation of FEM to obtain elongations
at nodes of a bar subjected to traction and concentrated loads and prescribed boundary
conditions
7. The students will be able to use commercial software like ANSYS or ABAQUS for
implementation of FEM to obtain stress concentration due to a small hole in a rectangular
plate subjected to traction on edges and concentrated loads at points on the edges and
prescribed boundary conditions
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1: Introduction, Classification of problems – Dimensionality, time dependence, Boundary
Value problems, Initial value problems, Linear/Non-linear, etc,
Unit 2: Differential equation as the starting point for FEM, steps in finite element method,
discretization, types of elements used, Shape functions, Linear Elements, Local and Global
coordinates, Coordinate transformation and Gauss-Legendre scheme of numerical integration,
Nodal degrees of freedom,
Unit 3: Finite element formulation, variational, weighted residual and virtual work methods,
Unit 4: 1-D and 2-D problems from Structural Mechanics – Bar, Beam, Plane stress and plane
strain problems, Axisymmetric problems – Axi-symmetric forces and geometry,
Unit 5: computer implementation, higher order elements, iso-parametric formulation,
Unit 6: Eigen-value problems, Natural vibration of bars and beams, Methods to find eigen-values
and eigen-vectors.
References:
1. Chandrupatla and Belegundu “Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering”, Prentice
Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, Ed.4, 11.
2. Logan Deryl L., “A First Course in Finite Element Method”, Thomson Brook/Cole,5th Ed.
12
3. Cook R.D. “Concepts and applications of finite element analysis” Wiley, New York, 4th
Ed. 02.
4. Reddy J N, “Finite element Method”, Tata McGraw Hill publishing Co Ltd, New Delhi, 3rd
Ed., 05
5. Bathe K.J., Cliffs, N.J. “Finite Element Procedures in Engineering Analysis”, PHI
Learning, Eastern Economy Editions, 09.

Teaching Scheme
Lectures: 1hrs/week
Course Outcomes:
[ 169 ]

Syllabus Contents:

research problem.



IPR and IITs.
References:
 Ranjit Kumar, 2nd Edition, “Research Methodology: A Step by Step Guide for beginners”
[ 170 ]
ComputerAidedDesign
Ting Scheme
Course Outcomes:
1. Have a conceptual understanding of the principles of CAD systems, the implementation
of these principles, and its connections to CAM and CAE systems.
2. Understand 2D, 3D transformations and projection transformations
3. Get knowledge of various approaches of geometric modeling
4. Understand mathematical representation of 2D and 3D entities
5. Understand basic fundamentals of FEM
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1: CAD Hardware and Software, Types of systems and system considerations, input and
output devices, hardware integration and networking, hardware trends, Software modules,
Unit 2: Computer Communications, Principle of networking, classification networks, network
wring, methods, transmission media and interfaces, network operating systems,
Unit 3: Computer Graphics Introduction, transformation of geometric models: translation,
scaling, reflection, rotation, homogeneous representation, concatenated transformations;
mappings of geometric models, translational mapping rotational mapping, general mapping,
mappings as changes of coordinate system; inverse transformations and mapping;
Unit 4 : Projections of geometric models, orthographic projections, Geometric Modeling, curve
representation: Parametric representation of analytic curves, parametric representation of
synthetic curves, curve manipulations. Surface representation,
Unit 5 : Fundamentals of solid modeling, boundary representation (B-rep), Constructive Solid
Geometry (CSF), sweep representation, Analytic Solid Modeling (ASM), other representations;
solid manipulations, solid modeling based applications: mass properties calculations, mechanical
tolerancing, etc.
Unit 6: Finite Element Modeling and Analysis, Finite Element Analysis, finite element
modeling, mesh generation mesh requirements, semiautomatic methods, fully automatic
methods, design and engineering applications, System Simulation, Need of simulation, areas of
applications, when simulation is appropriate tool / not appropriate, concept of a system,
components of a system, discrete and continuous systems, model of a system, types of models,
types of simulation approaches
References:
1. Ibrahbim Zeid, “CAD / CAM Theory and Practice”.
2. Jim Browne, “Computer Aided Engineering and Design”.
3. P. Radhakrishnan / V. Raju / S. Subramanyam, “CAD / CAM / CIM”.
4. P.N. Rao, “CAD / CAM principles and applications”, Tata Mcraw-Hill, 02.
[ 171 ]
5. Rogers / Adams, “Mathematical Elements for Computer Graphics”.

6. Rooney and Steadman, “Principles of Computer Aided Design”, Aug. 1993.
7. Jerry Banks / John Carson / Barry Nelson / David Nicol, “Discrete-Event System
Simulation”
Tribology in Design
Ting Scheme
Course Outcomes:
1. The students will be able to apply theories of friction and wear to various practical
situations by analysing the physics of the process.
2. They will understand the various surface measurement techniques and effect of surface
texture on Tribological behavior of a surface.
3. They will be able to select materials and lubricants to suggest a tribological solution to a
particular situation.
4. The students will be able to design a hydrodynamic bearing using various bearing charts.
5. The students will be able to understand the recent developments in the field and
understand modern research material.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1: Friction, theories of friction, Friction control, Surface texture and measurement, genesis
of friction, instabilities and stick-slip motion.
Unit 2: Wear, types of wear, theories of wear, wear prevention.
Unit 3: Tribological properties of bearing materials and lubricants.
Unit 4: Lubrication, Reynolds’s equation and its limitations, idealized bearings, infinitely long
plane pivoted and fixed show sliders, infinitely long and infinitely short (narrow) journal
bearings, lightly loaded infinitely long journal bearing (Petroff’s solution), FiniteBearings,
Design of hydrodynamic journal bearings
Unit 5: Hydrostatic, squeeze film Circular and rectangular flat plates, variable and alternating
loads, piston pin lubrications, application to journal bearings.
Unit 6: Elasto-hydrodynamic lubrication – pressure viscosity term in Reynolds’s equation,
Hertz’ theory, Ertel-Grubin equation, lubrication of spheres, gear teeth and rolling element
bearings, Air lubricated bearings, Tilting pad bearings,
References:
1. Cameron, “Basic Lubrication Theory”, Ellis Horwood Ltd, 1981.
2. Principles in Tribology, Edited by J. Halling, 1975
3. Fundamentals of Fluid Film Lubrication – B. J. Hamrock, McGraw Hill
International,1994
[ 172 ]
4. D.D. Fuller, “Theory and Practice of Lubrication for Engineers”, John Wiley and Sons,
1984.
5. “Fundamentals of Friction and wear of Materials” American Society of Metals.
6. Introduction to Tribology of Bearings –B. C. Majumdar, A. H. Wheeler &co. pvt. ltd
1985.
7. T.A. Stolarski, “Tribology in Machine Design”.
Robotics
Ting Scheme
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course students will be able to
1. understand basic terminologies and concepts associated with Robotics and Automation
2. demontrate comprehension of various Robotic sub-systems
3. understand kinematics and dynamics to explain exact working pattern of robots
4. aware of the associated recent updates in Robotics
Syllabus Contents
Unit 1 Introduction:
Basic Concepts such as Definition, three laws, DOF, Misunderstood devices etc., Elements of
Robotic Systems i.e. Robot anatomy, Classification, Associated parameters i.e. resolution,
accuracy, repeatability, dexterity, compliance, RCC device, etc. Automation - Concept, Need,
Automation in Production System, Principles and Strategies of Automation, Basic Elements of an
Automated System, Advanced Automation Functions, Levels of Automations, introduction to
automation productivity.
Unit 2 Robot Grippers:
Types of Grippers , Design aspect for gripper, Force analysis for various basic gripper system.
Sensors for Robots:- Characteristics of sensing devices, Selections of sensors, Classification and
applications of sensors. Types of Sensors, Need for sensors and vision system in the working and
control of a robot.
Unit 3 Drives and control systems:
Types of Drives, Actuators and its selection while designing a robot system. Types of transmission
systems,
Control Systems -Types of Controllers, Introduction to closed loop control
Control Technologies in Automation:- Industrial Control Systems, Process Industries Verses
Discrete-Manufacturing Industries, Continuous Verses Discrete Control, Computer Process and its
Forms. Control System Components such as Sensors, Actuators and others.
Unit 4 Kinematics:
Transformation matrices and their arithmetic, link and joint description, Denavit - Hartenberg
[ 173 ]
parameters, frame assignment to links, direct kinematics, kinematics redundancy, kinematics

calibration, inverse kinematics, solvability, algebraic and geometrical methods. Velocities and
Static forces in manipulators:- Jacobians, singularities, static forces, Jacobian in force domain.
Dynamics:- Introduction to Dynamics , Trajectory generations
Unit 5 Machine Vision System:
Vision System Devices, Image acquisition, Masking, Sampling and quantisation, Image
Processing Techniques , Noise reduction methods, Edge detection, Segmentation.
Robot Programming :- Methods of robot programming, lead through programming, motion
interpolation, branching capabilities, WAIT, SIGNAL and DELAY commands, subroutines,
Programming Languages: Introduction to various types such as RAIL and VAL II etc, Features of
type and development of languages for recent robot systems.
Unit 6 Modeling and Simulation for manufacturing Plant Automation:
Introduction, need for system Modeling, Building Mathematical Model of a manufacturing Plant,
Modern Tools- Artificial neural networks in manufacturing automation, AI in manufacturing,
Fuzzy decision and control, robots and application of robots for automation.
Artificial Intelligence:- Introduction to Artificial Intelligence, AI techniques, Need and application
of AI. Other Topics in Robotics:- Socio-Economic aspect of robotisation. Economical aspects for
robot design, Safety for robot and associated mass, New Trends & recent updates in robotics
References:
Text Books:
1. John J. Craig, Introduction to Robotics (Mechanics and Control), Addison-Wesley, 2nd
Edition, 04
2. Mikell P. Groover et. Al., Industrial Robotics: Technology, Programming and
Applications, McGraw – Hill International, 1986.
3. Shimon Y. Nof , Handbook of Industrial Robotics , John Wiley Co, 01.
4. Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing, M.P. Groover,
Pearson Education.
5. Industrial Automation: W.P. David, John Wiley and Sons.
Reference Books:
1. Richard D. Klafter , Thomas A. Chemielewski, Michael Negin, Robotic Engineering : An
Integrated Approach , Prentice Hall India, 02.
2. Handbook of design, manufacturing & Automation: R.C. Dorf, John Wiley and Sons.
Fracture Mechanics
Ting Scheme
Course Outcomes:
[ 174 ]

1. Students will be able to use any one of the four parameters for finding out damage
tolerance: stress intensity factor, energy release rate, J integral, Crack tip opening
displacement.
2. Students will be able to manage singularity at crack tip using complex variable.
3. Students will understand important role played by plastic zone at the crack tip.
4. Students will learn modern fatigue and will able to calculate the fatigue life of a component
with or without crack in it.
5. Students will learn modern sophisticated experimental techniques to determine fracture
toughness and stress intensity factor.
6.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1: Modes of fracture failure, Brittle and ductile fracture,
Unit 2: Energy release rate: crack resistance, stable and unstable crack growth.
Unit 3: Stress intensity factor: Stress and displacement fields, edge cracks, embedded cracks.
Unit 4: Crack tip plasticity: Shape and size of plastic zone, effective crack length, effect of plate
thickness, J-Integral. Crack tip opening displacement.
Unit 5: Test methods for determining critical energy release rate, critical stress intensity factor,
J-Integral.
Unit 6: Fatigue failure: Crack propagation, effect of an overload, crack closure, variable
amplitude fatigue load. Environment-assisted cracking. Dynamic mode crack initiation and
growth, various crack detection techniques.
References:
1. Brook D, “Elementary engineering fracture mechanics”.
2. Liebowitz H., “Fracture” Volume I to VII.
3. A Nadai, W. S. Hemp, “Theory of flow and fracture of solids”, McGraw Hill Book
Company, 1950.
Multi-body Dynamics
Ting Scheme
Course Outcomes: At the end ofthis course, the students will be able to:
1. Derive equations of motion for interconnected bodies in multi-body systems with three-
dimensional motion.
2. Implement and analyze methods of formulating equations of motion for interconnected bodies.
3. Write programs to solve constrained differential equations for analyzing multi-body systems.
4. Simulate and analyze all types of static and dynamic behaviors of the multi-body systems
including the kineto-static analysis.
5. Lead team projects in academic research or the industry that require modeling and simulation of
multi-body systems.
6. Demonstrate an improved technical writing and presentation skills.
[ 175 ]
Syllabus Contents
Unit 1. Introduction:
The method of constraints for planar kinematic analysis. Revolute, prismatic, gear and cam pairs
are considered together with other 2 degrees-of-freedom types of constraints.
Unit 2. Basic principles for analysis of mulyi-body systems:
The automatic assembly of the systems of equations for position, velocity and acceleration
analysis. Iterative solution of systems of non linear equations. Geometry of masses. The principle
of virtual work and Lagrange’s equations.
Unit 3. Dynamics of Planar Systems:
Dynamics of planar systems. Systematic computation and assembly of mass matrix. Computation
of planar generalized forces for external forces and for actuator-spring-damper element. Simple
applications of inverse and forward dynamic analysis. Numerical integration of first-order initial-
value problems. The method of Baumgarte for the solution of mixed differential-algebraic
equations of motion. The use of coordinates partitioning, QR and SVD decomposition for the
orthogonalization of constraints.
Unit 4. Kinematics of rigid bodies in space:
Reference frames for the location of a body in space. Euler angles and Euler parameters. The
formula of Rodrigues. Screw motion in space. Velocity, acceleration and angular velocity.
Relationship between the angular velocity vector and the time derivatives of Euler parameters.
Unit 5. Kinematic analysis of spatial systems:
Basic kinematic constraints. Joint definition frames. The constraints required for the description in
space of common kinematic pairs (revolute, prismatic, cylindrical, spherical). Equations of motion
of constrained spatial systems.
Unit 6. Computation of Forces:
Computation of spatial generalized forces for external forces and for actuator-spring-damper
element. Computation of reaction forces from Lagrange’s multipliers.
References:
1. Wittenburg, J., Dynamics of Systems of Rigid Bodies, B.G. Teubner, Stuttgart, 1977.
2. Kane, T.R, Levinson, D.A., Dynamics: Theory and Applications, McGraw-Hill Book Co.,
1985.
3. Nikravesh, P.E., Computer Aided Analysis of Mechanical Systems, Prentice-Hall Inc.,
Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1988.
4. Roberson, R.E., Schwertassek, R., Dynamics of Multibody Systems, Springer-Verlag,
Berlin, 1988.
5. Haug, E.J., Computer-Aided Kinematics and Dynamics of Mechanical Systems-Basic
Methods, Allyn and Bacon, 1989.
6. Huston, R.L., Multibody Dynamics, Butterworth-Heinemann, 1990.
7. Schielen, W. ed., Multibody Systems Handbook, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1990.
8. de Jalon, J.C., Bayo, E., Kinematic and Dynamic Simulation of Multibody Systems,
Springer-Verlag, 1994.
[ 176 ]
9. Shabana, A.A., Computational Dynamics, John Wiley & Sons, 1994.

Reference Books:
1. "Why Do Multi-Body System Simulation?" by Rajiv Rampalli, Gabriele Ferrarotti & Michael
Hoffmann, Published NAFEMS Publications, January 12
2. “Principles of Dynamics” by Donald T. Greenwood, 2nd ed., Prentice Hall
Condition Based Monitoring

Ting Scheme
Course Outcomes:
1. to know and be able to explain the aim and the basics of CM
2. be aware of some methods and procedures applied for general CM;
3. appreciate and understand the basic idea behind vibration-based structural health
monitoring and vibration-based condition monitoring, know the general stages of CM;
4. be able to apply some basic techniques for analysis of random and periodic signals;
5. know the basics of Vibration of Linear Systems: time and frequency response, resonance;
6. be aware of some basic instrumentation used for machinery and structural vibration-based
monitoring;
7. be aware of some basic faults in rotating machinery, their manifestation and methods for
detection and recognition: low frequency, medium frequency and high frequency
Syllabus Contents
Unit 1. The basic idea of health monitoring and condition monitoring of structures and machines.
Some basic techniques.
Unit 2. Basics of signal processing: Study of periodic and random signals, probability distribution,
statistical properties, auto and cross correlation and power spectral density functions of commonly
found systems, spectral analysis.
Unit 3. Fourier transform: the basic idea of Fourier transform, interpretation and application to
real signals. Response of linear systems to stationary random signals: FRFs, resonant frequencies,
modes of vibration,
Unit 4. Introduction to vibration-based monitoring, Machinery condition monitoring by vibration
analysis: Use and selection of measurements, analysis procedures and instruments,
Unit 5. Typical applications of condition monitoring using vibration analysis to rotating machines,
Unit 6. Some other health monitoring techniques, acoustic emission, oil debris and temperature
analysis, Applications.
References:
1. M.Adams, Rotating machinery analysis - from analysis to troubleshooting, Marcel Dekker, New
York, 01, ISBN 0-8247-0258-1.
2. Cornelius Scheffer Paresh Girdhar, Practical Machinery Vibration Analysis and Predictive
Maintenance, Newnes, 1st Edition, 04, Paperback ISBN: 9780750662758
[ 177 ]
Optimization Techniques in Design
Ting Scheme
Course Outcomes:
1. Students will know the principles of optimization.
2. Students will have knowledge of algorithms for design optimization
3. Students will be able to formulate an optimization problem.
4. Students should be able to find the optimum solution of their problems using
optimization techniques.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1: Introduction to optimization, classification of optimisation problems, classical
optimization techniques,
Unit 2: Linear programming, simplex method and Duality in linear programming, sensitivity or
post-optimality analysis, Karmarkar’s methods,
Unit 3:Non-Linear Programming: - One dimensional minimization, unconstrained and
constrained minimization, direct and indirect methods,
Unit 4: Geometric programming, Optimum design of mechanical elements like beams, columns,
gears, shafts, etc.
Unit 5: Introduction to Genetic Algorithms, Operators, applications to engineering optimization
problems.
References:
1. S. S. Stricker, “Optimising performance of energy systems” Battelle Press, New York,
1985.
2. R.C. Johnson, “Optimum Design of Mechanical Elements”, Willey, New York, 1980.
3. J. S. Arora, “Introduction to Optimum Design”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1989.
4. Kalyanmoy Deb, “Optimization for Engineering Design”, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 05
5. L.C.W. Dixon, “Non-Linear Optimisation - Theory and Algorithms”, Birkhauser,
Boston, 1980.
6. R.J. Duffin, E.L. Peterson and C.Zener “Geometric Programming-Theory and
Applications”, Willey, New York, 1967.
7. G.B. Dantzig “Linear Programming and Extensions Princeton University Press”,
Princeton, N. J., 1963.
8. R. Bellman “Dynamic Programming-Princeton” University Press, Princeton, N.J. 1957.
Advanced Finite Element Method

Ting Scheme
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to
[ 178 ]
1. Demonstrate understanding of FE formulation for linear problems in solid mechanics

2. Understand behaviour of elastic-plastic materials and visco-plasticity, Use of Newton-
Raphson method for solving nonlinear equations of equilibrium
3. Understand flow rules and strain hardening, loading and unloading conditions, Drucker’s
stability postulates, J2 flow of theory of plasticity
4. Demonstrate use of FE formulation to solve the problems of large deformation of
structures under loads
5. Able to solve contact problems oby using the techniques of non-linear FEM
Syllabus Contents
Unit 1. Review of linear FEA:
FE formulation of 1D bar, 3D linear elastic continuum, 2D plane strain, plane stress, and
axisymmetric elements; Iso-parametric mapping; numerical integration.
Unit 2. FE formulation for 1D plasticity:
Elastic-perfectly plastic material; Isotropic and kinematic hardening; Integration algorithms for 1D
plasticity; FE formulation; Newton-Raphson method for solving nonlinear equilibrium equations;
1D visco-plasticity and integration algorithm.
Unit 3. Continuum theories of plasticity:
Review of tensor algebra; Yield condition, flow rule and hardening rules; loading and unloading
conditions; Drucker’s stability postulates; Convexity and normality; J2 flow theory of plasticity
and visco-plasticity, Gurson model.
Unit 4. FE procedures for 2D and 3D plasticity:
Integration algorithms for rate independent plasticity—explicit forward Euler and implicit
backward Euler; Return mapping algorithm; visco-plasticity; FE formulation; Consistent
linearization; Algorithmic and consistent tangent modulii; Treatment of incompressible
deformation (Locking); B-bar method.
Unit 5. FE procedures for large deformation problems:
Continuum mechanics—deformation gradient, polar decomposition, Green-Lagrange strain, rate
of deformation, Cauchy stress, P-K stresses, Balance laws; Principle of objectivity and isotropy;
Constitutive equations for hyperelasticity; Neo-Hookean model; FE formulation—Total
Lagrangian and updated Lagrangian descriptions; Tangent Stiffness Matrix. Introduction to finite
strain plasticity.
Unit 6. Contact Problems:
Condition of impenetrability; Gap elements for modelling contact; Tangent stiffness matrix and
force vectors for 2D frictionless contact problems.
References:
1) K. J. Bathe, Finite Element Procedures, Prentice-Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi,
1996
2) J. C. Simo and T. J. R. Hughes, Computational Inelasticity, Springer-Verlag New York, Inc.,
New York, 1998
3) O. C. Zienkiewicz and R. L. Taylor, Finite Element Method: Volume 2 Solid Mechanics, Fifth
Edition, Butterworth-Heinemann, Oxford, 00
[ 179 ]
4) T. Belytschko and W. K. Liu and B. Moran, Nonlinear Finite Elements for Continua and
Structures, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., England, 00
5) D. R. J. Owen and E. Hinton, Finite Elements in Plasticity: Theory and Practice, Pineridge
Press Ltd., 00
Advanced Metallurgy
Ting Scheme
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
1. Demonstrate understanding of various aspects of crystal and lattice structure and their
imperfection
2. Understand importance of equilibrium diagrams and their uses in developing materials
3. Understand the process of heat treatment of different nonferrous alloys and tool steel
and decide a heat treatment to acquire their desired properties
4. Demonstrate acquisition of knowledge of composites, ceramics, orthodontal and bio-
materials
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1. Aspects of Physical Metallurgy:

Crystal structure, systems and Barvias lattices, Indexing of lattice planes (Miller’s Indices),
Indexing of lattice directions, Co-ordination Number (Ligency), Density calculations and
imperfections in crystals
Unit 2. Study of Equilibrium diagrams for Fe-C systems, Cu - Bronze alloys i.e. Cu:Zn, Cu:Sn,
Cu:Al etc., Developments in metallic materials like HSLA state, maraging steels, dual phased
steels, creep resisting steels, materials for high and low temperature applications, Nimerics,
Inconels, Haste Alloys etc., Al, Ni alloys, Ti, Mg alloys.
Unit 3. Heat Treatment of Nonferrous alloys, Heat Treatment of Tool steels
Unit 4. Orthodental materials, Bio material, Prosthetic materials, Nano materials, super
conducting materials, sports materials.
Unit 5. Composites, ceramics, cermets, shape memory alloys their manufacturing techniques,
advantages and limitations.
Unit 6. Surface coatings and their tribological aspects. PVD, CVD, IVD ion implantation method.
Reference Books
1. Engineering Metallurgy, R. A. Higgins, Viva Books Pvt. Ltd.
2. Elements of Material Science and Engineering, Lawrence H., Van Vlack Addison-
[ 180 ]
Wesley Publishing Company

3. Principles of Material Science and Engineering, William F. Smith, McGraw-Hill
Book Co.
4. Material Science, R. B. Gupta, Satya Publications, New Delhi.
5. A Text Book of Material Science and Metallurgy, O. P. Khanna, Dhanpat Rai and
Sons, New Delhi.
6. Material Science and Engineering an Introduction, William D. Callister, Jr., John
Wiley and Sons Inc.
7. Smithells Metals Reference Book, E. A. Brandes and G. B. Brook, Butterworth
Heinemann.
8. Biomaterials and Bioengineering Handbook, Donald L. Wise, Marcel Dekker Inc.
Dissertation (Phase-I)
Ting Scheme
Lectures: hr/week
Course Outcomes:
1. Students will learn to survey the relevant literature such as books, national/international
refereed journals and contact resource persons for the selected topic of research.
1. Students will be able to use different experimental techniques.
2. Students will be able to use different software/ computational/analytical tools.
3. Students will be able to design and develop an experimental set up/ equipment/test rig.
4. Students will be able to conduct tests on existing set ups/equipments and draw logical
conclusions from the results after analyzing them.
5. Students will be able to either work in a research environment or in an industrial
environment.
Syllabus Contents:
The Project Work will start in semester III and should preferably be a problem with
research potential and should involve scientific research, design, generation/collection and
analysis of data, determining solution and must preferably bring out the individual
contribution. Seminar should be based on the area in which the candidate has undertaken
the dissertation work as per the common instructions for all branches of M. Tech. The
examination shall consist of the preparation of report consisting of a detailed problem
statement and a literature review. The preliminary results (if available) of the problem may
also be discussed in the report. The work has to be presented in front of the examiners
panel set by Head and PG coordinator. The candidate has to be in regular contact with his
guide and the topic of dissertation must be mutually decided by the guide and student.
Dissertation (Phase- II)
[ 181 ]
Ting Scheme
Practical Hours: 32 per week
Course Outcomes:
1. Students will develop attitude of lifelong learning and will develop interpersonal skills
to deal with people working in diversified field will.
2. Students will learn to write technical reports and research papers to publish at national
and international level.
3. Students will develop strong communication skills to defend their work in front of
technically qualified audience.
Syllabus Contents:
It is a continuation of Project work started in semester III. He has to submit the report in
prescribed format and also present a seminar. The dissertation should be presented in
standard format as provided by the department. The candidate has to prepare a detailed
project report consisting of introduction of the problem, problem statement, literature
review, objectives of the work, methodology (experimental set up or numerical details as
the case may be) of solution and results and discussion. The report must bring out the
conclusions of the work and future scope for the study. . The work has to be presented in
front of the examiners panel consisting of an approved external examiner, an internal
examiner and a guide, co-guide etc. as decided by the Head and PG coordinator. The
candidate has to be in regular contact with his guide.
OPEN ELECTIVES
Business Analytics
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
Course Code
Credits
Prerequisites
Course objective
[ 182 ]


LECTURES
Unit1:
organisation, competitive advantages of Business Analytics. 9
Statistical Tools: Statistical Notation, Descriptive Statistical methods, Review of
overview.
Unit 2:
Important Resources, Business Analytics Personnel, Data and models for Business 8
analytics, problem solving, Visualizing and Exploring Data, Business Analytics
Technology.
Unit 3:
Measuring contribution of Business analytics, Managing Changes. 9
Descriptive Analytics, predictive analytics, predicative Modelling, Predictive
Unit 4:
Models for Time Series with a Linear Trend, Forecasting Time Series with 10
Seasonality, Regression Forecasting with Casual Variables, Selecting Appropriate
Forecasting Models.
Analytic Solver Platform, New-Product Development Model, Newsvendor Model,
Overbooking Model, Cash Budget Model.
Unit 5:
Unit 6:
COURSE OUTCOMES
[ 183 ]

and deep analytics.
Reference:

OPEN ELECTIVES
Industrial Safety
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week

[ 184 ]
Reference:

OPEN ELECTIVES
Operations Research
Teaching Scheme
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:
Unit 2
Unit 3:
problem - CPM/PERT
Unit 4
[ 185 ]
Unit 5
References:

Open Elective
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week

[ 186 ]

References:

Open Elective
Composite Materials
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week

performance.


TEXT BOOKS:
[ 187 ]

Germany.
References:

Tasi.
Open Elective
Waste to Energy
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
[ 188 ]
References:
Sons, 1996.
Course objectives:
Syllabus
Suggested Studies:
book .
[ 189 ]

they work in
Syllabus
Uni CONTENTS Hours
ts
1 Introduction 4
Hazards With Special Reference To Tsunami; Post-Disaster Diseases And
Epidemics
Hazard; Evaluation Of Risk: Application Of Remote Sensing, Data From
5 Risk Assessment 4
[ 190 ]
SUGGESTED READINGS:
Royal book Company.
India, New Delhi.
Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours
2  Order 8
Suggested reading

Course Output
[ 191 ]

Course Objectives

Syllabus
Unit Content Hours


[ 192 ]
Suggested reading
Press, New Delhi
Course outcomes
Course Objectives:
1. Understand the premises informing the twin themes of liberty and freedom from a civil
rights perspective.
2. To address the growth of Indian opinion regarding modern Indian intellectuals’
constitutional role and entitlement to civil and economic rights as well as the emergence of
nationhood in the early years of Indian nationalism.
Syllabus
Units Content Hours
1 History 4
2 Preamble 4
Salient Features
3 4
4  Organs of Governance: 4
[ 193 ]
 Parliament
 Composition
 Executive
 President
 Governor
5 4
 ElectionCommission: Role and Functioning.
Suggested reading

Course Outcomes:

1. Discuss the growth of the demand for civil rights in India for the bulk of Indians before
the arrival of Gandhi in Indian politics.
3. Discuss the circumstances surrounding the foundation of the Congress Socialist Party
[CSP] under the leadership of Jawaharlal Nehru and the eventual failure of the proposal
of direct elections through adult suffrage in the Indian Constitution.
Course Objectives:
[ 194 ]

Syllabus
Units Content Hours
terminology
1 4
 Methodology for the in depth stage: quality assessment of included
studies.
3 4
practices.
up support
 Peer support
4 4
 Research design
 Contexts
5  Pedagogy 2
Suggested reading
1. Ackers J, Hardman F (2001) Classroom interaction in Kenyan primary schools,

Compare, 31 (2): 245-261.
[ 195 ]
3. Akyeampong K (2003) Teacher training in Ghana - does it count? Multi-site teacher

education research project (MUSTER) country report 1. London: DFID.
4. Akyeampong K, Lussier K, Pryor J, Westbrook J (2013) Improving teaching and learning
of basic maths and reading in Africa: Does teacher preparation count? International
Journal Educational Development, 33 (3): 272–282.
5. Alexander RJ (2001) Culture and pedagogy: International comparisons in primary
education. Oxford and Boston: Blackwell.
Course Outcomes:

4.
[ 196 ]
Course Objectives

Syllabus
Unit Content Hours


Types of pranayam
Suggested reading

Course Outcomes:

Course Objectives
[ 197 ]
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours

 Verses- 71,73,75,78 (do’s)

23, 35,
 Chapter 12 -Verses 13, 14, 15, 16,17, 18
Suggested reading
2. Bhartrihari’s Three Satakam (Niti-sringar-vairagya) by P.Gopinath,Rashtriya Sanskrit

Course Outcomes
[ 198 ]
MODEL CURRICULUM
of
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING

www.aicte-india.org
[ 199 ]
M.Tech.(Chemical Engineering)
Semester I
Sr. No. Course Type/Code Course Name
1 Core 1 Mathematical and Statistical Methods in Chemical Engineering
2 Core 2 Advanced Separation

Processes
3 Prog. Specific Elective I
Elective One from the list Electives I
4 Prog. Specific Elective – II
Elective One from the list of Electives II
5 Lab1 Laboratory 0I: Process Modeling and Simulation laboratory
6 Lab2 Laboratory II Advanced separation processes
7 Research Methodology and IPR
8 Audit 1 Audit course
Semester II
Sr. No. Course Code Course Name
1 Core 3 Advanced transport phenomena
2 Core 4 Advanced Reaction

Engineering
3 Program Specific Elective – III

Elective One from the list of Electives III
4 Program Specific Elective – IV
Elective One from the list of Electives III
5 Lab 3 Advanced Chemical Reaction Engineering laboratory
6 Lab 4 Advanced Chemical Engineering Laboratory
7 Mini Project
8 Aud2 Audit course 2
Semester III
1. Program Specific Elective – V
Elective One from the list Electives V
2. Open Elective 1. Business Analytics
[ 200 ]
################################
6. Waste to Energy
Sr. Course
Course Name
No. Code
Audit course 1 & 2

4. Value Education
6. Pedagogy Studies
[ 201 ]
Semester I
Sr. Course Course Name Teaching Scheme Credits
No. Type/Code Hrs/Week
L T P
1 Core 1 Mathematical and Statistical Methods in 3 0 0 3
Chemical Engineering
2 Core 2 Advanced Separation Processes 3 0 0 3
3 Prog. Elective I 3 0 0 3
Specific One from the list Electives I
Elective
4 Prog. Elective – II 3 0 0 3
Specific One from the list of Electives II
Elective
5 Lab1 Laboratory 0I:Process Modeling and 0 0 4 2
Simulation laboratory
6 Lab2 Laboratory II Advanced separation 0 0 4 2

processes
7 Research Methodology and IPR 2 0 0 2

8 Audit 1 Audit course 2 0 0 0
Total 16 0 8 18
Semester II
Sr. Course Course Name Teaching Credits

No. Code Scheme
Hrs/Week
L T P
1 Core 3 Advanced transport phenomena 3 0 0 3
2 Core 4 Advanced Reaction 3 0 0 3
Engineering
3 Program Elective – III 3 0 0 3

Specific One from the list of Electives III
Elective
4 Program Elective – IV 3 0 0 3
Specific One from the list of Electives III
Elective
5 Lab 3 Advanced Chemical Reaction Engineering 0 0 4 2
laboratory
6 Lab 4 Advanced Chemical Engineering Laboratory 0 0 4 2
7 Mini Project 0 0 4 2
8 Aud2 Audit course 2 2 0 0 0
[ 202 ]
Total 14 0 12 18
Semester-III
No. Code Scheme
Hrs/Week
1. Program Elective – V 3 0 0 3
Specific One from the list Electives V
Elective
2. Open 1. Business Analytics 3 0 0 3
Elective 2. Industrial Safety
6. Waste to Energy
3. Dissertat Dissertation Phase – I 0 0 20 10
ion
Total 06 0 20 16
Semester-IV
Course Name Credits
No. Code L T P
1. Dissertation Dissertation Phase – II -- -- 32 16
Total -- -- -- 16
Total 68
Audit course 1 & 2

4. Value Education
6. Pedagogy Studies
[ 203 ]

List of Electives
[Elective – III] (a): Modern concepts in Catalysis and Surface Phenomenon III
[Elective – III] (b): Advanced Downstream Processes
[Elective – III] (c): Computational Fluid Dynamics
[Elective – III] (d): Bioprocess Engineering
[Elective – IV] (a): Process Intensification I
[Elective – IV] (b): Phase transitions in Process Equipment II
[Elective – IV] (c): Micro and Nano fluidics III
[Elective – IV] (d): Process Integration IV
[Elective – IV] (e): Transport in porous Media V
[Elective – IV] (f): Micro Flow Chemistry and Process Technology VI
[Elective – IV] (g): Process Plant Design & Flow sheeting VII
[Elective – I] (a): Process Design and Synthesis I
[Elective – I] (b): Chemical Reactor Analysis
[Elective – I] (c): Fluidization Engineering
[Elective – II] (a): Industrial Pollution Control II
[Elective – II] (b): Application of Nanotechnology in Chemical Engineering
[Elective – II] (c): Chemoinformatics

[Elective – V] (a): Design of Experiments and Parameter Estimation
[Elective – V] (b): Computer Aided Design
[Elective – V (c): Cleaner Production
Semester-I
1). Mathematical and Statistical Methods in Chemical Engineering
Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives:
1. To give students an insight in various Chemical Engineering Processes using advanced
Numerical and Statistical Methods.
2. To provide adequate background of Mathematics to deal with Chemical Engineering
Problems
3. To understand research papers on relevant topics involving advanced Mathematics.
4. To study correlation and regression of multivariate data.
5. To evaluate Experimental design methods and statistical quality control measures.
Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Students should be able to solve system of linear algebraic equations

2. Students should be able to do numerical integrations of functions.
3. Students should be able to fit relationship between two data sets using linear, non-linear
regression.
4. Students should be able to calculate maxima/minima and functions.
Unit-1: Equation Forms in Process Modeling, Introduction and Motivation, Linear and Nonlinear
Algebraic Equation, Optimization based Formulations, ODE-IVPs and Differential Algebraic
Equations, ODE-BVPs and PDEs, Abstract model forms.Fundamentals of Vector Spaces,
Generalized concepts of vector space, sub-space, linear dependence, Concept of basis, dimension,
norms defined on general vector spaces, Examples of norms defined on different vector spaces,
Cauchy sequence and convergence, introduction to concept of completeness and Banach spaces,
Inner product in a general vector space, Inner-product spaces and their examples, Cauchy-Schwartz
inequality and orthogonal sets, Gram-Schmidt process and generation of orthogonal basis, well
known orthogonal basisMatrix norms.
Unit-2: Problem Discretization Using Approximation Theory, Transformations and unified view of
problems through the concept of transformations, classification of problems in numerical analysis,
Problem discretization using approximation theory, Weierstrass theorem and polynomial
approximations, Taylor series approximation, Finite difference method for solving ODE-BVPs with
examples, Finite difference method for solving PDEs with examples, Newton’s Method for solving
nonlinear algebraic equation as an application of multivariable Taylor series, Introduction to
polynomial interpolation, Polynomial and function interpolations, Orthogonal Collocations method
for solving ODE-BVPs, Orthogonal Collocations method for solving ODE-BVPs with examples,
Orthogonal Collocations method for solving PDEs with examples, Necessary and sufficient
[ 205 ]
conditions for unconstrained multivariate optimization, Least square approximations, Formulation

and derivation of weighted linear least square estimation, Geormtraic interpretation of least
squaresProjections and least square solution, Function approximations and normal equation in any
inner product space, Model Parameter Estimation using linear least squares method, Gauss Newton
Method, Method of least squares for solving ODE-BVP, Gelarkin’s method and generic equation
forms arising in problem discretization, Errors in Discretization, Generaic equation forms in
transformed problems.
Unit-3: Solving Linear Algebraic Equations, System of linear algebraic equations, conditions for
existence of solution - geometric interpretations (row picture and column picture), review of
concepts of rank and fundamental theorem of linear algebra, Classification of solution approaches as
direct and iterative, review of Gaussian elimination, Introduction to methods for solving sparse linear
systems: Thomas algorithm for tridiagonal and block tridiagonal matrices, Block-diagonal, triangular
and block-triangular systems, solution by matrix decomposition, Iterative methods: Derivation of
Jacobi, Gauss-Siedel and successive over-relaxation methods, Convergence of iterative solution
schemes: analysis of asymptotic behavior of linear difference equations using Eigen
values,Convergence of iterative solution schemes with examples, Convergence of iterative solution
schemes, Optimization based solution of linear algebraic equations, Matrix conditioning, examples
of well conditioned and ill-conditioned linear systems.
Unit-4: Solving Nonlinear Algebraic Equations, Method of successive substitutions derivative free
iterative solution approachesSecant method, regulafalsi method and Wegsteine iterations, Modified
Newton’s method and qausi-Newton method with Broyden’s update, Optimization based
formulations and Leverberg-Marquardt method, Contraction mapping principle and introduction to
convergence analysis.
Unit-5: Solving Ordinary Differential Equations, Initial Value Problems (ODE-IVPs), Introduction,
Existence of Solutions (optional topic),Analytical Solutions of Linear ODE-IVPs, Analytical
Solutions of Linear ODE-IVPs (contd.), Basic concepts in numerical solutions of ODE-IVP: step
size and marching, concept of implicit and explicit methods, Taylor series based and Runge-Kutta
methods: derivation and examplesRunge-Kutta methods, Multi-step (predictor-corrector)
approaches: derivations and examples, Multi-step (predictor-corrector) approaches: derivations and
examples, Stability of ODE-IVP solvers, choice of step size and stability envelopes, Stability of
ODE-IVP solvers (contd.), stiffness and variable step size implementation, Introduction to solution
methods for differential algebraic equations (DAEs), Single shooting method for solving ODE-
BVPs.
References
Gilbert Strang, Linear Algebra and Its Applications (4th Ed.), Wellesley Cambridge Press (2009).
Philips, G. M.,Taylor, P. J. ; Theory and Applications of Numerical Analysis (2nd Ed.), Academic
Press, 1996.
Gourdin, A. and M Boumhrat; Applied Numerical Methods. Prentice Hall India, New Delhi, (2000).
Gupta, S. K.; Numerical Methods for Engineers.Wiley Eastern, New Delhi, 1995.
Linz, P.; Theoretical Numerical Analysis, Dover, New York, (1979).
Gilbert Strang , Introduction to Applied Mathematics, Wellesley Cambridge Press (2009)
2). Advanced Separation Processes
Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives:
1. To familiarize students with various advanced aspects of separation processes and the
selection of separation processes.
2. To enable students to understand the principles and processes of adsorption, membrane
separation and chromatography and to design an absorber or a membrane unit to achieve a
specified separation.
3. To introduce them to new trends used in the separation technologies.
Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
1. List situations where liquid–liquid extraction might be preferred to distillation, make a
preliminary selection of a solvent using group-interaction rules, Size simple extraction
equipment.
2. Differentiate between chemisorption and physical adsorption, List steps involved in
adsorption of a solute, and which steps may control the rate of adsorption, Explain the
concept of breakthrough in fixed-bed adsorption.
3. Explain how crystals grow, Explain the importance of supersaturation in crystallization.
Describe effects of mixing on supersaturation, mass transfer, growth, and scale-up of
crystallization.
4. Explain membrane processes in terms of the membrane, feed, sweep, retentate, permeate, and
solute membrane interactions. Distinguish among microfiltration, ultrafiltration,
nanofiltration, virus filtration, sterile filtration, filter-aid filtration, and reverse osmosis in
terms of average pore size. Explain common idealized flow patterns in membrane modules.
Unit-1: Introduction: Conventional separation processes - Absorption,Adsorption, Conventional

separation processes - Distillation, Drying, Conventional separation processes - Extraction,
Diffusion, Conventional separation processes - Leaching, Crystalisation, Advances in separation
techniques based on size, Advances in separation techniques based on surface properties, Advances
in separation techniques based on ionic properties, Cross flow filtration, Electro filtration, Dual
functional filter, Surface based solid-liquid separations involving a second liquid, Sirofloc filter
Unit-2: Bubble and Foam Fractionation: Nature of bubbles and foams, stabilityof foams, foam
fractionation techniques, batch, continuous, single stageand multistage columns.
Types and choice of membranes, Plate and frame, spiral wound membranes, Tubular and hollow
fibre membrane reactors, Membrane Permeates: Dialysis, Reverse osmosis, Nanofiltration,
ultrafiltration, microfiltration, Donnan dialysis, Ceramic membranes
Unit-3: Membrane Separation: Characteristics of organic and inorganicmembranes, basis of

membrane selection, osmotic pressure, partitioncoefficient and permeability, concentration
polarization, electrolytediffusion and facilitated transport, macro-filtration, ultra-filtration,reverse
osmosis, electro-dialysis. Industrial applications.
Unit-4: Special Processes: Liquid membrane separation, super-criticalextraction, adsorptive

separation-pressure, vacuum and thermal swing,pervaporation and permeation, nano-separation.
Unit-5: Chromatographic Methods of Separation: Gel, solvent, ion and highperformance liquid
chromatography.
King C.J., “Separation Processes”, Tata McGraw Hill. 1982.

Nakagawal, O. V., “Membrane Science and Technology”, Marcel Dekker, 1992.
[ 207 ]
Humphrey, J and G. Keller, Separation Process Technology, McGraw-Hill, 1997

Khoury F.M., “Multistage Separation Processes”, 3rd Ed., CRC Press. 2004.
Wankat P.C., “Separation Process Engineering”, 2nd Ed., Prentice Hall.2006.
Seader J.D. and Henley E.J., “Separation Process Principles”, 2nd Ed.,Wiley.2006
Basmadjian D., “Mass Transfer and Separation Processes: Principlesand Applications”, 2nd Ed.,
CRC Press.2007.
Phillip C. Wankat , Separation Process Engineering (2nd Edition),Printice Hall,2007
Rousseau, R. W., “Handbook of Separation Process Technology”, John Wiley, New York, 2009.
[Elective – I] (a): Process Design and Synthesis
Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives:
1. To understand the systematic approaches for the development of conceptual chemical process
designs
2. To learn the advances in problem formulation and software capabilities which offer the
promise of a new generation of practical process synthesis techniques based directly on
structural optimization.
3. Learning chemical process synthesis, analysis, and optimization principles
4. Product design and development procedure and Process life cycle assessment.
1. Analyze alternative processes and equipment
2. Synthesize a chemical process flow sheet that would approximate the real process
3. Design best process flow sheet for a given product
4. Perform economic analysis related to process design and evaluate project profitability
Introduction
Introduction to fundamental concepts and principles of process synthesis and design and use of flow
sheet simulators to assist process design. Process Flow sheet Models: An Introduction to Design,
Chemical process synthesis, analysis and optimization. Introduction to commercial process design
software such as HYSYS, Aspen plus etc., Chemical Process (reactor, heat exchanger, distillation
etc) analysis using commercial software
Product designand developments
Process engineering economics and project evaluation Life Cycle Assessments of process: From
design to product development, Engineering Economic Analysis of Chemical Processes, Project
costing and performance analysis, Environmental concerns, Green engineering, Engineering ethics,
Health and safety.
Reactor Networks
Geometry of mixing and basic reactor types, The Attainable Region (AR) approach, AR in higher
dimensions & for other processes, Reactive Separation processes, Fundamental behavior and
problems, Separation through reactions. Reactive Residue Curve Maps
Synthesis of Separation Trains
Criteria for selection of separation methods, select ion of equipment: Absorption, Liquid-liquid
extraction Membrane separation, adsorption, leaching, drying, crystallization, Ideal distillation -
Column and sequence fundamentals, Sharp splits & sequencing Phase diagrams for 2, 3 and 4
components, Feasibility and vapor ow rates for single columns, Residue curve basics, Non-ideal
Distillation - Azeotropic systems; detecting binary azeotropes, Residue curve maps for azeotropic
systems, Topological analysis, Feasibility for single azeotropic columns ,Binary VLLE and pressure-
swing separation, Non-ideal distillation synthesis. Equipment sequencing: VLE + VLLE, Detailed
Residue Curve Maps, Residue curve maps: Interior structure
Heat Exchanger Network Synthesis
Minimum heating and cooling requirements, Minimum Energy Heat Exchanger Network, Loops and
Paths, Reducing Number of Exchangers, HENS basics & graphics, The pinch point approach, Stream
Splitting, Performance targets, trade-off & utilities, Heat & power integration, HENS as
mathematical programming
References
1. Douglas, J. “Conceptual Design of Chemical Processes”,New York, NY: McGraw-Hill
Science/Engineering/Math, 1988. ISBN: 0070177627.
2. Seider, W. D., J. D. Seader, and D. R. Lewin. “Product and Process Design Principles:
Synthesis, Analysis, and Evaluation”,. 2nd ed. New York, NY: Wiley, 2004. ISBN:
0471216631.
3. Richard Turton, Richard C. Bailie, Wallace B. Whiting, Joseph A. Shaeiwitz., “Analysis,
Synthesis, and Design of Chemical Processes”, 2nd Edition, 2002, Prentice Hall ISBN-10: 0-
13-064792-6
4. Biegler L.T., Grossmann I.E. and Westerberg A.W., “Systematic Methods of Chemical
Process Design”, Prentice Hall, 1997.
[Elective – I] (b): Chemical Reactor Analysis
Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives:
1. To learn the heterogeneous catalyzed reactions and the models involved in reactor design
2. To study mass and heat transfer mechanisms in the different reactors
3. To appreciate the importance of both external and internal transport effects in gas-solid and
liquid-solid systems
4. To design isothermal and non-isothermal reactors for heterogeneous catalytic reactions
[ 209 ]
1. Evaluate heterogeneous reactor performance considering mass transfer limitations

2. Perform the energy balance and obtain concentration profiles in multiphase reactors.
3. Estimate the performance of multiphase reactors under non-isothermal conditions
Unit-I: Chemical factor affecting the choice of the reactor, fundamental mass, energy and
momentum balance, Model for a semi-batch reactor, optimum operation policies and control
strategies, optimal batch operation time, optimal temperature policies, stability of operation and
transient behavior for mixed flow reactor. Transient CSTR analysis, Hot spot equation; Optimization
using Lagrange multiplier, Poyntrgins maximum principle.
Unit-II: Fixed bed catalytic reactor: The importance and scale of fixed bed catalytic processes,
factors in preliminary design, modeling of fixed bed reactor. Pseudo-homogeneous model, the multi-
bed adiabatic reactor, auto-thermal operation, non-steady-state model with axial mixing, two
dimensional pseudo-homogeneous models, heterogeneous models, global and intrinsic rates,
Mechanism of catalytic reactions, Engineering properties of catalysts - BET surface area, pore
volume, pore size, pore size distribution, one dimensional and two dimensional model equation.
Unit-III: Multiphase flow reactor: Types of multiphase flow reactors, packed columns, plate
columns, empty columns, stirred vessel reactors.Development of rate equations for solid catalyzed
fluid phase reactions; Estimation of kinetic parameters. External mass and heat transfer in catalyst
particles. Stability and selectivity, Packed bed reactor, slurry reactor; Trickle bed reactor and
fluidized bed reactor. Intra-particle heat and mass transfer - Wheelers parallel pore model, random
pore model of Wakao and Smith. deactivation of catalyst, Ideal and non-ideal flow in reactors.
Unit-IV: Design model for multiphase flow reactors, gas and liquid phase in completely mixed and
plug flow, gas phase in plug flow and liquid phase in completely mixed flow, effective diffusion
model, two zone model, specific design aspects, packed absorber, two-phase fixed bed reactor, plate
column, spray tower, bubble reactor, stirred vessel reactor.Computer - aided reactor design.
Unit-V: Temperature effects in reactor: Introduction, well mixed system with steady feed, the
stability and start-up of CSTR, limit cycles and oscillatory reactions, the plug flow reactors, tubular
reactor, diffusion control, prorogation of reaction zone.
Reference Books:
1. Froment G. F. and K.B.Bischoff, “ Chemical Reactor Analysis and Design”, John Wiley & Sons
2. Denbigh K. G. and J.C. Turner, “ Chemical Reactor and Theory – an Introduction”, 3rd edition
Cambridge University Press.
3. Bruce Nauman, “ Chemical Reactor Design”, John Wiley & Sons
4. Elements of Chemical Reaction Engineering by H. Scott Fogler
5. Chemical Engineering Kinetics by J. M. Smith.
6. Chemical Reactor Design and Operation by K. R. Westerterp, W. P. M. Van Swaaij and A. A. C.
M. BeenackersReference
7. Chemical Reactor Analysis and Design by G. F. Froment and K. B. Bischoff
[Elective – I] (c): Fluidization Engineering
Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives
1. To study the phenomenon of fluidization with industrial processing objective
2. To study the various regimes of fluidization and their mapping.
3. To study the design of equipments based on fluidization technique
1. Performing and understanding the behavior fluidization in fluidized bed
2. Evaluate the characterization of particles and power consumption in fluidization regimes
3. Understanding the applicability of the fluidized beds in chemical industries
Introduction to fluidization and applications

Phenomenon of fluidization, behavior of fluidized bed, contacting modes, advantages and
disadvantages of fluidization, fluidization quality, selection of contacting mode, Beds for Industrial
applications, coal gasification, synthesis reactions, physical operations, cracking of hydrocarbons
Mapping of fluidization regimes
characterization of particles, mechanics of flow around single particles, minimum fluidization

velocity, pressure drop versus velocity diagram, The Geldart classification of solids, fluidization with
carryover of particles, terminal velocity of particles, distributor types, gas entry region of bed,
pressure drop requirements, design of gas distributor, power consumption
Bubbling fluidized beds
Davidson model for bubble in a fluidized bed, and its implications, the wake region and movement
of solids at bubbles, coalescence and splitting of bubbles, bubble formation above a distributor, slug
flow, Turbulent and fast fluidization - mechanics, flow regimes and design equations, Emulsion
movement, estimation of bed properties, bubble rise velocity, scale up aspects, flow models, two
phase model, K-L model
Solids movement and Gas dispersion
Vertical and horizontal movement of solids, Dispersion model, large solids in beds of smaller
particles, staging of fluidized beds
Gas dispersion in beds, gas interchange between bubble and emulsion, estimation of gas interchange
coefficient, Heat and mass transfer in fluidized systems, Mixing in fluidized systems - measurements
and models.
Fluidized bed reactors

Entrainment and elutriation, Freeboard behavior, gas outlet, entrainment from tall vessel, freeboard
entrainment model, high velocity fluidization, pressure drop in turbulent and fast fluidization,
Slugging, Spouted beds, Circulating Fluidized Beds.
Mathematical model of a homogeneous fluidized bed, Design of catalytic reactors, pilot plant
reactors, information for design, bench scale reactors, design decisions, deactivating catalysts,Design
of noncatalytic reactors, kinetic models for conversion of solids, models for shrinking particles,
conversion of solids of unchanging size
[ 211 ]
References
1. Levenspiel O. and Kunnii D., “Fluidization Engineering”, John Wiley, 1972

2. Liang-Shih Fan, “Gas-Liquid-Solid Fluidization Engineering”, Butterworths, 1989
[Elective – II] (a): Industrial Pollution Control
Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives
1. To understand the importance of industrial pollution and its abatement
2. To study the underlying principles of industrial pollution control
3. To acquaint the students with case studies
4. Student should be able to design complete treatment system
1. Recognize the causes and effects of environmental pollution
2. Analyze the mechanism of proliferation of pollution
3. Develop methods for pollution abatement and waste minimization
4. Design treatment methods for gas, liquid and solid wastes
Industries & Environment

Industrial scenario in India - Industrial activity and Environment - Uses of Water by industry -
Sources and types of industrial wastewater - Industrial wastewater and environmental impacts -
Regulatory requirements for treatment of industrial wastewater - Industrial waste survey - Industrial
wastewater generation rates, characterization and variables - Population equivalent - Toxicity of
industrial effluents and Bioassay tests.
Industrial Noise pollution

Sources of noise pollution, characterization of noise pollution prevention& control of noise pollution,
Factories Act 1948 for regulatory aspects of noise pollution.
Air Pollutant Abatement
Air pollutants scales of concentration, lapse rate and stability, plume behavior, dispersion of air
pollutants, atmospheric dispersion equation and its solutions, Gaussian plume models.Air pollution
control methods, Source correction methods, Design concepts for pollution abatement systems for
particulates and gases. Such as gravity chambers, cyclone separators, filters, electrostatic
precipitators, condensation, adsorption and absorption, thermal oxidation and biological processes.
Waste water treatment processes
Design concepts for primary treatment, grid chambers and primary sedimentation basins, selection of
treatment process flow diagram, elements of conceptual process design, design of thickner,
biological treatment Bacterial population dynamics, kinetics of biological growth and its applications
to biological treatment, process design relationships and analysis, determination of kinetic
coefficients, activated sludge process. Design, trickling filter design considerations, advanced
treatment processes, Study of environment pollution from process industries and their abatement:
Fertilizer, paper and pulp, inorganic acids, petroleum and petrochemicals, recovery of materials from
process effluents.
Solid waste and Hazardous waste management
Sources and classification, properties, public helth aspects, Sanitary land fill design, Hazardous
waste classification and rules, management strategies, Nuclear waste disposal Treatment methods –
component separation, chemical and biological treatment, incineration, solidification and
stabilization, and disposal methods, Latest Trends in solid waste management.
References
1. Rao C.S., “Environmental Pollution Control Engineering”, 2nd edition

2. Mahajan S.P., “Pollution Control in Process Industries”.
3. Nemerow N.L., “Liquid waste of industry- theories, Practices and Treatment”, Addison
Wesley, New York, 1971
4. Weber W.J., “Physico-Chemical Processes for water quality control”, Wiley Interscience
New York, 1969
5. Strauss W., “Industrial Gas Cleaning”, Pergamon, London, 1975
6. Stern A.C., “Air pollution”, Volumes I to VI, academic Press, New York, 1968
7. Peterson and Gross .E Jr., “Hand Book of Noise Measurement”, 7th Edn, 2003.
8. Antony Milne, “Noise Pollution: Impact and Counter Measures”, David & Charles PLC,
2009.
[Elective – II] (b): Application of Nanotechnology in Chemical Engineering
Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives
1. To understand the fundamentals of the preparation and properties of nanomaterials from a
chemical engineering perspective.
2. To gain knowledge of structure, properties, manufacturing, and applications of various
nanomaterials and characterization methods in nanotechnology
3. To give a survey of the key processes, principles, and techniques used to build novel
nanomaterials and assemblies of nanomaterials
1. Understanding the different top down and bottom up approaches for nanoparticles
2. Get to know the different applications of nanoparticles in chemical engineering field.
3. Learning the characterization techniques for nanoparticles.
Introduction
Introduction to nanotechnology, Feynman’s Vision-There’s Plenty of Room at the Bottom,

Classification of nanostructures, Nanoscale architecture, Chemical interactions at nanoscale, Types
of carbon based nanomaterials, Synthesis of fullerenes, Graphene, Carbon nanotubes,
Functionalization of carbon nanotubes, One, two and multidimensional structures, Crystallography.
[ 213 ]
Approaches to Synthesis of Nanoscale Materials and characterization
Top down approach, Bottom up approach Bottom-up vs. top-down fabrication; Top-down:
Atomization, Sol gel technique, Arc discharge, Laser ablation, RF sputtering; Bottom-up: Chemical
Vapor Deposition (CVD), Metal Oxide Chemical Vapor Deposition (MOCVD), Atomic layer
deposition (ALD), Molecular beam Molecular self-assembly; Ultrasound assisted, microwave
assisted, Mini, micro and nanoemulsion. Wet grinding method, Spray pyrolysis, Ultrasound assisted
pyrolysis, atomization techniques. Surfactant based synthesis procedures, Types of molecular
modeling methods. Size, shape, crystallinity, topology, chemistry analysis usingX-ray imaging,
Transmission Electron Microscopy, HRTEM, Scanning Electron Microscopy, SPM, AFM, STM,
PSD, Zeta potential, DSC and TGA.
Semiconductors and Quantum dots
Intrinsic semiconductors, Extrinsic semiconductors, Review of classical mechanics, de Broglie's

hypothesis, Heisenberg uncertainty principle Pauli exclusion principle Schrödinger's equation
Properties of the wave function, Applications: quantum well, wire, dot, Quantum cryptography
Polymer-based and Polymer-filled Nanocomposites
Nanoscale Fillers, Nanofiber or Nanotube Fillers, Plate-like Nanofillers, Equi-axed Nanoparticle

Fillers, Inorganic Filler Polymer Interfaces, Processing of Polymer Nanocomposites,
Nanotube/Polymer Composites, Layered Filler Polymer Composite Processing,
Nanoparticle/Polymer Composite Processing: Direct Mixing, Solution Mixing, In-Situ
Polymerization, In-Situ Particle Processing, In-Situ Particle Processing Metal/Polymer
Nanocomposites, Properties of nanocomposites.
Applications to Safety, Environment and Others
Chemical and Biosensors- Classification and Main Parameters of Chemical and Biosensors,
Nanostructured Materials for Sensing, Waste Water Treatment, Nanobiotechnology, Drug Delivery,
Nanocoatings, Self cleaning Materials, Hydrophobic Nanoparticles, Photocatalysts, Biological
nanomaterials, Nanoelectronics, Nanomachines & nanodevices, Societal, Health and Environmental
Impacts.
References
1. Louis Hornyak G., Dutta Joydeep, Tibbals Harry F. and Rao Anil K., “Introduction to
Nanoscience”, (CRC Press of Taylor and Francis Group LLC), May 2008, 856pp, ISBN-13:
978142004805
2. Ajayan P. M., Schadler L. S., Braun P. V., “Nanocomposite Science and Technology”, Edited by
WILEY-VCH Verlag GmbH Co. KGaA, Weinheim ISBN: 3-527-30359-6, 2003.
3. Kelsall Robert W., Hamley Ian W., GeogheganMark, “Nanoscale Science and
Technology”,John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2006.
4. Kal Ranganathan Sharma, “Nanostructuring Operations in Nanoscale Science and Engineering”,

McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. ISBN: 978-0-07-162609-5, 2010.
5. “Organic and inorganic nanostructures”.-(Artech House MEMS series), Nabok, Alexei, ISBN 1-
58053-818-5, 2005.
[Elective – II] (c): Chemoinformatics
Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives
1. To give students a concept of Chemo-informatics related to chemical structure databases and
database search methods
2. To understand the quantum methods and models involved in drug discovery and targeted
drug delivery
3. To study the application of Chemical Libraries, Virtual Screening, Prediction of
Pharmacological Properties
1. The course will introduce the students preparing for professional work in chemistry must
learn how to retrieve specific information from the enormous and rapidly expanding chemical
literature.
2. The course will provide a broad overview of the computer technology to chemistry in all of
its manifestations.
3. The course will expose the student to current and relevant applications in QSAR and Drug
Design.
Chemo-informatics
Introduction, scope and application, Basics of Chemo-informatics, Current Chemo-informatics

resources for synthetic polymers, pigments. Primary, secondary and tertiary sources of chemical
information, Databases: Chemical Structure Databases (PubChem, Binding database, Drugbank),
Database search methods:chemical indexing, proximity searching, 2D and 3D structure and
substructure searching. Drawing the Chemical Structure: 2D & 3D drawing tools (ACD
Chemsketch) Structure optimization.
Introduction to quantum methods
Combinatorial chemistry (library design, synthesis and deconvolution), spectroscopic methods and
analytical techniques,Representation of Molecules and Chemical Reactions:Different types of
[ 215 ]
Notations, SMILES Coding, Structure of Mol files and Sd files (Molecular converter, SMILES
Translator).
Analysis and use of chemical reaction information
Chemical property information, spectroscopic information, analytical chemistry information,

chemical safety information, Drug Designing: Prediction of Properties of Compounds, QSAR Data
Analysis, Structure-Activity Relationships, Electronic properties, Lead Identification, Molecular
Descriptor Analysis.
Target Identification
Molecular Modeling and Structure Elucidation: Homology Modelling (Modeller 9v7, PROCHECK),
Visualization and validation of the Molecule (Rasmol, Pymol Discovery studio), Applications of
Chemoinformatics in Drug Research - Chemical Libraries, Virtual Screening, Prediction of
Pharmacological Properties.
Drug Discovery
Structure based drug designing, Docking Studies (Target Selection, Active site analysis, Ligand
preparation and conformational analysis, Rigid and flexible docking, Structure based design of lead
compounds, Library docking), Pharmacophore - Based Drug Design, Pharmacophore Modeling
(Identification of pharmacophore features, Building 2D/3D pharmacophore hypothesis), Toxicity
Analysis-Pharmacological Properties (Absorption, Distribution and Toxicity), Global Properties
(Oral Bioavailability and Drug-Likeness) (ADME, OSIRIS, and MOLINSPIRATION)
References
1. Bajorath J (2004), “Chemoinformatics: Concepts, Methods and Tools for Drug Discovery”
Humana Press
2. Leach A, Gillet V, “An Introduction to Chemoinformatics” Revised edition, Springer
3. Gasteiger J. Engel T. “A textbook of Chemoinformatics” Wiley- VCH GmbH & Co. KGaA
4. Bunin B. Siesel B. Guillermo M. “Chemoinformatics: Theory, Practice & Products”, Springer
5. Lavine B. (2005), “Chemometrics and Chemoinformatics”, American Chemical Society
6. Casteiger J. and Engel T (2003) “Chemoinformatics” Wiley-VCH
7. Bunin Barry A. Siesel Brian, Morales Guillermo,Bajorath Jürgen. Chemoinformatics:
Theory, Practice, & Products Publisher:New York, Springer. 2006.
8. Leach Andrew R., Valerie J. Gillet, “An introduction to Chemoinformatics”, Publisher:
Kluwer academic, 2003. ISBN: 1402013477
9. Gasteiger Johann, Handbook of Chemoinformatics: From Data to Knowledge (4 Volumes),
2003. Publisher: Wiley-VCH.
Laboratory I Modeling and Simulation laboratory
Laboratory Scheme:
Lecture: 4 h/week
Objectives:
1. To learn Process Modeling and Simulation of Chemical operations and processes.
2. To understand Dynamic Behavior of processes.
3. To understand Close loop control of processes.
4. To learn Dynamic simulation of chemical processes.
5. To get acquainted with Controllability Analysis of chemical processes.
1. Carry out thermodynamic property estimations using property estimation and property
analysis in Aspen.
2. Simulate Mixer, splitter, heat exchangers, reactors, distillation columns.
3. Apply sensitivity, design specification and case study tools in Aspen.
4. Solve linear and non-linear programming problems.
List of experiments: Simulation laboratory practical

1. Thermodynamic property estimations using property estimation and property analysis in Aspen.
2. Simulate Mixer, splitter, heat exchangers, and reactive distillation column.
3. Apply sensitivity, design specification and case study tools in Aspen
4. Solve linear and non-linear programming problems.
5. Controller tuning by Ziegler- Nichol’s & Cohen- Coon methods
6. Stability analysis using Bode diagrams for control systems.
7. Simulation of Ideal Binary Distillation Column
8. Simulation of Heat/Mass Transfer coefficient in 3 phase fluidized bed column
9. Simulation studies of various unit operations using CHEMCAD.
10. Modeling and Simulation of cyclone separator
Note: Simulation can be done using C/C++ / MATLAB/ ASPEN PLUS/ CHEMCAD
Lab Practice: II Advanced separation processes
Laboratory Scheme:
Lecture: 4 h/week
Objectives:
1. To familiarize students with various advanced aspects of separation processes and the
selection of separation processes.
2. To enable students to understand the principles and processes of adsorption, membrane
separation and chromatography and to design an absorber or a membrane unit to achieve a
specified separation.
[ 217 ]
3. To introduce them to new trends used in the separation technologies.
1. Knowledge of mass transfer operations and mechanical operations
2. Students should be able to know the synthesis of materials and applications in separation
processes.
3. Students will be able to provide applicable solutions to separation processes.
Prerequisites:
List of experiments: advanced separation processes
1) Separation of fluoride and arsenic using cellulose acetate asymmetric membrane separation
process
2) Adsorption of dyes from waste water using nano adsorbents.
3) Supercritical extraction of the fragrance.
4) Study the effect of pressure on permeate flux and solution rejection in RO system.
5) Mass transfer studies and study the effect of parameters in separation system using liquid
emulsion membrane.
6) Laboratory experiments on ion exchange membranes: effect of process parameters on flux

etc.
7) Study the reaction with mass transfer: e.g. Synthesis of calcium carbonate.
8) Study the reactive distillation system considering batch and continuous mode
Teaching Scheme
Lectures: 1hrs/week
Course Outcomes:
 Understand that today’s world is controlled by Computer, Information Technology, but tomorrow
world will be ruled by ideas, concept, and creativity.
 Understanding that when IPR would take such important place in growth of individuals & nation, it
is needless to emphasis the need of information about Intellectual Property Right to be promoted
among students in general & engineering in particular.
Understand that IPR protection provides an incentive to inventors for further research work and investment
in R & D, which leads to creation of new and better products, and in turn brings about, economic growth
and social benefits.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1: Meaning of research problem, Sources of research problem, Criteria Characteristics of a good
research problem, Errors in selecting a research problem, Scope and objectives of research problem.
Approaches of investigation of solutions for research problem, data collection, analysis, interpretation,
Necessary instrumentations
Developing a Research Proposal, Format of research proposal, a presentation and assessment by a
review committee
Unit 4: Nature of Intellectual Property: Patents, Designs, Trade and Copyright. Process of Patenting
and Development: technological research, innovation, patenting, development. International Scenario:
International cooperation on Intellectual Property. Procedure for grants of patents, Patenting under
PCT.
Unit 5: Patent Rights: Scope of Patent Rights. Licensing and transfer of technology. Patent information
and databases. Geographical Indications.
Unit 6: New Developments in IPR: Administration of Patent System. New developments in IPR; IPR
of Biological Systems, Computer Software etc. Traditional knowledge Case Studies, IPR and IITs.
References:
 Stuart Melville and Wayne Goddard, “Research methodology: an introduction for science &
engineering students’”
[ 219 ]

T. Ramappa, “Intellectual Property Rights Under WTO”, S. Chand, 2008
Semester II
Core III). Advances in Transport Phenomena

Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives:
1. To familiarize the student with basic concepts of transport phenomena and brief review of
mathematics.
2. To enable students to understand the equations of change for isothermal flow and for non-
isothermal flow.
3. To introduce them details of equations of change for multi component systems.
4. To give them insight into properties of two-dimensional flows and aspects of dimensional
analysis
1. Understand the mechanism of momentum, heat and mass transport for steady and unsteady
flow.
2. Perform momentum, energy and mass balances for a given system at macroscopic and
microscopic scale.
3. Solve the governing equations to obtain velocity, temperature and concentration profiles.
4. Model the momentum, heat and mass transport under turbulent conditions.
5. Develop analogies among momentum, energy and mass transport.
Unit-1:Equations of Change for Isothermal Systems: Equation of Continuity, Equation of

Motion,Equation of Mechanical Energy, Equations of Change in terms of the Substantial Derivative,
Use of the Equations to solve Flow Problems, Dimensional Analysis of the Equations of Change.
Velocity Distributions with more than one Independent Variable: Time Dependent Flow of
Newtonian Fluids. Velocity Distributions in Turbulent Flow -Comparisons of Laminar and Turbulent
Flows, Time Smoothed Equations of Change for Incompressible Fluids, Time Smoothed Velocity
Profile near a wall, Empirical Expressions for the Turbulent Momentum Flux, Turbulent Flow in
Ducts, Turbulent Flow in Jets.
Unit-2: Macroscopic Balances for Isothermal Systems: The Macroscopic Mass Balance, The
Macroscopic Momentum Balance, The Macroscopic Mechanical Energy Balance, Estimation of the
Viscous loss, Use of the Macroscopic Balances for Steady-State Problems, Derivation of the
Macroscopic Mechanical Energy Balance.
Equations of Change for Non-Isothermal Systems: The Energy Equation, Special forms of the
Energy Equation, The Boussine sq Equation of Motion for Forced and Free Convection, Use of the
Equations of change to Solve Steady-State Problems, Dimensional Analysis of the Equations of
Change for Non-Isothermal Systems.
Unit-3:Temperature Distributions in Solids and in Laminar Flow: Heat Conduction with an

Electrical Heat Source, Heat Conduction with a Viscous Heat Source. Temperature Distributions
with more than One Independent Variable - Unsteady Heat Conduction in Solids, Steady Heat
Conduction in Laminar, Incompressible Flow. Temperature Distributions in Turbulent Flow - Time-
Smoothed Equations of Change for Incompressible Non-Isothermal Flow, Time-Smoothed
Temperature Profile near a Wall, Empirical Expressions for the Turbulent Heat Flux Temperature
Distribution for Turbulent Flow in Tubes.
Unit-4:Macroscopic Balances For Non-Isothermal Systems: Macroscopic Energy Balance,

Macroscopic Mechanical Energy Balance, Use Of The Macroscopic Balances To Solve Steady State
Problems With Flat Velocity Profiles, Concentration Distributions in Solids and in Laminar Flow:
Shell Mass Balances Boundary Conditions, Diffusion through a Stagnant Gas Film, Diffusion with a
Heterogeneous Chemical Reaction. Concentration Distributions with more than One Independent
Variable: Time-Dependent Diffusion, Steady-State Transport in Binary Boundary Layers,
Concentration Distributions in Turbulent Flow - Concentration Fluctuations and the Time-Smoothed
Concentration, Time-Smoothing of the Equation of Continuity of A, Semi-Empirical Expressions for
the Turbulent Mass Flux, Enhancement of Mass Transfer by a First-Order Reaction in Turbulent
Flow.
Unit-5:Interphase Transport in Multi-Component Systems: Definition of Transfer Coefficients in

One Phase, Analytical Expressions for Mass Transfer Coefficients, Correlation of Binary Transfer
Coefficients in One Phase, Definition of Transfer Coefficients in Two Phases, Mass Transfer and
Chemical Reactions. Macroscopic Balances For Multi-Component Systems: Macroscopic Mass
Balances, Macroscopic Momentum, Use of the Macroscopic Balances to solve Steady-State
Problems.
References
Thomson W. J., Transport Phenomena, Pearson education, Asia, 2001.
Geankopolis C. J., Transport Processes and Unit Operations, 4th Ed., Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi. 2004.
Bird R. B., Stewart W. E. and Light Foot E. N., Transport Phenomena, Revised 2nd Edition, John
Wiley & Sons, 2007.
Core IV ). Advanced Reaction Engineering
Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives : This Subject is essential for Design of Reactor especially heterogeneous reactors.
Students will learn the energy balance, temperature and concentration profiles in different reactors,
advance design aspects of multiple reactors, students will get insight of importance of population
balance of particles. Role of Reaction Engineering in mitigation of Global warming will also
addressed.
1. Evaluate heterogeneous reactor performance considering mass transfer limitations
2. Perform the energy balance and obtain concentration profiles in multiphase reactors.
3. Estimate the performance of multiphase reactors under non-isothermal conditions.
4. Understand modern reactor technologies for mitigation of global warming
[ 221 ]
Unit-1:Non-elementary Kinetics Importance: Approximations for formulations of Rate laws,

Formulations of Kinetic model.
Effect of flow on conversions in Reactors: Semibatch Reactors : Importance and examples of
applications , Material Balance on Semibatch Reactor, Multiple reaction in Semibatch Reactors,
Conversion Vs Rate in Reactors, Use of POLYMATHS to solve the equations and understanding the
profiles
Non-Isothermal reaction modeling in CSTR & Semi-Batch reactor: Energy Balance equations for
CSTR, PFR and Batch reactors, Adiabatic operations Temperature conversion profiles in PFR,
CSTR, Steady state tubular reactor with heat exchange.
Unit-2:Need for Multi-staging CSTR with multiple stages: Exothermic and Endothermic Reaction
with examples, CSTR with heat effects, Multiple reactions in CSTR and PFR with heat effects, Semi
batch Reactors with heat exchange.
Design of PFR and Packed Bed Tubular Reactors: Radial and Axial mixing in Tubular reactors,
unsteady state in non-isothermal energy balance, CSTR, Energy balance in Batch Reactors, Volume
of reactors calculations for non-isothermal reactors.
Optimal Design of Reactors for Reversible exothermic reactions: Unsteady state non-isothermal
reactor design, adiabatic operation in batch, Heat effects in semi batch unsteady state operation. Auto
thermal Plug flow reactors and packed tubular reactors.PFR with inter stage cooling. Shift of Energy
and material balance lines for reversible reactions in CSTR, Examples of optimal design of PFR and
Semibatch and CSTR Exothermic Reactions.
Unit-3:Catalytic reactions: theory and modeling: Global rate of reaction, Types of Heterogeneous
reactions Catalysis, Different steps in catalytic reactions, Theories of heterogeneous catalysis .
Steady State approximation, formulations of rate law Rate laws derived from the PSSH, Rate
controlling steps, Eiley-Rideal model, Reforming catalyst example :Finding mechanism consistent
with experimental observations Evaluation of rate law parameters, packed beds : Transport and
Reactions, Gradients in the reactors : temperature.
Porous media reactors: Mass transfer coefficients, Flow effects on spheres tube and cylinders,
External Mass Transfer pore diffusion, structure and concentration gradients Internal Effectiveness
Factor Catalytic wall reactor: limiting steps reactions and mass transfer limiting Porous catalyst on
tube wall reactors Design of packed bed porous catalytic reactors: Mass transfer limited reactions in
Packed bed.
Unit-4:Fluidized bed reactor modeling: Geldart Classification of powders, Fixed bed vs fluidized
bed Why fluidized bed, important parameters pressure drop in fixed bed, Class I model Arbitrary
Two Region Flow Models, Class II Chemical Reactor: Plug Flow or Mixed Flow Model. Class III
Modeling the Bubbling Fluidized Bed Reactor, BFB, The Kunii-Levenspiel bubbling bed model, Gas
Flow Around and Within a Rising Gas Bubble in a Fine particle BFB, Reactor performance of BFB.
Unit-5:Application of Population Balance Equations for reactor modeling: Particle size distribution,
Distribution Functions in Particle Measuring Techniques, Particle distribution model in colloidal
particle synthesis in batch reactor, Moments of Distribution, Nucleation rate based on volumetric
holdup versus crystal growth rate.
Reaction engineering and mitigation of Global warming: CO2 absorption in high pressure water,
different techniques of mitigation of CO2, methods of separations. Recent advancements, automotive
monolith catalytic converter example, removal and utilization of CO2 for thermal power plants.
References
K.G. Denbigh : Chemical Reactor Theory, Cambridge University Press, Second Edition, 1971.
J.M. Smith : Chemical Engineering Kinetics, Mcgraw Hill, Third Edition, 1981.
Levenspiel O., Chemical Reaction Engineering, Wiley, 1998.
Foggler,H.S., Elements of Chemical Reaction Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, 2008.
Fromment G.F. and Bischoff K.B., Chemical Reactor Analysis and Design, John Wiley, 2010.
[Elective – III] (a): Modern concepts in Catalysis and Surface Phenomenon
Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives
1. To give the students insight into advances in catalytic reaction engineering
2. To understand the mechanisms involved in catalytic reactions
3. To study the catalyst characterization techniques
4. To study the advanced industrial applications in catalysis
5. To understand the principles behind catalyst deactivation and study their models
1. To understand the concepts of homogenous and heterogeneous catalysis, with specific
examples.
2. To study reaction mechanisms and kinetics of homogenous and heterogeneous catalytic
reactions.
3. To familiarize with the characterization of catalysts
4. To understand the application and mechanisms of several types of catalysts in chemical
industry.
Introduction to Catalysis
Definition of Catalytic activity, Magnitude of Turnover Frequencies and Active Site Concentrations,
Evolution of Important Concepts and Techniques in Heterogeneous Catalysis, Classification of
Catalysts – Homogeneous, Heterogeneous, Biocatalysts, Dual Functional Catalysts, Enzymes, Solid
Catalysts, Powder Catalysts, Pellets, Composition, Active Ingredients, Supportive materials,
Catalysts Activation, Catalyst Deactivation.
Adsorption in Catalysis
Adsorption and its importance in Catalysis, Adsorption and potential energy curves, Surface
Reconstruction, Adsorption Isotherms and Isobars, Dynamical Considerations, Types of Adsorption
Isotherms and their Derivation from Kinetic Principles, Mobility at Surfaces, Kinetics of surface
Reactions, Photochemistry on oxide and metallic surfaces, Characterization of the adsorbed
molecules
Catalyst Characterization
Catalyst Characterization Methods – Their Working Principle and Applications – XRF, XRD, IR
Spectroscopy, XPS, UPS, ESR, NMR; Infrared, Raman, NMR, Mossbauer and X-Ray Absorption
spectroscopy, Surface Acidity and Toxicity, Activity, Life time, Bulk density, Thermal stability
Crystal Defects, Peroviskites, Spinels, Clays, Pillared Clays, Zeolites
[ 223 ]
Significance of Pore Structure and Surface Area
Importance of Surface Area and Pore Structure, Experimental Methods for Estimating Surface Area
– Volumetric, Gravimetric, Dynamic Methods, Experimental Methods for Estimating Pore Volume
and Diameter – Gas Adsorption and Mercury Porosimeter Method, Models of the Pore Structure –
Hysteresis Loops, Geometric Models, Wheeler’s Model, Dusty Gas Model, Random Pore Model,
Diffusion in Porous Catalysts – Effective Diffusivity, Knudsen Diffusion, Effect of Intraparticle
Diffusion, Non-isothermal Reactions in Pores, Diffusion Control.
Industrial applications– Case Studies
Industrial processes involving heterogeneous solid catalyst: Synthesis of Methanol, Fiscer-Tropsch

Catalysis, Synthesis of Ammonia, Automobile Exhaust Catalysts and Catalyst Monolith,
Photocatalytic Breakdown of Water and the Harnessing of Solar Energy.
Contribution of homogeneous catalytic process in chemical industry:Oxidations of Alkenes such as
production of acetaldehyde, propylene oxide etc., Polymerization such as production of
polyethylene, polypropylene or polyester production
References
1. Emmett, P.H. - “Catalysis Vol. I and II, Reinhold Corp.", New York, 1954
2. Smith, J.M. - “Chemical Engineering Kinetics ", McGraw Hill, 1971
3. Thomas and Thomas - “Introduction to Heterogeneous Catalysts ", Academic Press, London
1967
4. Piet W.N.M. van Leeuwen, Homogeneous catalysis: Understanding the Art, Springer, 2004
5. Piet W.N.M. van Leeuwen, and John C. Chadwick, Homogeneous catalysis: Activity-stability
–deactivation, Wiley, VCH, 2011.
[Elective – III] (b): Advanced Downstream Processes
Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives
1. To understand the unit processes involved in downstream processing.
2. To study advanced treatment methods.
3. To study the energy conservation in different separation processes
4. To understand the underlying design principles
1. To learn effective strategies of downstream processing in chemical industry.

2. Understand the role of downstream processing.
3. Analyze reactors, upstream and downstream processes in production
Introduction
Introduction to Downstream processes theory, applications in chemical separation for Gas-Liquid

system, Gas-Solid system. Super critical fluids extraction in food, pharmaceutical, environmental
and petroleum applications, water treatment, desalination, Bio separation, dialysis, industrial dialysis.
Downstream Processes in Petrochemical Industry
Cryogenic distillation for refinery, petrochemical off gases, natural gases, gas recovery-Olefin,
Helium, Nitrogen, Desulfurization - coal, flue gases
Advanced Distillation Processes
Azeotropic & extractive distillation - residue curve maps, homogeneous azeotropic distillation,
pressure swing distillation, Column sequences, heterogeneous azeotropic distillation.
Energy conservation in separation processes
Energy balance, molecular sieves - zeolights, adsorption, catalytic properties, manufacturing

processes, hydrogel process, application, New trends.
Non-Ideal Mixtures and Ion Exchange
Separations process synthesis for nonazeotropic mixtures, non ideal liquid mixtures, separation
synthesis algorithm, Ion exchange - manufacture of resins, physical & chemical properties, capacity,
selectivity, application, regeneration, equipment, catalysis use.
References
1. Perry’s “Chemical Engg. Handbook”: McGraw Hill Pub.

2. Douglas J.M., “Conceptual Design of Chemical Processes”, McGraw Hill
3. Liu Y.A., “Recent Developments in Chemical Process & Plant Design”, John Wiley & Sons
Inc.
4. Timmerhaus K.D., “Cryogenic Process Engg.”, Plenum Press
5. Othmer Kirk “Encyclopedia of Separation Technology, Vol I & II”, Wiley Interscience
[Elective – III] (c): Computational Fluid Dynamics
Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives
1. To make students understand the governing equations of fluid dynamics and their derivation
from laws of conservation
2. To develop a good understanding in computational skills, including discretisation, accuracy
and stability.
3. To acquaint the students with a process of developing a mathematical and geometrical model
of flow, applying appropriate boundary conditions and solving system of equations.
Outcomes: At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
1. Understand the basic principles of mathematics and numerical concepts of fluid dynamics.
2. Develop governing equations for a given fluid flow system.
3. Adapt finite difference techniques for fluid flow models.
[ 225 ]
4. Apply finite difference method for heat transfer problems.

5. Solve computational fluid flow problems using finite volume techniques.
6. Get familiarized to modern CFD software used for the analysis of complex fluid-flow
systems.
Introduction to Fluid Dynamics
Concepts of Fluid Flow, Pressure distribution in fluids, Reynolds transport theorem, Integral form of
conservation equations, Differential form of conservation equations, Different Types of Flows, Euler
and Navier Stokes equations, Properties of supersonic and subsonic flows, Flow characteristics over
various bodies. Philosophy of CFD, Governing equations of fluid dynamics and there physical
meaning, Mathematical behavior of governing equations and the impact on CFD simulations, Simple
CFD techniques and CFL condition. Numerical Methods in CFD:Finite Difference, Finite Volume,
and Finite Element, Upwind and downwind schemes, Simple and Simpler schemes, Higher order
methods, Implicit and explicit methods, Study and transient solutions
Grid Generation
Basic theory of structured grid generation, Surface grid generation, Mono block, multi block,
hierarchical multi block, Moving and sliding multiblock, Grid clustering and grid enhancement.
Basic theory of unstructured grid generation, advancing front, Delaunay triangulation and various
point insertion methods, Unstructured quad and hex generation, grid based methods, various
elements in unstructured grids, Surface mesh generation, Surface mesh repair, Volume grid
generation, Volume mesh improvement, mesh smoothing algorithms, grid clustering and quality
checks for volume mesh. Adaptive, Moving and Hybrid Grids, Need for adaptive and, moving grids,
Tet, pyramid, prism, and hex grids, using various elements in combination
Turbulence and its Modelling

Transition from laminar to turbulent flow, Effect of turbulence on time-averaged Navier-Stokes
equations, Characteristics of simple turbulent flows, Free turbulent flows, Flat plate boundary layer
and pipe flow, Turbulence models, Mixing length model,The k-e model, Reynolds stress equation
models, Algebraic stress equation models
Chemical Fluid Mixing Simulation
Stirred tank modeling using the actual impeller geometry, Rotating frame model, The MRF Model
Sliding mesh model, Snapshot model, Evaluating Mixing from Flow Field Results, Industrial
Examples
Post-Processing of CFD results
Contour plots, vector plots, and scatter plots, Shaded and transparent surfaces, Particle trajectories
and path line trajectories, Animations and movies, Exploration and analysis of data.
References
1. Anderson John D., “Computational Fluid Dynamics: The Basics with Applications”, Mc
Graw Hill, 1995
2. Ranade V.V., “Computational Flow Modeling for Chemical Reactor Engineering”, Process
Engineering Science, Volume 5, 2001
3. Knupp Patrick and Steinberg Stanly, “Fundamentals of Grid Generation”, CRC Press, 1994
4. Wilcox D.C., “Turbulence Modelling for CFD”, 1993
5. Wesseling Pieter, “An Introduction to Multigrid Methods”, John Wiley & Sons, 1992
6. Thompson J.F., Warsi Z.U.A. and Mastin C.W., “Numerical Grid Generation: Foundations
and Applications”, North Holland, 1985
7. Patankar S.V., “Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow”, McGraw-Hill,1981
8. Gatski Thomas B., Hussaini M. Yousuff and Lumley John L., “Simulation and Modelling of
Turbulent Flows”, Oxford University Press, 1996
9. Laney, C. B., “Computational Gas Dynamics”, Cambridge Uni. Press, 1998.
[Elective – III] (d): Bioprocess Engineering
Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives
1. To learn the principles of bioprocessing for traditional chemical engineering in the design and
development of processes involving biocatalyst.
2. To study engineering principles in the development of products based on living cells or
subcomponents of such cells.
3. To learn and develop quantitative models and approaches related to bioprocesses
4. To learn mechanisitic models for enzyme catalyzed reactions for large scale production of
bioproducts
Outcomes: At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
1. Understand the different cells and their use in biochemical processes.
2. Understand the role of enzymes in kinetic analysis of biochemical reaction.
3. Analyze bioreactors, upstream and downstream processes in production of bio-products
4. Demonstrate the fermentation process and its products for the latest industrial revolution
Introduction:
Biotechnology and bioprocessing. An overview of biological basics. Basics of enzyme and microbial
kinetics. Operating considerations for bioreactors: cultivation method, modifying batch and
continuous reactors, immobilized cell systems, solid state fermentations.
Advance Enzyme Kinetics
Models for complex enzyme kinetics, modeling of effect of pH and temperature, models for
insoluble substrate, models for immobilized enzyme systems, diffusion limitations in immobilized
enzyme system, electrostatic and steric effects.
Bioreactors
Selection, scale-up, operation and control of bioreactors: Scale-up and its difficulties, bioreactor
instrumentation and control, sterilization of process fluids.Modifications of batch and continuous
reactors, chemostat with recycle, multistage chemostat, fed-batch operation, perfusion system, active
and passive immobilization of cells, diffusional limitations in the immobilized system, solid state
fomenters.
[ 227 ]
Homogeneous and heterogeneous reactions in bioprocesses

Reaction thermodynamics, growth kinetics with Plasmid instability, The Thiele Modulus and
effectiveness factor, diffusion and reaction in waste treatment lagoon. Reactors and choice of
reactors.
Recovery and purification of products:
Strategies to recover and purify products, separation of insoluble products, cell disruption, separation
of soluble products.
References
1. Bailey J.E. and Ollis D.F., “Biochemical Engineering Fundamentals”, McGraw-Hill

2. Doran P.M., “Bioprocess Engineering Principles”, Academic Press
3. Shuler M.L., Kargi F., ”Bioprocess Engineering”, Prentice -Hall
[Elective – IV] (a): Process Intensification
Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives:
1. Understand the concept of Process Intensification.
2. Know the limitations of intensification of the chemical processes.
3. Applythe techniques of intensification to a range of chemical processes.
4. Develop various process equipment used for intensifying the processes.
5. Infer alternative solutions keeping in view point, the environmental protection, economic
viability and social acceptance.
Outcomes: At the end of this course, students are able to:

1. Assess the values and limitations of process intensification, cleaner technologies and waste
minimization options.
2. Measure and monitor the usage of raw materials and wastes generating from production and
frame the strategies for reduction, reuse and recycle.
3. Obtain alternative solutions ensuring a more sustainable future based on environmental
protection, economic viability and social acceptance.
4. Analyze data, observe trends and relate this to other variables.
5. Plan for research in new energy systems, materials and process intensification.
Unit-I: Introduction: Techniques of Process Intensification (PI) Applications, The philosophy and
opportunities of Process Intensification, Main benefits from process intensification,
ProcessIntensifying Equipment, Process intensification toolbox, Techniques for PI application.
Unit-II: Process Intensification through micro reaction technology: Effect of miniaturization on unit
operations and reactions, Implementation of Microreaction Technology, From basic Properties To
Technical Design Rules, Inherent Process Restrictions in Miniaturized Devices and Their Potential
Solutions, Microfabrication of Reaction and unit operation Devices - Wet and Dry Etching
Processes.
Unit-III: Scales of mixing, Flow patterns in reactors, Mixing in stirred tanks: Scale up of mixing,
Heat transfer. Mixing in intensified equipment, Chemical Processing in High-Gravity Fields
Atomizer Ultrasound Atomization, Nebulizers, High intensity inline MIXERS reactors Static mixers,
Ejectors, Tee mixers, Impinging jets, Rotor stator mixers, Design Principles of static Mixers
Applications of static mixers, Higee reactors.
Unit-IV: Combined chemical reactor heat exchangers and reactor separators: Principles of operation;
Applications, Reactive absorption, Reactive distillation, Applications of RD Processes,
Fundamentals of Process Modelling, Reactive Extraction Case Studies: Absorption of NOx Coke
Gas Purification. Compact heat exchangers: Classification of compact heat exchangers, Plate heat
exchangers, Spiral heat exchangers, Flow pattern, Heat transfer and pressure drop, Flat tube-and-fin
heat exchangers, Microchannel heat exchangers, Phase-change heat transfer, Selection of heat
exchanger technology, Feed/effluent heat exchangers, Integrated heat exchangers in separation
processes, Design of compact heat exchanger - example.
Unit-V: Enhanced fields: Energy based intensifications, Sono-chemistry, Basics of cavitation,

Cavitation Reactors, Flow over a rotating surface, Hydrodynamic cavitation applications, Cavitation
reactor design, Nusselt-flow model and mass transfer, The Rotating Electrolytic Cell, Microwaves,
Electrostatic fields, Sonocrystallization, Reactive separations, Superctrical fluids
References:
1. Stankiewicz, A. and Moulijn, (Eds.), Reengineering the Chemical Process Plants, Process
Intensification, Marcel Dekker, 2003.
2. Reay D., Ramshaw C., Harvey A., Process Intensification, Butterworth Heinemann, 2008.
3. Kamelia Boodhoo (Editor), Adam Harvey (Editor),Process Intensification Technologies for
Green Chemistry: Engineering Solutions for Sustainable Chemical Processing, Wiley, 2013.
4. Segovia-Hernández, Juan Gabriel, Bonilla-Petriciolet, Adrián (Eds.)Process Intensification in
Chemical Engineering Design Optimization and Control, Springer, 2016.
5. Reay, Ramshaw, Harvey, Process Intensification, Engineering for Efficiency, Sustainability
and Flexibility, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2013.
[Elective – IV] (c): Phase transitions in Process Equipment
Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives:
1. Basic laws in thermodynamics.
2. Basic statistical concepts and methods: heat, work, energy, temperature and the kinetic theory
of matter; entropy, ensemble, partition function, etc
3. Learning phase transition catalysis
4. Have a good grasp of the basic thermodynamic interactions and process: adiabatic,
isothermal, etc
[ 229 ]
1. The student is expected to obtain considerable insight into various types of phase transitions,
and how these can be described theoretically in different ways
2. Predict relationships between physical quantities using the laws and methods of
thermodynamics.
3. Find probabilities and thermal quantities (free energy, entropy, etc) given the energy
eigenvalues of a system.
Unit-I: Thermodynamic aspects of phase transitions: Concept of phase, First-order phase transition,
conditions for phase coexistence lines, free energy barrier of nucleation, and crystal-melt interfacial
free energy, Ehrenfest classification of phase transitions, Van der Waals equation of state, Critical
point
Unit-II: Single phase and multiphase catalytic reactions, Acid--base catalysis, Transition metal
catalysis, Phase transfer catalysis, Micellar catalysis, Microemulsion catalysis, Electron transfer
catalysis, Heteropoly acid catalysis, Homogeneous polymer catalysis, Heterogenisation of
homogeneous catalysts.
Unit-III: Applications to Multi-phase Systems Stability conditions for a homogeneous system,

equilibrium between phases, phase transformations, general relations for a system with several
components, general conditions for chemical equilibrium, chemical equilibrium between ideal gases,
and the equilibrium constants in terms of partition functions.
Unit-IV: Phase diagrams and transformations Phase rule- single and binary phase diagrams, lever
rule, micro structural changes during cooling, Al2O3, Cr2O3, Pb-Sn, Ag-Pt and Fe-Fe3C Systems
phase diagrams, phase transformations, corrosion- theories of corrosion, control and prevention of
corrosion
UNIT-V: Energy balance - heat capacity and calculation of enthalpy changes, Enthalpy changes for
phase transitions, evaporation, clausius - clapeyron equation,
References:
1. Hegedus, L.S., Transition Metals in the Synthesis of Complex Organic Molecules, University
Science Book (2010) 3rd ed.
2. Raghavan V., Material Science and Engineering Prentice Hall of India, 1996
3. David.M.Himmelblau, “Basic principles and calculations in chemical engineering”, Prentice
Hall of India Ltd., 6th Edition, 1998.
4. A.Hougen, K.M. Watson and K.A.Ragatz, “Chemical Process Principles”, Vol 1, John Wiley,
1960.
[Elective – IV] (c): Micro and Nano fluidics
Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives:
1. To introduce to the students, the various opportunities in the emerging field of micro and
nano fluids.
2. To the make students familiar with the important concepts applicable to small micro and nano
fluidic devices, their fabrication, characterization and application.
3. To get familiarize with the new concepts of real-time nano manipulation & assembly
1. Introduce students to the physical principles to analyze fluid flow in micro and nano-size
devices. It unifies the thermal sciences with electrostatics, electrokinetics, colloid science;
electrochemistry; and molecular biology.
Unit-1: Introduction: Fundamentals of kinetic theory-molecular models, micro and macroscopic

properties, binary collisions, distribution functions, Boltzmann equation and Maxwellian distribution
functions-Wall slip effects and accommodation coefficients, flow and heat transfer analysis of
microscale Couette flows, Pressure driven gas micro-flows with wall slip effects, heat transfer in
micro-Poiseuille flows, effects of compressibility. Pressure Driven Liquid Microflow: apparent slip
effects, physics of near-wall microscale liquid flows, capillary flows, electro-kinetically driven liquid
micro - flows and electric double layer (EDL) effects, concepts of electroosmosis, electrophoresis
and dielectro-phoresis.
Unit-2: Laminar flow: Hagen-Poiseullie eqn, basic fluid ideas, Special considerations of flow in
small channels, mixing, microvalves & micropumps, Approaches toward combining living cells,
microfluidics and ‘the body’ on a chip, Chemotaxis, cell motility. Case Studies in Microfluidic
Devices. Ionic transport: Polymer transport – microtubule transport in nanotuble channels driven by
Electric Fields and by Kinesin Biomolecular Motors - Electrophoresis of individual nanotubules in
microfluidic channels.
Unit-3: Fabrication techniques for Nanofluidic channels – Biomolecules separation using

Nanochannels - Biomolecules Concentration using Nanochannels – Confinement of Biomolecules
using Nanochannels. Hydrodynamics: Particle moving in flow fields – Potential Functions in Low
Renoylds Number Flow – Arrays of Obstacles and how particles Move in them: Puzzles and
Paradoxes in Low Re Flow.
Unit-4: Microfluidics and Lab-on-a-chip: Microfluidic Devices - Microchannels, Microfilters,

Microvalves, Micropumps, Microneedles, Microreserviors, Micro-reaction chambers. Concepts and
Advantages of Microfluidic Devices - Fluidic Transport - Stacking and Scaling – Materials for The
Manufacture (Silicon, Glass, Polymers) - Fluidic Structures - Fabrication Methods - Surface
Modifications - Spotting - Detection Mechanisms. Microcontact printing of ProteinsStrategies-
printing types- methods and characterization- Cell nanostructure interactions-networks for neuronal
cells. Applications in Automatic DNA sequencing, DNA and Protein microarrays.
Unit-5: BioMEMS (Micro-Electro-Mechanical Systems): Introduction and Overview, Biosignal
Transduction Mechanisms: Electromagnetic Transducers Mechanical Transducers, Chemical
Transducers, Optical Transducers – Sensing and Actuating mechanisms (for all types). Case Studies
in Biomagnetic Sensors, Applications of optical and chemical transducers. Ultimate Limits of
Fabrication and Measurement, Recent Developments in BioMEMS and BioNEMS - An alternative
approach to traditional surgery, Specific targeting of tumors and other organs for drug delivery,
Micro-visualization and manipulation, Implantation of microsensors, microactuators and other
components of a larger implanted device or external system (synthetic organs).
Text Books
1. Joshua Edel “Nanofluidics” RCS publishing, 2009.
2. Patric Tabeling “Introduction to Microfluids” Oxford U. Press, New York 2005.
3. K. Sarit “Nano Fluids; Science and Technology”, RCS Publishing, 2007.
[ 231 ]
References
1. M. Madou, Fundamentals of Microfabrication, CRC Press, 1997
2. G. Kovacs, Micromachined Transducers, McGraw-Hill, 1998
3. Steven S Saliterman, Fundamentals of BioMEMS and Medical Microdevices, 2006
[Elective – IV] (c): Process Integration
Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives:
1. To introduce to the students, the various opportunities in the process integration in chemical
industries.
2. To the make students familiar with the important concepts process integration for heat
recovery/minimization.
3. To get familiarize with the case studies.
1. Maximum heat recovery for a given process (both new processes, and retrofit of existing
processes) identify opportunities for integration of high-efficiency energy.
2. Energy-intensive thermal separation operations (distillation, evaporation) at an industrial
process site.
3. Evaluate the process integration measures with respect to energy efficiency, greenhouse gas
emissions and economic performance.
Unit-I: Introduction to process Intensification and Process Integration (PI). Areas of application and
techniques available for PI, onion diagram.
Unit-II: Pinch Technology-an overview: Introduction, Basic concepts, How it is different from
energy auditing, Roles of thermodynamic laws, problems addressed by Pinch Technology, Key steps
of Pinch Technology: Concept of Tmin , Data Extraction, Targeting, Designing, Optimization Super
targeting, Basic Elements of Pinch Technology: Grid Diagram, Composite curve, Problem Table
Algorithm, Grand Composite Curve.
Unit-III: Heat exchanger networks analysis, Maximum Energy Recovery (MER) networks for
multiple utilities and multiple, Chemical Engineering Pre-requisites: Knowledge of basic process
design of process equipment. Pinches, design of heat exchanger network.
Unit-IV: Heat integrated distillation columns, evaporators, dryers, and reactors.
Unit-V: Waste and waste water minimization, flue gas emission targeting, and heat and power
integration. Case studies.
References:
1. Shenoy U.V.;"Heat Exchanger Network Synthesis", Gulf Publishing company.
2. Smith R.;"Chemical Process Design", McGraw-Hill.
3. Linnhoff B., Townsend D. W.,Boland D, Hewitt G. F., Thomas B.E.A., Guy A. R., and
Marsland R. H.;"A User Guide on Process Integration for the Efficient Uses of Energy", Inst.
of Chemical Engineers.
[Elective – IV] (d): Transport in porous Media
Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives:
1. Introduce the physics and governing mechanisms controlling flow and transport processes in
porous media.
2. Learning Liquid and solute transport in porous media.

1. Students will understand the mechanisms involved in transport processes in porous media and
will be able to work with the equations that govern the fate and transport of gas, water and
solutes in porous media.
Unit-I: Fundamentals: Mass, momentum and energy transport, Darcy and Non-Darcy equations,
equilibrium and non-equilibrium conditions, species transport, radioactive decay.
Unit-II: Effective medium approximation: equivalent thermal conductivity, viscosity, dispersion.
Unit-III: Exact solutions: Flow over a flat plate, flow past a cylinder, boundary-layers, reservoir
problems.
Unit-IV: Special topics: Field scale and stochastic modeling, Turbulent flow, compressible flow,
multiphase flow, numerical techniques, hierarchical porous media, nanoscale porous media,
multiscale modeling.
Unit-V: Engineering applications: Groundwater, waste disposal, oil and gas recovery, regenerators,
energy storage systems. Experimental techniques: Flow visualization, quantitative methods, inverse
parameter estimation.
References:
1. Principles of Heat Transfer in Porous Media, by M. Kaviany, Springer New York (1995).
2. Transport Phenomena in Porous Media, Volumes I-III, edited by D. R. Ingham and I. Pop,
Elsevier, New York (1998-2005).
3. Dynamics of Fluids in Porous Media, J. Bear, Dover (1988).
4. Introduction to Modeling of Transport Phenomena in Porous Media, J. Bear and Y. Bachmat,
Kluwer Academic Publishers, London (1990).
5. Enhanced Oil Recovery, L.W. Lake, Gulf Publishing Co. Texas (1989).
6. The Mathematics of Reservoir Simulation, R.E. Ewing, SIAM Philadelphia (1983).
7. Stochastic Methods for Flow in Porous Media: Coping with Uncertainties, Zhang, D.,
Academic Press, California (2002).
8. The Method of Volume Averaging, S. Whitaker, Springer, New York (1999).
[ 233 ]
[Elective – IV] (d): Micro Flow Chemistry and Process Technology
Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives:
1. Introduce the students to micro flow chemistry and process technology.
2. Learning Micromixers, Mixing Principles.
3. Learning micro reactor based chemicals production

1. Students will understand the role of micro flow chemistry and process technology in
chemical engineering.
2. The student is expected to obtain considerable insight into various types of micro reactors.
Unit-I: State of the Art of Microreaction Technology, Structural Hierarchy of Microreactors,

Functional Classification of Microreactors, Fundamental Advantages of Microreactors, Advantages
of Microreactors Due to Decrease of Physical Size, Advantages of Microreactors Due to Increase of
Number of Units, Potential Benefits of Microreactors
Unit-II: Modern Microfabrication Techniques for Microreactors, Evaluation of Suitability of a

Technique, Anisotropic Wet Etching of Silicon, Dry Etching of Silicon, LIGA Process, Injection
Molding, Wet Chemical Etching of Glass, Advanced Mechanical Techniques
Unit-III: Micromixers, Mixing Principles and Classes of Macroscopic Mixing Equipment, Mixing
Principles and Classes of Miniaturized Mixers, Mixing Tee-Type Configuration
Unit-IV: Microsystems for Gas Phase Reactions, Catalyst Supply for Microreactors , Types of Gas
Phase Microreactors, Microchannel Catalyst Structures, H2/O2 Reaction, Selective Partial
Hydrogenation of Benzene, Selective Oxidation of 1-Butene to Maleic Anhydride, Selective
Oxidation of Ethylene to Ethylene Oxide, Oxidative Dehydrogenation of Alcohols, Synthesis of
Methyl Isocyanate and Various Other Hazardous Gases, Synthesis of Ethylene Oxide, Oxidation of
Ammonia
Unit-V: Microsystems for Energy Generation, Microdevices for Vaporization of Liquid Fuels,
Microdevices for Conversion of Gaseous Fuels to Syngas by Means of Partial Oxidations, Hydrogen
Generation by Partial Oxidations, Microdevices for Conversion of Gaseous Fuels to Syngas by
Means of Steam Reforming
References:
1. Wolfgang Ehrfeld, Volker Hessel, Holger Löwe MicroreactorsNew Technology for Modern
Chemistry © WILEY-VCH Verlag GmbH, D-69469 Weinheim (Federal Republic of
Germany), 2000.
2. S.V. Luis and E. Garcia-Verdugo, Chemical Reactions and Processes under Flow Conditions,
University Jaume I/CSIC, Castello´n, Spain, The Royal Society of Chemistry 2010
3. Madhvanand N. Kashid, Albert Renken,and Lioubov Kiwi-Minsker, Microstructured Devices
for Chemical Processing, Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH & Co. KGaA, Boschstr ©2015 12,
69469 Weinheim, Germany
4. Hessel, V., Renken, A., Schouten, J.C., Yoshida, Micro Process Engineering" A
Comprehensive Handbook 2009, ISBN 978-3-527-31550-5.
[Elective – IV] (d): Process Plant Design & Flow sheeting
Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives:
1. Understanding of the scope, principles, norms, accountabilities and bounds of contemporary
engineering practice in the specific discipline.
2. Application of established engineering methods to complex engineering problem solving.
3. Application of systematic engineering synthesis and design processes.
1. Analyze, synthesize and design processes for manufacturing products commercially

2. Integrate and apply techniques and knowledge acquired in other courses such as
thermodynamics, heat and mass transfer, fluid mechanics, instrumentation and control to
design heat exchangers, plate and packed columns and engineering flow diagrams
3. Use commercial flow sheeting software to simulate processes and design process equipment
4. Recognize economic, construction, safety, operability and other design constraints
5. Estimate fixed and working capitals and operating costs for process plants
Unit-I: Introduction: Basic concepts: General design considerations, Process design development,
Layout of plant items, Flow sheets and PI diagrams, Economic aspects and Optimum design,
Practical considerations in design and engineering ethics, Degrees of freedom analysis in
interconnected systems, Network analysis, PERT/CPM, Direct and Indirect costs, Optimum
scheduling and crashing of activities.
Unit-II: Hierarchy of chemical process design; Nature of process synthesis and analysis; Developing
a conceptual design and flow sheet synthesis. Synthesis of reaction-separation systems; Distillation
sequencing; Energy targets. Heat integration of reactors, distillation columns, evaporators and driers;
Process change for improved heat integration. Heat and mass exchange networks and network
design.
Unit-III: Flow-sheeting: Synthesis of flow sheet: Propositional logic and semantic equations,
Deduction theorem, Algorithmic flow sheet generation using P-graph theory, Sequencing of
operating units, Feasibility and optimization of flow sheet using various algorithms viz, Solution
Structure Generation (SSG), Maximal Structure Generation (MSG), Simplex, Branch-and-bound etc.
Unit-IV: Analysis of Cost estimation: Factors affecting Investment and production costs, Estimation
of capital investment and total product costs, Interest, Time value of money, Taxes and Fixed
charges, Salvage value, Methods of calculating depreciation, Profitability, Alternative investments
and replacements.
Unit-V: Optimum Design and Design Strategy: Break-even analysis, Optimum production rates in
plant operation, Optimum batch cycle time applied to evaporator and filter press, Economic pipe
diameter, Optimum insulation thickness, Optimum cooling water flow rate and optimum distillation
reflux ratio.
[ 235 ]
References:
1. Peters, M.A. and Timmerhaus, K.D., Plant Design and Economics for Chemical Engineers,
McGraw Hill (2003).
2. Anil Kumar, Chemical Process Synthesis and Engineering Design, Tata McGraw Hill (1982).
3. Ulrich, G.D., A Guide to Chemical Engineering Process Design and Economics, John Wiley
& Sons (1984).
4. Perry, R.H. and Green, D., Chemical Engineer's Handbook, McGraw-Hill (1997).
Laboratory III: Advanced Chemical Reaction Engineering laboratory
Teaching Scheme:
Lab 4 hrs/week
Objectives: At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
1. To provide through understanding of Reaction Engineering.
2. To design reactor and identity type of reactor by suiting chemical kinetics and using
information from thermodynamics, heat and mass transfer economics.
3. Characteristics of a fluidized bed reactor
4. Understanding of corrosion reaction and monolithic catalytic reactors.
Outcomes:
1. Students will able to know the solid-liquid, liquid –liquid reactions.
2. Students will be able to know the micro reactor based process intensification.
3. Students will be able to know the monolithic catalytic reactors applications.
List of Laboratory Experiments:
1. Analyze the characteristics of a fluidized bed reactor

2. Kinetics of a (solid-liquid) Esterification reaction in a batch reactor
3. Evaluate the performance of a process intensified Batch Reactive Distillation in catalytic
reactions
4. Evaluate the performance of a process intensified micro reactor in catalytic reactions
5. Interfacial (Liquid-Liquid) Nitration
6. Gas-solid catalytic reactor analysis: Understanding of gas-solid catalytic reactor theory and
dynamics analysis.
7. Gas-liquid-solid three-phase catalytic reactor analysis: Understanding gas-liquid-solid three-
phase catalytic reactor theory and dynamics analysis.
8. Reactor analysis: Understanding the principle and diffusion analysis of batch and flow
reactors.
9. Corrosion reaction characteristics of a metal in a given electrolyte.
10. Reactions on Monolithic Catalytic Reactors
Lab IV: ADVANCED CHEMICAL ENGINEERING LAB
Teaching Scheme:
Lab 4 hrs/week
Objectives:
1) Analyze characteristics of a fluidized bed dryer
2) Estimate efficiency of compact heat exchangers
3) Evaluate the performance of a process intensification in catalytic reactions, ultrasound
assisted reactions, reactive distillation column, micro reactor and advanced flow reactor
4) Design controller for a given process
5) Evaluate the performance of membrane separation process for water purification
6) Characterize electrochemical phenomena such as corrosion
Detailed syllabus
1. Characteristics of a Fluidized bed dryer
2. Helical Coil heat exchanger
3. Determination of Effective thermal conductivity (ETC) in granular material
4. Plate Type Heat Exchanger
5. Kinetics for solid catalyzed esterification reaction in a batch reactor
6. Reactive distillation in Packed Column
7. Ultrasonic cavitation based reactions
8. Micro-reactor
9. Advanced Flow Reactor
10. Membrane Separation for water purification
11. Corrosion characteristics of a metal in a given electrolyte
12. Control of liquid level in non-interacting systems.
13. Identification and control of a three tank system.
14. pH control in a process.
Dissertation Phase – I and Phase – II
Teaching Scheme Lab work: 20 and 32 hrs/week for phase I and II respectively
Objectives:
• Ability to synthesize knowledge and skills previously gained and applied to an in-depth study
and execution of new technical problem.
• Capable to select from different methodologies, methods and forms of analysis to produce a
suitable research design, and justify their design.
• Ability to present the findings of their technical solution in a written report.
• Presenting the work in International/ National conference or reputed journals.
Syllabus Contents:
The dissertation / project topic should be selected / chosen to ensure the satisfaction of the urgent
need to establish a direct link between education, national development and productivity and thus
reduce the gap between the world of work and the world of study. The dissertation should have the
following
• Relevance to social needs of society
• Relevance to value addition to existing facilities in the institute
• Relevance to industry need
• Problems of national importance
• Research and development in various domain
The student should complete the following:
[ 237 ]
• Literature survey Problem Definition

• Motivation for study and Objectives
• Preliminary design / feasibility / modular approaches
• Implementation and Verification
• Report and presentation
The dissertation stage II is based on a report prepared by the students on dissertation allotted to them.
It may be based on:
• Experimental verification / Proof of concept.
• Design, fabrication, testing of Communication System.
• The viva-voce examination will be based on the above report and work.
Guidelines for Dissertation Phase – I and II
• As per the AICTE directives, the dissertation is a yearlong activity, to be carried out and
evaluated in two phases i.e. Phase – I: July to December and Phase – II: January to June.
• The dissertation may be carried out preferably in-house i.e. department’s laboratories and
centers OR in industry allotted through department’s T & P coordinator.
• After multiple interactions with guide and based on comprehensive literature survey, the
student shall identify the domain and define dissertation objectives. The referred literature should
preferably include Springer/Science Direct. In case of Industry sponsored projects, the relevant
application notes, while papers, product catalogues should be referred and reported.
• Student is expected to detail out specifications, methodology, resources required, critical
issues involved in design and implementation and phase wise work distribution, and submit the
proposal within a month from the date of registration.
• Phase – I deliverables: A document report comprising of summary of literature survey,
detailed objectives, project specifications, paper and/or computer aided design, proof of
concept/functionality, part results, A record of continuous progress.
• Phase – I evaluation: A committee comprising of guides of respective specialization shall
assess the progress/performance of the student based on report, presentation and Q & A. In case of
unsatisfactory performance, committee may recommend repeating the phase-I work.
• During phase – II, student is expected to exert on design, development and testing of the
proposed work as per the schedule. Accomplished results/contributions/innovations should be
published in terms of research papers in reputed journals and reviewed focused conferences OR
IP/Patents.
• Phase – II deliverables: A dissertation report as per the specified format, developed system in
the form of hardware and/or software, A record of continuous progress.
• Phase – II evaluation: Guide along with appointed external examiner shall assess the
progress/performance of the student based on report, presentation and Q & A. In case of
unsatisfactory performance, committee may recommend for extension or repeating the work
[Elective – V] : Design of Experiments and Parameter Estimation
Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives:
This subject provides students with the knowledge to
1. Use statistics in experimentation;
2. Understand the important role of experimentation in new product design, manufacturing
process development, and process improvement;
3. Analyze the results from such investigations to obtain conclusions; become familiar
methodologies that can be used in conjunction with experimental designs for robustness and
optimization.
1. Plan experiments for a critical comparison of outputs
2. Include statistical approach to propose hypothesis from experimental data
3. Implement factorial and randomized sampling from experiments
4. Estimate parameters by multi-dimensional optimization
Unit-1: Design of experiments. Basic concepts, Bias and confounding, controlling bias, causation,
Examples. Random Variables: Introduction to discrete and continuous random variables, quantify
spread and central tendencies of discrete and continuous random variables.
Unit-2: Exploratory Data Analysis Variable types, Displaying the distribution, mean variance and
typical spread, quartiles and unusual spread, multivariate data: finding relations. Probability
Definition of a random variable, expectation, percentiles, common distributions such as the binomial,
Poisson and normal distributions.
Unit-III: Point Estimation Estimators as random variables, sample mean and the central limit
theorem, normal approximations, assessing normality. Interval Estimation Confidence intervals for
the mean when the variance is known, confidence interval for the mean when the variance is
unknown, confidence intervals for a single proportion, sample size, Student distribution. Hypothesis
Testing Hypothesis testing for a mean or proportion, testing the equality of two means assuming
equal variances, testing the equality of two means with unequal variances, comparison of two
proportions.
Unit-IV: Linear Regression analysis: The linear regression model, Parameter estimation, accuracy of
the coefficient estimates, checking the model, multiple linear regression, confidence and prediction
intervals, potential issues, high leverage points, outliers. Matrix approach to linear regression,
Variance-Covariance matrix, ANOVA in regression analysis, quantifying regression fits of
experimental data, Extra sum of squares approach, confidence intervals on regression coefficients,
lack of fit analysis.
Unit-V: Response Surface Methodology: Method of steepest ascent, first and second order models,
identification of optimal process conditions
References:
1. Hanneman, Robert A., Kposowa, Augustine J., Riddle, Mark D. (2012). Research Methods
for the Social Sciences: Basic Statistics for Social Research. John Wiley & Sons.
2. Saunders, Mark, Brown, Reva Berman (2007). Dealing with Statistics: What You Need to
Know. McGraw-Hill Education.
3. Cowles, Michael (2000). Statistics in Psychology: An Historical Perspective (2nd Edition).
Lawrence Erlb
[Elective – V] : Computer Aided Design
Teaching Scheme:
[ 239 ]
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives:
1. To understand importance and applications of CAD in the field of chemical engineering
2. To understand the basic structure and components of CAD software
3. To understand the underlying thermodynamic and physical principles To give insight into the
approaches used in the simulation of flow sheets
4. To understand flow charts, computer languages and numerical methods used for writing
algorithms
1. Students get the knowledge about computer Aided Flow Sheet Synthesis
2. Computer aided equipment design of Evaporators; Distillation columns; Reactors, adsorption
columns.
Introduction
Introduction to CAD, Scope and applications in chemical Engineering, Mathematical methods used
in flow sheeting and simulation, Introduction to solution methods for linear and non-linear algebraic
equations, solving one equation one unknown, solution methods for linear and nonlinear equations,
general approach for solving sets of differential equations, solving sets of sparse non-linear
equations.
Properties Estimation
Physical properties of compounds, Thermodynamic properties of gases and binary mixtures,

Viscosity, Vapour pressure, Latent heat, Bubble point and drew point calculation, phase equilidria,
Vapour-liquid equilibria, Liquid phase activity coefficients, K-values, Liquid phase activity
coefficients, K-values, Liquid-Liquid equilidria, Gas solutions.
Equipment Design
Computer aided Design of Equipment: Design of Shell and Tube Heat exchangers; Design of
Evaporators; Design of Distillation columns; Design of Reactors, Design of adsorption columns.
Distillation columns (specific attention to multi components systems. Heat exchangers)
Computer Aided Flow Sheet Synthesis
Computerized physical property systems – physical property calculations, degrees of freedom in

process design, degrees of freedom for a unit, degrees of freedom in a flow sheet, steady state flow
sheeting and process design, approach to flow sheeting systems, introduction to sequential modular
approach, simultaneous modular approach and equation solving approach, sequential modular
approach to flow sheeting, examples. Tear streams, convergence of tear streams, partitioning and
tearing of a flow sheet, partitioning and precedence ordering, tearing a group of units. Flow sheeting
by equation solving methods based on tearing.
Dynamic Simulation
Numerical recipes in CLinear and nonlinear equations, Ordinary and partial differential equations,
Dynamic simulation of stirred tanks system with heating Multi component system, Reactors,
Absorption and distillation columns, Application of orthogonal collocation and weighted residuals
techniques in heat and mass transfer systems, Introduction to special software for steady and
dynamic simulation of Chemical engineering systems. Introduction to various commercial design
software and optimizers used in field of chemical engineering.
References
1. Douglas James M., “Conceptual design of Chemical Processes", McGraw -Hill Book
Company, New York, 1988
2. Remirez, W.F. - " Computational methods for Process Simulations ", Butterworths, New
York, 1989
3. Sinnott R.K. "Chemical Engineering”, Volume 6, Pergamon Press, New York, 1989
4. Westerberg A.W., et al, “Process Flow Sheeting”, Cambridge University Press
5. Biegler Lorenz T, et al, “Systematic method of Chemical Process Design”, Prentice Hall
6. Crowe C.M., et al, “Chemical Plant Simulation-An Introduction to Computer Aided Steady
State Analysis”, Prentice Hall
7. Anil Kumar, “Chemical Process Synthesis and Engineering Design”,TMH,1981
[Elective – V: Cleaner Production
Teaching Scheme:
Lecture: 3 hrs/week
Objectives
1. To give student an understanding about the concept of cleaner production.
2. To understand in detail, the methodologies involved
3. Financial evaluation of cleaner production technologies
4. To study the practical applications of cleaner production technologies
1. Explain the concept and principles of cleaner production.
2. Suggest different unit operations in industrial production process to minimize pollutions.
3. Plan good housekeeping practices for Industry/other places with concern of safety, hygiene
and waste reduction.
4. Suggest basic methods and techniques of pollution prevention during production.
5. Suggest cleaner production methods for a given situation which will also lead to cost
reduction in long run
Introduction
Cleaner production definition: Evaluation of cleaner production, Cleaner production network, Area
covered by cleaner production (what is not cleaner production?).Difference between cleaner
production and other methods, End of the pipe treatment to curb pollution, prerequisites of cleaner
production.
Cleaner production technique
[ 241 ]
Waste reduction at source, (a) Good housekeeping, (b) Process changes: change in raw material,
batter process, control, equipment modification and technology changes, Recycling: on site recovery
and reuse creation of useful byproducts, Product modification.
Cleaner production methodology
Methods of environmental protection -- preventive strategy, Methods of environmental protection --

preventive strategy, making team for cleaner production, Analyzing process steps, Generating C.P
opportunities
Selection of C.P solution, Implementing C.P solution
Concept of cleaner production

Overview of CP Assessment Steps and skills, Preparing for the site visit, Information Gathering, and
process flow diagram, material balance, CP Option Generation Technical and Environmental
feasibility analysis-Economic valuation of alternatives fuels, Total cost analysis-CP Financing-
Establishing a program-Organizing a program preparing a program plan-Measuring progress-
pollution prevention and cleaner production Awareness plan -Waste audit-Environmental Statement.
Energy audit related tocleaner production, Energy audit’s need and scope, Types of energy audit.
Preliminary or walk through energy audit. Detailed energy audit, Methodology of energy audit,
Energy balance and identifying the energy conservation opportunities.
Financial analysis of cleaner production
Gathering base line information, Determining the capital or investment cost, Establishing lifetime of
equipment and annual depreciation, Determine revenue implication of the project. Estimating change
in operating cost, Calculating incremental cash flow, Assessing project’s viability.
Case studies and Cleaner Production applications

Application (Industrial application of CP,LCA,EMS and Environmental Audits. C.P in chemical
process industry, Practical ways & means to save material loss in loading/unloading and unit
operations equipment like distillation column, drying and other equipments like heat exchanger,
vacuum unit, conveying, etc. Practical ways & means for energy saving in industries. Case Studies of
cleaner production.
References
1. “Cleaner Production Worldwide”, 1993, United Nations Environment Programme, Industry

and Environment, Paris, France, 1993
2. “Cleaner Production: Training Resource Package”, UNEP IE, Paris, 1996
3. “Clean Technology for manufacture of Specialty Chemicals”, Editor-W. Hoyle and M.
Lancaster, Royal Society of Chemistry, U.K
4. Randall Paul M, “Engineers Guide to Cleaner Production Technologies”.
5. Ahluvalia V. K., “Green Chemistry: Environmentally Benign Reactions”.
6. Sanders R.E., “Chemical Process Safety: Learning from case Histories”, Oxford Butter
Worth Publication
7. “Training Manual Package” by NCPC
OPEN ELECTIVES
Business Analytics
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
Course Code
Credits
Prerequisites
Course objective

2. Analyze data using statistical and data mining techniques and understand relationships between the
underlying business processes of an organization.
3. To gain an understanding of how managers use business analytics to formulate and solve business
problems and to support managerial decision making.
Unit1:

analytics, Business Analytics Process, Relationship of Business Analytics
Process and organisation, competitive advantages of Business Analytics.
Statistical Tools: Statistical Notation, Descriptive Statistical methods, 9

Unit 2:
Trendiness and Regression Analysis: Modelling Relationships and Trends in

Data, simple Linear Regression.
Important Resources, Business Analytics Personnel, Data and models for

Business analytics, problem solving, Visualizing and Exploring Data, 8
Business Analytics Technology.
Unit 3:
[ 243 ]

Management Issues, Designing Information Policy, Outsourcing, Ensuring
Data Quality, Measuring contribution of Business analytics, Managing
Changes. 9
Descriptive Analytics, predictive analytics, predicative Modelling, Predictive
analytics and its step in the business analytics Process, Prescriptive
Modelling, nonlinear Optimization.
Unit 4:

Forecasting Models, Forecasting Models for Stationary Time Series,
Forecasting Models for Time Series with a Linear Trend, Forecasting Time
Series with Seasonality, Regression Forecasting with Casual Variables, 10
Selecting Appropriate Forecasting Models.
Analytic Solver Platform, New-Product Development Model, Newsvendor
Model, Overbooking Model, Cash Budget Model.
Unit 5:
Decision Analysis: Formulating Decision Problems, Decision Strategies with 8

the without Outcome Probabilities, Decision Trees, The Value of Information,
Utility and Decision Making.
Unit 6:
Recent Trends in : Embedded and collaborative business intelligence, Visual 4

data recovery, Data Storytelling and Data journalism.
COURSE OUTCOMES

2. Students will demonstrate the ability of think critically in making decisions based on data and deep
analytics.
3. Students will demonstrate the ability to use technical skills in predicative and prescriptive modeling
to support business decision-making.
Reference:

OPEN ELECTIVES
Industrial Safety
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week

Reference:
OPEN ELECTIVES
Operations Research
Teaching Scheme
[ 245 ]
___________________________________________________________________________
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:
Unit 2
Unit 3:
problem - CPM/PERT
Unit 4
Unit 5
References:
Open Elective
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
execution : conception to commissioning. Project execution as conglomeration of technical and non
documents Project team : Role of each member. Importance Project site : Data required with

References:
5. Ashish K. Bhattacharya, Principles & Practices of CostAccounting A. H. Wheeler publisher
[ 247 ]
Open Elective
Composite Materials
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week

performance.
TEXT BOOKS:
Germany.
References:
Tasi.
Open Elective
Waste to Energy
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
References:
Sons, 1996.
[ 249 ]
Course objectives:
Syllabus
1 Planning and Preparation, Word Order, Breaking up long sentences, Structuring 4
Paragraphs and Sentences, Being Concise and Removing Redundancy, Avoiding
Ambiguity and Vagueness
2 Clarifying Who Did What, Highlighting Your Findings, Hedging and Criticising, 4
Paraphrasing and Plagiarism, Sections of a Paper, Abstracts. Introduction
3 Review of the Literature, Methods, Results, Discussion, Conclusions, The Final 4
Check.
4 key skills are needed when writing a Title, key skills are needed when writing an 4
Abstract, key skills are needed when writing an Introduction, skills needed when
writing a Review of the Literature,
5 skills are needed when writing the Methods, skills needed when writing the 4
Results, skills are needed when writing the Discussion, skills are needed when
writing the Conclusions
6 useful phrases, how to ensure paper is as good as it could possibly be the first- time 4
submission
Suggested Studies:
book .
Course Objectives:-Students will be able to:

2. critically evaluate disaster risk reduction and humanitarian response policy and practice from multiple
perspectives.
they work in
Syllabus
Unit CONTENTS Hours
s
1 Introduction 4

Disaster; Natural And Manmade Disasters: Difference, Nature, Types And Magnitude.
2 Repercussions Of Disasters And Hazards: Economic Damage, Loss Of Human And 4
Animal Life, Destruction Of Ecosystem.
Natural Disasters: Earthquakes, Volcanisms, Cyclones, Tsunamis, Floods, Droughts
And Famines, Landslides And Avalanches, Man-made disaster: Nuclear Reactor
Meltdown, Industrial Accidents, Oil Slicks And Spills, Outbreaks Of Disease And
Epidemics, War And Conflicts.
Avalanches; Areas Prone To Cyclonic And Coastal Hazards With Special Reference To
Tsunami; Post-Disaster Diseases And Epidemics
Preparedness: Monitoring Of Phenomena Triggering A Disaster Or Hazard; Evaluation
Of Risk: Application Of Remote Sensing, Data From Meteorological And Other
Agencies, Media Reports: Governmental And Community Preparedness.
5 Risk Assessment 4
Disaster Risk: Concept And Elements, Disaster Risk Reduction, Global And National
Disaster Risk Situation. Techniques Of Risk Assessment, Global Co-Operation In Risk
Assessment And Warning, People’s Participation In Risk Assessment. Strategies for
Survival.
Mitigation. Structural Mitigation And Non-Structural Mitigation, Programs Of Disaster
Mitigation In India.
SUGGESTED READINGS:
Royal book Company.
India, New Delhi.
Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours
[ 251 ]
2  Order 8
Suggested reading
Course Output

Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours
1  Values and self-development –Social values and individual attitudes. Work 4
ethics, Indian vision of humanism.

 Sense of duty. Devotion, Self-
reliance.Confidence,Concentration.Truthfulness, Cleanliness.
 Honesty ,Humanity.Power of faith, National Unity.
3  Personality and Behaviour Development - Soul and Scientific 6
attitude.Positive Thinking.Integrity and discipline.

 Equality ,Non violence ,Humility, Role of Women.
 Mind your Mind ,Self-control.
Suggested reading
1 Chakroborty , S.K. “Values and Ethics for organizations Theory and practice”, Oxford University
Press ,New Delhi
Course outcomes
1.Knowledge of self-development 2.Learn the importance of Human values
Course Objectives:
perspective.
Syllabus
Units Content Hours
1 History 4
2 Preamble 4
Salient Features
3 4
4  Parliament 4
 Composition
[ 253 ]
 Qualificationsand Disqualifications
 Executive
 President
 Governor
 Municipalities: Introduction, Mayor and role of Elected Representative, CEO of
Municipal Corporation.
Suggested reading
Course Outcomes:

Course Objectives:
Syllabus
Units Content Hours
1  Introduction and Methodology: 4

terminology
 Thematic overview: Pedagogical practices are being used by teachers in formal
2 and informal classrooms in developing countries. 2
3  Theory of change. 4
practices.
up support
 Peer support
4 4
Research gaps and future directions
 Research design
 Contexts
5  Pedagogy 2
Suggested reading
245-261.
Course Outcomes:
[ 255 ]
Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours

Suggested reading
Course Outcomes:

Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours

 Verses- 71,73,75,78 (do’s)

23, 35,
 Shrimad Bhagwad Geeta : Chapter2-Verses 56, 62, 68
 Chapter 12 -Verses 13, 14, 15, 16,17, 18
 Personality of Role model. Shrimad Bhagwad Geeta :
Chapter2-Verses 17,Chapter 3-Verses 36,37,42,
Suggested reading
Rashtriya Samskrit Sansthanam, New Delhi.
Course Outcomes
1. Study of Shrimad-Bhagwad-Geeta will help the student in developing his personality and
achieve the highest goal in life
[ 257 ]
MODEL CURRICULUM
of
ELECTRONICS
&
TELECOMMUNICATION

www.aicte-india.org
[ 258 ]
M. Tech. (Electronics & Telecommunication) Specialization: Signal Processing
Semester I
Sr. No. Course Type/Code Course Name
1 Core 1 Advanced Digital Signal Processing
2 Core 2 Digital Image and Video Processing

Elective (1) DSP Architecture
(2) Computer Vision
(3) Remote Sensing
Elective (1) JTFA and MRA
(2) Voice and Data Networks
(3) Audio Video Coding & Compression
5 Lab1 Advanced Digital Signal Processing Lab
6 Lab2 Digital Image and Video Processing Lab
8 Aud 1 Audit course 1
Semester II
1 Core 3 Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning
2 Core 4 Detection and Estimation Theory
3 Program Elective – III

Specific (1) Advanced Compute Architecture
Elective (2) IOT and Applications
(3) Digital Design and Verification
4 Program Elective – IV
Specific (1) Multispectral Signal Analysis
Elective (2) Audio Processing
(3)Biomedical Signal Processing
5 Lab 1 Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning Lab
6 Lab 2 Detection and Estimation Theory Lab
7 Mini Project
[ 259 ]
################################
Semester III
1. Program Elective – V
Specific (1) Artificial Intelligence
Elective (2) Optimization Techniques
(3) Modelling and Simulation Techniques
6. Waste to Energy
Semester IV
Sr. Course
Course Name
No. Code
Audit course 1 & 2

4. Value Education
6. Pedagogy Studies
M. Tech. (Electronics & Telecommunication) Specialization: Communications
Semester I
Sr. No. Course Course Name
Type/Code
1 Core 1 Advanced Communication Networks
2 Core 2 Wireless and Mobile Communication

Elective (4) Wireless Sensor Networks
(5) Optical Networks
(6) Statistical Information Processing
[ 260 ]
################################
Elective (4) Cognitive Radio
(5) RF and Microwave Circuit Design
(6) DSP Architecture
5 Lab1 Advanced Communication Networks Lab
6 Lab2 Wireless and Mobile Communication Lab
Semester II
1 Core 3 Antennas and Radiating Systems

2 Core 4 Advanced Digital Signal Processing
3 Program Elective – III
Specific (1) Satellite Communication
Elective (2) Internet of Things
(3) Voice and data networks
4 Program Elective – IV
Specific (1) Markov Chain and Queuing System
Elective (2) MIMO System
(3) Programmable Networks – SDN, NFV
5 Lab 3 Antennas and Radiating Systems lab
6 Lab 4 Advanced Digital Signal Processing Lab
7 Mini Project
8 Aud2 Audit course 2
Semester III
1. Program Elective – V
Specific (1) High Performance Networks
Elective (2) Pattern Recognition and Machine learning
(3) Remote Sensing
6. Waste to Energy
Semester IV
Sr. Course
Course Name
No. Code
[ 261 ]
################################
Audit course 1 & 2

4. Value Education
6. Pedagogy Studies
M. Tech. (Electronics & Telecommunication) Specialization: VLSI & Embedded Systems
Semester I
Sr. No. Course Course Name
Type/Code
1 Core 1 RTL Simulation and Synthesis with PLDs
2 Core 2 Microcontrollers and Programmable Digital Signal Processors

Elective (1) Digital Signal and Image Processing
PE1 (2) Programming Languages for Embedded Software
(3) VLSI signal processing
4 Prog. Specific Elective II
Elective (1) Parallel Processing
PE2 (2) System Design with Embedded Linux
(3) CAD of Digital System
5 Lab 1 RTL Simulation and Synthesis with PLDs Lab
6 Lab2 Microcontrollers and Programmable Digital Signal Processors Lab
Semester II
1 Core 3 Analog and Digital CMOS VLSI Design

2 Core 4 VLSI Design Verification and Testing
3 PE-3 Elective III
(1) Memory Technologies
(2) SoC Design
(3) Low power VLSI Design
4 PE-4 Elective IV
[ 262 ]
################################
(1) Communication Buses and Interfaces
(2) Network Security and Cryptography
(3) Physical design automation
5 Lab1 Analog and Digital CMOS VLSI Design Lab
6 Lab2 VLSI Design Verification and Testing Lab
7 Mini Project
Semester III
1. PE-5 Elective – V
(1) Communication Network
(2) Selected Topics in Mathematics
(3) Nano materials and Nanotechnology
2. OE 1. Business Analytics
6. Waste to Energy
3 Dissertation Dissertation Phase – I
Semester IV
Sr. Course
Course Name
No. Code
Audit course 1 & 2

4. Value Education
6. Pedagogy Studies
[ 263 ]
M. Tech.(Electronics and Telecommunication)
Curriculum Structure
Specialization: Signal processing
Program Outcomes (POs)
a. Ability to apply the knowledge of science, mathematics, and engineering principles for developing
problems solving attitude.
b. Ability to identify, formulate and solve engineering problems in the signal processing areas such
as Developing robust and problem specific algorithms for acquisition, processing, analysis, synthesis
of signals, to be applied in Signal Processing, Machine Vision and Communication Networks.
c. Ability to understand and use different software tools in the domain of signal processing. Analysis
and Verification of algorithms, Functional and timing Simulation on platforms like MATLAB, code
composer studio and assembly language.
d. Ability to design and conduct experiments, analyze and interpret data, imbibe programming skills
for development of simulation experiments.
e. Ability to function as a member of a multidisciplinary team with sense of ethics, integrity and
social responsibility.
Semester I
No. Type/Code L T P
1 Core 1 Advanced Digital Signal Processing 3 0 0 3
2 Core 2 Digital Image and Video Processing 3 0 0 3
Specific (1) DSP Architecture
Elective (2) Computer Vision
(3) Remote Sensing
Specific (1) JTFA and MRA
Elective (2) Voice and Data Networks
(3) Audio Video Coding &
Compression
5 Lab1 Advanced Digital Signal Processing Lab 0 0 4 2
6 Lab2 Digital Image and Video Processing Lab 0 0 4 2
8 Aud 1 Audit course 1 2 0 0 0
Total 16 0 8 18
Semester II
[ 264 ]

No. Code Scheme
L T P
1 Core 3 Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning 3 0 0 3
2 Core 4 Detection and Estimation Theory 3 0 0 3
Specific (1) Advanced Compute Architecture
Elective (2) IOT and Applications
(3) Digital Design and Verification
Specific (1) Multispectral Signal Analysis
Elective (2) AudioProcessing
(3)Biomedical Signal Processing
5 Lab 1 Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning 0 0 4 2
Lab
6 Lab 2 Detection and Estimation Theory Lab 0 0 4 2
Total 14 0 12 18
Semester-III

No. Code Scheme
Specific (1) Artificial Intelligence
Elective (2) Optimization Techniques
(3) Modelling and Simulation Techniques
6. Waste to Energy
ion
Total 06 0 20 16
265
Semester-IV

Course Name Credits
No. Code
L T P
Total -- -- -- 16
Total 68 credits
Audit course 1 & 2

4. Value Education
6. Pedagogy Studies
Advanced Digital Signal Processing

Teaching Scheme
Lectures: 3 hrs./week
Course Outcomes:
 To understand theory of different filters and algorithms
 To understand theory of multirate DSP, solve numerical problems and write algorithms
 To understand theory of prediction and solution of normal equations
 To know applications of DSP at block level.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1
Overview of DSP,Characterization in time and frequency, FFT Algorithms, Digital filter design
and structures: Basic FIR/IIR filter design &structures, design techniques of linear phase FIR
filters,IIR filters by impulse invariance, bilinear transformation,FIR/IIR Cascaded lattice
structures, and Parallel all pass realization of IIR.
Unit 2
Multi rate DSP, Decimators and Interpolators, Sampling rate conversion, multistage decimator &
interpolator, poly phase filters, QMF, digital filter banks, Applications in subband coding.
Unit 3
Linear prediction & optimum linear filters, stationary random process, forward-backward linear
prediction filters, solution of normal equations, AR Lattice and ARMA Lattice-Ladder Filters,
Wiener Filters for Filtering and Prediction.
[ 266 ]
Unit 4
Adaptive Filters, Applications, Gradient Adaptive Lattice,Minimum mean square criterion, LMS
algorithm, Recursive Least Square algorithm
Unit 5
Estimation of Spectra from Finite-Duration Observations of Signals. Nonparametric Methods for
Power Spectrum Estimation,Parametric Methods for Power Spectrum Estimation, Minimum-
Variance Spectral Estimation, Eigenanalysis Algorithms for Spectrum Estimation.
Unit6
Application of DSP & Multi rate DSP, Application to Radar, introduction to wavelets, application
to image processing, design of phase shifters, DSP in speech processing & other applications
References:
 J.G.Proakis and D.G.Manolakis“Digital signal processing: Principles, Algorithm and
Applications”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2007.
 N. J. Fliege, “Multirate Digital Signal Processing: Multirate Systems -Filter Banks –
Wavelets”, 1st Edition, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, 1999.
 Bruce W. Suter, “Multirate and Wavelet Signal Processing”,1st Edition, Academic Press, 1997.
 M. H. Hayes, “Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling”, John Wiley & Sons
Inc., 2002.
 S.Haykin, “Adaptive Filter Theory”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2001.
 D.G.Manolakis, V.K. Ingle and S.M.Kogon, “Statistical and Adaptive Signal
Processing”, McGraw Hill, 2000.
Digital Image and Video Processing

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Learn different techniques for image enhancement, video and image recovery
 Understand techniques for image and video segmentation
 Study techniques for image and video compression and object recognition
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1
Digital Image and Video Fundamentals
Digital image and video fundamentals and formats, 2-D and 3-D sampling and aliasing, 2-D/3-D
filtering, image decimation/interpolation, video sampling and interpolation, Basic image
processing operations, Image Transforms
Need for image transforms, DFT, DCT, Walsh, Hadamard transform, Haar transform, Wavelet
transform
Unit 2
267
Image and Video Enhancement and Restoration

Histogram, Point processing, filtering, image restoration, algorithms for 2-D motion estimation,
change detection, motion-compensated filtering, frame rate conversion, deinterlacing, video
resolution enhancement, Image and Video restoration (recovery).
Unit 3
Image and Video Segmentation
Discontinuity based segmentation- Line detection, edge detection, thresholding, Region based
segmentation, Scene Change Detection, Spatiotemporal Change Detection, Motion Segmentation,
Simultaneous Motion Estimation and Segmentation Semantic Video Object Segmentation,
Morphological image processing.
Unit 4
Colour image Processing
Colour fundamentals, Colour models, Conversion of colour models, Pseudo colour image
processing, Full colour processing
Unit 5
Image and Video Compression
Lossless image compression including entropy coding, lossy image compression, video
compression techniques, and international standards for image and video compression (JPEG,
JPEG 2000, MPEG-2/4, H.264, SVC), Video Quality Assessment
Unit 6
Object recognition
Image Feature representation and description-boundary representation, boundary descriptors,
regional descriptors, feature selection techniques, introduction to classification, supervised and
unsupervised learning, Template matching, Bayes classifier
References:
 Ed. Al Bovik ,”Handbook of Image and Video Processing”, 2nd Edition, Academic
Press, 2000.
 J. W. Woods, “Multidimensional Signal, Image and Video Processing and Coding”,2nd
Edition, Academic Press, 2011.
 Rafael C. Gonzalez and Richard E. Woods,” Digital Image Processing”, 3rd Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2008.
 A. M. Tekalp, “Digital Video Processing”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2015.
 S. Shridhar, “Digital Image Processing”, 2nd Edition, Oxford University Press, 2016.
DSP Architecture
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Identify and formalize architectural level characterization of P-DSP hardware
[ 268 ]
 Ability to design, programming (assembly and C), and testing code using Code Composer
Studio environment
 Deployment of DSP hardware for Control, Audio and Video Signal processing
applications
 Understanding of major areas and challenges in DSP based embedded systems
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1
Programmable DSP Hardware: Processing Architectures (von Neumann, Harvard), DSP core
algorithms (FIR, IIR, Convolution, Correlation, FFT), IEEE standard for Fixed and Floating Point
Computations, Special Architectures Modules used in Digital Signal Processors (like MAC unit,
Barrel shifters), On-Chip peripherals, DSP benchmarking.
Unit 2
Structural and Architectural Considerations: Parallelism in DSP processing, Texas Instruments
TMS320 Digital Signal Processor Families, Fixed Point TI DSP Processors: TMS320C1X and
TMS320C2X Family,TMS320C25 –Internal Architecture, Arithmetic and Logic Unit, Auxiliary
Registers, Addressing Modes (Immediate, Direct and Indirect, Bit-reverse Addressing), Basics of
TMS320C54x and C55x Families in respect of Architecture improvements and new applications
fields, TMS320C5416 DSP Architecture, Memory Map, Interrupt System, Peripheral Devices,
Illustrative Examples for assembly coding.
Unit 3
VLIW Architecture: Current DSP Architectures, GPUs as an alternative to DSP Processors,
TMS320C6X Family, Addressing Modes, Replacement of MAC unit by ILP, Detailed study of
ISA, Assembly Language Programming, Code Composer Studio, Mixed Cand Assembly
Language programming, On-chip peripherals, Simple applications developments as an embedded
environment.
Unit 4
Multi-core DSPs: Introduction to Multi-core computing and applicability for DSP hardware,
Concept of threads, introduction to P-thread, mutex and similar concepts, heterogeneous and
homogenous multi-core systems, Shared Memory parallel programming –OpenMP approach of
parallel programming, PRAGMA directives, OpenMP Constructs for work sharing like for loop,
sections, TI TMS320C6678 (Eight Core subsystem).
Unit 5
FPGA based DSP Systems: Limitations of P-DSPs, Requirements of Signal processing for
Cognitive Radio (SDR), FPGA based signal processing design-case study of a complete design of
DSP processor.
Unit 6
High Performance Computing using P-DSP: Preliminaries of HPC, MPI, OpenMP, multicore DSP
as HPC infrastructure.
References:
 M. Sasikumar, D. Shikhare, Ravi Prakash, “Introduction to Parallel Processing”, 1st
Edition, PHI, 2006.
 Fayez Gebali, “Algorithms and Parallel Computing”,1st Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2011
269
 Rohit Chandra, Ramesh Menon, Leo Dagum, David Kohr, DrorMaydan, Jeff
McDonald,“Parallel Programming in OpenMP”, 1st Edition, Morgan Kaufman,2000.
 Ann Melnichuk,Long Talk, “Multicore Embedded systems”, 1st Edition, CRC Press,2010.
 Wayne Wolf, “High Performance Embedded Computing: Architectures, Applications and
Methodologies”, 1st Edition, Morgan Kaufman, 2006.
 E.S.Gopi, “Algorithmic Collections for Digital Signal Processing Applications Using
MATLAB”, 1st Edition, Springer Netherlands,2007.
Computer Vision
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Study the image formation models and feature extraction for computer vision
 Identify the segmentation and motion detection and estimation techniques
 Develop small applications and detect the objects in various applications
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1
Image Formation Models
• Monocular imaging system • Orthographic & Perspective Projection • Camera model and
Camera calibration • Binocular imaging systems, Perspective, Binocular Stereopsis: Camera and
Epipolar Geometry; Homography, Rectification, DLT, RANSAC, 3-D reconstruction framework;
Auto-calibration. Apparel, Binocular Stereopsis: Camera and Epipolar Geometry; Homography,
Rectification, DLT, RANSAC, 3-D reconstruction framework; Auto-calibration. Apparel, Stereo
vision
Unit 2
Feature Extraction
• Image representations (continuous and discrete) • Edge detection, Edge linking, corner detection,
texture, binary shape analysis, boundary pattern analysis, circle and ellipse detection, Light at
Surfaces; Phong Model; Reflectance Map; Albedo estimation; Photometric Stereo; Use of Surface
Smoothness Constraint; Shape from Texture, color, motion and edges.
Unit 3
Shape Representation and Segmentation • Deformable curves and surfaces • Snakes and active
contours • Level set representations • Fourier and wavelet descriptors • Medial representations •
Multi-resolution analysis, Region Growing, Edge Based approaches to segmentation, Graph-Cut,
Mean-Shift, MRFs, Texture Segmentation
Unit 4
Motion Detection and Estimation • Regularization theory • Optical computation • Stereo Vision
• Motion estimation, Background Subtraction and Modelling, Optical Flow, KLT, Spatio-
Temporal Analysis, Dynamic Stereo; Motion parameter estimation • Structure from motion,
Motion Tracking in Video
Unit 5
Object recognition • Hough transforms and other simple object recognition methods • Shape
[ 270 ]
correspondence and shape matching • Principal component analysis • Shape priors for recognition
Unit 6
Applications of Computer Vision
Automated Visual Inspection, Inspection of Cereal Grains, Surveillance, In-Vehicle Vision
Systems, CBIR, CBVR, Activity Recognition, computational photography, Biometrics, stitching
and document processing
References:
 D. Forsyth and J. Ponce,“Computer Vision - A modern approach”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Prentice Hall, 2012
 Szeliski, Richard, “Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications”, 1st Edition, Springer-
Verlag London Limited, 2011.
 Richard Hartley and Andrew Zisserman, “Multiple View Geometry in Computer Vision”,
2nd Edition, Cambridge University Press, 2004.
 K. Fukunaga,“Introduction to Statistical Pattern Recognition”,2ndEdition, Morgan
Kaufmann, 1990.
 Rafael C. Gonzalez and Richard E. Woods,” Digital Image Processing”, 3rd Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2008.
 B. K. P. Horn, “Robot Vision”, 1st Edition, McGraw-Hill, 1986.
 E. R. Davies“Computer and Machine Vision: Theory, Algorithms, Practicalities”, 4th
Edition, Elsevier Inc,2012.
Remote Sensing
Teaching Scheme
Lectures: 3hrs/week
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course, students shall be able to
 Understand basic concepts, principles and applications of remote sensing, particularly the
geometric and radiometric principles;
 Provide examples of applications of principles to a variety of topics in remote sensing,
particularly related to data collection, radiation, resolution, and sampling.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1
Physics Of Remote Sensing:Electro Magnetic Spectrum, Physics of Remote Sensing-Effects of
Atmosphere-Scattering–Different types–Absorption-Atmospheric window-Energy interaction with
surface features –Spectral reflectance of vegetation, soil and water atmospheric influence on
spectral response patterns-multi concept in Remote sensing.
Unit 2
Data Acquisition:Types of Platforms–different types of aircrafts-Manned and Unmanned space
crafts–sun synchronous and geo synchronous satellites –Types and characteristics of different
platforms –LANDSAT, SPOT, IRS, INSAT, IKONOS, QUICKBIRDetc.
Unit 3
271
Photographic products, B/W,color, color IR film and their characteristics –resolving power of lens
and film - Optomechanical electro optical sensors –across track and along track scanners-
multispectral scanners and thermal scanners–geometric characteristics of scanner imagery -
calibration of thermal scanners.
Unit 4
Scattering System: Microwave scatterometry,types of RADAR –SLAR –resolution –rangeand
azimuth –real aperture and synthetic aperture RADAR. Characteristics of Microwave
imagestopographic effect-different types of Remote Sensing platforms –airborne and space borne
sensors -ERS, JERS, RADARSAT, RISAT -Scatterometer, Altimeter-LiDAR remote sensing,
principles, applications.
Unit 5
Thermal And Hyper Spectral Remote Sensing:Sensors characteristics-principle of spectroscopy-
imaging spectroscopy–fieldconditions, compound spectral curve, Spectral library, radiative
models, processing procedures, derivative spectrometry, thermal remote sensing –thermal sensors,
principles, thermal data processing, applications.
Unit 6
Data Analysis:Resolution–Spatial, Spectral, Radiometric and temporal resolution-signal to noise
ratio-data products and their characteristics-visual and digital interpretation–Basicprinciples of
data processing –Radiometric correction–Image enhancement–Imageclassification–Principles of
LiDAR, Aerial Laser Terrain Mapping.
References:
 Lillesand.T.M. and Kiefer.R.W,“Remote Sensing and Image interpretation”, 6thEdition,
John Wiley & Sons, 2000.
 John R. Jensen, “Introductory Digital Image Processing: A Remote Sensing Perspective”,
2nd Edition, Prentice Hall,1995.
 Richards, John A., Jia, Xiuping, “Remote Sensing Digital Image Analysis”,5th Edition,
Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 2013.
 Paul Curran P.J. Principles of Remote Sensing, 1st Edition, Longman Publishing Group,
1984.
 Charles Elachi, Jakob J. van Zyl, “Introduction to The Physicsand Techniques of Remote
Sensing”, 2nd Edition, Wiley Serie, 2006.
 Sabins, F.F.Jr, “Remote Sensing Principles and Image Interpretation”, 3rd Edition,
W.H.Freeman& Co, 1978
Joint Time Frequency Analysis & Multi Resolution Analysis

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Introduction to Transforms in signal processing
 To understand Time -Frequency Analysis & Multiresolution Analysis
 Study of Wavelets and its Applications
[ 272 ]
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1
Introduction Review of Fourier Transform, Parseval Theorem and need for joint time-frequency
Analysis.Concept of non-stationary signals, Short-time Fourier transforms (STFT), Uncertainty
Principle, and Localization/Isolation in time and frequency, Hilbert Spaces, Banach Spaces, and
Fundamentals of Hilbert Transform.
Unit 2
Bases for Time-Frequency Analysis: Wavelet Bases and filter Banks, Tilings of Wavelet Packet
and Local Cosine Bases, Wavelet Transform, Real Wavelets, Analytic Wavelets, Discrete
Wavelets, Instantaneous Frequency, Quadratic time-frequency energy, Wavelet Frames, Dyadic
wavelet Transform, Construction of Haar and Roof scaling function using dilation equation and
graphical method.
Unit 3
Multiresolution Analysis: Haar Multiresolution Analysis, MRA Axioms, Spanning Linear
Subspaces, nested subspaces, Orthogonal Wavelets Bases, Scaling Functions, Conjugate Mirror
Filters, Haar 2-band filter Banks, Study of up samplers and down samplers, Conditions for alias
cancellation and perfect reconstruction, Discrete wavelet transform and relationship with filter
Banks, Frequency analysis of Haar 2-band filter banks, scaling and wavelet dilation equations in
time and frequency domains, case study of decomposition and reconstruction of given signal
using orthogonal framework of Haar 2band filter bank.
Unit 4
Wavelets: Daubechies Wavelet Bases, Daubechies compactly supported family of wavelets;
Daubechies filter coefficient calculations, Case study of Daub-4 filter design, Connectionbetween
Haar and Daub-4, Concept of Regularity, Vanishing moments. Other classes of wavelets like
Shannon, Meyer, and Battle-Lamarie.
Unit 5
Bi-orthogonal wavelets and Applications: Construction and design. Case studies of biorthogonal
5/3 tap design and its use in JPEG 2000. Wavelet Packet Trees, Time-frequency localization,
compactly supported wavelet packets, case study of Walsh wavelet packet bases generated using
Haar conjugate mirror filters till depth level 3. Lifting schemes for generating orthogonalbases
ofsecond generation wavelets.
Unit 6
JTFA Applications:Riesz Bases, Scalograms, Time-Frequency distributions: fundamental
ideas, Applications: Speech,audio, image and video compression; signal denoising, feature
extraction, inverse problem.
References:
 S. Mallat, "A Wavelet Tour of Signal Processing," 2nd Edition, Academic Press, 1999.
 L. Cohen, “Time-frequency analysis”, 1st Edition, Prentice Hall, 1995.
 G.Strang and T. Q. Nguyen, “Wavelets and Filter Banks",2nd Edition, Wellesley
Cambridge Press, 1998.
 I. Daubechies, "Ten Lectures on Wavelets", SIAM, 1992.
 P. P. Vaidyanathan, "Multirate Systems and Filter Banks", Prentice Hall, 1993.
 M. Vetterli and J. Kovacevic, "Wavelets and Subband Coding", Prentice Hall, 1995
273
Voice and Data Networks

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Protocol, algorithms, trade-offs rationale.
 Routing, transport, DNS resolutions
 Network extensions and next generation architectures.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1
Network Design Issues, Network Performance Issues, Network Terminology, centralized and
distributed approaches for networks design, Issues in design of voice and data networks.
Unit 2
Layered and Layer less Communication, Cross layer design of Networks, Voice Networks (wired
and wireless) and Switching, Circuit Switching and Packet Switching, Statistical Multiplexing.
Unit 3
Data Networks and their Design, Link layer design- Link adaptation, Link Layer Protocols,
Retransmission. Mechanisms (ARQ), Hybrid ARQ (HARQ), Go Back N, Selective Repeat
protocols and their analysis.
Unit 4
Queuing Models of Networks , Traffic Models , Little's Theorem, Markov chains, M/M/1 and
other Markov systems, Multiple Access Protocols , Aloha System , Carrier Sensing , Examples of
Local area networks,
Unit 5
Inter-networking , Bridging, Global Internet , IP protocol and addressing , Sub netting , Classless
Inter domain Routing (CIDR) , IP address lookup , Routing in Internet. End to End Protocols, TCP
and UDP. Congestion Control , Additive Increase/Multiplicative Decrease , Slow Start, Fast
Retransmit/ Fast Recovery,
Unit 6
Congestion avoidance, RED TCP Throughput Analysis, Quality of Service in Packet Networks.
Network Calculus, Packet Scheduling Algorithms.
References:
 D. Bertsekas and R. Gallager, “Data Networks”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 1992.
 L. Peterson and B. S. Davie, “Computer Networks: A Systems Approach”,5th Edition,
Morgan Kaufman, 2011.
 Kumar, D. Manjunath and J. Kuri, “Communication Networking: An analytical approach”,
1st Edition, Morgan Kaufman, 2004.
 Walrand,“Communications Network: A First Course”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2002.
 Leonard Kleinrock, “Queueing Systems,Volume I: Theory”, 1st Edition, John Wiley and
Sons, 1975.
[ 274 ]
 Aaron Kershenbaum, “Telecommunication Network Design Algorithms”, McGraw Hill,

1993.
 Vijay Ahuja, “Design and Analysis of Computer Communication Networks”, McGraw
Hill, 1987
Audio Video Coding &Compression

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Familiarity to lossy and lossless compression systems.
 Study of Video coding techniques and standards.
 Understand audio coding and multimedia synchronization techniques.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1
Introduction to Multimedia Systems and Processing, Lossless Image Compression Systems Image
Compression Systems, Huffman Coding, Arithmetic and Lempel-Ziv Coding, Other Coding
Techniques
Unit 2
Lossy Image Compression Systems, Theory of Quantization, Delta Modulation and DPCM,
Transform Coding & K-L Transforms, Discrete Cosine Transforms, Multi-Resolution Analysis,
Theory of Wavelets, Discrete Wavelet Transforms, Still Image Compression Standards: JBIG and
JPEG
Unit 3
Video Coding and Motion Estimation: Basic Building Blocks & Temporal Redundancy, Block
based motion estimation algorithms, Other fast search motion estimation algorithms
Unit 4
Video Coding Standards MPEG-1 standards, MPEG-2 Standard, MPEG-4 Standard, H.261,
H.263 Standards, H.264 standard
Unit 5
Audio Coding, Basic of Audio Coding, Audio Coding, Transform and Filter banks, Polyphase
filter implementation , Audio Coding, Format and encoding, Psychoacoustic Models
Unit 6
Multimedia Synchronization, Basic definitions and requirements, References Model and
Specification, Time stamping and pack architecture, Packet architectures and audio-video
interleaving, Multimedia Synchronization, Playback continuity, Video Indexing And Retrieval:
Basics of content based image retrieval, Video Content Representation, Video Sequence Query
Processing
References:
275
 Iain E.G. Richardson, “H.264 and MPEG-4 Video Compression”, Wiley, 2003.
 Khalid Sayood, “Introduction to Data Compression”, 4th Edition, Morgan Kaufmann,
2012
 Mohammed Ghanbari, “Standard Codecs: Image Compression to Advanced Video
Coding”, 3rd Edition, The Institution of Engineering and Technology, 2011.
 Julius O. Smith III, “Spectral Audio Signal Processing”, W3K Publishing, 2011.
 Nicolas Moreau, “Tools for Signal Compression: Applications to Speech and Audio
Coding”, Wiley, 2011.
Lab 1 : Advanced Digital Signal Processing lab
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Design different digital filters in software
 Apply various transforms in time and frequency
 Perform decimation and interpolation
List of Assignments:
1. Basic Signal Representation
2. Correlation Auto And Cross
3. Stability Using Hurwitz Routh Criteria
4. Sampling FFT Of Input Sequence
5. Butterworth Low pass And High pass Filter Design
6. Chebychev Type I,II Filter
7. State Space Matrix from Differential Equation
8. Normal Equation Using Levinson Durbin
9. Decimation And Interpolation Using Rationale Factors
10. Maximally Decimated Analysis DFT Filter
11. Cascade Digital IIR Filter Realization
12. Convolution And M Fold Decimation &PSD Estimator
13. Estimation Of PSD
14. Inverse Z Transform
15. Group Delay Calculation
16. Separation Of T/F
17. Parallel Realization of IIR filter
Digital Image and Video Processing lab

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Perform image and video enhancement
[ 276 ]
 Perform image and video segmentation

 Detect an object in an image/video
1. Perform basic operations on images like addition, subtraction etc.
2. Plot the histogram of an image and perform histogram equalization
3. Implement segmentation algorithms
4. Perform video enhancement
5. Perform video segmentation
6. Perform image compression using lossy technique
7. Perform image compression using lossless technique
8. Perform image restoration
9. Convert a colour model into another
10. Calculate boundary features of an image
11. Calculate regional features of an image
12. Detect an object in an image/video using template matching/Bayes classifier

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Understanding that when IPR would take such important place in growth of individuals
& nation, it is needless to emphasis the need of information about Intellectual Property
Right to be promoted among students in general & engineering in particular.
 Understand that IPR protection provides an incentive to inventors for further research
work and investment in R & D, which leads to creation of new and better products, and
in turn brings about, economic growth and social benefits.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Meaning of research problem, Sources of research problem, Criteria Characteristics
of a good research problem, Errors in selecting a research problem, Scope and objectives of
research problem.
Unit 2:Effective literature studies approaches, analysis
Plagiarism , Research ethics,
Unit 3:Effective technical writing, how to write report, Paper
Unit 4:Nature of Intellectual Property: Patents, Designs, Trademarks and Copyright. Process
of Patenting and Development: technological research, innovation, patenting, development.
277
International Scenario: International cooperation on Intellectual Property. Procedure for

grants of patents, Patenting under PCT.
Unit 5:Patent Rights: Scope of Patent Rights. Licensing and transfer of technology. Patent
Unit 6:New Developments in IPR: Administration of Patent System. New developments in
IPR; IPR of Biological Systems, Computer Software etc. Traditional knowledge Case
Studies, IPR and IITs.
References:
 Stuart Melville and Wayne Goddard, “Research methodology: an introduction for
science & engineering students’”
 Ranjit Kumar, 2nd Edition , “Research Methodology: A Step by Step Guide for
beginners”
Semester II
Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Study the parametric and linear models for classification
 Design neural network and SVM for classification
 Develop machine independent and unsupervised learning techniques.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1
Introduction to Pattern Recognition: Problems, applications, design cycle, learning and
adaptation, examples, Probability Distributions, Parametric Learning - Maximum likelihood and
Bayesian Decision Theory- Bayes rule, discriminant functions, loss functions and Bayesian error
analysis
Unit 2
Linear models: Linear Models for Regression, linear regression, logistic regression Linear
Models for Classification
Unit 3
Neural Network: perceptron, multi-layer perceptron, backpropagation algorithm, error surfaces,
practical techniques for improving backpropagation, additional networks and training methods,
Adaboost, Deep Learning
[ 278 ]
Unit 4
Linear discriminant functions - decision surfaces, two-category, multi-category, minimum-
squared error procedures, the Ho-Kashyap procedures, linear programming algorithms, Support
vector machine
Unit 5
Algorithm independent machine learning – lack of inherent superiority of any classifier, bias
and variance, re-sampling for classifier design, combining classifiers
Unit 6
Unsupervised learning and clustering – k-means clustering, fuzzy k-means clustering,
hierarchical clustering
References:
 Richard O. Duda, Peter E. Hart, David G. Stork, “Pattern Classification”, 2nd Edition John
Wiley & Sons, 2001.
 Trevor Hastie, Robert Tibshirani, Jerome H. Friedman, “The Elements of Statistical
Learning”, 2nd Edition, Springer, 2009.
 C. Bishop, “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer, 2006.
Detection and Estimation Theory
Lectures: 3 hrs/week Marks : 100
Course Outcomes:
 Understand the mathematical background of signal detection and estimation
 Use classical and Bayesian approaches to formulate and solve problems for signal
detection and parameter estimation from noisy signals.
 Derive and apply filtering methods for parameter estimation.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1
Review of Vector Spaces: Vectors and matrices: notation andproperties, orthogonality and linear
independence, bases, distance properties, matrix operations, Eigen values and eigenvectors.
Unit 2
Properties of Symmetric Matrices: Diagonalizationof symmetric matrices, symmetric positive
definite and semi definite matrices, principal component analysis (PCA), singular value
decomposition.
Unit 3
Stochastic Processes: Time average and moments, ergodicity, power spectral density, covariance
matrices, response of LTI system to random process, cyclostationary process, and spectral
factorization.
Unit 4
279
Detection Theory:Detection in white Gaussian noise, correlator and matched filter interpretation,
Bayes‘ criterion of signal detection, MAP, LMS, entropy detectors, detection in colored
Gaussian noise, Karhunen-Loeve expansions and whitening filters.
Unit 5
Estimation Theory: Minimum variance estimators, Cramer-Rao lower bound, examples of linear
models, system identification, Markov classification, clustering algorithms.
Unit 6
Topics in Kalman and Weiner Filtering: Discrete time Wiener-Hopf equation, error variance
computation, causal discrete time Wiener filter, discrete Kalman filter, extended Kalman filter,
examples. Specialized Topics in Estimation:Spectral estimation methodslike MUSIC, ESPIRIT,
DOA Estimation.
References:
 Steven M. Kay, “Fundamentals of Statistical Signal Processing, Volume I: Estimation
Theory”,
 Prentice Hall, 1993
 Steven M. Kay, “Fundamentals of Statistical Signal Processing, Volume II: Detection
Theory”, 1st Edition, Prentice Hall, 1998
 Thomas Kailath, BabakHassibi, Ali H. Sayed, “Linear Estimation”, Prentice Hall, 2000.
 H. Vincent Poor, “An Introduction to Signal Detection and Estimation”, 2nd Edition,
Springer, 1998.
Advanced Computer Architecture
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Understand parallelism and pipelining concepts, the design aspects and challenges.
 Evaluate the issues in vector and array processors.
 Study and analyze the high performance scalable multithreaded and multiprocessor
systems.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1
Parallel Processing and Pipelining Processing- Architectural Classification, Applications of
parallel processing, Instruction level Parallelism and Thread Level Parallelism, Explicitly Parallel
Instruction Computing (EPIC) Architecture
Unit 2
Pipeline Architecture-Principles and implementation of Pipelining, Classification of pipelining
processors, Design aspect of Arithmetic and Instruction pipelining, Pipelining hazards and
resolving techniques, Data buffering techniques, Advanced pipelining techniques, Software
pipelining, VLIW (Very Long Instruction Word) processor.
Unit 3
[ 280 ]
Vector and Array Processor- Issues in Vector Processing, Vector performance modeling, SIMD
Computer Organization, Static Vs Dynamic network, Parallel Algorithms for Array Processors:
Matrix Multiplication.
Unit 4
Multiprocessor Architecture - Loosely and Tightly coupled multiprocessors, Inter Processor
communication network, Time shared bus, Multiport Memory Model, Memory contention and
arbitration techniques, Cache coherency and bus snooping, Massively Parallel Processors (MPP).
Unit 5
Multithreaded Architecture- Multithreaded processors, Latency hiding techniques, Principles of
multithreading, Issues and solutions, Parallel Programming Techniques: Message passing program
development.
Unit 6
Parallel algorithms for multiprocessors- Classification and performance of parallel algorithms,
operating systems for multiprocessors systems, Message passing libraries for parallel
programming interface, PVM (in distributed memory system), Message Passing Interfaces (MPI).
References:
 Kai Hwang, Faye A. Briggs, “Computer Architecture and ParallelProcessing” McGraw
Hill Education, 2012.
 Kai Hwang, “Advanced Computer Architecture”, McGraw Hill Education, 1993.
 William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture, Designing for Performance”
Prentice Hall, 6th edition, 2006.
 Kai Hwang, “ScalableParallelComputing”, McGraw Hill Education, 1998.
 Harold S. Stone “High-Performance Computer Architecture”, Addison-Wesley, 1993.
IOT and Applications

Lectures: 3 hrs/week Marks : 100
Course Outcomes:
 Understand the concept of IOT and M2M
 Study IOT architecture and applications in various fields
 Study the security and privacy issues in IOT.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1
IoT& Web Technology The Internet of Things Today, Time for Convergence, Towards the IoT
Universe, Internet of Things Vision, IoT Strategic Research and Innovation Directions, IoT
Applications, Future Internet Technologies, Infrastructure, Networks and Communication,
Processes, Data Management, Security, Privacy & Trust, Device Level Energy Issues, IoT Related
Standardization, Recommendations on Research Topics.
Unit 2
M2M to IoT – A Basic Perspective– Introduction, Some Definitions, M2M Value Chains, IoT
Value Chains, An emerging industrial structure for IoT, The international driven global value
281
chain and global information monopolies. M2M to IoT-An Architectural Overview– Building an
architecture, Main design principles and needed capabilities, An IoT architecture outline,
standards considerations.
Unit 3
IoT Architecture -State of the Art – Introduction, State of the art, Architecture Reference Model-
Introduction, Reference Model and architecture, IoT reference Model, IoT Reference
Architecture- Introduction, Functional View, Information View, Deployment and Operational
View, Other Relevant architectural views.
Unit 4
IoT Applications for Value Creations Introduction, IoT applications for industry: Future Factory
Concepts, Brownfield IoT, Smart Objects, Smart Applications, Four Aspects in your Business to
Master IoT, Value Creation from Big Data and Serialization, IoT for Retailing Industry, IoT For
Oil and Gas Industry, Opinions on IoT Application and Value for Industry, Home Management,
eHealth.
Unit 5
Internet of Things Privacy, Security and Governance Introduction, Overview of Governance,
Privacy and Security Issues,
Unit 6
Contribution from FP7 Projects, Security, Privacy and Trust in IoT-Data-Platforms for Smart
Cities, First Steps Towards a Secure Platform, Smartie Approach. Data Aggregation for the IoT in
Smart Cities, Security
References:
 Vijay Madisetti and ArshdeepBahga, “Internet of Things (A Hands-on-Approach)”, 1st
Edition, VPT, 2014.
 Francis daCosta, “Rethinking the Internet of Things: A Scalable Approach to Connecting
Everything”, 1stEdition, Apress Publications, 2013.
 CunoPfister, “Getting Started with the Internet of Things”, O Reilly Media, 2011.
Digital Design and Verification

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Familiarity of Front end design and verification techniques and create reusable test
environments.
 Verify increasingly complex designs more efficiently and effectively.
 Use EDA tools like Cadence, Mentor Graphics.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1
Revision of basic Digital systems: Combinational Circuits, Sequential Circuits, Logic families.
[ 282 ]
Synchronous FSM and asynchronous design, Metastability, Clock distribution and issues, basic
building blocks like PWM module, pre-fetch unit, programmable counter, FIFO, Booth's
multiplier, ALU, Barrel shifter etc.
Unit 2
Verilog/VHDL Comparisons and Guidelines, Verilog: HDL fundamentals, simulation, and test-
bench design, Examples of Verilog codes for combinational and sequential logic, Verilog AMS
Unit 3
System Verilog and Verification: Verification guidelines, Data types, procedural statements and
routines, connecting the test bench and design, Assertions, Basic OOP concepts, Randomization,
Introduction to basic scripting language: Perl, Tcl/Tk
Unit 4
Current challenges in physical design: Roots of challenges, Delays: Wire load models Generic PD
flow, Challenges in PD flow at different steps, SI Challenge - Noise & Crosstalk, IR Drop,
Process effects: Process Antenna Effect &Electromigration
Unit 5
Programmable Logic Devices: Introduction, Evolution: PROM, PLA, PAL, Architecture of PAL's,
Applications, Programming PLD's, FPGA with technology: Antifuse, SRAM, EPROM, MUX,
FPGA structures, and ASIC Design Flows, Programmable Interconnections, Coarse grained
reconfigurable devices
Unit 6
IP and Prototyping: IP in various forms: RTL Source code, Encrypted Source code, Soft IP,
Netlist, Physical IP, and Use of external hard IP during prototyping, Case studies, and Speed
issues. Testing of logic circuits: Fault models, BIST, JTAG interface
References:
 Douglas Smith, “HDL Chip Design: A Practical Guide for Designing, Synthesizing &
Simulating ASICs & FPGAs Using VHDL or Verilog”, Doone publications, 1998.
 Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL: A guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Prentice Hall,
2nd Edition, 2003.
 Doug Amos, Austin Lesea, Rene Richter, “FPGA based Prototyping Methodology
Manual”, Synopsys Press, 2011.
 Christophe Bobda, “Introduction to Reconfigurable Computing, Architectures, Algorithms
and Applications”, Springer, 2007.
 Janick Bergeron, “Writing Testbenches: Functional Verification of HDL Models”, Second
Edition, Springer, 2003.
Audio Processing
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
283
 Understand different characteristics of Speech.

 Identify and analyze different speech analysis system.
 Write algorithms for Recognition of speech.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1
Principle Characteristics of Speech: Linguistic information, Speech and Hearing, Speech
production mechanism, Acoustic characteristic of speech Statistical Characteristics of speech.
Speech production models, Linear Separable equivalent circuit model, Vocal Tract and Vocal
Cord Model.
Unit 2
Speech Analysis and Synthesis Systems: Digitization, Sampling, Quantization and coding,
Spectral Analysis, Spectral structure of speech, Autocorrelation and Short Time Fourier transform,
Window function, Sound Spectrogram, Mel frequency Cepstral Coefficients, Filter bank and Zero
Crossing Analysis, Analysis –by-Synthesis, Pitch Extraction.
Unit 3
Linear Predictive Coding Analysis: Principle of LPC analysis, Maximum likelihood spectral
estimation, Source parameter estimation from residual signals, LPC Encoder and Decoder,
PARCOR analysis and Synthesis, Line Spectral Pairs, LSP analysis and Synthesis.
Unit 4
Speech Coding: Reversible coding, Irreversible coding and Information rate distortion theory,
coding in time domain: PCM, ADPCM, Adaptive Predictive coding, coding in Frequency domain:
Sub band coding, Adaptive transform coding, Vector Quantization, Code Excited Linear
Predictive Coding (CELP).
Unit 5
Speech Recognition: Principles of speech recognition, Speech period detection, Spectral distance
measure, Structure of word recognition system, Dynamic Time Warping (DTW), Theory and
implementation of Hidden Markov Model (HMM).
Unit 6
Speaker recognition: Human and Computer speaker recognition Principles Text dependent and
Text Independent speaker recognition systems. Applications of speech Processing.
References:
 SadaokiFurui, “Digital Speech Processing, Synthesis and Recognition” 2nd Edition, Taylor
& Francis, 2000.
 Rabiner and Schafer, “Digital Processing of Speech Signals”, Pearson Education, 1979.
Multispectral Signal Analysis
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Select appropriate hyperspectral data for a particular application.
 Understand basic concepts of data acquisition and image processing tasks required for
multi and hyperspectral data analysis.
[ 284 ]
 Learn techniques for classification and analysis of multi and hyperspectral data
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1
Hyperspectral Sensors and Applications: Introduction, Multi-spectral Scanning Systems (MSS),
Hyperspectral Systems, Airborne sensors, Spaceborne sensors, Ground Spectroscopy, Software for
Hyperspectral Processing, Applications, Atmosphere and Hydrosphere, Vegetation, Soils and
Geology, Environmental Hazards and Anthropogenic Activity
Unit 2
Overview of Image Processing: Introduction, Image File Formats, Image Distortion and
Rectification, Radiometric Distortion, Geometric Distortion and Rectification, Image Registration,
Image Enhancement, Point Operations, Geometric Operation, Image Classification, Supervised
Classification, Unsupervised Classification, Crisp Classification Algorithms, Fuzzy Classification
Algorithms, Classification Accuracy Assessment, Image Change Detection, Image Fusion,
Automatic Target Recognition
Unit 3
Mutual Information:A Similarity Measure for Intensity Based Image Registration: Introduction,
Mutual Information Similarity Measure,Joint Histogram Estimation Methods, Two-Step Joint
Histogram Estimation, One-Step Joint Histogram Estimation, Interpolation Induced Artifacts,
Generalized Partial Volume Estimation of Joint Histograms, Optimization Issues in the
Maximization of MI
Unit 4
Independent Component Analysis: Introduction, Concept of ICA, ICA Algorithms, Preprocessing
using PCA, Information Minimization Solution for ICA, ICA Solution through Non-Gaussianity
Maximization, Application of ICA to Hyperspectral Imagery, Feature Extraction Based Model,
Linear Mixture Model Based Model, An ICA algorithm for Hyperspectral Image Processing,
Applications using ICA.
Unit 5
Support Vector Machines : Introduction, Statistical Learning Theory, Empirical Risk
Minimization, Structural Risk Minimization, Design of Support Vector Machines, Linearly
Separable Case, Linearly Non-Separable Case, Non-Linear Support Vector Machines, SVMs for
Multiclass Classification, One Against the Rest Classification, Pair wise Classification,
Classification based on Decision Directed Acyclic Graph and Decision Tree Structure, Multiclass
Objective Function, optimization Methods , Applications using SVM.
Unit 6
Markov Random Field Models: Introduction, MRF and Gibbs Distribution, Random Field and
Neighborhood ,Cliques, Potential and Gibbs Distributions, MRF Modeling in Remote Sensing
Applications, Optimization Algorithms, Simulated Annealing, Metropolis Algorithm, Iterated
Conditional Modes Algorithm
References:
 Pramod K. Varshney, Manoj K. Arora, “Advanced Image Processing Techniques for
Remotely Sensed Hyperspectral Data”, Springer, 2013.
 S. Svanberg, “Multi-spectral Imaging– from Astronomy to Microscopy – from Radio
waves to Gamma rays”, Springer Verlag, 2009
285
Biomedical Signal Processing

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Understand different types of biomedical signal.
 Identify and analyze different biomedical signals.
 Find applications related to biomedical signal processing
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1
Acquisition, Generation of Bio-signals,Origin of bio-signals, Types of bio-signals,Study of
diagnostically significant bio-signal parameters
Unit 2
Electrodes for bio-physiological sensing and conditioning, Electrode-electrolyte interface,
polarization, electrode skin interface and motion artefact, biomaterial used for electrode, Types of
electrodes (body surface, internal, array of electrodes,microelectrodes), Practical aspects of using
electrodes, Acquisition of bio-signals (signal conditioning) and Signal conversion (ADC’s DAC’s)
Processing, Digital filtering
Unit 3
Biomedical signal processing by Fourier analysis, Biomedical signal processing by wavelet (time-
frequency) analysis, Analysis (Computation of signal parameters that are diagnostically
significant)
Unit 4
Classification of signals and noise, Spectral analysis of deterministic, stationary random signals
and non-stationary signals, Coherent treatment of various biomedical signal processing methods
and applications.
Unit 5
Principal component analysis, Correlation and regression, Analysis of chaotic signals Application
areas of Bio–Signals analysis Multiresolution analysis(MRA) and wavelets, Principal component
analysis(PCA), Independent component analysis(ICA)
Unit 6
Pattern classification–supervised and unsupervised classification, Neural networks, Support vector
Machines, Hidden Markov models. Examples of biomedical signal classification examples.
References:
 W. J. Tompkins, “Biomedical Digital Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall, 1993.
 Eugene N Bruce, “Biomedical Signal Processing and Signal Modeling”, John Wiley &
Son’s publication, 2001.
 Myer Kutz, “Biomedical Engineering and Design Handbook, Volume I”, McGraw Hill,
2009.
 D C Reddy, “Biomedical Signal Processing”, McGraw Hill, 2005.
 Katarzyn J. Blinowska, JaroslawZygierewicz, “Practical Biomedical Signal Analysis Using
MATLAB”, 1st Edition, CRC Press, 2011.
[ 286 ]
Pattern Recognition & Machine LearningLaboratory

Teaching Scheme
Lab work : 4hrs/week
Course Outcomes:
 Perform image and video enhancement
 Perform image and video segmentation
 Detect an object in an image/video
1. Implement maximum likelihood algorithm
2. Implement Bayes classifier
3. Implement linear regression
4. Design a classifier using perceptron rule
5. Design a classifier using feedforward back-propagation and delta rule algorithms
6. Implement deep learning algorithm
7. Implement linear discriminant algorithm
8. Design a two class classifier using SVM
9. Design a multiclass classifier using SVM
10. Perform unsupervised learning
Detection and Estimation Theory Laboratory

Teaching Scheme
Lab work : 4hrs/week
Course Outcomes:
 Simulate signals and noise
 Detect signals in the presence of noise
 Compare various estimation techniques
1. Simulate signal and noise models models.
2. Simulate spatially separated target Signal in the presence of Additive Correlated White
Noise
3. Simulate spatially separated target Signal in the presence of Additive Uncorrelated
White Noise
4. Simulate spatially separated target Signal in the presence of Additive Correlated Colored
Noise
5. Detect Constant amplitude Signal in AWGN
6. Detect Time varying Known Signals in AWGN
7. Detect Unknown Signals in AWGN
8. Compare performance comparison of the Estimation techniques - MLE, MMSE, Bayes
Estimator, MAP Estimator, Expectation Maximization (EM) algorithm
9. Performance comparison of conventional Energy Detectors and Coherent Matched
Filter Techniques
287
Mini Project
Lectures: 4hrs/week Marks :100
Course Outcomes:
 Understand of contemporary / emerging technology for various processes and systems.
 Share knowledge effectively in oral and written form and formulate documents.
Syllabus Contents:
The students are required to search / gather the material / information on a specific a topic
comprehend it and present / discuss in the class.
Semester III
Artificial Intelligence
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Understand the concept of Artificial Intelligence, search techniques and knowledge
representation issues
 Understanding reasoning and fuzzy logic for artificial intelligence
 Understanding game playing and natural language processing.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1
What is AI (Artificial Intelligence)? : The AI Problems, The Underlying Assumption, What are AI
Techniques, The Level Of The Model, Criteria For Success, Some General References, One Final
WordProblems, State Space Search & Heuristic Search Techniques: Defining The Problems As A
State Space Search, Production Systems, Production Characteristics, Production System
Characteristics, And Issues In The Design Of Search Programs, Additional Problems. Generate-
And-Test, Hill Climbing, Best-First Search, Problem Reduction, Constraint Satisfaction, Means-
Ends Analysis.
Unit 2
Knowledge Representation Issues: Representations And Mappings, Approaches To Knowledge
Representation. Using Predicate Logic: Representation Simple Facts In Logic, Representing
Instance And Isa Relationships, Computable Functions And Predicates, Resolution. Representing
Knowledge Using Rules: Procedural Versus Declarative Knowledge, Logic Programming,
Forward Versus Backward Reasoning.
Unit 3
Symbolic Reasoning Under Uncertainty: Introduction To No monotonic Reasoning, Logics For
Non-monotonic Reasoning. Statistical Reasoning: Probability And Bays’ Theorem, Certainty
[ 288 ]
Factors And Rule-Base Systems, Bayesian Networks, DempsterShafer Theory

Unit 4
Fuzzy Logic. Weak Slot-and-Filler Structures: Semantic Nets, Frames. Strong Slot-and-Filler
Structures: Conceptual Dependency, Scripts, CYC
Unit 5
Game Playing: Overview, And Example Domain: Overview, MiniMax, Alpha-Beta Cut-off,
Refinements, Iterative deepening, The Blocks World, Components Of A Planning System, Goal
Stack Planning, Nonlinear Planning Using Constraint Posting, Hierarchical Planning, Reactive
Systems, Other Planning Techniques. Understanding: What is understanding? What makes it
hard? As constraint satisfaction
Unit 6
Natural Language Processing: Introduction, Syntactic Processing, Semantic Analysis, Semantic
Analysis, Discourse And Pragmatic Processing, Spell Checking Connectionist Models:
Introduction: Hopfield Network, Learning In Neural Network, Application Of Neural Networks,
Recurrent Networks, Distributed Representations, Connectionist AI And Symbolic AI.
References:
 Elaine Rich and Kevin Knight “Artificial Intelligence”, 2nd Edition, Tata Mcgraw-Hill, 2005.
 Stuart Russel and Peter Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach”, 3rd
Edition, Prentice Hall, 2009.
Optimization Techniques
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Understand importance of optimization
 Apply basic concepts of mathematics to formulate an optimization problem
Analyze and appreciate variety of performance measures for various optimization
problems
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1
Introduction to ClassicalMethods & Linear Programming ProblemsTerminology, Design
Variables, Constraints, Objective Function, Problem Formulation. Calculus method, Kuhn Tucker
conditions, Method of Multipliers.
Unit 2
Linear Programming Problem,Simplex method, Two-phase method, Big-M method, duality,
Integer linear Programming, Dynamic Programming, Sensitivity analysis.
Unit 3
Single Variable Optimization Problems: Optimality Criterion, Bracketing Methods, Region
Elimination Methods, Interval Halving Method, Fibonacci Search Method, Golden Section
Method. Gradient Based Methods: Newton-Raphson Method, Bisection Method, Secant Method,
289
Cubic search method.

Unit 4
Multi Variable and Constrained Optimization Technique, Optimality criteria , Direct search
Method, Simplex search methods, Hooke-Jeeve‘s pattern search method, Powell‘s conjugate
direction method,Gradient based method, Cauchy‘s Steepest descent method, Newton‘s method ,
Conjugate gradient method. Kuhn - Tucker conditions, Penalty Function, Concept of Lagrangian
multiplier, Complex search method, Random search method
Unit 5
Intelligent Optimization Techniques:Introduction to Intelligent Optimization, Soft Computing,
Genetic Algorithm: Types of reproduction operators, crossover & mutation, Simulated
Annealing Algorithm, Particle Swarm Optimization (PSO) - Graph Grammer Approach - Example
Problems
Unit 6
Genetic Programming (GP): Principles of genetic programming, terminal sets, functional sets,
differences between GA & GP, random population generation, solving differential equations
using GP.
References:
 S. S. Rao, “Engineering Optimisation: Theory and Practice”, Wiley, 2008.
 K. Deb, “Optimization for Engineering design algorithms and Examples”, Prentice Hall,
2005.
 C.J. Ray, “Optimum Design of Mechanical Elements”, Wiley, 2007.
 R. Saravanan, “Manufacturing Optimization through Intelligent Techniques, Taylor &
Francis Publications, 2006.
 D. E. Goldberg, “Genetic algorithms in Search, Optimization, and Machine learning”,
Addison-Wesley Longman Publishing, 1989.
Modelling and Simulation Techniques

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Identify and model discrete systems (deterministic and random)
 Identify and model discrete signals (deterministic and random)
 Understand modelling and simulation techniques to characterize systems/processes.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1
Introduction Circuitsas dynamicsystems, Transfer functions, poles and zeroes, State space,
Deterministic Systems, Difference and Differential Equations, Solution of Linear Difference and
Differential Equations, Numerical Simulation Methods for ODEs, System Identification, Stability
and Sensitivity Analysis.
[ 290 ]
Unit 2
Statistical methods, Description of data, Data-fitting methods, Regression analysis, Least Squares
Method, Analysis of Variance, Goodness of fit.
Unit 3
Probability and Random Processes, Discrete and Continuous Distribution, Central Limit theorem,
Measure of Randomness, MonteCarlo Methods.
Unit 4
Stochastic Processes and Markov Chains, Time Series Models.
Unit 5
Modeling and simulation concepts, Discrete-event simulation, Event scheduling/Time advance
algorithms, Verification and validation of simulation models.
Unit 6
Continuous simulation: Modeling with differential equations, Example models, Bond Graph
Modeling, Population Dynamics Modeling, System dynamics.
References:
 R. L. Woods and K. L. Lawrence, “Modeling and Simulation of Dynamic Systems”,
Prentice-Hall, 1997.
 Z. Navalih, “VHDL Analysis and Modelling of Digital Systems”, McGraw-Hill, 1993.
 J. Banks, JS. Carson and B. Nelson, “Discrete-Event System Simulation”, 2nd Edition,
Prentice-Hall of India, 1996.
(Dissertation) Dissertation Phase – I and Phase - II
Teaching Scheme: Lab

20 and 30 Hrs/Week
Course Outcomes:
 Ability to synthesize knowledge and skills previously gained and applied to an in-depth
study and execution of new technical problem.
 Capable to select from different methodologies, methods and forms of analysis to produce
a suitable research design, and justify their design.
 Ability to present the findings of their technical solution in a written report.
 Presenting the work in International/ National conference or reputed journals.
Syllabus Contents:
following
291
 Relevance to social needs of society

 Relevance to value addition to existing facilities in the institute
 Relevance to industry need
 Problems of national importance
 Research and development in various domain
 Literature survey Problem Definition
 Motivation for study and Objectives
 Preliminary design / feasibility / modular approaches
 Implementation and Verification
 Report and presentation
The dissertation stage II is based on a report prepared by the students on dissertation allotted to
them. It may be based on:
 Experimental verification / Proof of concept.
 Design, fabrication, testing of Communication System.
 The viva-voce examination will be based on the above report and work.
Guidelines for Dissertation Phase – I and II at M. Tech. (Electronics):

 As per the AICTE directives, the dissertation is a yearlong activity, to be carried out and
 The dissertation may be carried out preferably in-house i.e. department’s laboratories and
 After multiple interactions with guide and based on comprehensive literature survey, the
student shall identify the domain and define dissertation objectives. The referred literature
should preferably include IEEE/IET/IETE/Springer/Science Direct/ACM journals in the
areas of Computing and Processing (Hardware and Software), Circuits-Devices and
Systems, Communication-Networking and Security, Robotics and Control Systems, Signal
Processing and Analysis and any other related domain. In case of Industry sponsored
projects, the relevant application notes, while papers, product catalogues should be referred
and reported.
 Student is expected to detail out specifications, methodology, resources required, critical
issues involved in design and implementation and phase wise work distribution, and
submit the proposal within a month from the date of registration.
 Phase – I deliverables: A document report comprising of summary of literature survey,
 Phase – I evaluation: A committee comprising of guides of respective specialization shall
assess the progress/performance of the student based on report, presentation and Q & A. In
case of unsatisfactory performance, committee may recommend repeating the Phase-I
work.
 During phase – II, student is expected to exert on design, development and testing of the
proposed work as per the schedule. Accomplished results/contributions/innovations should
be published in terms of research papers in reputed journals and reviewed focused
conferences OR IP/Patents.
 Phase – II deliverables: A dissertation report as per the specified format, developed system
in the form of hardware and/or software, a record of continuous progress.
 Phase – II evaluation: Guide along with appointed external examiner shall assess the
[ 292 ]
unsatisfactory performance, committee may recommend for extension or repeating the

work
OPEN ELECTIVES
Business Analytics
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
Course Code
Credits
Prerequisites

Course objective

Unit1:
Analytics Process and organisation, competitive advantages of 9
Business Analytics.
Unit 2:
Important Resources, Business Analytics Personnel, Data and models 8
for Business analytics, problem solving, Visualizing and Exploring
Data, Business Analytics Technology.
Unit 3:
Ensuring Data Quality, Measuring contribution of Business analytics, 9
Managing Changes.
293
Predictive analytics analysis, Data Mining, Data Mining

Methodologies, Prescriptive analytics and its step in the business
analytics Process, Prescriptive Modelling, nonlinear Optimization.
Unit 4:
Series, Forecasting Models for Time Series with a Linear Trend, 10
Forecasting Time Series with Seasonality, Regression Forecasting with
Unit 5:
Decision Analysis: Formulating Decision Problems, Decision 8
Strategies with the without Outcome Probabilities, Decision Trees, The
Value of Information, Utility and Decision Making.
Unit 6:
COURSE OUTCOMES

and deep analytics.
Reference:
OPEN ELECTIVES
Industrial Safety
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week

[ 294 ]
Reference:
OPEN ELECTIVES
Operations Research
Teaching Scheme
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:
Unit 2
Unit 3:
problem - CPM/PERT
295
Unit 4
Unit 5
References:
Open Elective
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
[ 296 ]

References:
297
Open Elective
Composite Materials
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week

performance.
TEXT BOOKS:
Germany.
References:
Tasi.
Open Elective
Waste to Energy
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
[ 298 ]
References:
Sons, 1996.
Course objectives:
Syllabus
Suggested Studies:
299
book .

they work in
Syllabus
1 Introduction 4
Floods, Droughts And Famines, Landslides And Avalanches, Man-
made disaster: Nuclear Reactor Meltdown, Industrial Accidents, Oil
Slicks And Spills, Outbreaks Of Disease And Epidemics, War And
Conflicts.
And Epidemics
5 Risk Assessment 4
[ 300 ]
SUGGESTED READINGS:
Royal book Company.
India, New Delhi.
Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours
2  Order 8
Suggested reading
Course Output
Course Objectives
301
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours

Suggested reading
Press, New Delhi
Course outcomes
[ 302 ]
Course Objectives:
rights perspective.
Syllabus
Content Hour
Units
s
1 History 4
2 Preamble 4
Salient Features
3  Right to Freedom of Religion
4
 Parliament
 Composition
 Qualificationsand Disqualifications
4  Executive 4
 President
 Governor
303
5 4
Suggested reading
Course Outcomes:

Course Objectives:
Syllabus
Units Content Hours
terminology
1 4
[ 304 ]

studies.
3 4
practices.
 Professional development: alignment with classroom practices and
follow-up support
 Peer support
4 4
 Research design
 Contexts
5  Pedagogy 2
Suggested reading
245-261.
Course Outcomes:

305

Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours
ii)Regularization of breathing techniques and its effects-Types of
pranayam
Suggested reading
Course Outcomes:

Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours
 Verses- 71,73,75,78 (do’s)
[ 306 ]

23, 35,
 Chapter 12 -Verses 13, 14, 15, 16,17, 18
Suggested reading
Course Outcomes
307
M. Tech. (Electronics and Telecommunication)
Specialization: Communications

Students are expected to demonstrate
a. Ability to apply the knowledge of science, mathematics, and engineering principles for developing
problem solving attitude
b. Ability to identify, formulate and solve engineering problems in the broad areas like Systems
Design using communication and networking platforms and tools. Explore recent developments in
areas like optical communication, satellite communication, wireless communication, networking,
RF-microwave, antennas, measurements and standards in communication.
c. Ability to understand and use different software tools for Design, Analysis and Verification in the
domain of communication and networking. System results are obtained through progressive steps
such as Design entry, Synthesis, Functional and Timing Simulation.
d. Ability to design and conduct experiments, analyze and interpret data, imbibe programming skills
for development of simulation experiments.
e. Ability to function as a member of a multidisciplinary team with sense of ethics, integrity and
social responsibility.
Semester I
No. Type/Code Hrs/Week
L T P
1 Core 1 Advanced Communication Networks 3 0 0 3
2 Core 2 Wireless and Mobile Communication 3 0 0 3
Specific (1) Wireless Sensor Networks
Elective (2) Optical Networks
(3) Statistical Information Processing
Specific (1) Cognitive Radio
Elective (2) RF and Microwave Circuit Design
(3) DSP Architecture
5 Lab1 Advanced Communication Networks Lab 0 0 4 2
[ 308 ]
6 Lab2 Wireless and Mobile Communication Lab 0 0 4 2

Total 16 0 8 18
Semester II
No. Code Scheme
Hrs/Week
L T P
1 Core 3 Antennas and Radiating Systems 3 0 0 3
2 Core 4 Advanced Digital Signal Processing 3 0 0 3

Specific (1) Satellite Communication
Elective (2) Internet of Things
(3) Voice and data networks
Specific (1)Markov Chain and Queuing System
Elective (2)MIMO System
(3) Programmable Networks – SDN, NFV
5 Lab 3 Antennas and Radiating Systems lab 0 0 4 2
6 Lab 4 Advanced Digital Signal Processing Lab 0 0 4 2
8 Aud2 Audit course 2 2 0 0 0
Total 14 0 12 18
Semester-III
No. Code Scheme
Hrs/Week
Specific (1) High Performance Networks
Elective (2) Pattern Recognition and Machine
learning
(3) Remote Sensing
[ 309 ]
6. Waste to Energy
ion
Total 06 0 20 16
Semester-IV

Course Name Credits
No. Code
L T P
Total -- -- -- 16
Total 68 Credits
Audit course 1 & 2

4. Value Education
6. Pedagogy Studies
Advanced Communication Network

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Understand advanced concepts in Communication Networking.
 Design and develop protocols for Communication Networks.
 Understand the mechanisms in Quality of Service in networking.
 Optimise the Network Design.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1 :Overview of Internet-Concepts, challenges and history. Overview of -ATM. TCP/IP
Congestion and Flow Control in Internet-Throughput analysis of TCP congestion control. TCP for
high bandwidth delay networks. Fairness issues in TCP.
Unit 2 :Real Time Communications over Internet. Adaptive applications. Latency and throughput
issues. Integrated Services Model (intServ). Resource reservation in Internet. RSVP.;
[ 310 ]
Characterization of Traffic by Linearly Bounded Arrival Processes (LBAP). Leaky bucket

algorithm and its properties.
Unit 3 :Packet Scheduling Algorithms-requirements and choices. Scheduling guaranteed service
connections. GPS, WFQ and Rate proportional algorithms. High speed scheduler design. Theory
of Latency Rate servers and delay bounds in packet switched networks for LBAP traffic.;
Active Queue Management - RED, WRED and Virtual clock. Control theoretic analysis of active
queue management.
Unit 4 :IP address lookup-challenges. Packet classification algorithms and Flow Identification-
Grid of Tries, Cross producting and controlled prefix expansion algorithms.
Unit 5 :Admission control in Internet. Concept of Effective bandwidth. Measurement based
admission control. Differentiated Services in Internet (DiffServ). DiffServ architecture and
framework.
Unit 6 :IPV4, IPV6, IP tunnelling, IPswitching and MPLS, Overview of IP over ATM and its
evolution to IP switching. MPLS architecture and framework. MPLS Protocols. Traffic
engineering issues in MPLS.
References:
 Jean Wairand and Pravin Varaiya, “High Performance Communications Networks”, 2nd
edition, 2000.
 Jean Le Boudec and Patrick Thiran, “Network Calculus A Theory of Deterministic
Queueing Systems for the Internet”, Springer Veriag, 2001.
 Zhang Wang, “Internet QoS”, Morgan Kaufman, 2001.
 Anurag Kumar, D. Manjunath and Joy Kuri, “Communication Networking: An Analytical
Approach” , Morgan Kaufman Publishers, 2004.
 George Kesidis, “ATM Network Performance”, Kluwer Academic, Research Papers, 2005.
Wireless and Mobile Communication

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Design appropriate mobile communication systems.
 Apply frequency-reuse concept in mobile communications, and to analyze its effects on
interference, system capacity, handoff techniques
 Distinguish various multiple-access techniques for mobile communications e.g. FDMA,
TDMA, CDMA, and their advantages and disadvantages.
 Analyze path loss and interference for wireless telephony and their influences on a mobile-
communication system’s performance.
 Analyze and design CDMA system functioning with knowledge of forward and reverse
channel details, advantages and disadvantages of using the technology
 Understanding upcoming technologies like 3G, 4G etc.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Cellular Communication Fundamentals:Cellular system design, Frequency reuse, cell
splitting, handover concepts, Co channel and adjacent channel interference, interference reduction
[ 311 ]
techniques and methods to improve cell coverage, Frequency management and channel
assignment.GSM architecture and interfaces, GSM architecture details, GSM subsystems, GSM
Logical Channels, Data Encryption in GSM, Mobility Management, Call Flows in GSM.2.5 G
Standards: High speed Circuit Switched Data (HSCSD), General Packet Radio Service (GPRS),
2.75 G Standards: EDGE,
Unit 2:Spectral efficiency analysis based on calculations for Multiple access technologies:TDMA,
FDMA and CDMA,Comparison of these technologies based on their signal separation techniques,
advantages, disadvantages and application areas.Wireless network planning (Link budget and
power spectrum calculations)
Unit 3:Mobile Radio Propagation:Large Scale Path Loss, Free Space Propagation Model,
Reflection, Ground Reflection (Two-Ray) Model, Diffraction, Scattering, Practical Link Budget
Design using Path Loss Models, Outdoor Propagation Models, Indoor Propagation Models, Signal
Penetration into Buildings. Small Scale Fading and Multipath Propagation, Impulse Response
Model, Multipath Measurements, Parameters of Multipath channels, Types of Small Scale Fading:
Time Delay Spread; Flat, Frequency selective, Doppler Spread; Fast and Slow fading.
Unit 4:Equalization, Diversity:Equalizers in a communications receiver, Algorithms for adaptive
equalization, diversity techniques, space, polarization, frequency diversity, Interleaving.
Unit 5:Code Division Multiple Access:Introduction to CDMA technology, IS 95 system
Architecture, Air Interface, Physical and logical channels of IS 95, Forward Link and Reverse link
operation, Physical and Logical channels of IS 95 CDMA, IS 95 CDMA Call Processing, soft
Handoff, Evolution of IS 95 (CDMA One) to CDMA 2000, CDMA 2000 layering structure and
channels.
Unit 6:Higher Generation Cellular Standards:3G Standards: evolved EDGE, enhancements in 4G
standard, Architecture and representative protocols, call flow for LTE, VoLTE, UMTS,
introduction to 5G
References:
 V.K.Garg, J.E.Wilkes, “Principle and Application of GSM”, Pearson Education, 5th
edition, 2008.
 V.K.Garg, “IS-95 CDMA & CDMA 2000”, Pearson Education, 4th edition, 2009.
 T.S.Rappaport, “Wireless Communications Principles and Practice”, 2nd edition, PHI,2002.
 William C.Y.Lee, “Mobile Cellular Telecommunications Analog and Digital Systems”, 2nd
edition, TMH, 1995.
 Asha Mehrotra, “A GSM system Engineering” Artech House Publishers Bosten,
London,1997.
Program Elective : 1 Wireless Sensor Networks

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Design wireless sensor network system for different applications under consideration.
 Understand the hardware details of different types of sensors and select right type of sensor
for various applications.
 Understand radio standards and communication protocols to be used for wireless sensor
[ 312 ]
network based systems and application.

 Use operating systems and programming languages for wireless sensor nodes, performance
of wireless sensor networks systems and platforms.
 Handle special issues related to sensors like energy conservation and security challenges.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Introduction and overview of sensor network architecture and its applications, sensor
network comparison with Ad Hoc Networks, Sensor node architecture with hardware and software
details.
Unit 2:Hardware: Examples like mica2, micaZ, telosB, cricket, Imote2, tmote, btnode, and Sun
SPOT, Software (Operating Systems): tinyOS, MANTIS, Contiki, and RetOS.
Unit 3:Programming tools: C, nesC. Performance comparison of wireless sensor networks
simulation and experimental platforms like open source (ns-2) and commercial (QualNet, Opnet)
Unit 4:Overview of sensor network protocols (details of atleast 2 important protocol per layer):
Physical, MAC and routing/ Network layer protocols, node discovery protocols, multi-hop and
cluster based protocols, Fundamentals of 802.15.4, Bluetooth, BLE (Bluetooth low energy),
UWB.
Unit 5:Data dissemination and processing; differences compared with other database management
systems, data storage; query processing.
Unit 6: Specialized features: Energy preservation and efficiency; security challenges; fault-
tolerance, Issues related to Localization, connectivity and topology, Sensor deployment
mechanisms; coverage issues; sensor Web; sensor Grid, Open issues for future research, and
Enabling technologies in wireless sensor network.
References:
 H. Karl and A. Willig, “Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks”, John
Wiley & Sons, India, 2012.
 C. S. Raghavendra, K. M. Sivalingam, and T. Znati, Editors, “Wireless Sensor Networks”,
Springer Verlag, 1st Indian reprint, 2010.
 F. Zhao and L. Guibas, “Wireless Sensor Networks: An Information Processing
Approach”, Morgan Kaufmann, 1st Indian reprint, 2013.
 YingshuLi, MyT. Thai, Weili Wu, “Wireless sensor Network and Applications”, Springer
series on signals and communication technology, 2008.
Program Elective 1: Optical Networks
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Contribute in the areas of optical network and WDM network design.
 Implement simple optical network and understand further technology developments for
future enhanced network.
Syllabus Contents:
[ 313 ]
Unit 1:SONET/SDH: optical transport network, IP, routing and forwarding, multiprotocol label
switching.
Unit 2:WDM network elements: optical line terminals and amplifiers, optical add/drop
multiplexers, OADM architectures, reconfigurable OADM, optical cross connects.
Unit 3:Control and management: network management functions, optical layer services and
interfacing, performance and fault management, configuration management, optical safety.
Unit 4:Network Survivability: protection in SONET/SDH & client layer, optical layer protection
schemes
Unit 5:WDM network design: LTD and RWA problems, dimensioning wavelength routing
networks, statistical dimensioning models.
Unit 6:Access networks: Optical time division multiplexing, synchronization, header processing,
buffering, burst switching, test beds, Introduction to PON, GPON, AON.
References:
 Rajiv Ramaswami, Sivarajan, Sasaki, “Optical Networks: A Practical Perspective”, MK,
Elsevier, 3 rd edition, 2010.
 C. Siva Ram Murthy and Mohan Gurusamy, “WDM Optical Networks: Concepts Design,
and Algorithms”, PHI, EEE, 2001.
Program Elective 1 : Statistical Information Processing

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Characterize and apply probabilistic techniques in modern decision systems, such as
information systems, receivers, filtering and statistical operations.
 Demonstrate mathematical modelling and problem solving using such models.
 Comparatively evolve key results developed in this course for applications to signal
processing, communications systems.
 Develop frameworks based in probabilistic and stochastic themes for modelling and
analysis of various systems involving functionalities in decision making, statistical
inference, estimation and detection.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1: Review of random variables: Probability Concepts, distribution and density functions,
moments, independent, uncorrelated and orthogonal random variables; Vector-space
representation of Random variables, Vector quantization, Tchebaychef inequality theorem, Central
Limit theorem, Discrete &Continuous Random Variables.
Random process: Expectations, Moments,Ergodicity, Discrete-Time Random Processes Stationary
process, autocorrelation and auto covariance functions, Spectral representation of random signals,
Properties of power spectral density, Gaussian Process and White noise process.
Unit 2: Random signal modelling: MA(q), AR(p), ARMA(p,q) models, Hidden Markov Model &
its applications ,Linear System with random input , Forward and Backward Predictions, Levinson
Durbin Algorithm.
Unit 3: Statistical Decision Theory: Bayes’ Criterion, Binary Hypothesis Testing, M-ary
[ 314 ]
Hypothesis Testing, Minimax Criterion, Neyman-Pearson Criterion, Composite Hypothesis

Testing.
Parameter Estimation Theory: Maximum Likelihood Estimation, Generalized Likelihood Ratio
Test ,Some Criteria for Good Estimators, Bayes’ Estimation Minimum Mean-Square Error
Estimate, Minimum, Mean Absolute Value of Error Estimate Maximum A Posteriori Estimate ,
Multiple Parameter Estimation Best Linear Unbiased Estimator ,Least-Square Estimation
Recursive Least-Square Estimator.
Unit 4: Spectral analysis: Estimated autocorrelation function, Periodogram, Averaging the
periodogram (Bartlett Method), Welch modification, Parametric method, AR(p) spectral
estimation and detection of Harmonic signals.
Unit 5:Information Theory and Source Coding: Introduction, Uncertainty, Information and
Entropy, Source coding theorem, Huffman, Shanon Fano , Arithmetic , Adaptive coding , RLE ,
LZW Data compaction, , LZ-77, LZ-78. Discrete Memory less channels, Mutual information,
channel capacity, Channel coding theorem, Differential entropy and mutual information for
continuous ensembles.
Unit 6:Application of Information Theory: Group, Ring & Field, Vector, GF addition,
multiplication rules. Introduction to BCH codes, Primitive elements ,Minimal polynomials,
Generator polynomials in terms of Minimal polynomials, Some examples of BCH codes,&
Decoder, Reed- Solomon codes & Decoder, Implementation of Reed Solomon encoders and
decoders.
References:
 Papoulis and S.U. Pillai, “Probability, Random Variables and Stochastic Processes”,4th
Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2002.
 D.G. Manolakis, V.K. Ingle and S.M. Kogon, “Statistical and Adaptive Signal
Processing”, McGraw Hill, 2000.
 Mourad Barkat , “Signal Detection and Estimation”, Artech House, 2nd Edition, 2005.
 R G. Gallager, “Information theory and reliable communication”, Wiley, 1st edition, 1968.
 F. J. MacWilliams and N. J. A. Sloane, “The Theory of Error-Correcting Codes”, New
York, North-Holland, 1977.
 Rosen K.H, “Elementary Number Theory”, Addison-Wesley, 6th edition, 2010.
Program Elective 2 : Cognitive Radio

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Understand the fundamental concepts of cognitive radio networks.
 Develop the cognitive radio, as well as techniques for spectrum holes detection that
cognitive radio takes advantages in order to exploit it.
 Understand technologies to allow an efficient use of TVWS for radio communications
based on two spectrum sharing business models/policies.
 Understand fundamental issues regarding dynamic spectrum access, the radio-resource
management and trading, as well as a number of optimisation techniques for better
[ 315 ]
spectrum exploitation.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Introduction to Cognitive Radios: Digital dividend, cognitive radio (CR) architecture,
functions of cognitive radio, dynamic spectrum access (DSA), components of cognitive radio,
spectrum sensing, spectrum analysis and decision, potential applications of cognitive radio.
Unit 2:Spectrum Sensing: Spectrum sensing, detection of spectrum holes (TVWS), collaborative
sensing, geo-location database and spectrum sharing business models (spectrum of commons, real
time secondary spectrum market).
Unit 3:Optimization Techniques of Dynamic Spectrum Allocation: Linear programming, convex
programming, non-linear programming, integer programming, dynamic programming, stochastic
programming.
Unit 4:Dynamic Spectrum Access and Management: Spectrum broker, cognitive radio
architectures, centralized dynamic spectrum access, distributed dynamic spectrum access, learning
algorithms and protocols.
Unit 5:Spectrum Trading: Introduction to spectrum trading, classification to spectrum trading,
radio resource pricing, brief discussion on economics theories in DSA (utility, auction theory),
classification of auctions (single auctions, double auctions, concurrent, sequential).
Unit 6: Research Challenges in Cognitive Radio: Network layer and transport layer issues, cross-
layer design for cognitive radio networks.
References:
 Ekram Hossain, Dusit Niyato, Zhu Han, “Dynamic Spectrum Access and Management in
Cognitive Radio Networks”, Cambridge University Press, 2009.
 Kwang-Cheng Chen, Ramjee Prasad, “Cognitive radio networks”, John Wiley & Sons
Ltd., 2009.
 Bruce Fette, “Cognitive radio technology”, Elsevier, 2nd edition, 2009.
 Huseyin Arslan, “Cognitive Radio, Software Defined Radio, and Adaptive Wireless
Systems”, Springer, 2007.
 Francisco Rodrigo Porto Cavalcanti, Soren Andersson, “Optimizing Wireless
Communication Systems” Springer, 2009.
 Linda Doyle, “Essentials of Cognitive Radio”, Cambridge University Press, 2009.
Program Elective 2 : RF and Microwave Circuit Design
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Understand the behaviour of RF passive components and model active components.
 Perform transmission line analysis.
 Demonstrate use of Smith Chart for high frequency circuit design.
 Justify the choice/selection of components from the design aspects.
 Contribute in the areas of RF circuit design.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Transmission Line Theory:Lumped element circuit model for transmission line, field
analysis, Smith chart, quarter wave transformer, generator and load mismatch, impedance
[ 316 ]
matching and tuning.

Unit 2:Microwave Network Analysis:Impedance and equivalent voltage and current, Impedance
and admittance matrix, The scattering matrix, transmission matrix, Signal flow graph.
Unit 3:Microwave Components: Microwave resonators, Microwave filters, power dividers and
directional couplers, Ferromagnetic devices and components.
Unit 4:Nonlinearity And Time VarianceInter-symbol interference, random process & noise,
definition of sensitivity and dynamic range, conversion gain and distortion.
Unit 5:Microwave Semiconductor Devices And Modeling: PIN diode, Tunnel diodes, Varactor
diode, Schottky diode, IMPATT and TRAPATT devices, transferred electron devices, Microwave
BJTs, GaAs FETs, low noise and power GaAs FETs, MESFET, MOSFET, HEMT.
Unit 6:Amplifiers Design: Power gain equations, stability, impedance matching, constant gain and
noise figure circles, small signal, low noise, high power and broadband amplifier, oscillators,
Mixers design.
References:
 Matthew M. Radmanesh, “Advanced RF & Microwave Circuit Design: The Ultimate
Guide to Superior Design”, AuthorHouse, 2009.
 D.M.Pozar, “ Microwave engineering” ,Wiley, 4th edition, 2011.
 R.Ludwig and P.Bretchko, “R. F. Circuit Design”, Pearson Education Inc, 2009.
 G.D. Vendelin, A.M. Pavoi, U. L. Rohde, “Microwave Circuit Design Using Linear And
Non Linear Techniques”, John Wiley 1990.
 S.Y. Liao, “Microwave circuit Analysis and Amplifier Design”, Prentice Hall 1987.
 Radmanesh, “RF and Microwave Electronics Illustrated” , Pearson Education, 2004.
Program Elective 2 : DSP Architecture

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Identify and formalize architectural level characterization of P-DSP hardware
 Ability to design, programming (assembly and C), and testing code using Code Composer
Studio environment
 Deployment of DSP hardware for Control, Audio and Video Signal processing
applications
 Understanding of major areas and challenges in DSP based embedded systems
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1 : Programmable DSP Hardware: Processing Architectures (von Neumann, Harvard), DSP
core algorithms (FIR, IIR, Convolution, Correlation, FFT), IEEE standard for Fixed and Floating
Point Computations, Special Architectures Modules used in Digital Signal Processors (like MAC
unit, Barrel shifters), On-Chip peripherals, DSP benchmarking.
Unit 2: Structural and Architectural Considerations: Parallelism in DSP processing, Texas
Instruments TMS320 Digital Signal Processor Families, Fixed Point TI DSP Processors:
TMS320C1X and TMS320C2X Family,TMS320C25 –Internal Architecture, Arithmetic and
[ 317 ]
Logic Unit, Auxiliary Registers, Addressing Modes (Immediate, Direct and Indirect, Bit-reverse
Addressing), Basics of TMS320C54x and C55x Families in respect of Architecture improvements
and new applications fields, TMS320C5416 DSP Architecture, Memory Map, Interrupt System,
Peripheral Devices, Illustrative Examples for assembly coding.
Unit 3: VLIW Architecture: Current DSP Architectures, GPUs as an alternative to DSP
Processors, TMS320C6X Family, Addressing Modes, Replacement of MAC unit by ILP, Detailed
study of ISA, Assembly Language Programming, Code Composer Studio, Mixed Cand Assembly
Language programming, On-chip peripherals, Simple applications developments as an embedded
environment.
Unit 4: Multi-core DSPs: Introduction to Multi-core computing and applicability for DSP
hardware, Concept of threads, introduction to P-thread, mutex and similar concepts, heterogeneous
and homogenous multi-core systems, Shared Memory parallel programming –OpenMP approach
of parallel programming, PRAGMA directives, OpenMP Constructs for work sharing like for
loop, sections, TI TMS320C6678 (Eight Core subsystem).
Unit 5: FPGA based DSP Systems: Limitations of P-DSPs, Requirements of Signal processing for
Cognitive Radio (SDR), FPGA based signal processing design-case study of a complete design of
DSP processor.
Unit 6: High Performance Computing using P-DSP: Preliminaries of HPC, MPI, OpenMP,
multicore DSP as HPC infrastructure.
 M. Sasikumar, D. Shikhare, Ravi Prakash, “Introduction to Parallel Processing”, 1st

Edition, PHI, 2006.
 Fayez Gebali, “Algorithms and Parallel Computing”,1st Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2011
 Rohit Chandra, Ramesh Menon, Leo Dagum, David Kohr, DrorMaydan, Jeff
McDonald,“Parallel Programming in OpenMP”, 1st Edition, Morgan Kaufman,2000.
 Ann Melnichuk,Long Talk, “Multicore Embedded systems”, 1st Edition, CRC Press,2010.
 Wayne Wolf, “High Performance Embedded Computing: Architectures, Applications and
Methodologies”, 1st Edition, Morgan Kaufman, 2006.
 E.S.Gopi, “Algorithmic Collections for Digital Signal Processing Applications Using
MATLAB”, 1st Edition, Springer Netherlands,2007.
Advanced Communication Networks Laboratory

Teaching Scheme
Lab work : 4 hrs/week
Course Outcomes:
 Identify the different types of network devices and their functions within a network.
 Understand and build the skills of sub-netting and routing mechanisms.
 Understand basic protocols of computer networks, and how they can be used to assist in
network design and implementation.
1. Study of Networking Commands (Ping, Tracert, TELNET, nslookup, netstat, ARP, RARP)
and Network Configuration Files.
2. Linux Network Configuration.
[ 318 ]
a. Configuring NIC’s IP Address.

b. Determining IP Address and MAC Address using if-config command.
c. Changing IP Address using if-config.
d. Static IP Address and Configuration by Editing.
e. Determining IP Address using DHCP.
f. Configuring Hostname in /etc/hosts file.
3. Design TCP iterative Client and Server application to reverse the given input sentence.
4. Design a TCP concurrent Server to convert a given text into upper case using multiplexing
system call “select”.
5. Design UDP Client Server to transfer a file.
6. Configure a DHCP Server to serve contiguous IP addresses to a pool of four IP devices
with a default gateway and a default DNS address. Integrate the DHCP server with a
BOOTP demon to automatically serve Windows and Linux OS Binaries based on client
MAC address.
a. Configure DNS: Make a caching DNS client, and a DNS Proxy; implement reverse
DNS and forward DNS, using TCP dump/Wireshark characterise traffic when the
DNS server is up and when it is down.
7. Configure a mail server for IMAP/POP protocols and write a simple SMTP client in
C/C++/Java client to send and receive mails.
8. Configure FTP Server on a Linux/Windows machine using a FTP client/SFTP client
characterise file transfer rate for a cluster of small files 100k each and a video file of
700mb.Use a TFTP client and repeat the experiment.
9. Signaling and QoS of labeled paths using RSVP in MPLS.
10. Find shortest paths through provider network for RSVP and BGP.
11. Understand configuration, forwarding tables, and debugging of MPLS.
Lab 2 Wireless and Mobile Communication Laboratory
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Understanding Cellular concepts, GSM and CDMA networks
 To study GSM handset by experimentation and fault insertion techniques
 Understating of 3G communication system by means of various AT commands usage in
GSM
 Understanding CDMA concept using DSSS kit
 To learn, understand and develop concepts of Software Radio in real time environment
1. Understanding Cellular Fundamentals like Frequency Reuse, Interference, cell splitting,
multi path environment, Coverage and Capacity issues using communication software.
2. Knowing GSM and CDMA architecture, network concepts, call management, call setup,
call release,Security and Power Control, Handoff Process and types, Rake Receiver etc.
3. Study of GSM handset for various signalling and fault insertion techniques (Major GSM
handset sections: clock, SIM card, charging, LCD module, Keyboard, User interface).
4. To study transmitters and receiver section in mobile handset and measure frequency band
signal and GMSK modulating signal.
5. To study various GSM AT Commands their use and developing new application using it.
Understating of 3G Communication System with features like; transmission of voice and
videocalls, SMS, MMS, TCP/IP, HTTP, GPS and File system by AT Commands in 3G
[ 319 ]
network.
6. Study of DSSS technique for CDMA, observe effect of variation of types of PN codes,
chip rate, spreading factor, processing gain on performance.
7. To learn and develop concepts of Software Radio in real time environment by studying the
building blocks like Base band and RF section, convolution encoder, Interleaver and De-
Interleaver.
8. To study and analyze different modulation techniques in time and frequency domain using
SDR kit.

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Meaning of research problem, Sources of research problem, Criteria Characteristics of
research problem.
Unit 2:Effective literature studies approaches, analysis
Plagiarism , Research ethics,
Unit 3:Effective technical writing, how to write report, Paper
Unit 5:Patent Rights: Scope of Patent Rights. Licensing and transfer of technology. Patent
Unit 6:New Developments in IPR: Administration of Patent System. New developments in
IPR and IITs.
[ 320 ]
References:
 Ranjit Kumar, 2 nd Edition , “Research Methodology: A Step by Step Guide for
beginners”
Semester II
Core 3 : Antennas and Radiating Systems
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Compute the far field distance, radiation pattern and gain of an antenna for given current
distribution.
 Estimate the input impedance, efficiency and ease of match for antennas.
 Compute the array factor for an array of identical antennas.
 Design antennas and antenna arrays for various desired radiation pattern characteristics.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Types of Antennas: Wire antennas, Aperture antennas, Micro strip antennas, Array
antennas Reflector antennas, Lens antennas, Radiation Mechanism, Current distribution on thin
wire antenna.
Fundamental Parameters of Antennas: Radiation Pattern, Radiation Power Density, Radiation
Intensity, Directivity, Gain, Antenna efficiency, Beam efficiency, Bandwidth, Polarization, Input
Impedance, radiation efficiency, Antenna Vector effective length, Friis Transmission equation,
Antenna Temperature.
Unit 2:Linear Wire Antennas: Infinitesimal dipole, Small dipole, Region separation, Finite length
dipole, half wave dipole, Ground effects.
Loop Antennas: Small Circular loop, Circular Loop of constant current, Circular loop with non
uniform current.
Unit 3:LinearArrays: Two element array, N Element array: Uniform Amplitude and spacing,
Broadside and End fire array, Super directivity, Planar array, Design consideration.
Unit 4:Aperture Antennas: Huygen’s Field Equivalence principle, radiation equations,
Rectangular Aperture, Circular Aperture.
Horn Antennas: E-Plane, H-plane Sectoral horns, Pyramidal and Conical horns.
[ 321 ]
Unit 5:Micro strip Antennas: Basic Characteristics, Feeding mechanisms, Method of analysis,
Rectangular Patch, Circular Patch.
Unit 6:Reflector Antennas: Plane reflector, parabolic reflector, Cassegrain reflectors, Introduction
to MIMO.
References:
 Constantine A. Balanis, “Antenna Theory Analysis and Design”, John Wiley & Sons, 4th
edition, 2016.
 John D Kraus, Ronald J Marhefka, Ahmad S Khan, “Antennas for All Applications”, Tata
McGraw-Hill, 2002.
 R.C.Johnson and H.Jasik, “Antenna Engineering hand book”, Mc-Graw Hill, 1984.
 I.J.Bhal and P.Bhartia, “Micro-strip antennas”, Artech house, 1980.
Core-4 Advanced Digital Signal Processing
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 To understand theory of different filters and algorithms
 To understand theory of multirate DSP, solve numerical problems and write algorithms
 To understand theory of prediction and solution of normal equations
 To know applications of DSP at block level.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1: Overview of DSP, Characterization in time and frequency, FFT Algorithms, Digital filter
design and structures: Basic FIR/IIR filter design &structures, design techniques of linear phase
FIR filters,IIR filters by impulse invariance, bilinear transformation, FIR/IIR Cascaded lattice
structures, parallel realization of IIR.
Unit 2 : Multi rate DSP, Decimators and Interpolators, Sampling rate conversion, multistage
decimator & interpolator, poly phase filters, QMF, digital filter banks, Applications in subband
coding.
Unit 3: Linear prediction & optimum linear filters, stationary random process, forward-backward
linear prediction filters, solution of normal equations, AR Lattice and ARMA Lattice-Ladder
Filters, Wiener Filters for Filtering and Prediction.
Unit 4: Adaptive Filters, Applications, Gradient Adaptive Lattice, Minimum mean square
criterion, LMS algorithm, Recursive Least Square algorithm
Unit 5: Estimation of Spectra from Finite-Duration Observations of Signals. Nonparametric
Methods for Power Spectrum Estimation, Parametric Methods for Power Spectrum Estimation,
Minimum-Variance Spectral Estimation, Eigen analysis Algorithms for Spectrum Estimation.
Unit6 :Application of DSP & Multi rate DSP, Application to Radar, introduction to wavelets,
application to image processing, design of phase shifters, DSP in speech processing & other
applications
References:
 J.G.Proakis and D.G.Manolakis“Digital signal processing: Principles, Algorithm and
[ 322 ]
 Applications”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2007.

 N. J. Fliege, “Multirate Digital Signal Processing: Multirate Systems -Filter Banks –
Wavelets”, 1st Edition, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, 1999.
 Bruce W. Suter, “Multirate and Wavelet Signal Processing”,1st Edition, Academic Press,
1997.
 M. H. Hayes, “Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling”, John Wiley & Sons
Inc., 2002.
 S.Haykin, “Adaptive Filter Theory”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2001.
 D.G.Manolakis, V.K. Ingle and S.M.Kogon, “Statistical and Adaptive Signal
Processing”, McGraw Hill, 2000
PE 3 : Satellite Communication
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Visualize the architecture of satellite systems as a means of high speed, high range
communication system.
 State various aspects related to satellite systems such as orbital equations, sub-systems in a
satellite, link budget, modulation and multiple access schemes.
 Solve numerical problems related to orbital motion and design of link budget for the given
parameters and conditions.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Architecture of Satellite Communication System: Principles and architecture of satellite
Communication, Brief history of Satellite systems, advantages, disadvantages, applications, and
frequency bands used for satellite communication and their advantages/drawbacks.
Unit 2:Orbital Analysis: Orbital equations, Kepler’s laws of planetary motion, Apogee and
Perigee for an elliptical orbit, evaluation of velocity, orbital period, angular velocity etc of a
satellite, concepts of Solar day and Sidereal day.
Unit 3:Satellite sub-systems: Architecture and Roles of various sub-systems of a satellite system
such as Telemetry, tracking, command and monitoring (TTC & M), Attitude and orbit control
system (AOCS), Communication sub-system, power sub-systems, antenna sub-system.
Unit 4:Typical Phenomena in Satellite Communication: Solar Eclipse on satellite, its effects,
remedies for Eclipse, Sun Transit Outage phenomena, its effects and remedies, Doppler frequency
shift phenomena and expression for Doppler shift.
Unit 5:Satellite link budget: Flux density and received signal power equations, Calculation of
System noise temperature for satellite receiver, noise power calculation, Drafting of satellite link
budget and C/N ratio calculations in clear air and rainy conditions, Case study of Personal
Communication system (satellite telephony) using LEO.
Unit 6:Modulation and Multiple Access Schemes used in satellite communication.Typical case
studies of VSAT, DBS-TV satellites and few recent communication satellites launched by NASA/
ISRO. GPS.
[ 323 ]
References:
 Timothy Pratt and Others, “Satellite Communications”, Wiley India, 2nd edition,2010.
 S. K. Raman, “Fundamentals of Satellite Communication”, PearsonEducation India, 2011.
 Tri T. Ha, “Digital Satellite Communications”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.
 Dennis Roddy, “Satellite Communication”, McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2008.
PE 3 : Internet of things
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Understand what IoT technologies are used for today, and what is required in certain
scenarios.
 Understand the types of technologies that are available and in use today and can be
utilized to implement IoT solutions.
 Apply these technologies to tackle scenarios in teams of using an experimental platform
for implementing prototypes and testing them as running applications.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Smart cities and IoT revolution, Fractal cities, From IT to IoT, M2M and peer networking
concepts, Ipv4 and IPV6.
Unit 2:Software Defined Networks SDN, From Cloud to Fog and MIST networking for IoT
communications, Principles of Edge/P2P networking, Protocols to support IoT communications,
modular design and abstraction, security and privacy in fog.
Unit 3:Wireless sensor networks: introduction, IOT networks (PAN, LAN and WAN), Edge
resource pooling and caching, client side control and configuration.
Unit 4:Smart objects as building blocks for IoT, Open source hardware and Embedded systems
platforms for IoT, Edge/gateway, IO drivers, C Programming, multithreading concepts.
Unit 5:Operating systems requirement of IoT environment, study of mbed, RIoT, andContiki
operating systems, Introductory concepts of big data for IoT applications.
Unit 6:Applications of IoT, Connected cars IoT Transportation, Smart Grid and Healthcare sectors
using IoT, Security and legal considerations, IT Act 2000 and scope for IoT legislation.
References:
 A Bahaga, V. Madisetti, “Internet of Things- Hands on approach”, VPT publisher, 2014.
 A. McEwen, H. Cassimally, “Designing the Internet of Things”, Wiley, 2013.
 CunoPfister, “Getting started with Internet of Things”, Maker Media, 1st edition, 2011.
 Samuel Greenguard, “Internet of things”, MIT Press, 2015.
Web resources :
 http://www.datamation.com/open-source/35-open-source-tools-for-the-internet-of-things-
1.html
 https://developer.mbed.org/handbook/AnalogIn
 http://www.libelium.com/50_sensor_applications/
[ 324 ]
 M2MLabs Mainspring http://www.m2mlabs.com/framework

 Node-RED http://nodered.org/
PE 3 : Voice and Data Networks

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Protocol, algorithms, trade-offs rationale.
 Routing, transport, DNS resolutions
 Network extensions and next generation architectures.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1: Network Design Issues, Network Performance Issues, Network Terminology, centralized
and distributed approaches for networks design, Issues in design of voice and data networks.
Unit 2: Layered and Layer less Communication, Cross layer design of Networks, Voice Networks
(wired and wireless) and Switching, Circuit Switching and Packet Switching, Statistical
Multiplexing.
Unit 3: Data Networks and their Design, Link layer design- Link adaptation, Link Layer
Protocols, Retransmission. Mechanisms (ARQ), Hybrid ARQ (HARQ), Go Back N, Selective
Repeat protocols and their analysis.
Unit 4: Queuing Models of Networks , Traffic Models , Little's Theorem, Markov chains, M/M/1
and other Markov systems, Multiple Access Protocols , Aloha System , Carrier Sensing ,
Examples of Local area networks,
Unit 5: Inter-networking, Bridging, Global Internet , IP protocol and addressing , Sub netting ,
Classless Inter domain Routing (CIDR) , IP address lookup , Routing in Internet. End to End
Protocols, TCP and UDP. Congestion Control , Additive Increase/Multiplicative Decrease , Slow
Start, Fast Retransmit/ Fast Recovery,
Unit 6: Congestion avoidance, RED TCP Throughput Analysis, Quality of Service in Packet
Networks. Network Calculus, Packet Scheduling Algorithms.
References:
 D. Bertsekas and R. Gallager, “Data Networks”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 1992.
 L. Peterson and B. S. Davie, “Computer Networks: A Systems Approach”,5th Edition,
Morgan Kaufman, 2011.
 Kumar, D. Manjunath and J. Kuri, “Communication Networking: An analytical approach”,
1st Edition, Morgan Kaufman, 2004.
 Walrand, “Communications Network: A First Course”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2002.
 Leonard Kleinrock, “Queueing Systems, Volume I: Theory”, 1st Edition, John Wiley and
Sons, 1975.
 Aaron Kershenbaum, “Telecommunication Network Design Algorithms”, McGraw Hill,
1993.
 Vijay Ahuja, “Design and Analysis of Computer Communication Networks”, McGraw
Hill, 1987
[ 325 ]
PE 4 : Markov Chains and Queueing Systems

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Understand Markov Chains and regenerative processes used in modelling a wide variety of
systems and phenomena.
 Model a system as queuing system with some aspect of the queue governed by a random
process.
 Understand telecommunication systems modelling using Markov chains with special
emphasis on developing queuing models.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Introduction: Review of basic probability, properties of nonnegative random variables,
laws of large numbers and the Central Limit Theorem.
Unit 2:Renewal Processes: Basic definitions, recurrence times, rewards and renewal reward
theorem, point processes, Poisson process, Walds equation, Blackwell's theorem.
Unit 3:Discrete time Markov chains: definitions and properties, matrix representation, Perron-
Frobenius theory.
Unit 4:Continuous time Markov chains: basic definitions, Q-matrix, birth-death processes, quasi
birth death processes.;Embedded Markov processes, semi Markov processes, reversible Markov
chains, Random walks.
Unit 5:Fundamental queuing results: Little's theorem, invariance of the mean delay, Conservation
law.
Markovian queues: Jackson and BCMP networks, numerical Algorithms. M/G/1 & G/M/1 queues
and G/G/1 queues.
Unit 6:Advanced queuing models: priority, vacation and retrials in queues.
References:
 Cliffs, “Stochastic Modelling and the Theory Queues”, Prentice Hall, 1989.
 P.Bremaud, “Markov Chains”, Springer-Verlag, 1999.
 E.Seneta, “Non Negative Matrices and Markov Chains”, Springer Series in Statistics,
Springer,1981.
 R.Gallager, “Discrete Stochastic Processes”, Kluwer Academic Press, 1996.
 L.Kleinrock, “Queuing Systems”, vols I and II, John Wiley and Sons 1976.
PE 4 : MIMO Systems
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Understand channel modelling and propagation, MIMO Capacity, space-time coding,
[ 326 ]
MIMO receivers, MIMO for multi-carrier systems (e.g. MIMO-OFDM), multi-user

communications, multi-user MIMO.
 Understand cooperative and coordinated multi-cell MIMO, introduction to MIMO in 4G
(LTE, LTE-Advanced, WiMAX).
 Perform Mathematical modelling and analysis of MIMO systems.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Introduction to Multi-antenna Systems, Motivation, Types of multi-antenna systems,
MIMO vs. multi-antenna systems.
Unit 2:Diversity, Exploiting multipath diversity, Transmit diversity, Space-time codes, The
Alamouti scheme, Delay diversity, Cyclic delay diversity, Space-frequency codes, Receive
diversity, The rake receiver, Combining techniques, Spatial Multiplexing, Spectral efficiency and
capacity, Transmitting independent streams in parallel, Mathematical notation
Unit 3: The generic MIMO problem, Singular Value Decomposition, Eigenvalues and
eigenvectors, Equalising MIMO systems, Disadvantages of equalising MIMO systems, Pre-
distortion in MIMO systems, Disadvantages of pre-distortion in MIMO systems, Pre-coding and
combining in MIMO systems, Advantages of pre-coding and combining, Disadvantages of pre-
coding and combining, Channel state information.
Unit 4:Codebooks for MIMO, Beamforming, Beamforming principles, Increased spectrum
efficiency, Interference cancellation, Switched beamformer, Adaptive beamformer, Narrowband
beamformer, Wideband beamformer
Unit 5:Case study: MIMO in LTE, Codewords to layers mapping, Pre-coding for spatial
multiplexing, Pre-coding for transmit diversity, Beamforming in LTE, Cyclic delay diversity
based pre-coding, Pre-coding codebooks, Propagation Channels, Time & frequency channel
dispersion, AWGN and multipath propagation channels, Delay spread values and time variations,
Fast and slow fading environments, Complex baseband multipath channels, Narrowband and
wideband channels, MIMO channel models
Unit 6:Channel Estimation, Channel estimation techniques, Estimation and tracking, Training
based channel estimation, Blind channel estimation, Channel estimation architectures, Iterative
channel estimation, MMSE channel estimation, Correlative channel sounding, Channel estimation
in single carrier systems, Channel estimation for CDMA, Channel estimation for OFDM.
References:
 Claude Oestges, Bruno Clerckx, "MIMO Wireless Communications : From Real-world
Propagation to Space-time Code Design",Academic Press, 1st edition, 2010.
 Mohinder Janakiraman, “Space - Time Codes and MIMO Systems”, Artech House
Publishers, 2004.
PE 4 : Programmable Networks - SDN, NFV

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
[ 327 ]
 Understand advanced concepts in Programmable Networks.

 Understand Software Defined Networking, an emerging Internet architectural framework.
 Implement the main concepts, architectures, algorithms, protocols and applications in SDN
and NFV.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1 :Introduction to Programmable Networks, History and Evolution of Software Defined
Networking (SDN), Fundamental Characteristics of SDN, Separation of Control Plane and Data
Plane, Active Networking.
Unit 2 :Control and Data Plane Separation: Concepts, Advantages and Disadvantages, the basics
of OpenFlow protocol.
Unit 3 :Network Virtualization: Concepts, Applications, Existing Network Virtualization

Framework, Mininet A simulation environment for SDN.
Unit 4 :Control Plane: Overview, Existing SDN Controllers including Floodlight and
OpenDaylight projects. Customization of Control Plane: Switching and Firewall Implementation
using SDN Concepts. Data Plane: Software-based and Hadrware-based; Programmable Network
Hardware.
Unit 5 :Programming SDNs: Northbound Application Programming Interface, Current Languages

and Tools, Composition of SDNs. Network Functions Virtualization (NFV) and Software Defined
Networks: Concepts, Implementation and Applications.
Unit 6 :Data Center Networks: Packet, Optical and Wireless Architectures, Network Topologies.
Use Cases of SDNs: Data Centers, Internet Exchange Points, Backbone Networks, Home
Networks, Traffic Engineering.
References:
 Thomas D. Nadeau, Ken Gray, “SDN: Software Defined Networks, An Authoritative
Review of Network Programmability Technologies”, O'Reilly Media, August 2013.
 Paul Goransson, Chuck Black, Timothy Culver. “Software Defined Networks: A
Comprehensive Approach”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2016.
 Fei Hu, “Network Innovation through OpenFlow and SDN: Principles and Design”, CRC
Press, 2014.
 Vivek Tiwari, “SDN and OpenFlow for Beginners”, Amazon Digital Services, Inc.,
ASIN: , 2013.
 Nick Feamster, Jennifer Rexford and Ellen Zegura, “The Road to SDN: An Intellectual
History of Programmable Networks” ACM CCR April 2014.
 Open Networking Foundation (ONF) Documents, https://www.opennetworking.org, 2015.
 OpenFlow standards, http://www.openflow.org, 2015.
Antennas and Radiating Systems Laboratory

Teaching Scheme
Lab :4 hrs/week
[ 328 ]
Course Outcomes:
 Determine specifications, design, construct and test antenna.
 Explore and use tools for designing, analyzing and testing antennas. These tools include
Antenna design and analysis software, network analyzers, spectrum analyzers, and antenna
pattern measurement techniques.
1. Simulation of half wave dipole antenna.
2. Simulation of change of the radius and length of dipole wire on frequency of resonance
of antenna.
3. Simulation of quarter wave, full wave antenna and comparison of their parameters.
4. Simulation of monopole antenna with and without ground plane.
5. Study the effect of the height of the monopole antenna on the radiation characteristics
of the antenna.
6. Simulation of a half wave dipole antenna array.
7. Study the effect of change in distance between elements of array on radiation pattern of
dipole array.
8. Study the effect of the variation of phase difference 'beta' between the elements of the
array on the radiation pattern of the dipole array.
9. Case study.
Semester III
Lab 4 : Advanced Digital Signal Processing lab
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Design different digital filters in software
 Apply various transforms in time and frequency
 Perform decimation and interpolation
12. Basic Signal Representation
13. Correlation Auto And Cross
14. Stability Using Hurwitz Routh Criteria
15. Sampling FFT Of Input Sequence
16. Butterworth Lowpass And Highpass Filter Design
17. Chebychev Type I,II Filter
18. State Space Matrix from Differential Equation
19. Normal Equation Using Levinson Durbin
20. Decimation And Interpolation Using Rationale Factors
21. Maximally Decimated Analysis DFT Filter
22. Cascade Digital IIR Filter Realization
23. Convolution And M Fold Decimation &PSD Estimator
24. Estimation Of PSD
25. Inverse Z Transform
[ 329 ]
26. Group Delay Calculation

27. Seperation Of T/F
28. Parallel Realization of IIR filter
PEV- High Performance Networks

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Apply knowledge of mathematics, probability, and statistics to model and analyze some
networking protocols.
 Design, implement, and analyze computer networks.
 Identify, formulate, and solve network engineering problems.
 Show knowledge of contemporary issues in high performance computer networks.
Use techniques, skills, and modern networking tools necessary for engineering practice.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1: Types of Networks, Network design issues, Data in support of network design. Network
design tools, protocols and architecture. Streaming stored Audio and Video, Best effort service,
protocols for real time interactive applications, Beyond best effort, scheduling and policing
mechanism, integrated services, and RSVP-differentiated services.
Unit 2: VoIP system architecture, protocol hierarchy, Structure of a voice endpoint, Protocols for
the transport of voice media over IP networks. Providing IP quality of service for voice, signaling
protocols for VoIP, PSTN gateways, VoIP applications.
Unit 3: VPN-Remote-Access VPN, site-to-site VPN, Tunneling to PPP, Security in VPN. MPLS-
operation, Routing, Tunneling and use of FEC, Traffic Engineering, MPLS based VPN, overlay
networks-P2P connections.
Unit 4:Traffic Modeling: Little’s theorem, Need for modeling, Poisson modeling, Non-poisson
models, Network performance evaluation.
Unit 5: Network Security and Management: Principles of cryptography, Authentication, integrity,
key distribution and certification, Access control and fire walls, attacks and counter measures,
security in many layers.
Unit 6: Infrastructure for network management, The internet standard management framework –
SMI, MIB, SNMP, Security and administration, ASN.1.
References:
 Kershenbaum A., “Telecommunications Network Design Algorithms”, Tata McGraw Hill,
1993.
 Larry Peterson & Bruce David, “Computer Networks: A System Approach”, Morgan
Kaufmann, 2003.
 Douskalis B., “IP Telephony: The Integration of Robust VoIP Services”, Pearson Ed. Asia,
2000.
 Warland J., Varaiya P., “High-Performance Communication Networks”, Morgan
Kaufmann, 1996.
[ 330 ]
 Stallings W., “High-Speed Networks: TCP/IP and ATM Design Principles”, Prentice Hall,
1998.
 Leon Garcia, Widjaja, “Communication networks”, TMH 7threprint 2002.
 William Stalling, “Network security, essentials”, Pearson education Asia publication, 4th
Edition, 2011.
PE 5 : Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Study the parametric and linear models for classification
 Design neural network and SVM for classification
 Develop machine independent and unsupervised learning techniques.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1
Introduction to Pattern Recognition: Problems, applications, design cycle, learning and
adaptation, examples, Probability Distributions, Parametric Learning - Maximum likelihood and
Bayesian Decision Theory- Bayes rule, discriminant functions, loss functions and Bayesian error
analysis
Unit 2
Linear models: Linear Models for Regression, linear regression, logistic regression Linear
Models for Classification
Unit 3
Neural Network: perceptron, multi-layer perceptron, backpropagation algorithm, error surfaces,
practical techniques for improving backpropagation, additional networks and training methods,
Adaboost, Deep Learning
Unit 4
Linear discriminant functions - decision surfaces, two-category, multi-category, minimum-
squared error procedures, the Ho-Kashyap procedures, linear programming algorithms, Support
vector machine
Unit 5
Algorithm independent machine learning – lack of inherent superiority of any classifier, bias
and variance, re-sampling for classifier design, combining classifiers
Unit 6
Unsupervised learning and clustering – k-means clustering, fuzzy k-means clustering,
hierarchical clustering
References:
 Richard O. Duda, Peter E. Hart, David G. Stork, “Pattern Classification”, 2nd Edition John
Wiley & Sons, 2001.
 Trevor Hastie, Robert Tibshirani, Jerome H. Friedman, “The Elements of Statistical
[ 331 ]
Learning”, 2nd Edition, Springer, 2009.

 C. Bishop, “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer, 2006.
Remote Sensing
Teaching Scheme
Lectures: 3hrs/week
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course, students shall be able to
 Understand basic concepts, principles and applications of remote sensing, particularly the
geometric and radiometric principles;
 Provide examples of applications of principles to a variety of topics in remote sensing,
particularly related to data collection, radiation, resolution, and sampling.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1: Physics Of Remote Sensing: Electro Magnetic Spectrum, Physics of Remote Sensing-
Effects of Atmosphere-Scattering–Different types–Absorption-Atmospheric window-Energy
interaction with surface features –Spectral reflectance of vegetation, soil and water atmospheric
influence on spectral response patterns-multi concept in Remote sensing.
Unit 2: Data Acquisition: Types of Platforms–different types of aircrafts-Manned and Unmanned
spacecrafts–sun synchronous and geo synchronous satellites –Types and characteristics of
different platforms –LANDSAT,SPOT,IRS,INSAT,IKONOS,QUICKBIRD etc
Unit 3: Photographic products, B/W, color, color IR film and their characteristics –resolving
power of lens and film -Opto mechanical electro optical sensors –across track and along track
scanners-multispectral scanners and thermal scanners–geometric characteristics of scanner
imagery -calibration of thermal scanners.
Unit 4: Scattering System: Microwave scatterometry, types of RADAR –SLAR –resolution –
range and azimuth –real aperture and synthetic aperture RADAR. Characteristics of Microwave
images topographic effect-different types of Remote Sensing platforms –airborne and space borne
sensors -ERS, JERS, RADARSAT, RISAT -Scatterometer, Altimeter-LiDAR remote sensing,
principles, applications.
Unit 5: Thermal And Hyper Spectral Remote Sensing: Sensors characteristics-principle of
spectroscopy-imaging spectroscopy–field conditions, compound spectral curve, Spectral library,
radiative models, processing procedures, derivative spectrometry, thermal remote sensing –
thermal sensors, principles, thermal data processing, applications.
Unit 6: Data Analysis: Resolution–Spatial, Spectral, Radiometric and temporal resolution-signal
to noise ratio-data products and their characteristics-visual and digital interpretation–Basic
principles of data processing –Radiometric correction–Image enhancement–Image classification–
Principles of LiDAR, Aerial Laser Terrain Mapping.
References:
 Lillesand T.M., and Kiefer,R.W. Remote Sensing and Image interpretation, John Wiley &
Sons-2000, 6thEdition
 John R. Jensen, Introductory Digital Image Processing: A Remote Sensing Perspective,
2nd Edition, 1995.
 John A.Richards, Springer –Verlag, Remote Sensing Digital Image Analysis,1999.
 Paul Curran P.J. Principles of Remote Sensing, ELBS; 1995.
[ 332 ]
 Charles Elachi and Jakob J. van Zyl , Introduction To The Physics and Techniques
of Remote Sensing , Wiley Series in Remote Sensing and Image Processing, 2006.
 Sabins, F.F.Jr, Remote Sensing Principles and Image interpretation, W.H.Freeman& Co,
1978
Teaching Scheme
Lab work : 20 and 32 hrs/week for phase I
and II respectively
Course Outcomes:
 Capable to select from different methodologies, methods and forms of analysis to
produce a suitable research design, and justify their design.
Syllabus Contents:
need to establish a direct link between education, national development and productivity and
thus reduce the gap between the world of work and the world of study. The dissertation should
have the following
Guidelines for Dissertation Phase – I and II

 As per the AICTE directives, the dissertation is a yearlong activity, to be carried out and
 The dissertation may be carried out preferably in-house i.e. department’s laboratories and
student shall identify the domain and define dissertation objectives. The referred
[ 333 ]
literature should preferably include IEEE/IET/IETE/Springer/Science Direct/ACM

journals in the areas of Computing and Processing (Hardware and Software), Circuits-
Devices and Systems, Communication-Networking and Security, Robotics and Control
Systems, Signal Processing and Analysis and any other related domain. In case of
Industry sponsored projects, the relevant application notes, while papers, product
catalogues should be referred and reported.
assess the progress/performance of the student based on report, presentation and Q & A.
In case of unsatisfactory performance, committee may recommend repeating the Phase-I
work.
proposed work as per the schedule. Accomplished results/contributions/innovations
should be published in terms of research papers in reputed journals and reviewed focused
 Phase – II deliverables: A dissertation report as per the specified format, developed
system in the form of hardware and/or software, A record of continuous progress.
work
OPEN ELECTIVES
Business Analytics
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
Course Code
Credits
Prerequisites

Course objective
4. To become familiar with processes needed to develop, report, and analyze business
data.
[ 334 ]

7. Analyze and solve problems from different industries such as manufacturing, service,
retail, software, banking and finance, sports, pharmaceutical, aerospace etc.

Unit1:
Business analytics: Overview of Business analytics, Scope of
Business analytics, Business Analytics Process, Relationship of
Business Analytics Process and organisation, competitive 9
advantages of Business Analytics.
Statistical Tools: Statistical Notation, Descriptive Statistical
methods, Review of probability distribution and data modelling,
sampling and estimation methods overview.
Unit 2:
Important Resources, Business Analytics Personnel, Data and 8
models for Business analytics, problem solving, Visualizing and
Exploring Data, Business Analytics Technology.
Unit 3:
Ensuring Data Quality, Measuring contribution of Business 9
analytics, Managing Changes.
Unit 4:
Statistical Forecasting Models, Forecasting Models for Stationary
Time Series, Forecasting Models for Time Series with a Linear 10
Trend, Forecasting Time Series with Seasonality, Regression
Forecasting with Casual Variables, Selecting Appropriate
Forecasting Models.
Unit 5:
Strategies with the without Outcome Probabilities, Decision Trees,
The Value of Information, Utility and Decision Making.
Unit 6:
Recent Trends in : Embedded and collaborative business 4
intelligence, Visual data recovery, Data Storytelling and Data
journalism.
COURSE OUTCOMES
[ 335 ]

2. Students will demonstrate the ability of think critically in making decisions
based on data and deep analytics.
3. Students will demonstrate the ability to use technical skills in predicative and
prescriptive modeling to support business decision-making.
4. Students will demonstrate the ability to translate data into clear, actionable
insights.
Reference:
OPEN ELECTIVES
Industrial Safety
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week

[ 336 ]
Reference:
OPEN ELECTIVES
Operations Research
Teaching Scheme
_____________________________________________________________________
1. Students should able to apply the dynamic programming to solve problems of discreet
and continuous variables.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:
Unit 2
Formulation of a LPP - Graphical solution revised simplex method - duality theory - dual
simplex method - sensitivity analysis - parametric programming
Unit 3:
Nonlinear programming problem - Kuhn-Tucker conditions min cost flow problem - max
flow problem - CPM/PERT
Unit 4
Scheduling and sequencing - single server and multiple server models - deterministic
inventory models - Probabilistic inventory control models - Geometric Programming.
Unit 5
References:
3. J.C. Pant, Introduction to Optimisation: Operations Research, Jain Brothers, Delhi,
2008
[ 337 ]
Open Elective
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week

References:
Open Elective
Composite Materials
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week

performance.
[ 338 ]

TEXT BOOKS:
Germany.
References:
Tasi.
Open Elective
Waste to Energy
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
References:
[ 339 ]
Sons, 1996.
Course objectives:
Syllabus
Suggested Studies:
book .

[ 340 ]

they work in
Syllabus
1 Introduction 4
Disaster: Definition, Factors And Significance; Difference Between Hazard
And Disaster; Natural And Manmade Disasters: Difference, Nature, Types
And Magnitude.
Study Of Seismic Zones; Areas Prone To Floods And Droughts, Landslides
And Avalanches; Areas Prone To Cyclonic And Coastal Hazards With
Special Reference To Tsunami; Post-Disaster Diseases And Epidemics
Evaluation Of Risk: Application Of Remote Sensing, Data From
5 Risk Assessment 4
Disaster Risk: Concept And Elements, Disaster Risk Reduction, Global And
National Disaster Risk Situation. Techniques Of Risk Assessment, Global
Co-Operation In Risk Assessment And Warning, People’s Participation In
Risk Assessment. Strategies for Survival.
Meaning, Concept And Strategies Of Disaster Mitigation, Emerging Trends
In Mitigation. Structural Mitigation And Non-Structural Mitigation, Programs
Of Disaster Mitigation In India.
SUGGESTED READINGS:
Royal book Company.
India, New Delhi.
Course Objectives
[ 341 ]

Syllabus
Unit Content Hours
2  Order 8
Suggested reading
Course Output
Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours

[ 342 ]

Suggested reading
Press, New Delhi
Course outcomes

Course Objectives:
rights perspective.
Syllabus
Units Content Hours
[ 343 ]

1 History 4
2 Preamble 4
Salient Features
3 4
 Parliament
 Composition
4  Executive 4
 President
 Governor
Suggested reading
Course Outcomes:
[ 344 ]
Course Objectives:
4. Review existing evidence on the review topic to inform programme design and policy making
undertaken by the DfID, other agencies and researchers.
Syllabus
Units Content Hours
 Aims and rationale, Policy background, Conceptual framework and terminology
1  Theories of learning, Curriculum, Teacher education. 4
 Thematic overview: Pedagogical practices are being used by teachers in formal and
2 informal classrooms in developing countries. 2
 How can teacher education (curriculum and practicum) and the school curriculum
and guidance materials best support effective pedagogy?
3 4
 Strength and nature of the body of evidence for effective pedagogical practices.
support
 Peer support
4 4
 Research design
 Contexts
5  Pedagogy 2
[ 345 ]
Suggested reading
245-261.
Course Outcomes:


Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours
Suggested reading
[ 346 ]
Course Outcomes:

Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours
 Verses- 71,73,75,78 (do’s)

23, 35,
 Chapter 12 -Verses 13, 14, 15, 16,17, 18
Suggested reading
Course Outcomes
[ 347 ]
M. Tech. (Electronics and Telecommunication)

Specialization: VLSI and Embedded Systems

1. Apply the knowledge of science, mathematics, and engineering principles for developing problem
solving attitude.
2. Identify, formulate and solve engineering problems in the broad areas like System Design using
VLSI and Embedded Platforms and tools, Semiconductor Technologies, Applications in Signal
Processing, Machine Vision and Communication Networks.
3. Use different software tools in the domain of VLSI and Embedded Systems Design, Analysis and
Verification such as Design entry, Synthesis, Functional and Timing Simulation, Floor-planning,
Place and route, Layout editors, RTL schematic, Platform specific EDA sets, MATLAB.
4. Design and conduct experiments, analyze and interpret data, imbibe programming skills for
development of simulation experiments.
5. Function as a member of a multidisciplinary team with sense of ethics, integrity and social
responsibility
Semester I
No. Type/Code L T P
1 Core 1 RTL Simulation and Synthesis with PLDs 3 0 0 3
2 Core 2 Microcontrollers and Programmable 3 0 0 3
Digital Signal Processors
Specific (1) Digital Signal and Image Processing
Elective (2) Programming Languages for
PE1 Embedded Software
(3) VLSI signal processing
4 Prog. Elective II 3 0 0 3
Specific (1) Parallel Processing
Elective (2) System Design with Embedded Linux
PE2 (3) CAD of Digital System
5 Lab 1 RTL Simulation and Synthesis with 0 0 4 2
PLDs Lab
6 Lab2 Microcontrollers and Programmable 0 0 4 2
Digital Signal Processors Lab
Total 16 0 0 18
[ 348 ]
Semester II
No. Code Scheme
L T P
1 Core 3 Analog and Digital CMOS VLSI Design 3 0 0 3
2 Core 4 VLSI Design Verification and Testing 3 0 0 3
3 PE-3 Elective III 3 0 0 3

(1) Memory Technologies
(2) SoC Design
(3) Low power VLSI Design
4 PE-4 Elective IV 3 0 0 3
(1) Communication Buses and Interfaces
(2) Network Security and Cryptography
(3) Physical design automation
5 Lab1 Analog and Digital CMOS VLSI Design Lab 0 0 4 2
6 Lab2 VLSI Design Verification and Testing Lab 0 0 4 2
Total 14 0 12 18
Semester-III

No. Code Scheme
1. PE-5 Elective – V 3 0 0 3
(1) Communication Network
(2) Selected Topics in Mathematics
(3) Nano materials and
Nanotechnology
2. OE 1. Business Analytics 3 0 0 3
4. Cost Management of Engineering
Projects
6. Waste to Energy
3 Dissertation Dissertation Phase – I 0 0 20 10
Total 6 0 20 16
[ 349 ]
Semester-IV
Course Name Credits
No. Code
L T P
Total -- -- -- 16
Audit course 1 & 2

4. Value Education
6. Pedagogy Studies
RTL Simulation and Synthesis with PLDs

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will demonstrate the ability to:
 Familiarity of Finite State Machines, RTL design using reconfigurable logic.
 Design and develop IP cores and Prototypes with performance guarantees
 Use EDA tools like Cadence, Mentor Graphics and Xilinx.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit1: Top down approach to design, Design of FSMs (Synchronous and asynchronous), Static
timing
analysis, Meta-stability, Clock issues, Need and design strategies for multi-clock domain designs.
Unit 2:Design entry by Verilog/VHDL/FSM, Verilog AMS.
Unit 3:Programmable Logic Devices, Introduction to ASIC Design Flow, FPGA, SoC, Floor
planning,
Placement, Clock tree synthesis, Routing, Physical verification, Power analysis, ESD protection.
Unit 4:Design for performance, Low power VLSI design techniques. Design for testability.
Unit 5:IP and Prototyping: IP in various forms: RTL Source code, Encrypted Source code, Soft
IP, Netlist,
Physical IP, Use of external hard IP during prototyping
Unit 6: Case studies and Speed issues.
References:
 Richard S. Sandige, “Modern Digital Design”, MGH, International Editions.

 Donald D Givone, “Digital principles and Design”, TMH
 Charles Roth, Jr. and Lizy K John, “Digital System Design using VHDL”, Cengage
[ 350 ]
Learning.
 Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL, a guide to digital design and synthesis”, Prentice Hall.
 Doug Amos, Austin Lesea, Rene Richter, “FPGA based prototyping methodology
manual”, Xilinx
 Bob Zeidman, “Designing with FPGAs & CPLDs”, CMP Books.
Microcontrollers and Programmable Digital Signal Processors

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Compare and select ARM processor core based SoC with several features/peripherals
based on requirements of embedded applications.
 Identify and characterize architecture of Programmable DSP Processors
 Develop small applications by utilizing the ARM processor core and DSP processor based
platform.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1: ARM Cortex-M3 processor: Applications, Programming model – Registers, Operation
modes,
Exceptions and Interrupts, Reset Sequence Instruction Set, Unified Assembler Language,
Memory Maps, Memory Access Attributes, Permissions, Bit-Band Operations, Unaligned and
Exclusive Transfers. Pipeline, Bus Interfaces
Unit 2:Exceptions, Types, Priority, Vector Tables, Interrupt Inputs and Pending behaviour, Fault
Exceptions, Supervisor and Pendable Service Call, Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller, Basic
Configuration, SYSTICK Timer, Interrupt Sequences, Exits, Tail Chaining, Interrupt Latency.
Unit 3:LPC 17xx microcontroller- Internal memory, GPIOs, Timers, ADC, UART and other serial
interfaces, PWM, RTC, WDT
Unit 4: Programmable DSP (P-DSP) Processors:
Harvard architecture, Multi port memory, architectural structure of P-DSP- MAC unit, Barrel
shifters, Introduction to TI DSP processor family
Unit 5:VLIW architecture and TMS320C6000 series, architecture study, data paths, cross paths,
Introduction to Instruction level architecture of C6000 family, Assembly Instructions memory
addressing, for arithmetic, logical operations
Unit 6:Code Composer Studio for application development for digital signal processing,
On chip peripherals , Processor benchmarking
References:
1. Joseph Yiu, “The definitive guide to ARM Cortex-M3”, Elsevier, 2nd Edition
2. Venkatramani B. and Bhaskar M. “Digital Signal Processors: Architecture, Programming
and Applications” , TMH , 2nd Edition
3. Sloss Andrew N, Symes Dominic, Wright Chris, “ARM System Developer's Guide:
Designing and Optimizing”, Morgan Kaufman Publication
4. Steve furber, “ARM System-on-Chip Architecture”, Pearson Education
5. Frank Vahid and Tony Givargis, “Embedded System Design”, Wiley
6. Technical references and user manuals on www.arm.com, NXP Semiconductor
www.nxp.com and Texas Instruments www.ti.com
[ 351 ]
Elective IDigital Signal and Image Processing

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Analyze discrete-time signals and systems in various domains
 Design and implement filters using fixed point arithmetic targeted for embedded platforms
 Compare algorithmic and computational complexities in processing and coding digital
images.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Review of Discrete Time signals and systems, Characterization in time and Z and Fourier –
domain, Fast Fourier Transform algorithms – In-place computations, Butterfly computations, bit
reversal’s.
Unit 2:Digital Filter design: FIR - Windowing and Frequency Sampling, IIR – Impulse
invariance, bilinear
Transformation.
Unit 3: Fixed point implementation of filters – challenges and techniques.
Unit 4:Digital Image Acquisition, Enhancement, Restoration.
Digital Image Coding and Compression – JPEG and JPEG 2000.
Unit 5:Color Image processing – Handling multiple planes, computational challenges.
Unit 6:VLSI architectures for implementation of Image Processing algorithms, Pipelining.
References:
 J.G. Proakis, Manolakis “Digital Signal Processing”, Pearson, 4th Edition
 Gonzalez and Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, PHI, 3rd Edition
 S. K. Mitra. “Digital Signal Processing – A Computer based Approach”, TMH, 3rd Edition,
2006
 A. K. Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, Prentice Hall
 KeshabParhi, “VLSI Digital Signal Processing Systems – Design and Implementation”,
Wiley India
Elective IProgramming Languages for Embedded Software

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Write an embedded C application of moderate complexity.
 Develop and analyze algorithms in C++.
 Differentiate interpreted languages from compiled languages.
[ 352 ]
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Embedded ‘C’ Programming
- Bitwise operations, Dynamic memory allocation, OS services
- Linked stack and queue, Sparse matrices, Binary tree
- Interrupt handling in C, Code optimization issues
- Writing LCD drives, LED drivers, Drivers for serial port communication
- Embedded Software Development Cycle and Methods (Waterfall, Agile)
Unit 2:Object Oriented Programming
- Introduction to procedural, modular, object-oriented and generic programming techniques,
Limitations of procedural programming, objects, classes, data members, methods, data
encapsulation, data abstraction and information hiding, inheritance, polymorphism
Unit 3: CPP Programming: ‘cin’, ‘cout’, formatting and I/O manipulators, new and delete
operators,
Defining a class, data members and methods, ‘this’ pointer, constructors, destructors, friend
function, dynamic memory allocation
Unit 4:Overloading and Inheritance: Need of operator overloading, overloading the assignment,
overloading using friends, type conversions, single inheritance, base and derived classes, friend
classes, types of inheritance, hybrid inheritance, multiple inheritance, virtual base class,
polymorphism, virtual functions,
Unit 5:Templates: Function template and class template, member function templates and template
arguments,Exception Handling: syntax for exception handling code: try-catch- throw,
Multiple
Exceptions.
Unit 6:Scripting Languages
Overview of Scripting Languages – PERL, CGI, VB Script, Java Script.
PERL: Operators, Statements Pattern Matching etc. Data Structures, Modules, Objects, Tied
Variables, Inter process Communication Threads, Compilation & Line Interfacing.
References:
 Michael J. Pont , “Embedded C”, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 2008
 Randal L. Schwartz, “Learning Perl”, O’Reilly Publications, 6th Edition 2011
 A. Michael Berman, “Data structures via C++”, Oxford University Press, 2002
 Robert Sedgewick, “Algorithms in C++”, Addison Wesley Publishing Company, 1999
 Abraham Silberschatz, Peter B, Greg Gagne, “Operating System Concepts”, John Willey
& Sons, 2005
Elective I VLSI SIGNAL PROCESSING

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Acquired knowledge about DSP algorithms, its DFG representation, pipelining and parallel
processing approaches.
 Ability to acquire knowledge about retiming techniques, folding and register minimization
[ 353 ]
path problems.
 Ability to have knowledge about algorithmic strength reduction techniques and parallel
processing of FIR and IIR digital filters.
 Acquired knowledge about finite word-length effects and round off noise computation in
DSP systems.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Introduction to DSP systems, Pipelined and parallel processing.
Unit 2:Iteration Bound, Retiming, unfolding, algorithmic strength reduction in filters and
Transforms.
Unit 3:Systolic architecture design, fast convolution, pipelined and parallel recursive and
adaptive filters, Scaling and round off noise.
Unit 4: Digital lattice filter structures, bit level arithmetic, architecture, redundant arithmetic.
Unit 5:Numerical strength reduction, synchronous, wave and asynchronous pipe lines, low
power design.
Unit 6:Programmable digit signal processors.
References:
 Keshab K. Parthi[A1] , VLSI Digital signal processing systems, design and

implementation[A2] , Wiley, Inter Science, 1999.
 Mohammad Isamail and Terri Fiez, Analog VLSI signal and information processing,
McGraw Hill, 1994
 S.Y. Kung, H.J. White House, T. Kailath, VLSI and Modern Signal Processing, Prentice
Hall, 1985.
Elective IIParallel Processing

Teaching Scheme
Lectures: 3hrs/week
Course Outcomes:
 Identify limitations of different architectures of computer
 Analysis quantitatively the performance parameters for different architectures
 Investigate issues related to compilers and instruction set based on type of architectures.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Overview of Parallel Processing and Pipelining, Performance analysis, Scalability
Unit 2:Principles and implementation of Pipelining, Classification of pipelining processors,
Advanced
pipelining techniques, Software pipelining
Unit 3: VLIW processors
Case study: Superscalar Architecture- Pentium, Intel Itanium Processor, Ultra SPARC,
[ 354 ]
MIPS on
FPGA, Vector and Array Processor, FFT Multiprocessor Architecture
Unit 4:Multithreaded Architecture, Multithreaded processors, Latency hiding techniques,
Principles of
multithreading, Issues and solutions
Unit 5:Parallel Programming Techniques:
Message passing program development, Synchronous and asynchronous message passing,
Shared Memory Programming, Data Parallel Programming, Parallel Software Issues
Unit 6:Operating systems for multiprocessors systems
Customizing applications on parallel processing platforms
References:
 Kai Hwang, Faye A. Briggs, “Computer Architecture and Parallel Processing”, MGH
International Edition
 Kai Hwang, “Advanced Computer Architecture”, TMH
 V. Rajaraman, L. Sivaram Murthy, “Parallel Computers”, PHI.
 William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture, Designing for performance”
Prentice Hall, Sixth edition
 Kai Hwang, Zhiwei Xu, “Scalable Parallel Computing”, MGH
 David Harris and Sarah Harris, “Digital Design and Computer Architecture”, Morgan
Kaufmann.
Elective II System Design with Embedded Linux

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
1. Familiarity of the embedded Linux development model.
2. Write, debug, and profile applications and drivers in embedded Linux.
3. Understand and create Linux BSP for a hardware platform
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Embedded Linux Vs Desktop Linux, Embedded Linux Distributions
Unit 2:Embedded Linux
Architecture, Kernel Architecture – HAL, Memory manager, Scheduler, File System, I/O and
Networking subsystem, IPC, User space, Start-up sequence
Unit 3:Board Support Package
Embedded Storage: MTD, Architecture, Drivers, Embedded File System
Embedded Drivers: Serial, Ethernet, I2C, USB, Timer, Kernel Modules
Unit 4:Porting Applications
Real-Time Linux: Linux and Real time, Programming, Hard Real-time Linux
Unit 5:Building and Debugging: Kernel, Root file system
Embedded Graphics
Unit 6:Case study of uClinux
[ 355 ]
References:
 Karim Yaghmour, “Building Embededd Linux Systems”, O'Reilly & Associates
 P Raghvan, Amol Lad, SriramNeelakandan, “Embedded Linux System Design and
Development”, Auerbach Publications
 Christopher Hallinan, “Embedded Linux Primer: A Practical Real World Approach”,
Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition, 2010.
 Derek Molloy, “Exploring BeagleBone: Tools and Techniques for Building with
Embedded Linux”, Wiley, 1st Edition, 2014.
Elective II CAD of Digital System

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Fundamentals of CAD tools for modelling, design, test and verification of VLSI systems.
 Study of various phases of CAD, including simulation, physical design, test and
verification.
 Demonstrate knowledge of computational algorithms and tools for CAD.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Introduction to VLSI Methodologies – Design and Fabrication of VLSI Devices,
Fabrication
Process and its impact on Design.
Unit 2: VLSI design automation tools – Data structures and basicalgorithms, graph theory and
computational complexity, tractable and intractable problems.
Unit 3:General purpose methods for combinational optimization – partitioning, floor planning
andpin assignment, placement , routing.
Unit 4:Simulation – logic synthesis, verification, high level
Synthesis.
Unit 5 and 6:MCMS-VHDL-Verilog-implementation of simple circuits using VHDL
References:
 N.A. Sherwani, “Algorithms for VLSI Physical Design Automation”.

 S.H. Gerez, “Algorithms for VLSI Design Automation.
[ 356 ]
RTL Simulation and Synthesis with PLDs Lab
Teaching Scheme
Lectures:4 hrs/week
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the laboratory work, students will be able to:
 Identify, formulate, solve and implement problems in signal processing, communication
systems etc using RTL design tools.
 Use EDA tools like Cadence, Mentor Graphics and Xilinx.
List of Experiments:
1) Verilog implementation of 8:1 Mux/Demux, Full Adder, 8-bit Magnitude comparator,
Encoder/decoder, Priority encoder, D-FF, 4-bit Shift registers (SISO, SIPO, PISO,
bidirectional), 3-bit Synchronous Counters, Binary to Gray converter, Parity generator.
2) Sequence generator/detectors, Synchronous FSM – Mealy and Moore machines.
3) Vending machines - Traffic Light controller, ATM, elevator control.
4) PCI Bus & arbiter and downloading on FPGA.
5) UART/ USART implementation in Verilog.
6) Realization of single port SRAM in Verilog.
7) Verilog implementation of Arithmetic circuits like serial adder/ subtractor, parallel
adder/subtractor, serial/parallel multiplier.
8) Discrete Fourier transform/Fast Fourier Transform algorithm in Verilog.
Microcontrollers and Programmable Digital Signal Processors Lab
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
1. Install, configure and utilize tool sets for developing applications based on ARM processor
core SoC and DSP processor.
2. Develop prototype codes using commonly available on and off chip peripherals on the
Cortex M3 and DSP development boards.
Part A) Experiments to be carried out on Cortex-M3 development boards and using GNU tool-
chain
1. Blink an LED with software delay, delay generated using the SysTick timer.
2. System clock real time alteration using the PLL modules.
3. Control intensity of an LED using PWM implemented in software and hardware.
[ 357 ]
4. Control an LED using switch by polling method, by interrupt method and flash the LED once
every five switch presses.
5. UART Echo Test.
6. Take analog readings on rotation of rotary potentiometer connected to an ADC channel.
7. Temperature indication on an RGB LED.
8. Mimic light intensity sensed by the light sensor by varying the blinking rate of an LED.
9. Evaluate the various sleep modes by putting core in sleep and deep sleep modes.
10. System reset using watchdog timer in case something goes wrong.
11. Sample sound using a microphone and display sound levels on LEDs.
Part B) Experiments to be carried out on DSP C6713 evaluation kits and using Code Composer
Studio (CCS)
1. To develop an assembly code and C code to compute Euclidian distance between any two
points
2. To develop assembly code and study the impact of parallel, serial and mixed execution
3. To develop assembly and C code for implementation of convolution operation
4. To design and implement filters in C to enhance the features of given input sequence/signal

Teaching Scheme
Lectures: 1hrs/week
Course Outcomes:
Syllabus Contents:
research problem.
[ 358 ]

IPR and IITs.
References:
Semester II
Analog and Digital CMOS VLSI Design
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Analyze, design, optimize and simulate analog and digital circuits using CMOS
constrained by the design metrics.
 Connect the individual gates to form the building blocks of a system.
 Use EDA tools like Cadence, Mentor Graphics and other open source software tools like
Ngspice.
Syllabus Contents:
Technology Scaling and Road map, Scaling issues, Standard 4 mask NMOS Fabrication process
Digital CMOS Design:
Unit 1:Review: Basic MOS structure and its static behavior, Quality metrics of a digital design:
Cost, Functionality, Robustness, Power, and Delay, Stick diagram and Layout, Wire delay models.
Inverter: Static CMOS inverter, Switching threshold and noise margin concepts and their
evaluation, Dynamic behavior, Power consumption.
Unit 2:Physical design flow: Floor planning, Placement, Routing, CTS, Power analysis and IR
[ 359 ]
drop estimation-static and dynamic, ESD protection-human body model, Machine model.
Combinational logic: Static CMOS design, Logic effort, Ratioed logic, Pass transistor logic,
Dynamic logic, Speed and power dissipation in dynamic logic, Cascading dynamic gates,
CMOS transmission gate logic.
Unit 3:Sequential logic: Static latches and registers, Bi-stability principle, MUX based latches,
Static SR flip-flops, Master-slave edge-triggered register, Dynamic latches and registers,
Concept of pipelining, Pulse registers, Non-bistable sequential circuit.
Advanced technologies: Giga-scale dilemma, Short channel effects, High–k, Metal Gate
Technology, FinFET, TFET etc.
Analog CMOS Design:

Unit 4:Single Stage Amplifier: CS stage with resistance load, Divide connected load, Current
source load, Triode load, CS stage with source degeneration, Source follower, Common-
gate stage, Cascade stage, Choice of device models. Differential Amplifiers: Basic
difference pair, Common mode response, Differential pair with MOS loads, Gilbert cell.
Unit 5:Passive and active current mirrors: Basic current mirrors, Cascade mirrors, Active current
mirrors. Frequency response of CS stage: Source follower, Common gate stage, Cascade
stage and difference pair, Noise
Unit 6:Operational amplifiers: One stage OPAMP, Two stage OPAMP, Gain boosting, Common
mode feedback, Slew rate, PSRR, Compensation of 2 stage OPAMP, Other compensation
techniques.
References:
 J P Rabaey, A P Chandrakasan, B Nikolic, “Digital Integrated circuits: A design
perspective”, Prentice Hall electronics and VLSI series, 2nd Edition.
 Baker, Li, Boyce, “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout, and Simulation”, Wiley, 2nd Edition.
 BehzadRazavi , “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, TMH, 2007.
 Phillip E. Allen and Douglas R. Holberg, “CMOS Analog Circuit Design”, Oxford, 3rd
Edition.
 R J Baker, “CMOS circuit Design, Layout and Simulation”, IEEE Inc., 2008.
 Kang, S. and Leblebici, Y., “CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits, Analysis and Design”,
TMH, 3rdEdition.
 Pucknell, D.A. and Eshraghian, K., “Basic VLSI Design”, PHI, 3rd Edition.
VLSI Design Verification and Testing
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Familiarity of Front end design and verification techniques and create reusable test
environments.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Verification guidelines: Verification Process, Basic Testbench functionality, directed
[ 360 ]
testing, Methodology basics, Constrained-Random stimulus, Functional coverage, Testbench

components, Layered testbench, Building layered testbench, Simulation environment phases,
Maximum code reuse, Testbench performance.
Unit 2:Data types: Built-in data types, Fixed-size arrays, Dynamic arrays, Queues, Associative
arrays, Linked lists, Array methods, Choosing a storage type, Creating new types with typedef ,
Creating user-defined structures, Type conversion, Enumerated types, Constants strings,
Expression width.
Unit 3:Procedural statements and routines: Procedural statements, tasks, functions and void
functions, Routine arguments, Returning from a routine, Local data storage, Time values
Connecting the testbench and design: Separating the testbench and design, Interface constructs,
Stimulus timing, Interface driving and sampling, Connecting it all together, Top-level scope
Program – Module interactions.
Unit 4: SystemVerilog Assertions: Basic OOP: Introduction, think of nouns, Not verbs, your first
class, where to define a class, OOP terminology, Creating new objects, Object de-allocation,
Using objects, Static variables vs. Global variables, Class methods, Defining methods outside of
the class, Scoping rules, Using one class inside another, Understanding dynamic objects, Copying
objects, Public vs. Local, Straying off course building a testbench.
Unit 5:Randomization: Introduction, What to randomize, Randomization in SystemVerilog,
Constraint details solution probabilities, Controlling multiple constraint blocks, Valid constraints,
In-line constraints, The pre_randomize and post_randomize functions,
Unit 6:Random number functions, Constraints tips and techniques, Common randomization
problems, Iterative and array constraints, Atomic stimulus generation vs. Scenario generation,
Random control, Random number generators, Random device configuration.
References:
 Chris Spears, “ System Verilog for Verification”, Springer, 2nd Edition
 M. Bushnell and V. D. Agrawal, "Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory and
Mixed-Signal VLSI Circuits", Kluwer Academic Publishers
 IEEE 1800-2009 standard (IEEE Standard for SystemVerilog— Unified Hardware
Design,Specification, and Verification Language).
 System Verilog website – www.systemverilog.org
 http://www.sunburstdesign.com/papers/CummingsSNUG2006Boston_SystemVerilog
Events.pdf
 General reuse information and resources www.design-reuse.com
 OVM, UVM(on top of SV) www.verificationacademy.com
 Verification IP resources
http://www.cadence.com/products/fv/verification_ip/pages/default.aspx
 http://www.synopsys.com/Tools/Verification/FunctionalVerification/VerificationIP/Pages/defa
ult.aspx
[ 361 ]
Elective III Memory Technologies
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
 Select architecture and design semiconductor memory circuits and subsystems.
 Identify various fault models, modes and mechanisms in semiconductor memories and
their testing procedures.
 Knowhow of the state-of-the-art memory chip design
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Random Access Memory Technologies:
Static Random Access Memories (SRAMs), SRAM Cell Structures, MOS SRAM
Architecture, MOS
SRAM Cell and Peripheral Circuit, Bipolar SRAM, Advanced SRAM Architectures,
Application Specific
SRAMs.
Unit 2:DRAMs, MOS DRAM Cell, BiCMOS DRAM, Error Failures in DRAM, Advanced
DRAM Design and
Architecture, Application Specific DRAMs.SRAM and DRAM Memory controllers.
Unit 3: Non-Volatile Memories: Masked ROMs, PROMs, Bipolar & CMOS PROM, EEPROMs,
Floating Gate
EPROM Cell, OTP EPROM, EEPROMs, Non-volatile SRAM, Flash Memories.
Unit 4:Semiconductor Memory Reliability and Radiation Effects: General Reliability Issues,
RAM Failure
Modes and Mechanism, Nonvolatile Memory, Radiation Effects, SEP, Radiation Hardening
Techniques. Process and Design Issues, Radiation Hardened Memory Characteristics, Radiation
Hardness Assurance and Testing.
Unit 5 :Advanced Memory Technologies and High-density Memory Packing Technologies:
Ferroelectric Random Access Memories (FRAMs), Gallium Arsenide (GaAs) FRAMs, Analog
Memories, Magneto Resistive Random Access Memories (MRAMs), Experimental Memory
Devices.
Unit 6: Memory Hybrids (2D & 3D), Memory Stacks, Memory Testing and Reliability Issues,
Memory Cards,
High Density Memory Packaging
References:
 Ashok K Sharma, “Advanced Semiconductor Memories: Architectures, Designs and
Applications”, Wiley Interscience
 Kiyoo Itoh, “VLSI memory chip design”, Springer International Edition
 Ashok K Sharma,” Semiconductor Memories: Technology, Testing and Reliability , PHI
[ 362 ]
Elective III SoC Design

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Identify and formulate a given problem in the framework of SoC based design approaches
 Design SoC based system for engineering applications
 Realize impact of SoC on electronic design philosophy and Macro-electronics thereby
incline towards entrepreneurship & skill development.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:ASIC
- Overview of ASIC types, design strategies, CISC, RISC and NISC approaches for SOC
architectural issues and its impact on SoC design methodologies, Application Specific
Instruction Processor (ASIP) concepts.
Unit 2: NISC
- NISC Control Words methodology, NISC Applications and Advantages, Architecture
Description Languages (ADL) for design and verification of Application Specific Instruction-
set Processors (ASIP), No-Instruction-Set-computer (NISC)- design flow, modeling NISC
architectures and systems, use of Generic Netlist Representation - A formal language for
specification, compilation and synthesis of embedded processors.
Unit 3:Simulation
- Different simulation modes, behavioural, functional, static timing, gate level, switch level,
transistor/circuit simulation, design of verification vectors, Low power FPGA, Reconfigurable
systems, SoC related modeling of data path design and control logic, Minimization of
interconnects impact, clock tree design issues.
Unit 4:Low power SoC design / Digital system,
- Design synergy, Low power system perspective- power gating, clock gating, adaptive voltage
scaling (AVS), Static voltage scaling, Dynamic clock frequency and voltage scaling (DCFS),
building block optimization, building block memory, power down techniques, power
consumption verification.
Unit 5 :Synthesis
- Role and Concept of graph theory and its relevance to synthesizable constructs, Walks, trails
paths, connectivity, components, mapping/visualization, nodal and admittance graph.
Technology independent and technology dependent approaches for synthesis, optimization
constraints, Synthesis report analysisSingle core and Multi core systems, dark silicon issues,
HDL coding techniques for minimization of power consumption, Fault tolerant designs
Unit 6:Case study for overview of cellular phone design with emphasis on area optimization,
speed improvement and power minimization.
Note: Students will prepare and present a term paper on relevant identified current topics (in
batches of three students per topic) as a part of theory course.
[ 363 ]
References:
 Hubert Kaeslin, “Digital Integrated Circuit Design: From VLSI Architectures to CMOS
Fabrication”, Cambridge University Press, 2008.
 B. Al Hashimi, “System on chip-Next generation electronics”, The IET, 2006
 RochitRajsuman, “System-on- a-chip: Design and test”, Advantest America R & D Center,
2000
 P Mishra and N Dutt, “Processor Description Languages”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2008
 Michael J. Flynn and Wayne Luk, “Computer System Design: System-on-Chip”. Wiley,
2011
Elective III Low Power VLSI Design
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 CO1: Identify the sources of power dissipation in digital IC systems & understand the
impact of power on system performance and reliability.
 CO2: Characterize and model power consumption & understand the basic analysis
methods.
 CO3: Understand leakage sources and reduction techniques.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1: Technology & Circuit Design Levels: Sources of power dissipation in digital ICs, degree
of
freedom, recurring themes in low-power, emerging low power approaches, dynamic
dissipation in CMOS, effects of Vdd & Vt on speed, constraints on Vt reduction, transistor
sizing & optimal gate oxide thickness, impact of technology scaling, technology
innovations.
Unit 2:Low Power Circuit Techniques: Power consumption in circuits, flip-flops & latches, high
capacitance nodes, energy recovery, reversible pipelines, high performance approaches.
Unit 3: Low Power Clock Distribution: Power dissipation in clock distribution, single driver
versus
distributed buffers, buffers & device sizing under process variations, zero skew Vs.
tolerable
skew, chip & package co-design of clock network.
Unit 4:Logic Synthesis for Low Power estimation techniques: Power minimization techniques,
low
power arithmetic components- circuit design styles, adders, multipliers.
Unit 5: Low Power Memory Design: Sources & reduction of power dissipation in memory
subsystem, sources of power dissipation in DRAM & SRAM, low power DRAM circuits,
low power SRAM circuits.
[ 364 ]
Unit 6:Low Power Microprocessor Design System: power management support, architectural
trade offs for power, choosing the supply voltage, low-power clocking, implementation problem
for low power, comparison of microprocessors for power & performance.
References:
 P. Rashinkar, Paterson and L. Singh, “Low Power Design Methodologies”, Kluwer
Academic, 2002
 Kaushik Roy, Sharat Prasad, “Low power CMOS VLSI circuit design”, John Wiley sons
Inc.,2000.
 J.B.Kulo and J.H Lou, “Low voltage CMOS VLSI Circuits”, Wiley, 1999.
 A.P.Chandrasekaran and R.W.Broadersen, “Low power digital CMOS design”,
Kluwer,1995
 Gary Yeap, “Practical low power digital VLSI design”, Kluwer, 1998.
Elective IVCommunication Busses and Interfaces
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Select a particular serial bus suitable for a particular application.
 Develop APIs for configuration, reading and writing data onto serial bus.
 Design and develop peripherals that can be interfaced to desired serial bus.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Serial Busses
- Physical interface, Data and Control signals, features,
Unit 2: limitations and applications of RS232, RS485, I2C, SPI
Unit 3: CAN - Architecture, Data transmission, Layers, Frame formats, applications
Unit 4:PCIe - Revisions, Configuration space, Hardware protocols, applications
Unit 5:USB - Transfer types, enumeration, Descriptor types and contents, Device driver
Unit 6:Data Streaming Serial Communication Protocol
- Serial Front Panel Data Port (SFPDP) using fibre optic and copper cable
References:
 Jan Axelson, “Serial Port Complete - COM Ports, USB Virtual Com Ports, and Ports for
Embedded Systems ”, Lakeview Research, 2nd Edition
 Jan Axelson, “USB Complete”, Penram Publications
 Mike Jackson, Ravi Budruk, “PCI Express Technology”, Mindshare Press
 Wilfried Voss, “A Comprehensible Guide to Controller Area Network”, Copperhill Media
Corporation, 2nd Edition, 2005.
 Serial Front Panel Draft Standard VITA 17.1 – 200x
 Technical references on www.can-cia.org, www.pcisig.com, www.usb.org
[ 365 ]
Elective IV Network Security and Cryptography

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Identify and utilize different forms of cryptography techniques.
 Incorporate authentication and security in the network applications.
 Distinguish among different types of threats to the system and handle the same.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Security
- Need, security services, Attacks, OSI Security Architecture, one time passwords, Model for
Network security, Classical Encryption Techniques like substitution ciphers, Transposition
ciphers, Cryptanalysis of Classical Encryption Techniques.
Unit 2:Number Theory
- Introduction, Fermat’s and Euler’s Theorem, The Chinese Remainder Theorem, Euclidean
Algorithm, Extended Euclidean Algorithm, and Modular Arithmetic.
Unit 3: Private-Key (Symmetric) Cryptography
- Block Ciphers, Stream Ciphers, RC4 Stream cipher, Data Encryption Standard (DES),
Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), Triple DES, RC5, IDEA, Linear and Differential
Cryptanalysis.
Unit 4:Public-Key (Asymmetric) Cryptography
- RSA, Key Distribution and Management,Diffie-Hellman Key Exchange, Elliptic Curve
Cryptography, Message Authentication Code, hash functions, message digest algorithms:
MD4 MD5, Secure Hash algorithm, RIPEMD-160, HMAC.
Unit 5:Authentication
- IP and Web Security Digital Signatures, Digital Signature Standards, Authentication Protocols,
Kerberos, IP security Architecture, Encapsulating Security Payload, Key Management, Web
Security Considerations, Secure Socket Layer and Transport Layer Security, Secure Electronic
Transaction.
Unit 6:System Security
- Intruders, Intrusion Detection, Password Management, Worms, viruses, Trojans, Virus
Countermeasures, Firewalls, Firewall Design Principles, Trusted Systems.
References:
 William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security, Principles and Practices”,
Pearson Education, 3rd Edition.
 Charlie Kaufman, Radia Perlman and Mike Speciner, “Network Security, Private
Communication in a Public World”, Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition
 Christopher M. King, ErtemOsmanoglu, Curtis Dalton, “Security Architecture, Design
Deployment and Operations”, RSA Pres,
 Stephen Northcutt, LenyZeltser, Scott Winters, Karen Kent, and Ronald W. Ritchey,
“Inside Network Perimeter Security”, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition
 Richard Bejtlich, “The Practice of Network Security Monitoring: Understanding Incident
[ 366 ]
Detection and Response”, William Pollock Publisher, 2013.

Elective IV Physical Design Automation
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Study automation process for VLSI System design.
 Understanding of fundamentals for various physical design CAD tools.
 Develop and enhance the existing algorithms and computational techniques for physical
design process of VLSI systems.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Introduction to VLSI Physical Design Automation.
Unit 2:Standard cell, Performance issues in circuit layout, delay models Layout styles.
Unit 3:Discrete methods in global placement.
Unit 4: Timing-driven placement. Global Routing Via Minimization.
Unit 5:Over the Cell Routing - Single layer and two-layer routing, Clock and Power Routing.
Unit 6: Compaction, algorithms, Physical Design Automation of FPGAs..
References:
 William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security, Principles and Practices”,
Pearson Education, 3rd Edition.
 Charlie Kaufman, Radia Perlman and Mike Speciner, “Network Security, Private
Communication in a Public World”, Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition
 Christopher M. King, ErtemOsmanoglu, Curtis Dalton, “Security Architecture, Design
Deployment and Operations”, RSA Pres,
 Stephen Northcutt, LenyZeltser, Scott Winters, Karen Kent, and Ronald W. Ritchey,
“Inside Network Perimeter Security”, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition
 Richard Bejtlich, “The Practice of Network Security Monitoring: Understanding Incident
Detection and Response”, William Pollock Publisher, 2013.
Analog and Digital CMOS VLSI Design Lab

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Design digital and analog Circuit using CMOS.
 Use EDA tools like Cadence, Mentor Graphics and other open source software tools like
[ 367 ]
Ngspice
List of Experiments:
1) Use VDD=1.8V for 0.18um CMOS process, VDD=1.3V for 0.13um CMOS Process and
VDD=1V for 0.09um CMOS Process.
a) Plot ID vs. VGS at different drain voltages for NMOS, PMOS.
b) Plot ID vs. VGS at particular drain voltage (low) for NMOS, PMOS and determine Vt.
c) Plot log ID vs. VGS at particular gate voltage (high) for NMOS, PMOS and determine
IOFF and sub-threshold slope.
d) Plot ID vs. VDS at different gate voltages for NMOS, PMOS and determine Channel
length modulation factor.
e) Extract Vth of NMOS/PMOS transistors (short channel and long channel). Use VDS =
30mV
To extract Vth use the following procedure.
i. Plot gm vs VGS using NGSPICE and obtain peak gm point.
ii. Plot y=ID/(gm)1/2 as a function of VGS using Ngspice.
iii. Use Ngspice to plot tangent line passing through peak gm point in y (VGS) plane
and determine Vth.
f) Plot ID vs. VDS at different drain voltages for NMOS, PMOS, plot DC load line and
calculate gm, gds, gm/gds, and unity gain frequency.
Tabulate your result according to technologies and comment on it.
2) Use VDD=1.8V for 0.18um CMOS process, VDD=1.2V for 0.13um CMOS Process and
VDD=1V for 0.09um CMOS Process.
a) Perform the following
i. Plot VTC curve for CMOS inverter and thereon plot dVout vs. dVin and determine
transition voltage and gain g. Calculate VIL, VIH, NMH, NML for the inverter.
ii. Plot VTC for CMOS inverter with varying VDD.
iii. Plot VTC for CMOS inverter with varying device ratio.
b) Perform transient analysis of CMOS inverter with no load and with load and determine
tpHL, tpLH, 20%-to-80% tr and 80%-to-20% tf. (use VPULSE = 2V, Cload = 50fF)
c) Perform AC analysis of CMOS inverter with fanout 0 and fanout 1. (Use Cin= 0.012pF,
Cload = 4pF, Rload = k)
3) Use Ngspice to build a three stage and five stage ring oscillator circuit in 0.18um and 0.13um
technology and compare its frequencies and time period.
4) Perform the following
a) Draw small signal voltage gain of the minimum-size inverter in 0.18um and 0.13um
technology as a function of input DC voltage. Determine the small signal voltage gain at
the switching point using Ngspice and compare the values for 0.18um and 0.13um process.
b) Consider a simple CS amplifier with active load, as explained in the lecture, with NMOS
transistor MN as driver and PMOS transistor MP as load, in 0.18um technology.
(W/L)MN=5, (W/L)MP=10 and L=0.5um for both transistors.
i. Establish a test bench, as explained in the lecture, to achieve VDSQ=VDD/2.
ii. Calculate input bias voltage if bias current=50uA.
[ 368 ]
iii. Use Ngspice and obtain the bias current. Compare its value with 50uA.
iv. Determine small signal voltage gain, -3dB BW and GBW of the amplifier using small
signal analysis in Ngspice (consider 30fF load capacitance).
v. Plot step response of the amplifier for input pulse amplitude of 0.1V. Derive time
constant of the output and compare it with the time constant resulted from -3dB BW
vi. Use Ngspice to determine input voltage range of the amplifier
5) Three OPAMP INA. Vdd=1.8V Vss=0V, CAD tool: Mentor Graphics DA. Note:
Adjust accuracy options of the simulator (setup->options in GUI). Use proper
values of resistors to get a three OPAMP INA with differential-mode voltage gain=10.
Consider voltage gain=2 for the first stage and voltage gain=5 for the second stage.
i. Draw the schematic of op-amp macro model.
ii. Draw the schematic of INA.
iii. Obtain parameters of the op-amp macro model such that
a. low-frequency voltage gain = 5x104,
b. unity gain BW (fu) = 500KHz,
c. input capacitance=0.2pF,
d. output resistance = ,
e. CMRR=120dB
iv. Draw schematic diagram of CMRR simulation setup.
v. Simulate CMRR of INA using AC analysis (it's expected to be around 6dB below
CMRR of OPAMP).
vi. Plot CMRR of the INA versus resistor mismatches (for resistors of second stage only)
changing from -5% to +5% (use AC analysis). Generate a separate plot for mismatch in
each resistor pair. Explain how CMRR of OPAMP changes with resistor mismatches.
vii. Repeat (iii) to (vi) by considering CMRR of all OPAMPs to be 90dB.
6) Technology: UMC 0.18um, VDD=1.8V. Use MAGIC or Microwind.
a) Draw layout of a minimum size inverter in UMC 0.18um technology using MAGIC
Station layout editor. Use that inverter as a cell and lay out three cascaded minimum-sized
inverters. Use M1 as interconnect line between inverters.
b) Run DRC, LVS and RC extraction. Make sure there is no DRC error. Extract the netlist.
c) Use extracted netlist and obtain tPHLtPLH for the middle inverter using Eldo.
d) Use interconnect length obtained and connect the second and third inverter.
Extract the new netlist and obtain tPHL and tPLH of the middle inverter. Compare new
values of delay times with corresponding values obtained in part ‘c’.
VLSI Design Verification and Testing Lab

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
[ 369 ]

1. Sparse memory
2. Semaphore
3. Mail box
4. Classes
5. Polymorphism
6. Coverage
7. Assertions
Semester III
Elective VCommunication Networks
Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Analyze protocols and algorithms, acknowledge tradeoffs and rationale
 Use routing, transport protocols for the given networking scenario and application
 Evaluate and develop small network applications
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Introduction:
- Network Architecture, Performance
Unit 2:Connecting nodes:
- Connecting links, Encoding, framing, Reliable transmission, Ethernet and Multiple access
networks, Wireless networks
Unit 3:Queuing models
- For a) one or more servers b) with infinite and finite queue size c) Infinite population
Internetworking:
- Switching and bridging, IPv4, Addressing, Routing Protocols, Scale issues, Routers -
Architecture, IPv6
Unit 4:End-to-End Protocols:
- Services, Multiplexing, De-multiplexing, UDP, TCP, RPC, RTP
Unit 5:Congestion control and Resource Allocation
- Issues, Queuing disciplines, TCP congestion control, Congestion Avoidance, QoS
Applications:
- Domain Name Resolution, File Transfer, Electronic Mail, WWW, Multimedia Applications
Unit 6:Network monitoring – Packet sniffing tools such as Wireshark
Simulations using NS2/OPNET
References:
 Larry L. Peterson, Bruce S, Devie, “Computer Networks” , MK, 5th Edition
[ 370 ]
 Aaron Kershenbaum, “Telecommunication Network Design Algorithms”, MGH,

International Edition 1993.
 Vijay Ahuja, “Communications Network Design and Analysis of Computer
Communication Networks”, MGH, International Editions.
 Douglas E. Comer, “Internetworking with TCP/IP”, Pearson Education, 6th Edition
Elective IV Selected Topics in Mathematics

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 Characterize and represent data collected from experiments using statistical methods.
 Model physical process/systems with multiple variables towards parameter estimation and
prediction
 Represent systems/architectures using graphs and trees towards optimizing desired
objective.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Probability and Statistics:
- Definitions, conditional probability, Bayes Theorem and independence.
- Random Variables: Discrete, continuous and mixed random variables, probability mass,
probability
density and cumulative distribution functions, mathematical expectation, moments, moment
generating function, Chebyshev inequality.
Unit 2:Special Distributions: Discrete uniform, Binomial, Geometric, Poisson, Exponential,
Gamma, Normal
distributions.
- Pseudo random sequence generation with given distribution, Functions of a Random Variable
Unit 3:Joint Distributions: Joint, marginal and conditional distributions, product moments,
correlation,
independence of random variables, bi-variate normal distribution.
- Stochastic Processes: Definition and classification of stochastic processes, Poisson process
- Norms, Statistical methods for ranking data
Unit 4:Multivariate Data Analysis
- Linear and non-linear models, Regression, Prediction and Estimation
- Design of Experiments – factorial method
- Response surface method
Unit 5:Graphs and Trees:
- Graphs: Basic terminology, multi graphs and weighted graphs, paths and circuits, shortest path
Problems, Euler and Hamiltonian paths and circuits, factors of a graph, planar graph and
Kuratowski’s
graph and theorem, independent sets, graph colouring
Unit 6:Trees: Rooted trees, path length in rooted trees, binary search trees, spanning trees and cut
set,
theorems on spanning trees, cut sets , circuits, minimal spanning trees, Kruskal’s and Prim’s
[ 371 ]
algorithms for minimal spanning tree
References:
 Henry Stark, John W. Woods, “Probability and Random Process with Applications to
Signal Processing”, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition
 C. L. Liu, “Elements of Discrete Mathematics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2nd Edition
 Douglas C. Montgomery, E.A. Peck and G. G. Vining, “Introduction to Linear Regression
Analysis”, John Wiley and Sons, 2001.
 Douglas C. Montgomery, “Design and Analysis of Experiments”, John Wiley and Sons,
2001.
 B. A. Ogunnaike, “Random Phenomena: Fundamentals of Probability and Statistics for
Engineers”, CRC Press, 2010.
Elective IV Nanomaterials and Nanotechnology

Teaching Scheme
Course Outcomes:
 At the end of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: To understand the basic science behind the design and fabrication of nano scale
systems.
CO2: To understand and formulate new engineering solutions for current problems and
competing technologies for future applications.
CO3:To be able make inter disciplinary projects applicable to wide areas by clearing and
fixing the boundaries in system development.
CO4: To gather detailed knowledge of the operation of fabrication and characterisation
devices to achieve precisely designed systems.
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:Nanomaterials in one and higher dimensions,
Unit 2:Applications of one and higher dimension nano-materials.
Unit 3:Nano-lithography, micro electro-mechanical system (MEMS) and nano-phonics.
Unit 4:carbon nanotubes – synthesis and applications
Unit 5 and 6:Interdisciplinary arena of nanotechnology.
References:
 Nanoscale Materials in Chemistry edited by Kenneth J. Klabunde and Ryan M. Richards,
2ndedn, John Wiley and Sons, 2009.
 Nanocrystalline Materials by A I Gusev and A ARempel, Cambridge International
Science Publishing, 1st Indian edition by Viva Books Pvt. Ltd. 2008.
 Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology by Bharat Bhushan, Springer, 3rdedn, 2010.
 Carbon Nanotubes: Synthesis, Characterization and Applications by Kamal K. Kar,
Research Publishing Services; 1stedn, 2011, ISBN-13: 978-9810863975..
[ 372 ]

Teaching Scheme
Lab work : 20 and 32 hrs/week
Course Outcomes:
 Capable to select from different methodologies, methods and forms of analysis to produce
a suitable research design, and justify their design.
Syllabus Contents:
following
Guidelines for Dissertation Phase – I and II at M. Tech. (Electronics):

 As per the AICTE directives, the dissertation is a year long activity, to be carried out and
 The dissertation may be carried out preferably in-house i.e. department s laboratories and
centers OR in industry allotted through department s T & P coordinator.
student shall identify the domain and define dissertation objectives. The referred literature
should preferably include IEEE/IET/IETE/Springer/Science Direct/ACM journals in the
areas of Computing and Processing (Hardware and Software), Circuits-Devices and
Systems, Communication-Networking and Security, Robotics and Control Systems, Signal
Processing and Analysis and any other related domain. In case of Industry sponsored
projects, the relevant application notes, while papers, product catalogues should be referred
and reported.
[ 373 ]

assess the progress/performance of the student based on report, presentation and Q & A. In
case of unsatisfactory performance, committee may recommend repeating the Phase-I
work.
proposed work as per the schedule. Accomplished results/contributions/innovations should
be published in terms of research papers in reputed journals and reviewed focused
 Phase – II deliverables: A dissertation report as per the specified format, developed system
in the form of hardware and/or software, A record of continuous progress.
work
OPEN ELECTIVES
Business Analytics
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
Course Code
Credits
Prerequisites
Course objective
[ 374 ]

Unit1:
Analytics Process and organisation, competitive advantages of 9
Business Analytics.
Unit 2:
Important Resources, Business Analytics Personnel, Data and models 8
for Business analytics, problem solving, Visualizing and Exploring
Data, Business Analytics Technology.
Unit 3:
Ensuring Data Quality, Measuring contribution of Business analytics, 9
Managing Changes.
Unit 4:
Series, Forecasting Models for Time Series with a Linear Trend, 10
Forecasting Time Series with Seasonality, Regression Forecasting with
Unit 5:
Strategies with the without Outcome Probabilities, Decision Trees, The
Value of Information, Utility and Decision Making.
Unit 6:
COURSE OUTCOMES

and deep analytics.
[ 375 ]
Reference:
OPEN ELECTIVES
Industrial Safety
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week

Reference:
[ 376 ]
OPEN ELECTIVES
Operations Research
Teaching Scheme
_____________________________________________________________________
Syllabus Contents:
Unit 1:
Unit 2
Unit 3:
problem - CPM/PERT
Unit 4
Unit 5
References:
[ 377 ]
Open Elective
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week

References:
Open Elective
Composite Materials
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week

performance.
[ 378 ]
TEXT BOOKS:
Germany.
References:
Tasi.
Open Elective
Waste to Energy
Teaching scheme
Lecture: - 3 h/week
References:
[ 379 ]
Sons, 1996.
Course objectives:
Syllabus
Suggested Studies:
book .

[ 380 ]

they work in
Syllabus
1 Introduction 4
Floods, Droughts And Famines, Landslides And Avalanches, Man-made
disaster: Nuclear Reactor Meltdown, Industrial Accidents, Oil Slicks
And Spills, Outbreaks Of Disease And Epidemics, War And Conflicts.
And Epidemics
5 Risk Assessment 4
SUGGESTED READINGS:
Royal book Company.
India, New Delhi.
[ 381 ]
Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours
2  Order 8
Suggested reading
Course Output
Course Objectives
[ 382 ]
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours

1 4
 Values and self-development –Social values and individual
2 6
 Importance of cultivation of values.
3 6
 Personality and Behavior Development - Soul and Scientific
4 6
 Character and Competence –Holy books vs Blind faith.
Suggested reading
Press, New Delhi
Course outcomes
[ 383 ]

Course Objectives:
rights perspective.
Syllabus
Units Content Hours
1 History 4
2 Preamble 4
Salient Features
3  Right to Freedom of Religion
4
 Parliament
 Composition
4  Executive 4
 President
 Governor
[ 384 ]
Suggested reading
Course Outcomes:

Course Objectives:
Syllabus
Units Content Hours
terminology
1 4
studies.
3 4
practices.
 Professional development: alignment with classroom practices and
4 follow-up support 4
 Peer support
[ 385 ]

 Research design
 Contexts
5  Pedagogy 2
Suggested reading
245-261.
Course Outcomes:

4.

Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours

[ 386 ]

ii)Regularization of breathing techniques and its effects-Types of
pranayam
Suggested reading
Course Outcomes:

Course Objectives
Syllabus
Unit Content Hours
 Verses- 71,73,75,78 (do’s)

23, 35,
 Chapter 12 -Verses 13, 14, 15, 16,17, 18
[ 387 ]
Suggested reading
Course Outcomes
[ 388 ]

Vol. 2 - PG

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vol. 2 - PG

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Model Curriculum for

Postgraduate Degree Courses in

ALL INDIA COUNCIL FOR TECHNICAL EDUCATION

1) Electronics & Communication Engineering

6) Chemical Engineering & Technology

Distinct features of model PG curriculum in Engineering and Technology:

1. Standardized academic structure for all PG Programs with uniform credit

2. Advanced study of specialization through core subjects, flexible and diverse

3. Open electives to widen skills.

4. Enhanced engagement of industry in developing innovations and problem solutions.

5. Collaborating and interactive learning to ensure talent development.

6. Inbuilt mechanism for regular upgradation of curriculum.

7. Focus on development of advanced knowledge and specific skills required for

8. Ensured competency development of learner.

Audit course 1 & 2

1. English for Research Paper Writing

Research Methodology and IPR

 Understand research problem formulation.

Approaches of investigation of solutions for research problem, data collection,

Unit 2: Effective literature studies approaches, analysis

Plagiarism, Research ethics,

Unit 3: Effective technical writing, how to write report, Paper

Developing a Research Proposal, Format of research proposal, a presentation and

Unit 4: Nature of Intellectual Property: Patents, Designs, Trade and Copyright.

3. Chemical Engineering 199

4. Electronics & Telecommunication 258

Engineering & Technology PG Courses

ALL INDIA COUNCIL FOR TECHNICAL EDUCATION

1. Core 1 Advanced Structural Analysis

2. Core 2 Advanced Solid Mechanics

6. Core Lab II Advanced Concrete Lab

7. MLC Research Methodology and IPR

8. Audit 1 Audit Course

1. Core III FEM in Structural Engineering

6. Core Lab IV Numerical Analysis Lab

7. Core Mini Project

8. Audit 2 Audit Course-2

Audit course 1 & 2

M. Tech. (Civil Engineering) Specialization:Hydraulic Engineering

1. Core-III Ground Water Engineering

Computer Methods in Hydraulics and Hydrology

Audit course 1 & 2

Program Outcomes (POs):

Model curriculum for ME (Civil) - specialization in Structural Engineering

Sr. Course Teaching Scheme Credit

1. Core 1 Advanced Structural Analysis 3 0 0 3

2. Core 2 Advanced Solid Mechanics 3 0 0 3

5. Core Lab I Structural Design Lab 0 0 2 2

6. Core Lab II Advanced Concrete Lab 0 0 2 2

Audit course 1 & 2

1. English for Research Paper Writing

Course outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to

Core 2 - Advanced Solid Mechanics (Credits - 3:0:0 = 3)

Course outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to

1. Solve simple problems of elasticity and plasticityunderstanding the basic concepts.

Program Elective I - Theory of Thin Plates and Shells (Credits - 3:0:0 = 3)

Course Outcomes:At the end of the course, students will be able to

Program Elective I - Theory and Applications of Cement Composites

Course Outcomes:At the end of the course, students will be able to

Program Elective I - Theory of Structural Stability (Credits- 3:0:0 = 3)

Course Outcomes:At the end of the course, students will be able to

Program Elective II – Analytical and Numerical Methods for

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to